JP7404294B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

As a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the number of executions of a special figure game reaches a predetermined number in a normal gaming state, the probability of winning is increased by controlling the probability variable state (for example, Patent Document 1 ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-95449

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement regarding the control of the gaming machine having multiple states.

This invention was made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to improve the marketability of a gaming machine that has multiple states.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a transmission means capable of transmitting a command;
a state control means capable of controlling a plurality of states including a special state different from a normal state and the advantageous state;
an updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
The state control means includes:
When the display result of the variable display is a first advantageous result, control is possible to a first advantageous state among the advantageous states,
When the display result of the variable display is a second advantageous result, control is possible to a second advantageous state of the advantageous states,
controllable to a first special state of the special states when the first advantageous state ends;
controllable to a second special state of the special states when the second advantageous state ends;
Based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, control is possible to a third special state of the special states,
The game control means is
In either case, when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, the first process and the second process are performed,
When the first advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the first special state by the first process,
When the second advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the second special state by the first process,
In either case, whether the first advantageous state ends or the second advantageous state ends, a setting process of setting an initial value of numerical information to be updated by the updating means by the second process. and
The transmitting means includes:
When the power is turned on, transmitting a first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times;
In response to execution of the variable display, transmitting a second command different from the first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times;
The first command is
has a larger number of bytes than the second command;
The remaining number of times can be specified in a case where the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is a first number of times and a case where the remaining number of times until the said specific number of times is a second number of times that is greater than the first number of times,
including a predetermined number of command data that is a combination of first control data indicating a command type and second control data including specific data related to numerical information and to which a value corresponding to the transmission order of the first command is set;
The second command specifies the remaining number of times when the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times is the first number of times, and the number of times remaining until the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times is the second number of times. , it is not possible to specify the remaining number of times,
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a state control means capable of controlling a plurality of states including a special state different from a normal state and the advantageous state;
an updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
The state control means includes:
When the display result of the variable display is a first advantageous result, control is possible to a first advantageous state among the advantageous states,
When the display result of the variable display is a second advantageous result, control is possible to a second advantageous state of the advantageous states,
controllable to a first special state of the special states when the first advantageous state ends;
controllable to a second special state of the special states when the second advantageous state ends;
Based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, control is possible to a third special state of the special states,
The game control means is
In either case, when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, the first process and the second process are performed,
When the first advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the first special state by the first process,
When the second advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the second special state by the first process,
In either case, whether the first advantageous state ends or the second advantageous state ends, a setting process of setting an initial value of the numerical information to be updated by the updating means by the second process. I do.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine having a plurality of states.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between a special figure LED board, a 4th pattern unit, and a 4th pattern unit and a game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. installed in a pachinko game machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. It is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram for explaining an example of a production control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. It is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for explaining an example of lottery of performance patterns on the sub side. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of performances. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a start part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of SP latter half development). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the relief part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. It is a figure for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. It is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the accessory action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r28) to (r31). FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46). They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound. They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). It is a figure for explaining the modification of pattern display. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of a symbol confirmation period. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. FIG. 7 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example at the time of a loss. (r48) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portion. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a start part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a start part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design promotion after operation promotion). It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design maintenance after operation promotion). FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unpromoted operation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a trigger display brightness data table and an operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a lost luminance data table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the comparison of lamp control in the case of a hit and the time of a loss. It is a figure for explaining the shaking mode of a pattern. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of jackpot and the numerical range of loss with time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing various judgment tables. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing jackpot types, and (B) is a diagram showing time-saving loss types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of each time saving state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram when the start condition for the second time saving state is satisfied during the operation of the first time saving state. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for performance control. It is a diagram showing game control main processing. It is a diagram showing special symbol process processing. It is a diagram showing starting winning prize determination processing. It is a figure which shows random numerical value determination processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a diagram showing special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in the variable display of a 1st special symbol. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in the variable display of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in the variable display of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in the variable display of a 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time of the 2nd special figure when a variable display result becomes a failure in time saving state A. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time of the 2nd special figure when a variable display result becomes a failure in time saving state B. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time of the 2nd special figure when a variable display result becomes a failure in time saving state C. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing. It is a diagram showing special symbol stop processing. It is a diagram showing a pattern determination period in a normal state. It is a diagram showing a symbol confirmation period in time saving state A. It is a diagram showing a pattern determination period in time saving state B. It is a diagram showing a symbol confirmation period in time saving state C. It is a figure showing processing during small hit opening. It is a figure showing small hit end processing. It is a diagram showing jackpot end processing. It is a diagram showing production control process processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating variable display start setting processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an effect related to a time saving state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the rush performance, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the time saving remaining count display, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the time saving end countdown, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the result performance. . It is a timing chart showing the time saving end countdown until the end of the time saving state and the update timing of the remaining number of times display. It is a figure which shows the notice performance execution decision ratio during variable display during the variable display of the 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the notice performance execution decision ratio during the variable display during the variable display of the 2nd special figure. It is a diagram showing a performance pattern of a preview performance during variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the preview performance during variable display. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time in each time saving state. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing executable variable display notice effects in each time saving state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in a modification. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in a modified example, and (B) to (D) are diagrams showing variation patterns that can be selected in the modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. It is a timing chart when winning with time saving. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. It is a timing chart when winning with time saving. It is a timing chart when the time-saving acquisition chance effect can be executed on the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing whether or not a notice effect during variable display can be executed when the variable display result is that the time is shortened or not. It is a diagram showing whether or not a pending display preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of a performance pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the preview performance during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the preview performance during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the preview performance during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram of the execution timing of the preview performance during variable display and the executable winning performance pattern. It is an explanatory diagram when performing a promotion effect. It is a figure showing the execution rate of promotion production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display device when performing a promotion effect. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the arrangement of frame lamps provided in the opening/closing door frame. (A) is a diagram showing various lamps provided on the game board, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the various lamps and a brightness data table. (A) is for explaining the BGM and the emitted light colors of various LEDs, (B) is for rainbow effects, movable body effects, (C) is for rainbow effects, (D) is for rainbow display modes, and (E) is for explaining stop symbol action displays. This is a diagram. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining right-handed hitting promotion effects A, V, and F. It is a diagram showing a production mode from a jackpot fluctuation to a rush production A via a jackpot. It is a figure showing the production mode of winning variation and ceiling reaching variation in time saving and losing B. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of rush performance B. It is a figure which shows the effect|presentation mode when the winning time B with a time saving is won in the time saving state A1. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of a stop symbol action display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a fanfare production part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare performance part. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare performance part. (A) is a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect part A, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table. (A) to (I) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the rush effect part A. (A) is a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush performance B (scene 1) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (B) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush performance B (scene 4) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control between a fanfare performance, rush performance A, and rush performance B. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. (A) is a parent table in the brightness data table used for right-handed driving promotion effect part A, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the A part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table, (B) is a child table, and (C) is an example of a grandchild table in the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table, (B) is a child table, and (C) is an example of a grandchild table in the brightness data table used for right-handed driving promotion effect F part. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the display mode of the image display device and the lighting mode of the lamp in right-handed hitting promotion effects A, V, and F. It is a diagram showing grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 used in right-handed hitting promotion performance A part. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the grandchild table ATA1, ATV1, ATF1 and an image display device used in the right-handed hitting promotion production A, V, and F part, and the lighting mode of a lamp. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart etc. which shows special design process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a special figure display result. It is a flowchart showing production control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an address map of a memory area in a microcomputer for game control. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a production control command. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of RWM initial setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command set processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command transmission table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command extended data address table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of data set processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a specific number of times command transmission process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a first specific number of times designation command. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special symbol buffer shift processing. It is a diagram showing an example of symbol designation value determination. It is a diagram showing an example of setting the number of openings of the big winning opening. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a fluctuation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a fluctuation pattern determination. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special symbol stop time setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting at the time of a symbol stop. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of counter subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the example of data setting at the time of arrival. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time-saving subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows the clear object at the time of time saving end. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance setting after a winning end. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a production setting table. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a figure which shows the data setting example before a small hit start, and the setting clear object after a loss stop. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of jackpot start setting processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of a small hit end process. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a diagram showing an example of state setting at the end of jackpot. It is a diagram showing the setting contents corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type. It is a diagram showing an example of data setting at the end of a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance side counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of number of times suggestion control processing. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of count display control. It is a diagram showing an example of performance execution.

<Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

It should be noted that two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as a "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also referred to as a "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumu-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Yumu-chan is the main character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Further, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan that appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole. It becomes a closed state in which game balls do not enter (it is also said that the second starting prize opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. It becomes impossible to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the V big winning hole is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning hole. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFULII" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime, the name of a singer, etc.). Further, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position overlapping (superimposing) the front surface of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER FUL II" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( (overlap) position. Note that the movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a stick controller 31A that serves as an operation stick that can be held by the player and tilted (operation in front, back, left, and right directions, and operation in which the player pulls it toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A to detect a tilting operation on the operation stick. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also referred to as a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player by the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the special pattern LED board 20, the type of special pattern (first special pattern) in the first special pattern game and the special pattern in the second special pattern game are determined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, by combining lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 22. Note that in this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and turning off in various lamps such as a frame lamp described later.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the production control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by combinations of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs. (2nd special figure) represents the type. For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/lighting out by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display section 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a special variable winning ball device 7B provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B. The V attacker lamp 9E and the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A indicate that the V jackpot is open and the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur. A V lamp 9G that notifies the occurrence of the occurrence, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and a push button provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a member included in the movable body 32 and labeled with the letters "POWER FULII" is divided into four parts, with the accessory lamp 9A1 being the back side of the "P" and "O" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A2 being the part labeled "POWERFULII". The accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamp 9A3 is placed on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamp 9A4 is placed on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, when the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (light-emit) on the back side of the member labeled with the characters "POWER FULII", "POWER FULII" lights up (light-emits).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, a main character (for example, "Yumemu" indicating the main character Yume-chan) is depicted in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 depict the main character. are placed on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 where is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn, and the part of the game board 2 where the main character is drawn starts to light up (light up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn. As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) on the back side of the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 where "V" is drawn lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when turned on (lights up), it lights up (lights out) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the gaming machine The left side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (emits light), the gaming machine The right side of frame 3 is designed to light up (light emit light). Note that the left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. Also, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chew lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R. are also collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps including left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L illuminates the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps including left frame lamps 9R2 to 9L12 running clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R illuminates the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 20 and the fourth pattern unit 50. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 20 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 21 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 memory display section 23 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 24 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 25 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 26 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 30 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 27 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special pattern LED board 20 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lights using lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 30. In the present embodiment, when the player is encouraged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 30 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed display section 30 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the production control CPU 120, and also lights up the right-handed display section 30, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , sends a right-handed display light-off designation command to the performance control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display section 30. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 30.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during this time, the right-handed display section 30 urges the player to hit the ball to the right. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game. 2 special figure 2 storage display section 52 indicating the number of reserved memory numbers, a special figure 1 variable display section 53 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. This game includes a special figure 2 variable display section 54 that shows a special figure 2 variable display section 54, and a right-hitting display section 55 that prompts the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display of the first special symbol (variable display) will be described as representing the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 53. Also called. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 54 is also referred to as a variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 55 is turned off. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display section 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a previous variation pattern command and a subsequent variation pattern command, or a symbol confirmation command, which will be described later, among production control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp are activated. , the switching of the lighting mode such as lighting/blinking/lighting out is made different. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the production control CPU 120 of the production control board 12. One set of commands is output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command will also be collectively referred to as variation pattern commands.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special pattern 1 variable display 53 and special pattern 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50 when receiving a variation pattern command from the CPU 103. . For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 to the first special symbol based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the first special symbol. Further, upon receiving a variable pattern command corresponding to the second special pattern game from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the special pattern 2 variable display 54 to the second special pattern based on the received variable pattern command. Switching from extinguishing, which indicates a stop, to blinking, which indicates a change in the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the variable pattern command. maintain it.

In addition, when receiving the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special symbol 1 variable display 53 and special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50. For example, when the production control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the first special symbol game, the special symbol 1 variable display 53 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the first special symbol. In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of symbol variation in the second special symbol game, the special symbol 2 variable display 54 lights up based on the received symbol confirmation command. The mode is switched from blinking indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stoppage of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the CPU 120 for effect control receives the symbol confirmation command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp is not changed, and the lighting mode remains the same as before receiving the symbol confirmation command. maintain it.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes in the fourth symbol unit 50 in response to receiving the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1, the lamp mode is maintained in the game effect lamp 9 before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variable pattern command or the symbol confirmation command is received. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving the variable pattern command. For example, when the gaming state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the lighting mode from the normal state to the time-saving state in response to receiving a variable pattern command that starts the time-saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed is displayed. At the bottom of the fourth symbol 5J, numbers indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number are displayed. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side shows the first reservation storage number, and the right side shows the second reservation storage number. At the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. It is located. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 has a rectangular or substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. has been done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part of the screen of the image display device 5 (particularly the edge) is not visible or is difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Substrate configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the performance image, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9. For this purpose, the LED driver is supplied with brightness data (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver lights/blinks/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the performance control CPU 120. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12 and the audio control board 13, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the production control board 12, and is capable of lighting up (blinking) each display section under the control of the production control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game progresses as follows. When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special pattern game by the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 of the special pattern LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special pattern game by the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special pattern game, a combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 is a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. When a combination of lighting modes is reached, the result is a "lose". In addition, it corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol in the combination of lighting modes of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20. This lighting mode is also referred to as a "missing display result."

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. It should be noted that the advantageous state may be controlled to be a small winning game state. Here, a small win is a win that is allowed up to a smaller number of openings of the big winning opening than a jackpot. Note that when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning gaming state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. Further, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for the "small hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by either the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). It will continue until the earliest possible time. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, a jackpot type is set for "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and upper limit opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of a common figure (the period during which a common figure changes) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability of hitting a "normal figure" in the common figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Accordingly, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Further, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In addition, in the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is "SP first half (SP first half reach)", "second half of super reach" is "SP second half (SP second half reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a "jackpot" (the above-mentioned specific display result), a predetermined display result is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of decorative symbols. A determined decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed. As the promotion performance, for example, a re-lottery performance may be performed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability variable symbol after temporarily stopping a non-probability variable symbol (normal symbol) as a jackpot display result. Further, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state in which a non-probable variable jackpot is promoted to a certain variable jackpot.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables regarding jackpots>
Various tables related to jackpots will be explained with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

[Win type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of three rounds of jackpot gaming states. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low certainty high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. Random 1, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 65536, and then is updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) whether or not the control is to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state which is an advantageous state for the player. Then, out of the plurality of types of jackpots, which jackpot is to be determined is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set as many as the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and in the variable probability jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variable jackpot). Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot or the probability (proportion) of losing.

FIGS. 9(b) and 9(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

The pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are transmitted as a set of two commands from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 cannot specify a variation pattern by only receiving either one of the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command, but receives both the previous variation pattern command and the subsequent variation pattern command. By doing so, it is possible to identify fluctuation patterns.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the performance control CPU 101 receives the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variable jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variable jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variable jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variable jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variable jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variable jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variable jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variable jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variable jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the loss specification command, the normal jackpot 1 and 2 specification commands, and the probability variable jackpot 1 to 9 specification commands, or these collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands.

Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no reservation after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the production control CPU 120 causes the demonstration video to be displayed on the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (higher brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the appeal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the players. In addition, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, a background in a normal state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal background) is displayed, and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER FUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of a part of the performance may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 designation command that specifies the start of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start specification commands 1 to 11 or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is the production control command shown. Among these, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a previous variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the previous variation, and a subsequent variation pattern, which corresponds to the subsequent variation, and the combination has different contents. It is now included. Note that the previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX(H)) explained using FIG. 10, and the after variation pattern corresponds to the after variation pattern command (84XX(H)) explained using FIG. corresponds to

[Main side previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003(H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or SP first half) (reach that ends with normal reach or SP first half reach after entering the reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004(H)) that specifies normal reach (SP late development) (a reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after becoming a reach mode).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies to execute a normal reach (SP second half development) after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies to execute the normal reach (normal or SP first half) after performing the pseudo variation twice. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is to be executed after pseudo-variation is performed twice. Pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the previous variation patterns, and an animation (moving picture) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes approximately 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1246. Furthermore, in the case of patterns with previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is approximately 1861.

[Main side post-variation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies normal reach (win) (variation of decorative symbols that becomes a reach mode and becomes a win mode). Post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of SP (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops in the second half of SP reach and becomes a winning mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies the final reach (win) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode at the final reach).

[Determination of post-change pattern]
The post-change pattern is determined using a different random counter depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a loss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a loss. As shown in FIG. 13, if the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 3 explained in FIG. Furthermore, if it is determined that the jackpot is a loss in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and the determined post-variation number also differs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-change patterns from post-change numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-fluctuation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is three, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-variation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption, and furthermore, the post-fluctuation number is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the number of retained memories after consumption. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a post-change pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 14, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using Random 4 explained in FIG. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), if it is determined to be a normal jackpot 1 or 2, a definite variable jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8, then any one of the post variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined. Post-fluctuation patterns are determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When it is determined to be either a probability change jackpot 3 or 9, one of the after fluctuation patterns is determined from among the after fluctuation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the after fluctuation patterns. . Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing to SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 in the case of a loss, whereas Since the time is higher than that, approximately 1/1.1, it is possible for the player to expect that a jackpot will occur if the SP reach or final reach develops.

[Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns with post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the previous variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 4, 7, and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 7 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation numbers 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the after fluctuation pattern with the after fluctuation number 8 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with any of the previous fluctuation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 will be obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery of production patterns on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the performance pattern by lottery based on the variable pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP first half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern performance is decided. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs the SP first half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among the multiple types of reach production, or the SP Decide on one of the winning patterns of the first half reach B.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP second half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B losing pattern productions. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a SP second half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B winning pattern productions.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, the firing of the game ball by operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and losing symbols etc. are stopped and displayed, and a game stopping state different from the losing symbol is displayed. The display may be controlled so that a display corresponding to the display is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing every time the timer interrupts, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The game is executed by driving the game display unit 26, and the number of pending games is displayed by lighting the game memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the production control command to be transmitted in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes processing to make settings for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on passage of a predetermined switch provided inside the player (a so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability is higher than if the setting value is one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning determination process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the number of stored first special symbols has reached the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit value. (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 or step S56, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects a random number 1 for jackpot determination and a random number 1 for jackpot determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section (not shown). Numerical data indicating random number random 2 and random number random 3 and 4 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage section corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in the first special figure holding storage section (not shown), while when the starting opening buffer value is "2" At some point, numerical data indicating random numbers Random 1 to Random 4 is stored in a second special figure reservation storage section (not shown).

The numerical data indicating random number random 1 for jackpot determination and random number random 2 for jackpot type determination determines whether or not the fluctuating display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is considered a "jackpot". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used to determine the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation display time of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step S59, transmission settings for a starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value are performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), and the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the earlier of the following conditions is satisfied, the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type shown in FIG. 9(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on random numbers 3 and 4, depending on the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the after fluctuation pattern based on the selected after fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on Random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on a pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol variation designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stopping process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 22. Control is performed to derive and display (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process moves to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROМ101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the time between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, opening modes for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 3R are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening a normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening a V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in a RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the regular big prize opening in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. . The data of the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). A corresponding grand prize opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process moves to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step S1503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning prize counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process moves to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), a probability variation determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process moves to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big prize opening, or to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V big prize opening. One of the controls for closing is performed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), and a jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, set a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5 (step S1603), update the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), Finish the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a specified command after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round, is the V open round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V big prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a command for specifying that the big prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and a time saving number counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process moves to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Main operations of the production control board 12]
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained.

(Production control main processing)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control process. The production control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. When receiving a production control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is a "lose", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the production symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols are determined (step S7104), and in step S7106 Proceed to.

In addition, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process advances to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various performances in the variable display, the process advances to step S7107. For example, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot) in the performance setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a cut-in performance shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether it is a jackpot or not). In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it will develop into the final reach, based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the identified result of whether or not it is a jackpot, determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). do. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol fluctuation control pattern is determined according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and various performance control (performance movement) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each symbol fluctuation control pattern corresponds to the fluctuating display of the performance symbol, for example, the performance control process timer setting value, the performance control process timer judgment value, the performance display control data, the audio control data, the brightness data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various performance operations, and the content of various performance controls, switching timing of performance control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, a process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 30 of the special pattern LED board 20 and the right-handed hitting display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times for a 3R regular jackpot, 10 times for a 10R jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 30, and the right-hand game display section 55 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time-saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable-probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

<Production flow>
Next, the flow of a series of performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the fluctuating display starts until when the fluctuating display stops. The notification performance is a performance that notifies the player whether or not the fluctuations of the special symbols and decorative symbols will stop in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The notification performance is made up of multiple performance parts, and in this embodiment, it includes a start part, an incitement part, a winning epilogue part, a loss epilogue part, a role model action part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, there is a fanfare part that is executed before transitioning to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also referred to as the introduction part. In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as the epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which a performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the fluctuation is started and the pseudo link or normal reach is executed until the SP reach is started. Note that the starting part also includes fluctuations that result in non-reach losses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The incitement part (introduction part) includes the time from the start of SP Reach (also called Super Reach) (the start timing of the title display of SP Reach) to the timing when you can reach the branch of jackpot or loss. Moreover, the inciting part is a part that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a loss depending on the performance executed. The inciting part corresponds to the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, or the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. Parts included. Note that the SP first half reach A and the SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as the SP first half, the SP second half reach A, the SP second half reach B, and the SP final reach may be collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part that informs that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a loss epilogue part that informs that a loss display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a jackpot display result and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the loss epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect based on a story development is executed to notify that the fluctuating symbols become a loss display result and are not controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result is notified by movable accessories when announcing the win or failure after the introduction part, like the final reach described later, and when SP reach other than the final reach is announced. There are times when notifications are made by the development of a story on the liquid crystal display (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that is notified by movable accessories is also referred to as the win/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, if a jackpot occurs in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, the liquid crystal is used in the hit epilogue part as described above. It is reported that the game state is controlled to be a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance, and when a jackpot does not occur, it is reported by a loss epilogue part that the control is not controlled to the jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story performance using a liquid crystal. Depending on the first story development in the story direction, it may be suggested whether or not the game is a success. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introduction part, first of all, the win/fail notification part (accessory object movement part) determines whether or not the action of the accessory will lead to a jackpot game state. After that, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the conclusion of the story production using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the loss epilogue part will notify you that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. As the conclusion of the story production using , it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state. In this way, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes a win/fail notification part and a subsequent winning epilogue part or loss epilogue part.

In addition, corresponding to SP first half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP first half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, a winning epilogue part of the SP final reach and a loss epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Accessory action part]
The accessory motion part is a part corresponding to the period during which the SP second half develops, in which a performance indicating the development from the first half SP to the second half SP is performed by moving the movable body 32. The accessory motion part is executed after the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A or the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B. After the accessory motion part, any one of the SP second half reach A promotion part, the SP second half reach B promotion part, and the SP final reach promotion part is executed.

[Relief part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is performed that first appears to be a loss and then suggests a jackpot. The relief hit part is a part that may develop from any of the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the loss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, or the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part that is executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of first half of SP reach B, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. Executed after the win epilogue part and the rescue win part. In addition, in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery presentation part does not proceed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a variable probability symbol (probably variable). The re-lottery part may not be executed when an odd number symbol (shown in the figure) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination of validity]
Next, an example will be described in which a series of effects are divided at timings before and after the decision of success or failure. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. Here, the success/failure determination is an effect that indicates a branching of whether the result is a jackpot display result or a loss display result at the final stage of the promotion part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), the series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the decision is made, at timings before and after the decision is made, from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation. The parts before the determination of whether or not the answer is correct include a starting part and an inciting part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (win, loss), a relief part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, the series of performances from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation consists of multiple parts. Furthermore, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (post-variation start). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern of the before fluctuation, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the after fluctuation described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34(B). In the variation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (later variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the determination of validity is the inciting part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success or failure decision. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit). Then, the period from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation becomes the re-lottery part. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-drawing part is 20 seconds. A time has been set for this.

Next, the variation pattern of main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, will be explained using FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (post-variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-fluctuation) to the development of the second half of SP becomes the inciting part (first half of SP reach A). The incitement part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of validity. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success/fail determination. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP final reach hit). The re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation. For example, in the SP final reach jackpot variation pattern, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the incitement part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set such that the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation level, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total duration of the incitement part and the duration of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has higher expectations than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the period of time that excites the player can be lengthened as the variation has a higher degree of expectation, and the lingering time when the game wins can also be lengthened, making it possible to increase the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in a series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script that summarizes how each scene in a series of productions will proceed. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the presentation mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Contents such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail using diagrams for explaining the mode of effect described later. Below, the correspondence relationship between the diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and the diagrams for explaining the production mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 72 to 77, which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, which will be described later. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half SP development). The scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of second half development of SP) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIG. 83, which will be described later.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes shown in FIGS. 84 to 96, which will be described later. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 101 to 109, which will be described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, which will be described later.

FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). The scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, which will be described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the relief part. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols derived after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 157 to 159, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 161 to 163, which will be described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed on lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for performance control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the SP reach brightness used in each part of the SP reach (incitement part, winning epilogue part, loss epilogue part, role model action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance that notifies the end of the jackpot game state, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the high-accuracy high base state This includes a variable background brightness data table used in the following conditions.

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority level increases when the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table are used in this order.

For example, if SP reach occurs while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after SP reach ends, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach during SP reach, the production control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP reach. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table using priority over the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game effect is controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and SP reach is in progress again. When returning to the gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H, are used as "lights out", " Use terms such as "almost off," "on," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the brightness data of the accessory lamp 9A is "0000", the accessory lamp 9A is "extinguished". . Further, when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "1111", the accessory lamp 9A lights up in red at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the accessory lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the data of WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) defined as the brightness data of the panel left lamp 9B is "00000", the panel left lamp 9B is "off". "do. Further, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "11111", the left panel lamp 9B is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the panel left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V attacker lamp 9F is "extinguished". Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric lamp 9H is "000", the electric lamp 9H is turned off. Moreover, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "111", the electric lamp 9H is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the electric lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the lamps 9L1 to 9L12 on the left side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and especially in this case, the brightness is Since the height is high, the lamps 9R2 to 9R12 on the right side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the accessory lamp 9A is "lit". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the board left lamp 9B is "lit". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the attacker lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacker lamp 9F is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the V attacker lamp 9F is lit brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric light lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric light lamp 9H is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the electric light lamp 9H is lit brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" means when the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching over time between cases where the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , and blinking differ from each other in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

<Production mode of pachinko game machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game will be described. In the present embodiment, a presentation mode will be described when any of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern with main fluctuation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the SP first half reach B inciting part (5), and the SP first half reach B losing epilogue part (7). .

When the variation pattern with main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half of reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), and the inciting part of second half of SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the second half of SP reach B, or the start part (1), the instigation part of reach B of the first half of SP (5), the character movement part (8), and the second half of SP The production transitions in the following order: Reach A's inciting part (9), SP second half Reach B's loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half's Reach B inciting part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the promotion part (12) of SP second half reach B, and the loss epilogue part (14) of SP second half reach B.

If the variation pattern with main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), the SP final The production transitions in the order of the reach loss epilogue part (17), the start part (1), the SP first half reach B incitement part (5), the character movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15) , the performance transitions in the order of SP final reach loss epilogue part (17).

If the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the production will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), SP first half reach A hit epilogue part (3), or start The production transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP second half The production transitions in the following order: Reach A incitement part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the SP second half reach B incitement part (12), and the SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of reach epilogue part (16), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP final reach incitement part (15) , and the SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are also shown. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Furthermore, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part will also be explained. In addition, in the case of a win, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of a loss, the rescue winning part that pretends to be a loss and becomes a win may perform a performance by the rescue winning part using the variation time.

[Production style in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (fluctuating display) starts based on one pending memory, the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and furthermore, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as a background during variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a girl named Yume-chan flying is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yumu-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

At the start of the variation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, effect sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as appropriate, but only some of the drawings are shown regarding the effect sounds. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "background yellow lighting". The performance control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamps 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, hazy lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol in a ready-to-reach mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the second variation of the pseudo variation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Note that the term "flashing" here includes the lamp repeating turning on and off, as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following description. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), a second variation of the pseudo variation is performed. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x2" are displayed, indicating that this is the second variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the ready-to-reach mode is established, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo-continuous symbol stops in the middle symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, it is indicated that the third pseudo fluctuation is started. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display based on the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, small characters "x3" are displayed, indicating that this is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern of background yellow lighting. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which is called reach tenpai. It becomes a mode. At the time of reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen becomes dark while the middle symbol changes in the mode of reach-ten-pai. When the background darkens, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), a shutter-shaped image (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yumu-chan's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer or Yumu-chan's character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, images behind the shutter become invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a11). In the state in which the shutter is closed (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59(a14) to FIG. 59(a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a13).

Thereafter, from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens. When the shutter is open in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a15). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a16). When the shutter is open in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a16). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a17). When the shutter is open in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a17).

The screen brightness gradually improves from (a16) to (a17) such that, for example, (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Furthermore, when the shutter (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "substantially off" instead of "lights off". Further, when the shutter is opened, if it has been determined to move to SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B will be displayed. When SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process moves to the effect of FIG. 62(b1), and when SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), the effect shown in FIG. Transition to the performance of e1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 62 to 67, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP first half reach A) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP first half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch the Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing the enemy character Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display in (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. In the state (b3) where the enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image of a confrontation between the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), a subtitle display "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), the ally character Yumu-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume-up screen. In addition, in the state of (b7) Yumu-chan, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, in the dream chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the line "To". After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (b9) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering the line "Hehehe".

Thereafter, the background of the room is displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 65 (b10). In the room background state of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display ``Wait~'' corresponding to Yume-chan's line ``Wait~'' is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. In addition, a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) of Yume-chan's footsteps, ``zazazaza'', is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (b11), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (b11), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of Yumemu chasing (b12), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, and a part of Yumu-chan's hand is also displayed, resulting in a screen where Bakuchu runs away from Yumu-chan. As shown in (b13), on the screen of Bakuchu running away, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Yume-chan's footsteps ``Zazazaza'' is output along with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (b13) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), Bakuchu's jumping sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as onomatopoeia) in accordance with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu jumping state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the fact that the Bakuchu is jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), on the Baku Chew Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Baku Chew character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Toriya~!" is output on the Yume Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen is displayed in which Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner for deciding whether or not to accept the decision. In addition, in the scene before the decision of success or failure (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains white lighting so as to correspond to the scene of determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (b18), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach A, the process shifts to the performance of (c1). In the state of (b18), if it has been determined that there will be a loss in the SP first half reach A, the process moves to the performance of (d1). If it is determined that the state of (b18) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) where Bakuchu is caught, a physical sound of Yumu-chan catching "Bashit!" is output in accordance with the video of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu. Further, in the state of catching a Bakushu (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakushu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (c2), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught the Bakuchu, giving the buoy sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display ``Rakusho yo!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Rakusho yo!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color to indicate that a jackpot has been won. Hereinafter, smooth lighting in rainbow colors will also be referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Furthermore, in the state (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, giving a buoy sign is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying symbols (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (c5) and displayed in normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is the part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds and that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 70 (d1), in the loss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (d1) in which Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a darker white color than the lighting mode of (tb18) shown in (b18) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, is kneeling in regret, and Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (td1) showing the lighting mode in (d1). Thereafter, as shown in (d3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(d4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (d4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the inciting part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 72 to 77, the production mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The inciting part (SP first half reach B) is the part where the story unfolds in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo face off in a hockey game. In the incitement part (SP first half reach B), a story is developed that incites that if Yume-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a jackpot, and if Yume-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72(e1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach B with "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state (e2) where the screen is cracked and the title display has disappeared, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. Thereafter, as shown in (e3), an image of the appearance of the opposing characters is displayed, in which the ally character Yumu-chan and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. In the state (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e4), an image of a confrontation between the friendly character Yumu-chan in the front left of the screen and the enemy character Boingo in the back right of the screen is displayed. In the confrontation state (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color on the right side where Boingo is displayed, corresponding to the Boingo character. Furthermore, at the timing when the title display (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display ``I won't lose'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't lose'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (e5), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), a subtitle display "Come on, come on," corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on," is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumu-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Yumu-chan's turn, Yumu-chan's line "Ya~" is output. In addition, in the state of Yumemu turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering the lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yumu-chan is displayed in an enlarged manner. Furthermore, in the pack display state (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yumu-chan's pack is displayed. Further, in the state of preventing Boingo (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) dancing in the puck, the physical sound of the puck rotating "shururu" is output. Further, in the state (e10), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Thereafter, as shown in (e11), an image of Boingo, the enemy character, hitting the puck is displayed. Further, as shown in (e11), on the screen that is Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Further, in the state of Boingo turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is displayed in an enlarged manner. Further, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to the physical sound "shoo" of the pack operating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumu-chan is damaged by being directly hit by the pack, and an image is displayed in which electricity is running and her bones are visible. As shown in (e13), in the state of Yumu damage, Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e14). Further, in the state of Yumu-chan damage (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumu-chan receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the decision is made where the state in which Yumu-chan has been damaged is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (e17), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. In the state of (e17), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in the SP first half reach B, the process moves to the performance of (f1). If it is determined from the state of (e17) that there will be a loss in the first half of SP reach B, the process moves to the performance of (g1). If it is determined that the state of (e17) will develop to SP reach in the latter half, the state shifts to the performance of (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the first half of the SP reach B hit epilogue part, an image of Yumu-chan hitting the puck back is displayed. Further, in the state of the Yumu attack (f1) in which Yumu-chan attacks by hitting the puck back, a subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Go!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumu attack (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yumu-chan's attack. do.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yumu-chan's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Further, in the state (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns on (smoothly) in a rainbow direction indicating that a jackpot has been won. Furthermore, in the state (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu-chan doing a fist pump and Boingo falling down is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Yumu-chan's victory, a subtitle display ``Easy victory!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Easy victory!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (f3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumu Shoshi is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (f5). In the state of displaying symbols (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (f6) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 81 and 82, the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where the story of Yumu-chan being defeated by Boingo unfolds and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yumu-chan flying further away than in the state (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image of Yumu-chan kneeling down in regret after being defeated by Boingo and Boingo smiling is displayed. As shown in (g3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production style in the character movement part (second half development)]
With reference to FIG. 83, the performance mode in the accessory action part (second half development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, the accessory The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state (h2), the accessory falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state (h3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. An effect in which the accessory rises from the state of (h3) is executed. If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach A after the rise of the accessory, the transition is made to the production (i1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach B after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into the final reach after the accessory rises, the process moves to the production (r1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 84 to 96, the production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which the ally characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the inciting part (SP second half reach A), a story is told that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a jackpot, and if Yumu-chan and Jam-chan can't catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the SP second half reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan (characters on the far left) and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (i2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP second half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), a subtitle display ``I won't let you escape!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't let you escape!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i3), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), a subtitle display ``I'll help you too!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I'll help you too!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i4), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), a subtitle display ``I'll run away again!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Let's go" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Let's go" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Come on!" corresponding to the line "Come on!" of Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatap" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state (i10) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Jam Chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "Za-Za-Za" as a physical sound are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i13), Jam-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as a physical sound are outputted in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the jam chasing state (i13), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the state of Jam Jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu (i16), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound ``Sukak'' that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yumu-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan's movement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yumu-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (i19) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``Wait!'' is displayed on the Yume Chasing screen. Further, as shown in (i21), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i22), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume (i22), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yumu-chan jumping, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times in response to Yumu-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i24), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Yumu-chan was unable to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu in (i25), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan not being able to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Sukak" that Yumu-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, a subtitle display "Next time, two people!" corresponding to the two allies' dialogue "Next time, two people!" is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i27), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, in the state of (i27) Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yumu-chan is displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yumu and Jam Up, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two characters are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. In (i30), an image in which the two people are closer to Bakushu than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the physical sound of Yume-chan and Jam-chan's footsteps ``za-za-za'' is output along with the images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of (i30) where two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Further, in the jam jumping state (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yumu-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yumu-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yumu Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in a two-person jump state, a subtitle display ``Wait!'' corresponding to the lines ``Wait!'' from two allies is displayed. In the two-player jumping state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 1. In the state of two people jumping (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two people are jumping. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 2. In the two-player jumping state (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (i38), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 3. In the two-person jumping state (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two players are jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4 in a scene before the determination of validity. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (i39) that there will be a jackpot in reach A in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (j1). In the state of (i39), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach A or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (k1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the (j1) state of catching Bakuchu, the physical sound of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching ``Bashi!'' is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (j1) of catching a Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``It was a shame!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It was a shame!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Also, in the state (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yumu-chan who caught Bakuchu makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged in the symbol display, and the symbol is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (j4). In the state of displaying symbols (j5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two symbols (normal size) (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 99 to 100, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is the part where the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the loss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu could not be caught, the onomatopoeic sound ``sukak'' is output along with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color darker than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (k2), on the Bakushu-up screen, a subtitle display "Usssssss!" corresponding to the line "Usssssssssssssssssssssssssssss" in Bakusshu is displayed. In the explosive chew-up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan kneeling down and disappointed in not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the state of screen blacking out (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). From the state (k5), if it has been determined that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 101 to 109, the presentation mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B) will be described. The inciting part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which a story develops in which ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan confront the enemy character crab robot. In the incitement part (SP second half reach B), a story is developed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan incite that if the crab robot beats Boingo, they will win the jackpot, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, they will lose.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the inciting part where the SP second half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekushin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the second half of the SP that will be executed from now on. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot in this reach. Note that this display indicating the jackpot expectation level may be displayed at another SP reach. In the state where the title display (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (leftmost characters) and an enemy character crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the lines "I won't lose!" from the two allies is displayed. In the confrontation state (n2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state (n4) of two people running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the action of two people running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running into a hollow in a rocky area to escape from the crab's beam is displayed. In the two-person jump state (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky area is displayed. In the state where the beam (n6) is passing, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan relaxing in the shadow of a rocky area is displayed. As shown in (n7), on the screen where the two people are relieved, a subtitle display "Haaha" corresponding to Jam's line "Haaha" is displayed. In the confrontation state (n7), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (n8), a subtitle display "It's my turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's my turn!" is displayed on the Jam Up screen. Furthermore, in the jam-up state (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab using the technique described by Delta Break is displayed. Further, in the jam attack state (n9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab uttering the line "Gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Thereafter, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state of (n13) where two people run away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan receiving damage from the crab's beam is displayed. Further, in the state (n15) in which two players receive damage, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that two players have received damage.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up after receiving damage is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two people stand up, a subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "From now on!" is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two people stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the character of Jam-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. Further, in the Nana-up state (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana-chan offers a prayer is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer movement is performed to confuse the enemy. Furthermore, in the Nana prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab being confused by Nana's prayer performance is displayed. Further, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab's confusing movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion and getting angry is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of a crab waving its arms to attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana receiving damage similar to that of a crab attack is displayed. Further, in the state (n22) of Nana receiving damage, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam-chan holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display ``Leave it to me!'' corresponding to Jam's line ``Leave it to me!'' is displayed on the Jam remote control operation screen. Furthermore, in the Jam remote control operation state (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the Jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect in which a hand appears from the sky is performed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the player is going to catch crabs, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether the decision is made or not, in which an enlarged image of the crab and hand is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. From the state of (n27), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in reach B in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance of (o1). In the state of (n27), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach B or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 112, the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning against the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky and catching a crab is displayed. Further, as shown in (o1), on the screen where the crab is caught, a subtitle display "Yareta~" corresponding to the crab's line "Yareta ~" is displayed. In addition, in the crab catching state (o1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to catching a crab. Thereafter, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab installed as a signboard for the shop is displayed. Also, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 turns on in a rainbow light (smoothly) indicating that the player has won the jackpot. Also, in the state (o2), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Further, as shown in (o3), on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard, a subtitle display ``Nice signboard'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Nice signboard'' is displayed. Further, in the state of the shop (o3) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen continues where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Furthermore, as shown in (o4), a subtitle display ``Work hard'' corresponding to Nana's line ``Work hard'' is displayed on the screen of a shop with a crab as a signboard. Further, in the state of the shop (o4) where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (o6). In the state of displaying symbols (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being defeated by a crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the second half of the SP, an image of a hand extending from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch a crab (p1), the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) in response to not being able to catch a crab. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of a crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab running away state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown on page 3, an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan looking down in regret after being run away by crabs is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (p3), on the disappointing screen, a subtitle display ``Sonone~'' corresponding to the lines ``Sonone~'' of the two allies is displayed. Further, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined from the state (p5) that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 115 to 132, the production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach) will be described. The inciting part (SP final reach) is the part where a story unfolds in which six ally characters, Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. It is. In the inciting part (SP final reach), a story is told that if 6 people can catch Bakchu, it will be a jackpot, and if 6 people can't catch Bakchu, it will be a loss. Moreover, the inciting part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest jackpot expectation among all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the inciting part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach, ``Six people catch Bakuchu!'' is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the SP final reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yumu-chan face off against the enemy character Bakuchu in the center of the screen. The image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies, ``This is the last time,'' are output. Furthermore, in the confrontation state (r2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the six characters saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line ``I'll run away again'' is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display ``Watch'' corresponding to Maid A's line ``Watch'' is displayed. In the maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to the maid A uttering the lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r6), when Maid B is displayed, the subtitle display ``I'll do my best'' corresponding to Maid B's line ``I'll do my best'' is displayed. In the state of Maid B display (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color in response to Maid B uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the Nana-chan display state of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display ``Yoraku dho'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Yoraku dho'' is displayed. In the Jam-chan display state of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Everyone is going!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone is going!" is displayed. In the state of displaying Yume-chan (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display ``Anyone can come over'' corresponding to the Bakuchu's line ``Anyone can come over'' is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering its lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed. Is displayed. In the state of AD & Maid A chasing (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in blue in response to the maid A character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display ``Will you be caught!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Will you be caught?'' is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r13) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r14) where the game is running away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 120 (r16), when an image of Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the Nana chasing state (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the state where Maid B and Nana are chasing (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in Hawaiian blue color in response to Maid B's character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in pink in response to the Nana character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r18) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r20), when an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. be done. In the dream chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines, "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the dream dream & jam chase state of (r21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the Yume-chan character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r23) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound is the same as Maid A's, "Too!", but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), in a scene where the Jam-chan character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, the sound of Jam-chan's dialogue, "Toriya!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when a close-up image of six allies is displayed, a subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the six allies' lines "This is the last!" is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r36) where six allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to the six players saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), a close-up image of six allies is continuously displayed. Furthermore, in the state of (r37) with six allies up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakushu is displayed along with the city background. Further, in the state of Bakuchu display (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Thereafter, as shown in (r39), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabee!!!" is displayed. Ru. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu-up state (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with a concentrated line superimposed on the image of the explosive chew-up. Further, in the state of (r40) Baku Cheup + button display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid button operation period, the three main characters of the pachinko machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumu-chan, and Jam-chan, will be cut in on the screen, as shown in (r41). will be displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed by cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is finished, an image of six people jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. Further, in the state of cut-in and release (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. Thereafter, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen where Bakushu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the Bakushu is displayed in a larger size than in (r44).

After that, as shown in Figure 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed enlarged than in (r45), the subtitles corresponding to the six allies' lines "We've cornered you!" " is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of displaying six allies (r47), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the six allies saying lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is displayed. As shown in (r49), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is outputted to encourage the player to perform the operation. Further, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is more concentrated in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), in response to the trigger display converging toward the center, a sound corresponding to operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in the state (r50) where the trigger display is at the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. In a state in which the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in a state where the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In a state where the close display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In a state where the close display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the decision is made where the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4 appears. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state where the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determined scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it has been determined from the state (r54) that there will be a jackpot in the SP final reach, the process moves to the performance (s1). In the state of (r54), if it has been determined that the SP final reach will be a loss or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (u1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 133 to 136, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part where it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story in which six people catch the Bakushu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen as the object starts to fall, as shown in (s1). be done. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Further, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

Thereafter, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at the position where it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. From the state of (s3), an effect in which the accessory rises is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the accessory has been raised, a scene in which Yumu-chan catches the Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s4), a subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Furthermore, in the state (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of the six people being happy after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching Bakuchu is displayed. Further, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display ``Guys, you did it!'' is continuously displayed. In the state of catching the Bakushu (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people celebrating after catching Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the ``222'' pattern is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state in (s8). In the state of displaying the symbols (s9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story unfolds in which the six players were unable to catch the Bakushu.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) where the Bakushu escapes, the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the six people are disappointed that Bakchu ran away into the distance and were unable to catch him. Further, as shown in (u2), on the Sorry screen, a subtitle display ``Unfortunate~'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Unfortunate~'' is displayed. As shown in (u2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) showing the lighting mode in (u1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state (u4) that the game will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Production style in the rescue part]
With reference to FIGS. 139 to 140, the effect mode in the rescue part will be explained. The rescue winning part is a part in which a story is developed based on a rescue performance that becomes a jackpot after the story of a loss is developed. In the rescue part, a premium character named Drum-kun, who does not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief part, a relief effect in which a character named Drum-kun is displayed on the screen is executed. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that he has won a comeback disguised as a loss. In the rescue performance of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, the screen becomes white-out as shown in (v3). In the whiteout (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (v3). In the state of displaying symbols (v4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd or even symbols derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-lottery part (odd number or even number design derived after button operation) will be described. In FIGS. 141 to 156, the flow of a series of presentations from detailed presentation of symbols in the promotion presentation to button operation in the re-lottery presentation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. When the two symbols (A5) are in the normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery effect starts. In the state (A6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state (A6), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol starts swinging, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp. After that, in the symbol fluctuation period shown in FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbols have moved downward from the normal position is displayed. In the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the symbol fluctuation period, a screen with the symbol displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of two symbol fluctuations. Thereafter, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the movement start period of the re-lottery performance. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative symbols change at high speed to perform replacement display. When the replacement display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, and thus the decorative pattern is switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of variation (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc., and the display becomes thinner. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started from the 2 symbols passes through one cycle and the 2 symbols are clearly displayed again, a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the 2 symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), when the two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. After that, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, etc. , the symbols are replaced while changing at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (C1).

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 157 to 160, the production mode in the re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) will be described. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an odd numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "333" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the three-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a larger size than in (B1). In the state of 3-symbol enlargement (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the three symbols (B5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" swings up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the three-symbol shaking state (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (B7). In the normal background shaking state (B7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern "333" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of flashing rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed, after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even numbered symbols are derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the production mode in the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) will be described. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an even numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the 2-symbol enlargement state, the background becomes brighter, the "222" symbol is enlarged, and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the two-symbol enlargement state (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the two symbols (C5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a swinging period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (C7). In the normal background shaking state (C7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern "222" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol determination period (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (C9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains smooth lighting in rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (E2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(Start 6)
Furthermore, the shutter described above is configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect performed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is opened. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
Note that the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in the active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and the active pending display corresponds to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing of the development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Inciting 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Inciting 2)
Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

(Inciting 3)
Note that the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in another scene of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Inciting 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

(Inciting 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A, SP first half reach B as the first inciting part that is executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second inciting part that is executed at the timing of the second half. , SP late reach B, and SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

(Inciting 6)
In addition, in the aforementioned inciting part, the character of Yumu-chan plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, and the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of the SP. There was a scene where he was active. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. In addition, in the second half of the SP Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

(Inciting 11)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there are scenes in which each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

(True or false 1)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

(True or false 2)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and after that, the screen corresponding to the operating means displays the subtitles. The performance that was being performed becomes no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

(True or false 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed, The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

(True or false 4)
In addition, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly every time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progression of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the tail moving. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(True or false 5)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

(True or false 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

(True or false 7)
Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(True or false 14)
In addition, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 The images are displayed in a static state for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

(True or false 16)
Further, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, there is an introduction image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is a success or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(True or false 18)
Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the scenes of the decision of validity shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

(Epilogue 1)
The above-mentioned win epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes a scene where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocation part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIG. 134 (s6) to FIG. 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the symbol display is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from mistaking it as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background become still images. There is. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the display of the symbols shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, subtitles displayed at other timings may be given a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, by adding a fade effect to the display of subtitles other than the final one, effective switching can be achieved, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display can overlap the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and from being mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the symbols. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed during the presentation of symbols in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when presenting a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may be changed again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

(Re-lottery performance 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

(Re-lottery performance 6)
As shown in the flow shown in FIG. 144 (A10) to FIG. 156 (A46) and FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. The operation promotion display will be displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

(Re-lottery performance 16)
The pattern display in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using substantially the same video. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same.

(Re-lottery performance 17)
In the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 18)
In the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery performance. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

<Detailed explanation regarding production mode>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned production mode, characteristic parts and modifications that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191.

[About Inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (b11) to (b13) parts)
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In line with this character arrangement, the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, corresponding to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yumu-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Zazaza" are output as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output.

Further, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the front-rear direction, Bakuchu is in the front and Yumu-chan is behind. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Bakuchu is nearby and Yumu-chan is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volumes is as follows: ``Wait~'', the sound of Yumu-chan's line > Bakuchu's footsteps, ``ta-ta-ta-ta'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``za-za-za-za''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sounds of Yumu-chan's lines in the distance are louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, who are closer.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and the physical sounds of Yumu-chan's footsteps "zazazaza" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as physical sounds. The relationship between the volumes is ``Bakuchu's footsteps ``tatata tat'' > Yume-chan's footsteps ``zazazaza''. In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's nearby footsteps are louder than Yumu-chan's distant footsteps, to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that in the left-right direction, Yumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yumu-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" is output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps as a physical sound. "Tatatatat" is output. Further, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yumu-chan is in the front and Bakuchu is behind her in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen from the player's perspective is that Yumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship between the volume is as follows: Bakuchu's line sound in ``Let's get caught!'' > Yumu-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > Baku-chu's footsteps, ``Tata-ta-tat''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the sound of Bakuchu's lines in the distance is louder than the sound of Yumu-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Inciting 12)
In the inciting part, the BGM of SP Reach is output, and there are also scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also referred to as action sounds) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(Inciting 13)
Here, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Inciting 15)
Additionally, if the dialogue sound of a character who is far away from the player overlaps with the physical sound from a character who is closer to the player, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. has been done. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easy to convey to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[About Inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. As shown in FIG. 166(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko game machine 1, the relationship among the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The output volume level has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Furthermore, when these three sounds overlap, the way the sound is output is different depending on whether the sound is a dialogue sound with subtitles or a dialogue sound without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sound with subtitles, when the dialogue sound (with subtitles), physical sound, and SP reach BGM are output at the same timing, the volume of SP reach BGM is It is controlled to output at a lower level. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sound without subtitles, when the dialogue sound (without subtitles) is output at the timing when the physical sound and SP reach BGM overlap, the dialogue sound> It is controlled to output without changing any volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Inciting 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it is heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

(Inciting 16)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound, and a case where there is no subtitle on the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound. In the case, the BGM of SP Reach is adjusted so that it sounds louder by lowering the volume. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method for effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of output volume levels is the same: dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and the dialogue sound overlap and are output, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Inciting 16)
As shown in Figures 167(B) and (C), there is a difference between a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, and a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle. The volume will be adjusted to be louder only for those who are listening. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[About incitement 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), in the scene where Maid A is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where Maid B is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in the scene where Nana-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r32), in a scene where Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, the sound of Jam-chan's dialogue, "Toriya!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in the scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in the scene where Yume-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output lines are one-word lines that seem to be enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, the scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Furthermore, in these specific scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the story development compared to other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Inciting 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part, but no subtitles are attached (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Inciting 8)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), colors other than those corresponding to the character in the previous scene are used. Control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic parts in FIGS. 171 and 172 will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the determination of validity, the game effect lamp 9 maintains a white lighting state. Thereafter, when the SP develops into a second half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state (h2), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the falling of the accessory is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (h2). In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the (h4) retreating state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the accessory action part to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (inciting part) changes. . After that, in the state (h5), the accessory increases further. In the state (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory increases further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (h7), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. Thereafter, in the state (h8), the accessory increases further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state (h9), the accessory increases further. In the state (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h8), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state (h10), the accessory increases further. In the state (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h9), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, in the state (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the scene of the start of SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as the accessory moves, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

(Start 4)
Note that an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes the use of accessories.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before determining the validity of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Furthermore, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation promotion display to encourage the operation. The movable body 32 as an accessory operates when the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period or when the predetermined period elapses. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. Here, the period of time during which the accessory is falling in the scene of the success/failure notification is longer than the time during which the accessory is falling in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Specifically, the effect image in the scene of the success/failure notification like (s1) is a rainbow color. Note that the effect images in scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. Further, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state (s2), the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. In the state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Thereafter, in the state (s3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state (s2). In the state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. When the state of (s3) changes to the saving state of (s3-2), the brightness output from the brightness data table for the accessory movement of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part The data table changes. After that, in the state (s3-3), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (s3-6), the accessory increases further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state (s4), a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line ``Ugh, I got caught.'' In the state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display changes to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the ascent, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In situations where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, dialogue sounds are not output, and dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to its initial position. Just display it. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the win/fail decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[About Epilogue 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, there is no dialogue, so there are no subtitles.

In addition, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of lines is 5 and the number of subtitles is 3. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, there are no dialogues, so there are no subtitles. In addition, in the case of SP second half reach A, the number of lines is 16 and the number of subtitles is 14. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1.

In addition, in the case of SP second half reach B, the number of lines is 9 and the number of subtitles is 7. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In addition, in the case of SP final reach, the number of lines is 27 and the number of subtitles is 19. In addition, in the case of the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of lines is 2 and the number of subtitles is 2. In the case of the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 1 for each line of dialogue.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the inciting part, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[About re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, characteristic parts in the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then are reduced in size as shown in (A3) and (A4). Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect and the re-lottery effect is started. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are oscillating is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light changes from flashing white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp.

Thereafter, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbol oscillates up and down. Thereafter, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol located in the center is once reduced. After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed again from (A10') to (A23'). The high-speed fluctuations are performed in a manner similar to the above.

Thereafter, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been displayed twice, the button image is faintly displayed together with the "2" symbol that was initially displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern changes rapidly as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and as time passes The time gauge displayed under the button image will decrease accordingly. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid period of button operation has ended, an odd number is displayed as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. A symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a jackpot.

(Re-lottery performance 1)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 4)
At the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery performance 5)
In the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

(Re-lottery performance 7)
As shown in Figure 176, in the re-lottery performance, after the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and oscillated, the "2" symbol is used as it is for the re-lottery. The performance begins. At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(Re-lottery performance 8)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and again "2". '', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', all the decorative patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

(Re-lottery performance 9)
In the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

(Re-lottery performance 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns are sent in order of ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'', but each symbol The displayed time is the same. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

(Re-lottery performance 11)
During the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

(Re-lottery performance 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding performance. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

(Re-lottery performance 13)
Note that the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 14)
In the lottery performance, there are two patterns: a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. It was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 15)
In the lottery performance, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, Common data is used in any of the patterns in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the inciting part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the promotion part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), a part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is the inciting part, will be explained.

In state (b4), a screen where Yumu-chan and Bakuchu confront each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In addition, in the state (b4'), the dialogue sound for "I found it" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%, as in the state (b5). .

After that, as shown in (b5'), in the layer below the subtitle with 0% transparency for "I found it", which corresponds to Yume-chan's dialogue, "I found it", which corresponds to Bakuchu's dialogue, is transparent. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. Thereafter, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "I found it" and the subtitle "I found it" are displayed in such a state that their transparency is both 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" that corresponds to Yumu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle "Found" that corresponds to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states (b5') and (b5''), the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, and when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state (b6), the dialogue sound is not output. There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. For example, in FIG. 178(B), the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progress of the song sung by Nana-chan: ``I'll definitely get it someday.'' Immediately afterwards, subtitles (lyrics) appear as the song progresses, saying, ``I'll grab it with my little hands.'' If such subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of the change is easy to understand.

(Inciting 21)
In the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed text with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(Inciting 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. Sometimes. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Variation example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, instead of adding a fade effect to both of the two subtitles, a fade effect may be applied to one of the subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which a fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern that does not include is possible. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the pattern with the above-described pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. Furthermore, when applying a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display.

Further, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described in the case where the timings at which the subtitles are displayed overlap. However, when the same character utters lines consecutively, the subtitle display for the second line may be overlapped with the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the subtitle display.

(Inciting 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding a fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(About the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at 70% transparency one frame after 100% transparency. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of the line "I found it" was not output.

After that, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% while the sound of the dialogue "I found it" is output. Then, during period T1, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, but starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "found" is faded in. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transmittance of 70% one frame after the transmittance is 100%. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% during the period when the dialogue sound "Found" is output. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "found," the subtitle "found" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out. Effects are added. Furthermore, fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Inciting 23)
As shown in Figure 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and is output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

(Comparison of subtitles between the incitement part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the inciting part. Further, FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). 180(A) and 180(B) have in common that subtitles are displayed consecutively for lines uttered by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), it is displayed that Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Yumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180(B), in parts (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard was the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed, and Jam-chan's line " The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard Nene" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed without subtitles. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. Afterwards, the background of the shop with the crab as its sign becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the incitement part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed multiple times in one scene (period 0 to t1 and period 0 to t2). There are cases. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to erase the subtitle display that has been displayed to make it easier to understand the change in subtitle display. However, when there is not enough time, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to make the switching of subtitles easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, a video is first created, and then audio such as dialogue is added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. Suppose that it would take a lot of effort to recreate a video with a longer period for once erasing the subtitle display during the period 0 to t1, where a longer time frame cannot be taken. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to recreate the video. In addition, even when there is sufficient time, such as the epilogue part where the crab signboard shop is displayed, by applying a uniform fade effect, the overall workload is reduced, and when switching subtitles, This can prevent any discomfort from occurring.

(Inciting 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

(Inciting 25)
Here, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the inciting part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the inciting part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Inciting 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). With reference to FIG. 182, a description will be given of the correspondence between effects using decorative patterns and small patterns on the screen and effects using the game effect lamp 9. As shown in (B4), the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced in the symbol presentation performance of the re-lottery part. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, based on receiving the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a flashing rainbow-colored lighting mode.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Furthermore, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after approximately 33 msec to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after receiving the fanfare command. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), after the game effect lamp 9 appears, the screen changes to a screen where the words "FEVER" and Yume-chan, which indicate the fanfare mode, are displayed. Further, at this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the fanfare is maintained.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of pattern placement. In a modified example, the symbols may be put out in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) in the scene of catching the Bakuchu are aligned in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern at the upper left of the screen is temporarily erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration "222" which had been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state in (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white blinking.

In the variation of the symbol display, the decorative symbols move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach, and the symbols are aligned at the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced symbol once deleted after the reduced symbol fluctuation period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the center position of the screen and the first symbol effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). location). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). ``222'' is displayed in the same position as ``222''. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

FIGS. 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of the re-lottery. In a modified example, a case will be described in which, for example, a re-lottery is executed from the drawing of symbols in the order of (F1) to (F12). Specifically, after the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Thereafter, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size.

Thereafter, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation.

FIG. 185 shows a case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 185, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed fluctuation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1", and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). Thereafter, as shown in (G19), the symbol becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to a background for pattern shaking. Here, as the symbol shaking, an operation of shaking the symbol is performed by rotating the symbol on the screen from the back side to the front side. Specifically, after the symbol swings toward the back from (G20) to (G21), the symbol swings toward the front from (G22) to (G23), thereby changing to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (G24) to (G25), and then swings toward the back from (G26) to (G27), thereby changing to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12), the "3" symbol will remain displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge will decrease as time passes. . Thereafter, as shown in (H7), the button image is displayed faintly and then erased. After that, "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then are reduced in size as shown in (H24) and (H25). Thereafter, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the backgrounds shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the amount of time the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period in which the effect of shaking three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily goes white out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state (J2), move counterclockwise around the vertical direction of the "3 symbols" to (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation is so fast that the design appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the symbol swings toward the back from (J11) to (J12), and then from (J13) to (J14), the symbol moves toward the front. It changes to the initial position by swinging. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. The shaking movement of the symbols from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the shaking movement of the symbols from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly at the normal position.

[About losses 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of validity corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. The details of the symbol confirmation period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part will be explained using (X2) to (X5). Further, the details of the symbol confirmation period when the state moves from the state (X1) to the losing epilogue part will be explained using (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the hit epilogue part, an image of the state in which the Bakuchu is caught (s5) is displayed, as shown in (X2). Thereafter, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as (B8) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like (B11) begins. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period begins.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the loss epilogue part, an image of the state of regret (u2) in which the player was not able to catch the Bakushu is displayed, as shown in (X6). Thereafter, as shown in (X7), the background is blacked out and a symbol combination indicating a loss display result of "232" is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. Thereafter, after being controlled to the normal screen, there is a symbol determination period in which symbols such as (X9) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a pending memory corresponding to the next variable display after the end of the symbol confirmation period, the next variable display will be started.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. The details of blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate state (u2) of not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. From this state, the blackout background will be displayed with its transmittance gradually decreasing, and the background of the middle design showing "3", which is one of the decorative designs displayed in the center, will gradually decrease its transmittance. displayed. By lowering the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle design gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. Thereafter, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. Thereafter, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. Thereafter, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. Thereafter, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 40%. Thereafter, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 20%. Thereafter, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. Thereafter, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, from (X19) to (X20), there is a symbol shaking period in which the middle symbol "3" swings up and down. After the symbol shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). After that, as shown in (X22), the symbol confirmation period begins. As shown in Figure 189, the background blackout starts earlier than the medium pattern fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transmittance switching than the medium pattern fade-in. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the medium symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: The number of steps is greater than the number of steps required to progress in the process. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle pattern is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

(Loss 5)
The image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss blacked out, the medium symbol faded in, and as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% A blacked-out background is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan as information about the pachinko machine 1. be done. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Regarding losses 8, 10 to 17]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp in the case of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example in the case of a loss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamps when the game is lost, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when the game is lost. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when losing in the final SP reach, but the performance when losing in other reaches such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, etc. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect (X30) in which six ally characters are disappointed to the effect in (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. Note that the brightness data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in SP Reach, an eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen. The image is displayed.

A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen (X34) and the symbol confirmation period (X35), the background changes to the next fluctuation (X36), which is executed when the fluctuation pattern command with hold is received. A luminance data table for Note that the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the lose epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

Note that the background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern confirmation period (X35). In addition, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the production screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and a brightness data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is turned off in the state (X35). After that, by receiving the variable pattern command when there is reservation, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 becomes blinking in the state of (X36). In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 remains off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Furthermore, as a modification in case of a loss, the brightness data table in each state may be different from that in this embodiment. Specifically, from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41), the brightness data table at the time of failure is used. After that, during the (X42) eye-catch screen switching period, (X43) eye-catch screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is It may also be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the background brightness data table may be used.

Here, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before eye-catching display (when losing). In addition, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when the game is lost will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of the variation pattern command of the next variation, which is the trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

(Loss 13)
A modification example in case of a loss will be explained. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the effect in which the six ally characters are disappointed in (X40) to the effect in which the background image is blacked out in (X41). The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

(Loss 14)
The final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

(Loss 15)
After the symbol is determined, if there is no pending memory, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

(Loss 16)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Regarding validity 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of validity will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) shows a scene in which the final instigation is performed before the decision is made. FIG. 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the Bakushu (r48-1) is displayed, six allies are displayed as (r48-2). After that, the display of Bakushu like (r48-1) is displayed again, and then the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. Thereafter, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or false 8)
The scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. This is done using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(True or false 9)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

(True or false 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

(True or false 11)
In the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

(True or false 12)
During the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes will now move at the same speed as the period other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

<Explanation regarding game effect lamps>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 stores information in the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variable time reaches the timing to start display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) for each part such as the start part and the inciting part). Display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the image display device 5 . The display control unit 124 sets an extended command corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extended command to the effect control CPU 120. do. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control on the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extended command for specifying the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , information specifying a child table to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp (child table designation address) are stored. Note that in the parent table, only lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, panel left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric tube lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the accessory lamp 9A, and child table LD1 is specified for the panel left lamp 9B. , the child table AD1 is designated for the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric lamp 9H.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp. This is specified, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 is configured to perform lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are designated for each time such as ta1 to ta19.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp. , the performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. ing. In the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, in the grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and a current of "1" flows to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to brightness data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. For example, in a production where Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and when the current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. . In a production in which Maid A appears, data of "00F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in blue. In a production where Maid B appears, data of "0AC" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and as a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In a performance where an AD appears, data of "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow. In a production in which Jam-chan appears, the data "A5F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in purple. In a performance where Nana-chan appears, "F3F" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in pink. In a production where Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately displayed at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. specified. The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and reads the brightness data at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 300 msec. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, a 10 msec cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control to be performed for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. is referred to as data 4, data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 5, data “AAA” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 6, and data “000” in the next 30 msec is referred to as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and updates data 1 to data 7 at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the time reaches 3000 msec. However, after outputting data 1 to data 7, if the time measurement has not yet reached 3000 msec, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and such 10-minute data in the parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another from where a problem occurs. can do.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 193, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. When the value of the timer reaches 0, the timer of the parent table still remains, which plays a role in preventing lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the child table.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer reaches 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the brightness data table used in the start part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is set as 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information specifying child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced during control is stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the frame lamp child table WD1, the time of the start part of the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are indicated by "omitted" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp for 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink twice in white.

During times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is designated. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to gradually reduce the brightness in response to effects such as shutter closing as shown in FIGS. 58 (a10) to (a12). While doing so, the frame lamp lights up in red.

During times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to change the state from the shutter fully closed state as shown in FIGS. 59(a13) to (a15) and FIGS. 60(a16) to (a18) The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state in response to the effect of opening in stages after being maintained for a certain period of time.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp changes color and brightness, such as background lighting in yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting in red. While the brightness data switches so that it lights up/blinks while changing the brightness, at times ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the luminance data is set such that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. maintained, but is not limited to this. For example, even if the brightness data is maintained so that after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp remains in a reduced brightness state and turns on in red. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the brightness can be adjusted so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Data may be maintained.

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to an effect in which the shutter is kept fully open as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "lights out" here refers to a state in which the luminance data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. It's okay to be. In addition, in the following description, "lights out" may also be "substantially lights out". At time ta19, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame control is performed based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 becomes 0. The lamp remains off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, the timing when the shutter is fully opened can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 195, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified during 1560 msec of time tb10. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tb14 and 210 msec of time tb17, respectively. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the next 30 msec is "000" (lit in white). 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). For example, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 150 msec. When lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time tb17. Flashing.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time at which the grandchild table W4 is referenced between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp is blinked in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach A, Yumu-chan makes a Bakuchu before the decision of success or failure (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to a performance that incites whether or not the player will catch it. At time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the 2-luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the win/fail decision in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A inciting part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the production control CPU 120 responds to Yumu-chan by making it correspond to the production in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, when a character has dialogue as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and 63(b9) but no subtitles, the production control CPU 120 creates a frame in a color corresponding to the character. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). to make the frame lamp flash white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has RGB data of "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so that the winning can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

At time tc2 and time tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to a performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 68(c2) and (c3). Lights up in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP reach A in the first half, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP reach first half A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD0 for common symbol display is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to a performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 69(c4) and (c5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 69 (c6). Light. At time tc6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach A is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue is commonly used in the first half of SP reach A and B, the second half of SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, during 200 msec of time td1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the loss notification has RGB data of "888" or "444". . As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tb18), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time td2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the loss 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp from td1 in response to the performance in which Yume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2). It also lights up in a dark white color.

As mentioned above, when the rainbow lights up at the time of winning (tc2, tc3), the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, whereas when the darker white lighting occurs at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data changes for 250 msec longer than at the time of winning. Switch at intervals. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is designated. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 70(d3). .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). Turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed at the time of a loss has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is different from the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 controls the time until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold. The lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data until the customer waiting command is received in the progress, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command is not received yet, the lamp control is performed again. Lamp control is performed based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, during the period from when the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until when the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to the display of the normal screen at time td4. In this case, an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table, which is also used in the start part, is used as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the design is finalized, and lamp control can be performed based on the grandchild table W21 that is also used in the start part. , the performance using the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referred to when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 199, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the promotion part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec of time te8 and for 210 msec of time te12. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. At both time te8 and time te12, the grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time te8, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and the frame lamp flashes white three times at time te12. Flashing.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach B, the player tries to incite whether or not Yumu-chan loses in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the performance. At time te18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach B, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 sets the performance to correspond to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). The lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yume-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in cream color, corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). Make the left lamp blink. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 lights the frame right lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to an effect in which Boingo located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 73 (e6). Make it blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the first half of SP reach B incitement part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color corresponding to Boingo in response to a performance such as Boingo hitting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Further, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is Yume-chan's dialogue but no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7). let

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yumu-chan hits the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1). The frame lamp blinks in white in accordance with the performance.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is designated. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to productions in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins, as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, regarding the frame lamp, the time of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B is In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tf5 and time tf6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and (f6). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, an effect is created in which Boingo is attacked and Yumu-chan wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tf7, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP reach first half B is subdivided and , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec between time tg1 and time tg2. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which Yumu-chan is blown away as shown in FIG. 81 (g1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to this.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, while maintaining the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17), the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white color, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

During 5800 msec of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumu-chan is disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and (g3), and sets the frame Light the lamp in a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a yellow background lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the role model movement part during the second half of SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table that is referred to in the accessory action part is specified for the frame lamp. In addition, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the accessory movement shown in Fig. 171 (h1) to (h3) (Fig. 83 (h1) to (h3)). It will be done.

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified during 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories to fall as shown in FIGS. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the validity branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17). In response to this effect, the frame lamp flashes in red.

It should be noted that lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A during the period of 7000 msec from time th1 to th3 during which the accessory falls. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to th3 when the accessory falls, the performance control CPU 120 controls the child table corresponding to the falling motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the accessory lamp 9A is blinked in red.

Thereby, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the accessory lamp 9A, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the presentation in which the accessory falls.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. There is.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach A has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). From time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. As the CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time ti15 and time ti24, and for 210 msec between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, but at time ti15 and time ti24, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W7 is designated for 1000 msec from time ti36 to time ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the 1 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the promotion part of reach A in the second half of SP, Yume-chan and Jam-chan incite whether or not they will catch Bakuchu in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). In response to the effect, the frame lamp lights up in white. At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, the reach is without operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains illuminated in white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the decision (timing of decision). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38, and furthermore, "FDC" is specified for the data of the last RGB of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. Similarly, "FDC" is designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the production control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the brightness data of "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the brightness data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 and outputs the brightness data of "FDC" to the LED driver. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to proceed by using simpler ramp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the production control CPU 120 creates a production in which Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, confront Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the lamp on the left side of the frame is lit in white, which corresponds to Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame is lit in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Make the left lamp blink. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 displays a frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i4). flash. At time ti5, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the reach A incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan by making it correspond to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 90 (i21). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Further, at time ti32 and time ti34, the production control CPU 120 controls the color of the character corresponding to the character in the case where the character has dialogue as shown in FIG. 94 (i32) and FIG. 95 (i34) but there is no subtitle. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 94 (i32) and Figure 95 (i34), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights/flashes in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to ensure that the frame lamp hits in response to effects such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the corresponding rainbow color.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A is calculated for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tj4 and time tj5. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp display a symbol in correspondence with a production that produces a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and the frame lamp lights up in response to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tk1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, allowing the player to conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). Light the lamp in a white color darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 100 (k4). .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of SP reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the inciting part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach B has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach B in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which exceeds one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights in yellow for 1130 msec, and the time At time tn14, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD12 can be used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec period of time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, and the 210 msec period of time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, At time tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD12 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, in response to the effect of inciting whether or not to catch a crab in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen confront a crab located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the reach B incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the performance in which Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, the performance control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is dialogue of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitles. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the second half of SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to a performance such as catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1) after the decision-making shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to make the frame lamp flash white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so that Jam-chan and Nana-chan can use the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a pattern in response to a performance that produces winning symbols as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7). Flashes in a bright white color that corresponds to the current state.

At time to8, which is the last part of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, Jam-chan and Nana-chan make the caught crab work as a signboard for the shop. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to match the effect. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the lose epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tp1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 can respond to a performance in which the crab fails to be caught as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to light the frame lamp white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, so that the player can conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tp2 and time tp3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and (p3). Light the frame lamp in a white color darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach promotion part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the SP final reach promotion part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect Information specifying child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced when controlling the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining examples of child tables for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp, the time of the SP final reach promotion part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of the SP final reach, thereby clearly informing the player that the SP final reach has been reached. Can be done.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it possible for the player to place the player on the screen indicating that the SP has reached the final reach. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and time tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time tr19 and time At time tr22, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tr15, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD15 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach are all different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using a common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple timings, the data capacity used for ramp control is reduced in multiple reach effects, You can vary the time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tr36 and for 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, but at time tr36, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control in one child table WD15 based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the SP final reach promotion part, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing separate grandchild tables at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the lamp, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. When the information to execute the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and when the information to execute the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is designated at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only the R data is initially changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightnesses is specified, then data showing various brightnesses is specified only for R data at intervals of 20 msec, and finally, various brightnesses are specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 to light the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, only G data is first changed at 30 msec intervals. Data showing various brightness is specified, then data showing various brightness is specified only for G data at the next 20 msec interval, and finally, various brightness is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. Data indicating that is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) as shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128 (r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter any lines and no subtitles are displayed. Furthermore, the frame lamp that is the target of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance in the SP final reach continues to be the target of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap between the two makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being stored away or from being misunderstood. Furthermore, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is in the same frame as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use lamps, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect during the inciting part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the target of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in performance and other SP final reach performances use frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, accessory lamp 9A, and board left lamp 9B, are used for button display and cut-in effects, and other SP final reach effects. The object of lamp control may be common in that point, or the object of lamp control may be common in that all game effect lamps 9 are used.

At 860 msec of time tr49 and time tr50, grandchild table W9 is designated. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

In the time period tr51 to tr54, which is the last part of the promotion part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, it is possible to correspond to effects that encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r51) to 132 (r54). , the frame lamp blinks in red. During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W10, and the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD15 becomes 0. The frame lamp continues blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, in the correctness branch in the SP final reach incitement part, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54). In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of promoting operations for the player at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

Here, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and SP second half reach B. When the operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is not performed, such as the child table WD12 used in the inciting part, the frame lamp is displayed at the final success/fail branch of the inciting part. It remains lit white and then moves to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation promotion that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of the SP final reach, is shown in FIG. 130 (r47). As shown in Figure 130 (r48), after the white flashing is performed to encourage whether or not the ally character will capture Bakuchu, the display alternates between Bakuchu and the ally character, as shown in Figure 130 (r48). After the frame lamp lights up in red in response to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50) is activated based on the grandchild table W9. The frame lamp lights up in red in response to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail situation, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp illuminated in white, the effect can be created as if the effect had stopped. can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure. Furthermore, in the SP final reach where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the brightness data (RGB data) is changed to "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. As a result, the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision can be suitably expressed by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character utters lines, the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and a Bakushu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame flashes in white, corresponding to the six friendly characters, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white. In addition, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to the Bakushu, in response to the performance where the Bakushu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Make the right lamp blink.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. There is.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in blue corresponding to Maid A in response to a performance in which Maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33) and FIG. 126 (r35), when a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), while the characters have dialogue, subtitles are Even if there is no such character, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory movement used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a2), in the child table WD16a for accessory movements used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the accessory action part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, grandchild table W18 is specified during 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 causes the accessories shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) to fall after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). In response to the effect, the frame lamp flashes in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , information specifying child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215 (b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that as the ornaments shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rise, it appears as if a bomb has been caught. The frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory in accordance with the performance in which the display appears.

During times ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to control the frame lamp in response to the performance that looks like catching a Bakushu as shown in FIGS. 134 (s4) to 135 (s7). Lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the SP final reach epilogue part, the time of the symbol display part in the SP final reach epilogue part is divided into small parts for the frame lamp. At the same time, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time ts8 and time ts9. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and the frame lamp lights up in response to an effect such that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings. , it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, while enlivening each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where objects fall, the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, when an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow color is lit without any achromatic colors, and the player is calmly congratulated on winning the jackpot. be able to. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the lose-lose epilogue used for the lose-lose epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during 200 msec of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which Bakushu runs away as shown in FIG. 137 (u1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54). to light the frame lamp white.

The red blinking in the win/fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". Thereby, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss.

During 3900 msec of time tr2, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby changing the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the performance in which six ally characters lose and are disappointed, as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as child table WD17 of SP final reach. Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 137 (u3). .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in the relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for frame lamps in the one brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red in response to the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139(v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 specified last in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is changed to the lighting mode at the beginning of the child table WD18 used in the case of a rescue. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp lights up brighter than in the state after the loss notification, so that depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification can be easily understood by the player. I can show you.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a loss is reported, the frame lamp is lit once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, and furthermore, when a rescue is successful, the frame lamp is lit even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue effect. there were. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the grandchild table W15 is specified, and "111" is specified as the final luminance data (RGB data). may be done. As a result, at the end of a losing game, the frame lamp turns off in white. Further, "AAA" may be designated as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the first designated grandchild table W16 of the child table WD18 used at the time of relief. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white range at the beginning when the rescue is successful after the failure notification. In this way, at the time of winning the rescue, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can be used to prevent the loss. The notification and the subsequent relief hit notification can be shown more easily to the player.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is designated. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the white-out performance shown in FIG. 139(v2).

Grandchild table W4 is designated between 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to the symbol presentation shown in FIGS. 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last part of the rescue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the confirmation of a hit, corresponding to the design presentation shown in FIG. 140 (v5). . At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the maximum time for each game effect lamp 9 to be Information specifying child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, there are prepared a child table that is used before the symbol starts moving, and a child table that is used after the symbol starts moving. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the symbol begins to move. For example, from time tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery performance is started, the symbols are changed by the re-lottery performance, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8). Before it starts moving, turn off the frame lamp.

In this way, once the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to an effect in which the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect, so depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect. This can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219(b) shows a child table used after the symbol begins to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is designated. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, the performance control CPU 120 corresponds to the performance in which the "2" symbol is reduced as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). Make the frame lamp flash red.

During times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. has been done. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) that change at high speed while switching symbols, Make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

(Brightness data table used when symbols are promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "3" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "3" symbol as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) in a reduced size and in normal size, A frame lamp is made to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the symbol "3" is displayed in a swaying manner and then the symbol is confirmed.

It should be noted that the rainbow-colored blinking caused by the lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting caused by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, from time tB5 to tB9, the rainbow color flashes more intensely than smoothly. From time tB5 to tB9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp will continue to flash in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a lamp control when the symbol is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow is used in the same way as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. The frame lamp lights up with the color, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color blinks from time tB5 to tB9, and once in the winning epilogue part, the "2" symbol is displayed. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that would occur if the symbol was temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect after the lights are turned off, and the symbols are displayed in a swaying manner, the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, RGB data on grandchild table W19) is used to change the color to a smooth rainbow color. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp flashes in red. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the ``3'' symbol shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) is displayed in a swaying manner and then the design is confirmed. This makes it easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing rainbow color when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be changed during the period when the symbol is confirmed as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Brightness data table used when the symbol is not promoted after operation promotion)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. 219. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "2" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to create a performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed in a swaying manner as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) and then the symbol is finalized. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the . From time tC5 to tC9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp will remain lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the lights are turned off, and then the symbols start moving by re-drawing effect, and the symbols are displayed shaking. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W19 and W20) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the "2" symbol is promoted by the re-drawing and replaced with the "3" symbol, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, and the "2" symbol is not promoted from the "2" symbol by the re-lottery and is replaced by the "3" symbol. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color from time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol is maintained. As a result, if the winning symbol is promoted in the re-drawing, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-drawing, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol will be promoted in the re-drawing. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using a common grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part.

Also, as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9), after the "2" symbol has finished appearing, the "2" symbol becomes the normal size and the design is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, the designer can easily decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow color lighting when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be continued during the symbol confirmation period as shown in FIGS. 163 (C8) and (C9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. By performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 temporarily turns off the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the lights.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to correspond to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. Turn it on in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and is referenced when controlling the lamp for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the child table (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used is stored.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referred to in a predetermined time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, various brightness values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the accessory lamp grandchild table Y1, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The production control CPU 120 lights up the accessory lamp 9A in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data output to the board left lamp 9B. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1, thereby lighting the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and data is output to the power lamp 9H. As the "RGB" data to be displayed, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric chew lamp 9H in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Accessory object action red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the red blinking luminance data table for accessory motion. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W2 to cause the frame lamp to blink in red.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White blinking (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (white light on), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W5e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. Or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, 3970 msec is the time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child table that is referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only the G data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only the G data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W6e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to turn on or blink the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various luminances is specified at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. Or blink.

[Agitation brightness data table when no operation promotion is performed]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unprompted operation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W7 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Agitation brightness data table with operation promotion]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to light the frame lamp in red.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 outputs the lamp data based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling it, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals. specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11, thereby lighting the frame lamp in red while decreasing the brightness in stages.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to light the frame lamp in red.

[Loss luminance data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the lost brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table per relief]
FIGS. 254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the per-relief brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, each "B00" is specified for the lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in red.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Confirmed hit brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18 to cause the frame lamp to blink in seven colors.

[Re-lottery performance brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background brightness data table]
FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 259, the child tables in the background brightness data table include grandchild tables (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Regarding brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized by performance content.

FIGS. 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the accessory movement in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) The frame lamp flashes in seven colors to correspond to the effect of falling objects.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the ornaments as shown in FIG. 173 (s3-2) to FIG. 174 (s3-8) rise and the explosion Corresponding to the appearance of a display that looks like it has been caught, the frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory.

During the time period ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to productions that produce winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern display.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the production in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5), and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table to turn off the light. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), Before the design begins to move due to the effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby supporting effects such as the reduction of the "2" symbol as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). to make the frame lamp blink in red.

During the time period tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby supporting productions in which the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46). to make the frame lamp flash red rapidly.

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4), A frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation performance in which the pattern "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby finalizing the symbol after the "2" symbol as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is displayed in a oscillating manner In response to this kind of effect, the frame lamps are lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to temporarily display the fanfare before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare manner is designated. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, thereby controlling the frame lamp in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). Lights up in a fanfare lighting mode.

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and uses the child table to Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-drawing part when the symbols are not promoted is illustrated, but if the symbols are changed from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part, As for the child tables leading to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each production part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. There is.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is fully closed, the frame lamp lights up in yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red, etc. The brightness data changes so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, but from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains red while maintaining its brightness in a lowered state. Brightness data is maintained to ensure lighting. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
Figure 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), As shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. /The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(Inciting 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character, and when the character utters lines, the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

(Inciting 17)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time at which the grandchild table W4 is referenced between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp is blinked in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach, multiple mutually different In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each timing, SP reach is possible while reducing the data capacity used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. You can change the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be varied. Good too.

(Instigation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the incitement part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the incitement part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the incitement part of SP second half reach A, child table WD9 used in the incitement part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inciting part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) uses the frame lamp at the same location as the lamp control in the SP final reach inciting part. designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(True or false 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation is promoted to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white to give the player the impression that the performance has stopped. It is possible to clearly convey to the player the win/fail branch (timing of decision). On the other hand, in the SP reach performance in which operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp so as to have a mode corresponding to the frame lamp, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing for deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by using different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is encouraged in the case of whether or not the decision is made.

(True or false 15)
In the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

(True or false 17)
In the child table WD15 at the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), the frame lamp is displayed while the sound corresponding to operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of encouraging operations for the player at the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

(True or false 20)
In child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to child table WD17 of SP final reach, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

(True or false 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the last specified grandchild table W26 in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the case of a loss, the first specified grandchild of the child table WD18 used in the case of rescue is determined. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on table W16, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) and even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and The subsequent relief winning notification can be shown more easily to the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 gradually moves the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending movement of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so as to turn it off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to create a rainbow colored table without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of multiple timings that are different from each other. While reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on, it is possible to enhance each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off. After the light goes out, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that the start of the re-lottery performance can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights turned off, and when the symbols are oscillating, the re-lottery effect is executed. Based on the luminance data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Re-lottery performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. It will be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. However, when the "2" symbol is promoted to the "3" symbol due to the re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB7 to tB9, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops during the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation regarding lamp control>
Next, with regard to the lamp control described above, characteristic parts that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps when winning and when losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, lamp control in the event of a loss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing). Further, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. This causes the frame lamp to blink in red in response to the effect of winning or failing (deciding timing).

After that, in the loss epilogue part via the instigation part in each of the SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white in response to a performance in which an ally character loses in a ready-to-reach performance after a win/fail decision.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W13, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a darker white color than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13 in response to the effect that the ally character is disappointed in. let

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W14, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the final 600000 msec (10 minutes ), "111" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, the lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table for switching (for eye catching), and then Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 which was also used in the previous example. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that normally corresponds to the background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before the reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case where the game moves to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the inciting part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in accordance with the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W19, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified for this. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the inciting part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, thereby causing the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance of the win/fail branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in the SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec, " 333'' is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to cause the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance such as a falling accessory.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W20, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263 will be described below.

(True or false 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the objects fall, the frame lamp is lamp controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and the achromatic color ("333'' RGB data) and the frame lamp lights up alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing an achromatic color between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing the fact that he has hit the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

(About the shaking pattern of the pattern)
Here, the manner in which the symbols swing will be explained in detail using FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the symbols swing. During the symbol fluctuation period in the above-mentioned inciting part and re-lottery part, the decorative symbols move in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(a) or in the first to third modes shown in FIG. 264(b). It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located lower than the first mode.

Moreover, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center position of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated clockwise about the center of the vertical axis so that the decorative pattern is oriented more to the left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated counterclockwise about the center of the decorative pattern as a vertical axis, so that the decorative pattern is in a position facing rightward more than in the first mode.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using 7 symbols. Moreover, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the symbols are enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Thereafter, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size from (D8) to (D9).

Thereafter, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. Thereafter, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" changes rapidly, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Similar high-speed fluctuations are repeated after (D20).

As shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect as shown in FIG. 265(B), the symbol feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery effects. be. Here, the re-lottery effects include a first re-lottery effect in which even-numbered symbols become odd-numbered symbols, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 symbols to 7 symbols. There is a performance. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1) of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, after which the symbol is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feed performance is started, there is a swinging period (t1-t2) of the decorative symbols after the end of the symbol feed period, After that, the design is finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, if the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the symbol feeding performance is started, there is no swinging period of the decorative symbol after the symbol feeding period ends, and the symbol is determined as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the symbol feeding period is constant, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the finalization of the symbol is absorbed by the button operation. . Such a relationship holds true even when the button operation is performed in any of the re-lottery performances from the first to the third re-lottery performances.

[About re-lottery effects 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, no matter at which timing the button is operated in the scene of determining the validity, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, if the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role object movement and winning epilogue part will be executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) will be executed. A pattern is drawn. Thereafter, after 5 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state facing forward as shown in (K5).

In addition, if the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K2), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 4 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols are in a state facing leftward from the front as shown in (K6). In addition, if the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K3), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and as shown in (K4). The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 3 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state where they are facing to the right from the front, as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in the position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing, After the symbol swing period, the symbol may be in a position facing to the right. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. A lottery performance is executed. Then, after (K17), a symbol feeding effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, although the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect will be executed thereafter. In the time until the predetermined timing, a time period may be provided for the symbols to absorb the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(Re-lottery performance 27)
From the time the white-out screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the multiple reaches may be the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 28)
The movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

(Re-lottery performance 29)
Among the plurality of SP reaches, there is one in which no prompting for operation such as button operation is notified at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery presentation.

[About re-lottery effects 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram when the operation is performed at an early timing after the movement promotion display is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L1) after the operation promotion display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action promotion display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, symbols are put out in the same way no matter which timing the button is operated during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance. After that, the decorative pattern moves in the same way across the whiteout, and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), if the button is operated immediately after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols are displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the symbols are displayed. is the normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a predetermined period of time, the three symbols are in a state where they face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

In addition, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L1), the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Become. In addition, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L2), the three symbols are in a state facing forward as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing right after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, the symbol is in a position facing left after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing In this case, the symbol may be in a position facing forward after the symbol oscillation period. However, even if the direction of the symbol changes depending on the operation timing during the symbol shaking period, there is a common effect after that, as shown in (J1) to (J10), which rotates and reduces the symbol after whiteout. is executed. Thereafter, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of shaking of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description has been made using odd numbered symbols, but the same effect is performed even with even numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery performance 21)
In a modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner after notification of whether or not promotion is to be performed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)) ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the valid operation period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

(Re-lottery performance 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing a whiteout as a common performance, a performance different from the previous pattern is performed in which the swinging decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is oscillated during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of presentation until the pattern stops can be adjusted. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

(Re-lottery performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swinging period, the symbol swings to the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

<Main composition and effects>
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be individually listed.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, an accessory, a movable body 32),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an incitement part) in which the validity of whether or not the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced, and a validity notification part (for example, the winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. (a win/fail notification part that notifies you of a jackpot by moving a role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a win epilogue part) that is executed after the win/fail notification and when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state. It consists of
In the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means makes it difficult to visually recognize the performance display by giving priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action over the performance display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part. state, and then performs a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body moves from the first position (e.g., the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (for example, advance position) (for example, the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
Displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and terminating the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; A display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, the decorative pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area (for example, Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as an incitement part, the character who first speaks a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the incitement part to the success/failure notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display that prompts you to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the incitement part, so that the effect display of the incitement part becomes invisible, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the inciting part become visible (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introduction image gives an impact, and since the introduction image changes to the image of the trigger button, the performance of the inciting part can be confirmed, thereby making it possible to excite the players. In addition, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled during the flow of the performance, which becomes the background display for the epilogue part until the evacuation of the accessory is completed. In addition, since the symbols are enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitles has finished in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbols and to prevent the player from mistaking it as a message for displaying the symbols. In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, subtitles are properly added to the slow-paced epilogue part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Furthermore, in the fast-paced inciting part, the content can be primarily conveyed through video switching, and auxiliary subtitles can be displayed so as not to disturb the video development. Thereby, a series of performances can be presented in a suitable manner.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second re-drawing of the plurality of types of re-lottery performances in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and in the second half part, the second symbol is displayed repeatedly. It is possible to perform a third re-lottery effect that is displayed again,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance, and the third re-lottery performance have the same performance length,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or substantially the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. Note that the images of the pattern portion including the background may be made completely the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the first symbol is displayed by changing the display mode to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it is shaking;
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
When the action is performed at a first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, when a predetermined timing has come after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance has been executed. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode;
When performing the action promotion display in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, after performing the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol changes to the third mode when the predetermined timing comes;
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, the swinging display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second symbol is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes in the second mode when
If the action is performed at the second timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the first symbol so that the first symbol assumes the third mode when
When performing the movement promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the shaking display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first symbol is displayed again in a shaking manner, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. Stop displaying one symbol in the first mode,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the display, display the scene corresponding to the scene after switching, and
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. During the evacuation, the movable body movable luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the SP first half reach performance by the movement of the accessory. Furthermore, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object may be displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the accessory movement part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the accessory is rising. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the reach of the first half of the SP may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP during the ascending of the accessory, the inciting part of the first half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of performing the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to prompt a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific action, but displays a display that encourages success or failure;
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, first video data is used,
In the second scene, second video data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. It is executed using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode through a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller;
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the performance that is being performed is made visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when the first symbol is displayed once, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first symbol,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, there is a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the displayed timing, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The performance execution means is configured to perform a transition from an epilogue part to a re-lottery part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. The first symbol is visually recognized both when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner. perform a specific display that makes it difficult, display the first symbol in a common display mode, and execute the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and thereafter, the display of the first serif subtitle is finished, and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous state is notified, and an introduction part after the notification of the propriety of being controlled in the advantageous condition. and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is in the advantageous state,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous condition is notified, and a part after the notification of the propriety or rejection. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled by the advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
when the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
when the background display is performed, switching the brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to the background display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
When a symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols starts, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. and is used to control the light emitting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , performs a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced design is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body moves, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the performance after switching to a state in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves and an effect display is performed before reaching a specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable presentation including accessories.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed production, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable object.

Specifically, an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes accessories.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode through a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
Occlusion display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller, the brightness of the effect display decreases,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shielding display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end of the screen toward the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above closes from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the production display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16), the sense of discomfort can be eliminated.

[Start 8]
After the shielding display undergoes a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and while the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed. , the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

[Start 9]
When the operation of releasing the shield display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off,
After the release operation of the shielding display is completed and one frame worth of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully opened is determined by the lighting state of the frame lamp. It can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing operation of the shielding display is started, and the closing operation ends at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It has become. Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is capable of performing a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by changing to a closed mode through a closing operation, and is made visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode. can be,
The occlusion display is executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for shielding display when performing shielding display,
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data changes when the shielding display performs the closing operation, and the brightness data is configured so that the brightness data does not change during the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until it performs the opening operation. It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed in the start part, the shielding display performs a closing action, and then the shielding display performs a releasing action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is impossible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the operation of releasing the shielded display is completed.

Specifically, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter is released. According to this, it is possible to have expectations as to which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at a timing other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the effect using the shutter described above may be performed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, the timing may be from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-association. In addition, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in the active pending display, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and the active pending display corresponds to the icon image. It may also be configured to change (for example, change from blue to green). Furthermore, a shutter effect may be performed at the timing of the development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance using the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing when the closing operation of the shielding display ends, the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the closing operation of the shielding display ends, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights up in yellow, flashes in red, flashes in white, lights in red, etc. In contrast, the brightness data changes so that the frame lamp turns on/flashes while changing its color and brightness, while the frame lamp remains at a reduced brightness from time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is fully closed. The brightness data is maintained so that it lights up in red. As a result, before the shutter closes, the lighting mode of the frame lamp enhances the performance in the start part, and when the shutter is closed, by maintaining the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the player can enjoy the content of the performance when the shutter opens. As a result, the subsequent performance in the inciting part can be shown better to the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period after the shielding display changes to the closed mode until a release operation is performed, or until the shielding display changes to the closed mode and a promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform an action. This is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and then opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the shielding display is in a closed mode and the promotion display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the brightness data that is changed, and after the promotion display is performed, the brightness data is switched again to the brightness data that is maintained.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. Then, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained.Lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, while the shutter display is in the closed mode. At the timing when the promotion display is performed, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a changing brightness data table, and the lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table. After that, after the promotion display is performed ( In the state in which the promotion display continues, lamp control may be performed again based on the brightness data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. However, they may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained, so that the player will not be able to play the next performance after the shutter display is in the open mode. can make it easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display that includes a button image and promotion characters that encourage the player to perform an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to perform an action (for example, a sound saying "Press") is output, and characters prompting the player to perform a motion (for example, "Press") are displayed. good. Further, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting a player's action. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's action, the player's motion changes depending on the sound prompting the player's motion and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display encouraging the player to more effectively perform the action corresponding to the promotion display.

[Instigation 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the propriety of being controlled to an advantageous state is announced,
It includes scenes where the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes where friendly characters receive damage.
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display switches is greater than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned inciting part, which incites the right or wrong, was updated as friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.) . In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Inciting 2]
In the introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

[Instigation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be long.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in other scenes of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

[Instigation 4]
There are scenes where the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

[Instigation 5]
The first introduction part may expand to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active role in both the first and second introduction parts,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inciting part are executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second inciting part is executed at the timing of the second half. There was a second half reach A, a SP second half reach B, and a SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

[Instigation 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active role,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active role,
In the first introduction part, the first character's dialogue sound is first output, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introduction part, the second character's dialogue sound is first output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the inciting part mentioned above, Yumu-chan's character plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of SP, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of SP. There were scenes where the characters played an active role. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

[Inciting 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed,
A scene in which a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where dialogue sounds emitted by characters are output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's actions. It is composed of

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 8]
In a scene where a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the color corresponding to the corresponding character in the previous scene is Control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than that shown in FIG. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[Inciting 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. As shown in Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), even if the character has dialogue but no subtitles, the color corresponding to the character The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Inciting 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is changed, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is configured so as not to change,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to a dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The luminance of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is not changed, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is changed.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character utters lines, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the color. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

[Instigation 11]
When the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of the scenes where the first character's dialogue sound is output and the second character's dialogue sound is output. , the serif subtitles are displayed in a certain font and at a certain position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there is a scene where each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for dialogue are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

[Instigation 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the action sound.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

[Inciting 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, movement sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the production performed in the introduction part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output along with a display corresponding to the performance performed in the introduction part, and the volumes of the various sounds are adjusted.

Specifically, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Inciting 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are outputted in a manner that overlaps with each other, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

[Instigation 15]
When the screen is viewed from the front, if the output of the dialogue sound of the first character who is far away overlaps with the output of the action sound of the second character who is closer, the volume of the dialogue sound will be higher than the volume of the action sound. The volume has been adjusted so that it becomes louder.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character whose sense of distance to the player is far overlaps with the physical sound from which the player's sense of distance is closer, the sound is adjusted so that the dialogue sound is heard louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, abandoning reality, so that the content of the performance can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Instigation 16]
The volume of dialogue sound for which subtitles are not displayed differs between when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are not displayed, and when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are displayed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound used to display subtitles is louder than that of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a difference between the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound does not have subtitles. When there are subtitles, the sound is adjusted to be louder by lowering the volume of SP Reach's BGM. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[Inciting 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part, thereby controlling the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, by controlling the lamp to vary the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In a second scene in the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While blinking in white, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be made two or three times by changing the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 using the lamp control between multiple different timings. Can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Inciting 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach. , instead of preparing separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W3, reducing the amount of data used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. At the same time, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be varied. Good too.

[Inciting 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific brightness data table,
In the first scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a specific brightness data table,
The specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification effect and the specific brightness data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification effect are a common brightness data table,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is configured such that the total time for using each of the plurality of luminance data becomes the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Inciting 21]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts while the first dialogue subtitle is displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. Then,
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed text with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

[Instigation 22]
In an exciting scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When one character's dialogue sound is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and then when the other character's dialogue sound is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the part where the first subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and then when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the first subtitle is displayed. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

[Inciting 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, and at least one of them has a fade effect, they are not output,
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so that they overlap, and a fade effect is added. It will not be output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

[Inciting 24]
In an advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When switching from displaying the first subtitle to displaying the second subtitle in lyrics display, no fade effect is applied to the display of any subtitle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. Subtitles (lyrics) are then displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are continuously displayed, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood from the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, it is easy to understand the timing of the change. In addition, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without adding a fade effect. According to this, the work of adding a fade effect can be omitted during the jackpot round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

[Instigation 25]
In both the introduction part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sounds may overlap,
The proportion of dialogue sounds that overlap is higher in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the timing of subtitle display may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than that in the provocation part. This is because the direction in the inciting part progresses quickly, and the direction in the epilogue part does not progress as quickly as in the inciting part. As a result, the provocation part is displayed at a higher rate than the epilogue part when the subtitles overlap. In such a case, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable when switching between subtitles.

[Inciting 26]
Even in certain scenes where subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when subtitles are displayed or when the subtitles disappear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

[Inciting 27]
The display of the first subtitle without a fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be swapped,
It may be possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this may create a sense of discomfort if long dialogue sounds or fast-paced dialogue sounds are output. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introduction part, a promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. . According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

[True or false 1]
In the success/failure reporting part,
The player is informed as to whether or not the game is controlled to be advantageous;
A promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
It is executed between the introduction part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

[True or false 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introductory display of the promotion display while the development display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the development display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the development display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the subtitles corresponding to the operating means are displayed. Due to the screen, the performance that was being performed is no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

[True or false 3]
The expanded display is performed on the back side of the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The performance is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

[True or false 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail moves slightly every time the image of Bakuchu changes. was. In this way, the performance may be performed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include scene changes and character movements, rather than just the movement of the tail. According to this, it is possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[True or false 5]
When the expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed, the expansion display progresses more slowly than before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed is slower than the performance that was being executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the promotion display for operating the operating means, and it is possible to maintain a balance between the promotion display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the promotion display is being displayed may progress at a slower speed than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is being displayed. According to this, the speed of progress of the performance can be made different between when the promotion display is being displayed and when the introduction image is being displayed.

[True or false 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) described above is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

[True or false 7]
The introduction display is performed after the output of the dialogue sound that was being displayed while the expansion display was being performed before the promotion display is performed is finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[True or false 8]
The introduction part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success/failure notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data,
During the slow motion period, an effect is added to one piece of image data to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. Also, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the effect executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. It is executed using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

[True or false 9]
There is a production that includes an introduction part where friendly characters and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introduction part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed alternate.
It is possible to move to the final part by performing an action by the player while the promotion display is being displayed during a predetermined period.
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed gradually increases, and the promotion display is performed after the speed becomes the fastest.
Even in the depiction of scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed, each of the enemies and allies is reproduced in one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

[True or false 10]
The above-described predetermined period in which the scenes in which allies are displayed and the scenes in which enemies are displayed are also applied to scenes in which the reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period effect in (r48) may be performed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP second half reach and SP final reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably perform the performance even at the timing when the SP first half reach develops.

[True or false 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or false 12]
During the slow motion period, a portion of the character changes.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), when making it appear that the character's hair and clothes gradually move from multiple images, the movement of the hair and clothes is the same as that of periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow motion motion in order to make the motion appear smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, the movement does not become jerky even if the number of images used is reduced, and it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement while reducing the amount of data. can.

[True or false 13]
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to encourage a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before moving from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a promotion display that prompts a specific action, but displays a display that encourages correctness or disapproval.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp in a mode corresponding to the above, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is promoted in the case of a judgment or failure.

[True or false 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display changes in the following order: a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is valid or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39) described above, the image in which the two characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and the timing of (i39) is Now, one image is displayed while remaining still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if you hit the jackpot, the winning epilogue part will be shown, and if you lose, the losing epilogue part will be shown. During the period in which one image is displayed stationary for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused and used, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity and suitably stimulate the scene of determination of validity. In addition, during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) than shown in FIGS. 95 (i36) to 96 (i39) are displayed. May be used.

[True or false 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined brightness data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, there is no operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. . Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

[True or false 16]
When a promotion display is performed, the display changes in the order of a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of a moving image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether it is correct or not. do.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introduction image is such that the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. be. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is successful or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

[True or false 17]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when promoting display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to reach are output. In this state, the frame lamp will be switched one after another, such as flashing white, lighting red, and flashing red, thereby making it possible to enhance the effect of promoting operations for the player at the winning/failing branch (deciding timing).

[True or false 18]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display indicating that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scenes shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

[True or false 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set lower in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the losing epilogue part via the inciting parts in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data in the inciting part ( While the RGB data) is "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the lose epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss in each of SP first half reaches A and B and SP second half reaches A and B, it is possible to use the white lighting at the win/fail branch to maintain the same color while lighting the frame lamp darker in white. Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss. In addition, when moving to the losing epilogue part via the inciting part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the inciting part includes "D00", but the first brightness in the losing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". Thereby, when there is a loss in the SP final reach, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably informed of the loss.

[True or false 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect, and the first notification effect to notify that the control is to be in the advantageous state is to notify whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state. It is composed of an introductory part until it is controlled, and an epilogue part in which it is announced that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The first notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part that informs you of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. Consisting of parts,
The second notification effect that notifies the user that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part in which it is announced whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a part that announces that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state. It consists of an epilogue part and an epilogue part.
The second notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part that informs you of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. Consisting of parts,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a brightness data table composed of brightness data according to time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The brightness data table includes a first notification effect brightness data table, a second notification effect brightness data table, and a specific brightness data table,
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table and a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the introduction part of the second notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table and a second notification effect brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the first notification effect to notify that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a third upper table and a specific brightness data table,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a fourth upper table and a specific brightness data table,
A specific brightness data table used in an epilogue part in a first notification performance that notifies that the control will not be in the advantageous state, and a specific brightness data table that is used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance that notifies that the control is not in the advantageous state. is a common brightness data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for the first time,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage location data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are also child tables of SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of a loss based on the grandchild table W14. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

[True or false 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state is as follows:
a first pattern including an introduction part in which it is reported whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state; and a first epilogue part in which it is reported that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
An introduction part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the control is not in the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is executed in the advantageous state. a second pattern including a relief notification part in which it is notified that the control will be performed;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
In the relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set higher in brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state, an image of the situation where it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state is displayed, and a decorative pattern notifies the user of the decision that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed, and the image is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss pattern is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of loss, the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means displays the decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so that it becomes clearer in stages, and displays the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so that it becomes darker in stages, Displaying a display notifying that the control is not carried out in the advantageous state;
The number of stages in which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is displayed in a darker manner is greater than the number of stages in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a clearer manner.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 189, in the loss epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of loss from 100% to 0% transparency is as follows: This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background is in 8 steps from (X11) to (X18), while the fade-in of the middle design is in 6 steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of a loss depends on the relationship between the two. can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Loss 4]
Blacking out of the image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state is performed earlier than fading in of the middle design of the decorative design.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background blacks out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change,
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled in an advantageous state for blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed at the time of the loss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed at the time of the blackout does not change. According to this, blackout can be made to look suitable by starting blackout when the image remains unchanged. Note that switching images includes switching the picture on the screen, switching the angle of the video, and switching the displayed scene itself. In addition, the expression "no change in the image" includes that the image is the same still image, that the angle of the image does not change even if it is a moving image, and that even if the image is moving, only part of the image moves slightly.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state blacks out, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fades in. As a result, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, and the 1 required for blackout. The period in which the transmittance of each image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period,
During a predetermined period, the pattern itself oscillates for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium symbol image changes from a state of 100% transmittance to a state of 0% transmittance, and longer than a period during which switching display is performed.

Specifically, at the time of a loss, the background blacked out and the medium symbol faded in, resulting in a medium symbol with a transmittance of 0%, as shown in (X18) to (X20). A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

[Lose 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information regarding the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWER FULII" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. The image will be displayed. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in an advantageous state is an introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and an introductory part that is carried out after the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state. a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the state is controlled;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be in an advantageous state is the introduction part until the notification is made as to whether or not the control will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the introductory part that is carried out after the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which it is announced that it is not controlled by
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that it is not controlled to an advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production,
When the switching display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the lighting means for production is controlled;
When a symbol is stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the lighting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. It is used to control the light emitting means for production.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). Further, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is a loop that references brightness data until the change conditions are met.
In the introduction part, the brightness data corresponding to the background is not used, but the brightness data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table will respond to changes such as SP reach when certain change conditions are met, such as when SP reach develops. After that, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach brightness data table. In this case, while the SP reach effect is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, switching of brightness data in the background brightness data table will stop over time. Continue without any trouble. In addition, lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, and from then on, the error brightness Lamp control is performed based on the data table. In this case, in the error state, switching of the luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table. Thereby, a series of effects to be executed can be shown more suitably.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part, the brightness data table corresponding to the background will be used even if a pattern confirmation command is received, and after that, even if a customer waiting command is received when there is no hold. The brightness data table corresponding to the background continues to be used.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. It is used as According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be used continuously, so it is possible to show the effect using the lamp without any discomfort, and it is possible to show a series of effects suitably. Can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the special pattern's light emitting means stops,
By receiving the symbol confirmation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is switched from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers a performance in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the light emitting means of the special figure will blink,
By receiving the next variation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is a trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loss 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled by the advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means includes:
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display,
Controlling the light emitting means by continuously using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the background display is performed;
Controlling the light emitting means by continuously using the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display when the stop display of the symbol is performed;
When the variable display of symbols is started, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the variable display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from (X40) where six ally characters are disappointed to (X41) where the background image is blacked out. . The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

[Loss 14]
The final brightness data is lights-off data, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part does not include brightness data that maintains lights-off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the pattern is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table switches to the brightness data table for the background, making it easier to recognize that the customer has lost.

[Loss 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect for notifying that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a first part in which it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state. Consisting of 1 epilogue part,
The notification effect that notifies you that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until you are notified of whether or not you will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue in which you will be notified that you will not be controlled to the advantageous state. It is composed of parts and
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the advantageous state is not controlled;
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
The light emission control means includes:
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display,
Switching the brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the background display,
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher than the final brightness data (lights off) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). It has become. According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to be higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is higher than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Accessory action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Accessory action 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP, in the production where the accessory falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the chromatic color of the rainbow and , achromatic color (RGB data of "333") and the frame lamp are lit alternately. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, in a performance in which an ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without intervening achromatic colors, indicating that a jackpot has been won. It is possible to perform a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a blessing part after the decision to control the advantageous state is announced, and there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the ally character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the same as the introduction part. There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the above-mentioned win epilogue part is a part that does not shift in the event of a loss, and is a part that includes scenes where the enemy character is at a disadvantage and where the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display changes in the performance is smaller than in the promotion part. According to this, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance in each part, and it is possible to suitably show the flow of a series of performances.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the characters' lines is higher than at the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 175, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach, which is the incitement part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shorter, so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching. Thereby, a suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue in the epilogue part. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, if dialogue sounds are output in a scene where an enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the inciting part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There is a first introduction part and a second introduction part, and each has a different development and number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the character's dialogue sound output is different from that in the introduction part. This is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialogue sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reaches, which are inciting parts, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the feeling of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a larger number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is displayed,
The movable body moves according to an evacuation pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the evacuation pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, it is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to its initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinguishing.

Specifically, when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120 adjusts the role based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

[Epilogue 10]
The change is suggested by BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of epilogue display.

Specifically, BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue being started. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue being started. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and sound effects suggesting the change are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using BGM and sound effects.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in a situation where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is display subtitles while outputting. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output and generated at the timing of the evacuation of the movable object,
When the movable body is completely retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the accessory returns to its initial position, dialogue sounds may be output and subtitles may be displayed in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be clearly recognized and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s6) to 135 (s8) described above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the symbol display is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from covering the decorative pattern and from causing the subtitle display to be mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the pattern. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the final symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the presentation of the symbols is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols and images such as characters displayed as the background are It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decorative pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decorative pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that is played before the drawing of the symbols begins is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added while standing still.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the display is finished, a display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, a dialogue subtitle is displayed for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance changes from the scene before the success/failure decision in the incitement part to the winning epilogue part by moving the accessory. Furthermore, as the accessory falls, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to a screen corresponding to the SP final reach hit epilogue part. Further, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the accessory to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the accessory changes to its initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), no dialogue sound is output. . Thereafter, in a state in which the movement of the accessory to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is completed (s4), dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the accessory is rising, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the return operation to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, the first scene displays dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters,
In the epilogue part, a second scene in which a final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then, after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area; There is,
A switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitles ends in the second scene, while a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitles ends in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends. Specifically, during the symbol shaking period in which the display of the decorative symbols is finished and the symbols are shaking up and down, the small symbols may also be made to swing up and down with the same movement as the decorative symbols. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
When drawing out symbols in the re-lottery part, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is attached to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not obstructed by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed when the symbols are produced in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, and to make it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-drawing part, the small symbols are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and in conjunction with the transition to the re-drawing part, the small symbols change again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when displaying a pattern, even if both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are once displayed in a state where the pattern is aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-lottery part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols may change again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be synchronized and suitably displayed.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The epilogue part is
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In a second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the first scene of the epilogue part, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and at a specific timing, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is changed to a luminance data table for making a rainbow light emission mode. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for switching and rainbow light emitting mode;
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display, and rainbow light is emitted from the brightness data table for enlarged display at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table to set the mode;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common brightness data table. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of a brightness data table for making a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used during the win notification presentation and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of multiple different timings. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, and to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the re-lottery result is announced.
The light emission control means includes:
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene, and at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene is controlled. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for creating a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and the re-lottery is performed at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative symbol. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode from a brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table for enlarged display of a result notification scene, and storage destination data of a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then, grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge side of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, a reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen. (at the upper left corner of the screen) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the reduced decorative pattern allows the player to recognize that a jackpot display result has been obtained.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the edge of the display area,
In relation to the timing at which the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state where the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Enlarge the display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the misunderstanding that some kind of message is being shown when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introduction part, a decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second symbol that displays the first symbol again in the second half part after displaying the first symbol in the first half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 2]
When the image corresponding to the background that temporarily stops the arrangement of decorative symbols is displayed, the light emitting means turns off, and when moving to the re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, Once the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that it can be clearly communicated to the player that the re-lottery performance will start based on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the arrangement of decorative symbols,
When temporarily stopped, the decorative patterns are displayed shaking with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are regenerated. Switch to one for lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image of concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

[Re-lottery performance 4]
At the start of symbol feeding, the decorative symbols that have been displayed since the epilogue are reduced.
After reducing the size, the pattern feed starts.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 5]
The symbol feeding starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols become uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the following order: movement promotion display, movement acceptance, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery performance, the symbols are moved by the reduced size decorative symbols. is executed, and a button operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

[Re-lottery performance 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the control will be in the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect in which a replacement display is performed in the first half of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half. is executable,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half until the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half to the display of the first symbol in the second half,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 8]
The pattern feeding according to a predetermined pattern is to send the temporarily stopped symbol to the next symbol in order, and after the last symbol is sent, return to the temporarily stopped symbol again, and then move to the next symbol in order. It is a performance that seems to send to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". , again, all the decorative patterns are sent in order, ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', ``1''. In this way, since the numbers of the decorative designs are sent in order, it is possible to clearly see the flow of a series of effects.

[Re-lottery performance 9]
While the symbols are being fed in a predetermined pattern, all of the sent decorative symbols are displayed at the same resolution as when the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, the "2" symbol with 0% transparency, the "2" symbol with 50% transparency, the "3" symbol with 0% transparency, the "3" symbol with 50% transparency, and the "3" symbol with 50% transparency. The symbols change, such as a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0% and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the symbols can be clearly displayed with low transparency during the symbol feeding performance, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of symbol is being sent.

[Re-lottery performance 10]
After symbol feeding is started, the display time of each of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is the same until notification of whether or not to promote is made.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". However, each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 11]
The motion promotion display is performed during symbol feeding,
The motion promotion display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol feeding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding performance, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. Note that a part of the promotion display may partially overlap with a decorative pattern during the pattern feeding performance.

[Re-lottery performance 12]
The movement promotion display is started during symbol feeding, and is started during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding effect. will be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

[Re-lottery performance 13]
When symbol feeding starts from the symbol "1", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When symbol feeding is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, at the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until it is announced whether or not it is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a notification part where it is notified whether it is correct or not, and a notification part that is after the notification that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, a second re-lottery effect that performs the replacement display in the first half of multiple types of re-lottery effects and displays the first symbol again in the second half. is executable,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, a repeated display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the third re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance have the same performance length,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 15]
The re-lottery effect displays a combination of display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, and reproduces each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery performance, the length of the performance is common between each re-lottery performance, and only the type of symbol being sent and the symbol issued in each re-lottery performance are the same. The lottery performance is different.

Specifically, in the lottery performance, there is a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed. Common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) or a pattern that displays an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols) after displaying an odd number of symbols (for example, 7 symbols). In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or almost the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the symbol is displayed to when it is enlarged and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned pattern display, a series of effects is performed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then displayed in its normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, by enlarging and reducing the symbols, it is possible to suitably display a series of symbols.

[Re-lottery performance 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern arrangement before the re-lottery is executed and when notifying whether or not the decorative pattern arrangement will be promoted in the notification part,
By combining the common display data and display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a display of a plurality of types of pattern placement is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of symbol presentation effects may be executed using the common symbol presentation data and a combination of a plurality of decorative patterns. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity while presenting a suitable design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used in the data for the symbol presentation performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the symbol presentation performance in the re-lottery presentation.

[Re-lottery performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in putting out symbols is the same when the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when notification is given that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is not promoted in the re-lottery.

Specifically, the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part has the same lamp control as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. Grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery performance 20]
In the event that you are promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is different between when the arrangement of decorative symbols temporarily stops before the re-lottery is executed and when the notification that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is carried out.
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is more intense when notification that the arrangement of decorative symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is performed than when the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. , the frame lamp lights up, but when the "2" symbol is promoted and replaced with the "3" symbol by re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, once the "2" symbol is lit in the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting that occurs when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
After the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period is reached, the first symbol will be shaken by changing the display mode of the first symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. performs a shaking display that displays the first symbol as if it were
After the second symbol is displayed in the second half part until the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is swayed by changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, second mode, and third mode. Performs a shaking display that displays the second symbol as if it were
The first aspect is an aspect in which the symbols are easier for the player to visually recognize than either the second aspect or the third aspect,
The performance execution means are
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to display an action promotion display that encourages the player to take action.
If the action is performed at the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second Displaying the second symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
When the action promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the predetermined timing will be displayed after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second symbol in a oscillating manner while maintaining the oscillating speed of the oscillating display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode when
When the movement promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the second symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the second symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol. stop display,
If the action is performed at the first timing while performing the action promotion display in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in the second mode,
If the action is performed at the second timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first Displaying the first symbol in a shaking display while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the symbol is in a third mode,
When the movement promotion display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, a display that makes it difficult to see the shaking display of the first symbol from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the movement is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display again, and then, when the symbol confirmation period comes, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol. stop display,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 22]
When the operation is performed at the first timing of the valid period of the operation, after the promotion or not is announced, the decorative pattern will be displayed flickering until the predetermined timing of the change comes.
When the action is performed at the second timing earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action will be performed at the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change is reached after the promotion or not is announced. Decorative patterns will be displayed flickering in proportion to the speed of the game, and the time will be absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying (FIG. 267 (L3) example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while flashing in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern is performed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is shaken during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of the presentation until the symbol stops is changed. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

[Re-lottery performance 24]
In the swaying display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position,
In the shaking display, the decorative patterns are displayed in the following order: 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. The predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative symbols are always displayed swinging in the order of the second position, first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings toward the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings toward the front from (J13) to (J14). changes to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery performance 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to cause the light emitting means to emit rainbow light at the start of a predetermined effect.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

[Re-lottery performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
In the epilogue part, when displaying the first symbol, the display mode of the first symbol is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the first symbol appears to be shaking. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. There are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing, and there are times when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The production execution means performs a re-drawing from the epilogue part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and when moving from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. Both when transitioning to the part and when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode, perform a specific display that makes the first symbol difficult to see, Displaying the first symbol in a common display mode and executing the first re-lottery performance or the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

[Re-lottery performance 27]
The re-lottery effect is the same no matter which one of the multiple introduction parts wins.

Specifically, from the time the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed, any of the plurality of reaches may be the same. According to this, the data capacity of the performance data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement in which the decorative pattern was once swayed and displayed before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

[Re-lottery performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state and is not notified due to the operation of the operating means,
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is determined that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no shake in the display, but the same re-lottery effect is performed as in the reach where the length is off.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reaches include those for which no promotion of operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery performance 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery performance after the shaking display of the decorative pattern at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery performance.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Below, some terms used in this specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

"Fluctuation" of symbols includes the updated display of multiple types of symbols, such as multiple types of special symbols (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols, and Scroll display, transformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, lighting/blinking/turning off of lamps (fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, etc.) Including.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

A "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which a decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced symbols are stopped and displayed, the same numerical symbols as the decorative symbols are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols at the edge of the screen.

The "small design" includes a design corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design that is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative design. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction.

"Design confirmation" means that the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, and decorative symbols, etc., which were fluctuating, stop, and finally the special symbol game This includes determining the design in . For example, the state in which the fluctuations of the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbols that fluctuate in the right decorative symbol display area 5R have stopped. include.

In the "symbol confirmation period", the display result is fixed by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, decorative symbols, etc. Including period. For example, the decorative patterns that change in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns that change in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns that change in the right decorative pattern display area 5R stop and are displayed. Includes a state in which the results are displayed definitively.

"Reach" means that when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination, the variable display of the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed continues to be displayed. For example, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern "2" is stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the inside decorative pattern display area 5C This includes a state in which the variable display of decorative patterns is still continuing.

"Lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to the brightness data corresponding to turning off the light, such as the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emission) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), such as "1" or "2". It may include a state where the value is close to "0". Note that a state where the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to "0", such as "1" or "2", is the brightness data corresponding to turning off the lamp, as " It may also be included in "lights on" or "slightly off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off, and the value of the brightness data is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is greater than or equal to the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to "lights out" described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and when the lamp is "on" and "off". This includes repeating the process over time. Furthermore, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "lighting up" and "substantially extinguishing" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, if the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is darkest), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the brightness data used for this is "F", lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest brightness (the lamp is brightest). As mentioned above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp becomes the largest. Note that the term "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the three light emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light due to the current applied to one light emitting element, thereby lighting up the LEDs in various colors. Note that the "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current; In the case of an LED consisting of only red light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

Among the lamp lighting colors, "rainbow colors" (seven colors) include colors made up of seven types of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the above-mentioned colors, but may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 256. In addition, the lighting mode using rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data.

The "colors corresponding to characters" include colors predetermined for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for the character Yumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the "emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the character Yumu-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. (emission color), the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakushu (emission color), etc.

The "line sounds" include sounds corresponding to the words that are output in synchronization with the timing at which the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utter the words. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to words uttered by the characters are outputted in accordance with images of characters appearing in the performance.

"Serif subtitles" include characters corresponding to the serif sounds displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sounds are output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds produced by the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) expressing the motion of the object is outputted in accordance with the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the performance.

The "character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, this includes the action of Yumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

The "re-lottery effect" is a temporary jackpot symbol that does not result in a variable probability jackpot in the variable display of decorative symbols (for example, an even number symbol such as a "2" symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol becomes a variable probability jackpot. It includes an effect that is executed before the symbol is determined in order to encourage whether or not the symbol will be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as a "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a performance included in the ``re-lottery performance'' and includes a display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, so that the decorative pattern is switched one after another. In this embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the "2" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, until the "2" or "3" symbol finally stops. include.

"Repeated display" refers to repeating the same display, and refers to repeating display using the same animation. This is a performance included in the "re-lottery performance" and includes a display in which a temporarily stopped decorative pattern is repeatedly displayed with the same animation. As an example, the "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" symbol changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced by other symbols, and finally the "7" symbol stops.

The "shaking display" is to display a decorative pattern while shaking it, indicating that the fluctuation is not finished but is in progress.

"Stop display" means to display the decorative pattern in a stationary state without moving it, and indicates that the variation has ended.

"Swinging speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position when it is displayed swinging.

The "first aspect of the design," the "second aspect of the design," and the "third aspect of the design" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative design. For example, when displaying a decorative pattern swinging up and down, if the first aspect is the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging in the front-back direction, when the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare performance" is a performance that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state to notify that the jackpot game state has entered.

"Advancement of a movable object (accessory object)" is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from its initial position. The position at the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating" a movable object (accessory object) is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retracted position.

"Effect display for movable body movement" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the action of the accessory stand out in accordance with the action of the accessory when the reach develops in the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. That is, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to the groups that make up the production, and parts are larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided by role.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in display, particularly a change in the displayed background, characters, etc.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catch display)" is an effect that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal gaming. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

"Occupation display (shutter display)" means that the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image that was displayed before the occlusion display is displayed. This is a display that shields the In the shielding display, the image may be shielded by displaying something other than the shutter.

"The luminance data is switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp changes. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the storyline of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"The luminance data is not switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0, and the luminance data continues to be used. Since the brightness data does not change, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. Since the light emitting mode of the lamp is constant, it gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is not updated and has stopped.

"Video data" is data for displaying a video including animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to give the illusion of movement. The video data may be stored after being compressed.

"First video data" is video data that is created using many images in order to make a character move among the video data.

"Second video data" is video data that is created using a small number of images in order to make the character move among the video data.

"Movement of a specific character" refers to a motion corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

"Blackout" is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“Whiteout” is an effect in which a white image is displayed in the display area (whiteout) in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decorative pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image entirely on the screen (whiteout), the decorative pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, images showing dialogue are gradually displayed from a state in which a room background is displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually lowering the transparency of the image showing the dialogue and displaying it. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 100% transparency, the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second by decreasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds. Further, "fade out" is the opposite of "fade in", and means that a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping the background image gradually changes to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state in which an image showing lines is displayed on the room background, the image showing lines is gradually hidden. Gradually hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the lines. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with a transparency of 0%, by increasing the transparency by 10% every 0.1 seconds, the dialogue image becomes hidden after 1 second. Furthermore, the fade effect includes a cross-fade in which images are replaced by fading in and fading out at the same time.

<Description of invention using multiple configurations>
An invention that is equipped with the plurality of features described above and has a particularly synergistic effect will be described below. The plurality of feature points may be feature points within the same part or may be feature points in different parts.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
Scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, but the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed,
It is composed of a specific scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by the character and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 170, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. It becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the sound corresponds to the scene after switching. Output sound.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 171, Figure 172
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being impaired. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that will be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to an epilogue part is output. Output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 173, Figure 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being impaired. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the lighting condition of the frame lamp changes the winning status. It is possible to convey information to players in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode can be created. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By using the flash mode to intuitively notify the player that they have won, and then using the smooth mode to give a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in a favorable manner. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action, and the notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the blessings in the epilogue part can be easily understood. As a result, it becomes possible to show the flow of a series of performances in a better manner.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are replaced and displayed, making it easier for players. At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the pattern stops (a pattern confirmation command is sent) By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without changing the brightness data table even during timing), the light emission mode changes during the short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance. By preventing players from being dissatisfied with flickering caused by switching the light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 172, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, by the time the character object completes the return movement to the initial position, the scene after the change By switching to a corresponding background display, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that will be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, the epilogue part can be handled by the time the character completes the return movement to the initial position. By switching to background display, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 213, Figure 214, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss Since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the epilogue part, it is possible to tell the player that he has won in an easy-to-understand manner by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 213, Figure 214, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, it is possible to emphasize the effect by changing the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, it is possible to emphasize the effect by changing the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table is configured to alternately repeat chromatic colors and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then there is no brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops. By using a configuration that uses chromatic colors sequentially without intervening colors, a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner intuitively conveys to the player that the player has won by using a flash mode, and after that, by using a smooth mode. By giving a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the success/failure notification to the epilogue, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances that will be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 175, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, the display ratio of dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds is higher in the epilogue part than in the introduction part. This design makes it easier to understand what the characters are saying, increases the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, makes it easier to see the flow of the series of performances being executed. It becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery effect, the subtitles are replaced by the re-lottery effect ( By displaying all the symbols that have the possibility of being promoted, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the player, and at the specific timing of the re-drawing part (timing after the symbols are enlarged). , Switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then continue to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the brightness data table even at the timing when the pattern stops (timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By preventing players from getting dissatisfied with flickering caused by switching the light emitting mode during the short period when the symbol is stopped or causing dissatisfaction with flickering caused by switching the light emitting pattern, the epilogue part, replay, etc. The lottery part can be shown suitably, and as a result, the flow of a series of effects to be executed can be shown better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , terminates the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for movable body movement during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission unit when the movable body advances from the second position. In the middle of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. controlling the light emitting means;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means. , it is notified that the control will be in an advantageous state,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement at the time of notification of success or failure when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , When the relevant/non-applicable body is notified, the effect display for moving the movable body is ended, the display corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed. conduct,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body advances to the second position using a brightness data table for movable body movement at the time of notification of success or failure, and controls the light emission means when the movable body advances from the second position. While retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for movable body movement at the time of notification of success or failure is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to turn on the light emitting means. control,
The sound output means outputs a sound for movable body movement at the time of notification of success/failure when the movable body advances to the second position, and when the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. outputs the sound corresponding to the epilogue part.
[Drawings] Figures 171 to 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the introduction part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying a scene change,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the switched scene, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the switched scene;
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 261, 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss. This can be clearly communicated to the player. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , terminates the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for movable body movement during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission unit when the movable body advances from the second position. In the middle of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. controlling the light emitting means;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means. , it is notified that the control will be in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success/failure;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success or failure is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed is smooth. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the role object to notify the hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so that it emits light in a flash mode. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story develops, uses chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, thereby creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By doing so, the player is intuitively informed that they have won using the flash mode, and then the smooth mode gives a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, making the flow from the win notification to the epilogue suitably visible. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before completing the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being impaired. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed is smooth. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the epilogue part As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, the player At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the symbol is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the symbol stops (when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the brightness data table even at the timing when the pattern is stopped, the light emission mode changes during the short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance. By preventing players from being dissatisfied with the flickering caused by switching the light emission, it is possible to present the epilogue part and the re-drawing part in a suitable manner, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be improved. It becomes possible to show it.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the first epilogue part, it is reported that the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means to be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for body movement, displaying a display corresponding to the first epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. 1 Output the sound corresponding to the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the lighting condition of the frame lamp changes the winning status. It is possible to convey information to players in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode can be created. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By using the flash mode to intuitively notify the player that they have won, and then using the smooth mode to give a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in a favorable manner. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. High [Drawing] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the blessings in the epilogue part can be easily understood. As a result, it becomes possible to show the flow of a series of performances in a better manner.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
A performance execution means,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. [Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are replaced and displayed, making it easier for players. At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the pattern stops (a pattern confirmation command is sent) By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the brightness data table even during timing), the light emission mode changes during the short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance. By preventing dissatisfaction to the players due to flickering caused by switching of light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the first epilogue part, it is reported that the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means to be controlled in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for movable body movement, and then from the brightness data table for movable body movement. switching to a brightness data table corresponding to a first epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used. ,
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings], Figures 261 to 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object used when moving the accessory to notify a hit is configured to alternately repeat chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so it can be used as a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. , by using a flash mode to intuitively notify the player that they have won, and then using a smooth mode to give a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the first epilogue part of the first notification performance is the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introduction part of the first notification performance. higher than
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the first epilogue part in the second notification performance is the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introduction part of the second notification performance. higher than
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the epilogue part has a sense of celebration. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and It is composed of a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the first epilogue part,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next brightness data.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are replaced and displayed, thereby making it easier for players. At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the symbol is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the symbol stops (when the symbol confirmation command is sent) ), without switching the brightness data table, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, the light emitting mode changes during the short period when the pattern is stopped, resulting in poor appearance and the lack of light emitting. By preventing players from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by switching, the epilogue part and re-drawing part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. It becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then using a smooth manner to give a sense of congratulations without overemphasizing it, the flow from the notification of success to the epilogue can be shown in a favorable manner. By designing the dialogue subtitle display ratio to be higher than that of the dialogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, , it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of performances to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then using a smooth manner to give a sense of congratulations without overemphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in a good manner. , When performing a re-lottery performance, by displaying all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, players can be suitably stimulated, and the re-lottery part At a specific timing (timing after the symbol is enlarged), switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also switch the brightness data table when the symbol stops (timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in poor visual appearance and flickering caused by the switching of light emitting, which may cause problems for players. By preventing dissatisfaction with the performance, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown suitably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. high,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 175 to 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by making the dialogue subtitle display ratio higher than that of the dialogue sound, it becomes easier to understand what the characters are saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. , In the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, players can be suitably stimulated. At the specific timing of the re-drawing part (timing after the symbol is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also at the timing when the symbol stops (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without changing the brightness data table, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the pattern is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or the light emitting switching. By preventing players from being dissatisfied due to flickering, the epilogue part and re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. .

[SP reach start to design confirmation (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a first scene in which dialogue sounds uttered by the character and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the first scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
In the introduction part, there is a second scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the second scene, the display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle ends and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles. It becomes possible to show the flow of the performance better.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
Scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, but the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed,
A specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figures 178 to 181, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the game is stimulated to the point of notification of winning or losing, thereby increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed in an overlapping manner, the subtitles can change due to the fade effect. By making it easier to understand, the switching of subtitles can be made easier to understand, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are being executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. In addition, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles, and as a result, the change in subtitles becomes easier to understand. It becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of performances.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part [Drawing] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 178 to Figure 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles. It becomes possible to show the flow of the performance better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. In addition, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles, and as a result, the series of performances that are performed This makes it possible to better show the flow of the flow.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then giving the player a sense of congratulation without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue. Even when the subtitles are displayed, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being executed. It becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds is higher, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying, increasing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and further Even when subtitles are displayed overlapping, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles. It is possible to make it look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 176 to 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. When performing a re-lottery performance, by displaying all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the players, and the re-lottery performance At the specific timing of the part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also change the brightness data table when the pattern stops (timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in poor appearance, and flickering caused by the switching of light emitting, which may cause problems in the game. By preventing dissatisfaction among users, it is possible to present the epilogue part and the re-drawing part in a suitable manner.Furthermore, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, changes in the subtitles can be easily understood due to the fade effect. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. In addition, when the image of the winning epilogue part is playing, by positioning the reduced symbol at the edge of the screen, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the display of the symbols, thereby emphasizing the jackpot symbols and showing them to the player. This allows the epilogue part to be shown appropriately. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 183, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced symbols can be placed on the edge of the screen. By positioning it, it does not disturb the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. However, by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the appearance of the symbols, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be suitably shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed is smooth. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is playing, by positioning the reduced symbol at the edge of the screen, it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the development of the image of the winning epilogue part ends. When placing symbols, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the display of the symbols, thereby emphasizing the jackpot symbols and making it easier for players to see. The epilogue part can be shown suitably. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, when the image of the winning epilogue part is playing, by positioning the reduced symbol at the edge of the screen, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the display of the symbols, thereby emphasizing the jackpot symbols and showing them to the player. This allows the epilogue part to be shown appropriately. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means is
In the first epilogue part, a decorative pattern is displayed on the edge side of the display area, and a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part ends,
Enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern using the center of the display area at a timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In the first epilogue part, when a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and then a decorative pattern is displayed. When an enlarged display is performed using the center of the area, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to display the light emitting means. control,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. In addition, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbol is emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols. This allows the epilogue part to be shown appropriately. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, when a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and then a decorative pattern is displayed using the center of the display area. When an enlarged display is performed, switching from a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then using a smooth manner to give a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in a good manner, and furthermore, the winning epilogue part. When the image is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbols are released, it is placed at the edge of the screen. By enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the center of the screen and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the appearance of the symbols, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part ideal. can be shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by making the dialogue subtitle display ratio higher than that of the dialogue sound, it becomes easier to understand what the characters are saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. , When the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbol is put out. , by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, it is possible to emphasize the jackpot symbols and show them to the player; The epilogue part can be shown suitably. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. control,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. When performing a re-lottery performance, by displaying all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, players can be suitably stimulated, and the re-lottery performance At the specific timing of the part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also change the brightness data table when the pattern stops (timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in poor appearance, and flickering caused by the switching of light emitting, which may cause problems in the game. By preventing dissatisfaction of the players, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown in a suitable manner, and furthermore, when the winning epilogue part video is being played, the reduced symbols can be positioned at the edge of the screen. When the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is displayed without disturbing the image of the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. By switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the payout, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By creating an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. Even when subtitles are displayed, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles.Furthermore, when the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbol is displayed. By positioning it at the edge of the screen, it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbols are displayed, it can be placed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. By enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the jackpot pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be suitably shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

<Example of time-saving control without going through hit>
Next, as a time saving state, an example will be described in which time saving control is executed without going through a win (big hit, small hit, etc.).
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the characteristic parts and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base (state). In other words, as the time saving state, time saving control that does not involve winning (big hit, small winning, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and When using a small winning symbol random number, a specific small winning symbol random number can be used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a fall lottery judgment value in a time saving symbol lottery, a random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. , a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state is finished after variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving state. Based on the variable display result of the time-saving symbol being displayed, game control is not performed to move from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (even if the time-saving symbol is displayed, the time-saving state is overwritten (time-saving It may also be possible to control switching of the gaming state so that it occurs again. Then, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol (For example, in the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general losing symbol is displayed.) Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, a decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is performed that suggests whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol); however, in the time-saving state, the decorative symbol It may be arranged not to perform an effect that suggests whether or not the display result will be a special symbol (time-saving symbol). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbols due to the performance in the time-saving state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time-saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (information that instructs right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, a variable display based on the stored pending memory information is displayed. Until it's all over. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B6) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and the normal state Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol, game control is performed to shift from a normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, a time-saving symbol is variable with a special symbol. Based on the display result, do not perform game control that moves the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state (such as overwriting the time-saving state even if a time-saving symbol is displayed (so that the time-saving state will occur again). (b) without controlling the switching of the gaming state. Then, the second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display results of the time-saving symbols than the first variable display, and the information regarding the variable display is stored as pending memory information, and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to perform different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (it is possible to specify that the time saving control will continue to be displayed when shifting to the time saving control, and that the time saving control will not be executed when not shifting to the time saving control) During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to not provide left-handed hitting notification (notification that instructs left-handed hitting). Thereby, suitable control is possible depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by performing the performance depending on whether or not the state has changed).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, and when the variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information is displayed. In the case of a hit (small hit, jackpot) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to the hit is different. It may be different. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining pending memory information stored when the time saving state ends, there is a common effect between when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no such pending memory information. It is possible to execute a different effect after executing (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common effect suggesting whether or not to return to the time-saving state is executed, and in the variable display based on the fourth suspended memory information, a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed. possible). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display result of the decorative symbol due to the performance of the right-hand hit notification mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. Thereby, the interest of the game can be improved by the special performance after the execution of the common specific performance.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined performance different from the common specific performance (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a win (a display that has been moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) The expectation level (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) is made to differ depending on the performance mode of the display display that can suggest the expectation level of winning corresponding to the variable display of Good too. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special performance that can be executed when the time-saving design (special display result) occurs, after executing the performance (time-saving suggestion performance, etc.) that suggests the time-saving design (special display result), the winning symbol (specific It may also be possible to perform a performance (such as a special jackpot with a higher gaming value than in a time-saving state) that notifies the player of the display result). As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can control the time-saving states (special states) in which the number of time-savings (time-saving continuation period) differs depending on the type of time-saving symbols (special display results) provided in plural types (for example, the (1st time saving symbol: 50 time savings, 2nd time saving symbol: 100 time savings, etc.), the performance control CPU 120 is given when the time saving symbol stops depending on the type of performance executed (for example, the type of reach performance, etc.) It is also possible to perform effects with different number of time reductions (duration periods). As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention is drawn to the number of times that the game is shortened after that, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) Based on the pre-reading of the pending storage information, pre-reading of the pending storage information that has occurred after the pending storage information where it has been specified that a variable display that can be shifted (controlled) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) will be executed. Execution of the preview performance may be restricted. Then, as the pre-read preview performance while the execution of such a pre-read preview performance is restricted, a common mode of performance may be made possible. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B24) When the variable display whose prefetch target is based on pending memory information is a variable display in which a time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and when the variable display that is not displayed as if the time-saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the case of display and the case of display, the execution of a prefetch preview effect for pending storage information generated after the relevant pending storage information may be restricted. Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using a variable number of displays that resulted in a predetermined display result, such as a variable display number of losers)
Next, an example of time saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of consecutive variable displays resulting in a loss) that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that does not become a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As shown below, the time saving state (special state) is when the number of consecutive variable displays with a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times). It may be possible to execute the following condition. Note that the predetermined result may be such that a time saving state (special state) can be executed on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in a losing display result reaches a special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display using the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display using the second special symbol, the game is played based on the fact that the variable display result becomes the specific display result. The numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the user and that resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small win display result that is not a jackpot, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is updated. Based on the above, when a special condition is established in which the number of executions (continuation number) of the variable display that resulted in the predetermined display result reaches a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.), the normal state changes to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to transfer. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, even in situations where either the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained continues to be updated, making it easier for players to be relieved in a time-saving state. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize relief for the player due to the time saving condition.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You may also do so. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (variable probability state, time saving state). This makes it possible to suitably rescue the player when display results that are disadvantageous to the player occur consecutively.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time-saving state (special state) is executable, and the predetermined condition is may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to rescue the player, such as when a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player occurs, and to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when variable display is executed a special number of times. This makes it possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state substantially occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief to the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control to a time saving state (special state) for a period equal to or more than the special number of times (for example, further 1000 times or more, etc.); During the time saving state (special state), the time saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state); A different effect may be performed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time is shorter in the second time saving state than in the first time saving state. It becomes possible to change the appearance of the performance, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Note that, without performing such a performance, the same performance may be performed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming more aware of the fact that they are in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled to a second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You can also do this. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, control to an advantageous state is given priority over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of special conditions, so the result is not more advantageous to the player, and the player's interest in playing is reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a fourth numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated.

(C15) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special condition (variable number of display times). It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time saving state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, a time saving state performance is performed in which the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time saving state is entered.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (When a jackpot is over, the time saving state is performed with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time saving state is reached after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 stores predetermined information ( A ram clear command at the time of a cold start, a command notifying the number of fluctuation display until the end of the time saving state at the time of a hot start) can be sent to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120, based on receiving the predetermined information, Suggestions regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effects that suggest that the number of times the variable display is executed are different in the morning, the background image is different, and that within 100 revolutions variation is far or near) are executed. (e.g. easy to execute). Since the player is given an incentive to play first thing in the morning, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information regarding the time saving state) to the performance control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the performance control CPU 120 It may be possible to perform a special performance (such as a performance suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled into a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information) and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). Good too. Thereby, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss, and it is possible to suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The performance control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is satisfied based on the fact that variable display has been performed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) smaller than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time-saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests that the control is to be performed, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times (for example, Suggestive effects can be executed every time variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances (such as different performances when shifting to the time saving state) are performed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a condition and when the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of a condition. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview presentation may be made different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving symbol, a jackpot, or a loss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention. Each configuration regarding the characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined with a part or all of the configurations regarding other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but it is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

Other embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-0 is
The first identification information (e.g., the first special figure) or the second identification information (e.g., the second special figure) is displayed variably based on the establishment of the starting condition (e.g., starting prize winning), and the variable display specifies the A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when displayed as a display result (e.g., jackpot),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result as a special state. can be,
The performance execution means are
It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, a time-saving acquisition chance effect) that suggests that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result,
As a suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, time saving acquisition chance effect A) that suggests that the variable display of the first identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state, and control from a special state to a non-special state. A second suggestion effect (for example, time-saving acquisition chance effect B) that suggests that the variable display of the second identification information will be displayed as a predetermined display result for a predetermined period after the second identification information is displayed can be executed;
The period from the start of the second suggestion effect until it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is longer than the period from the start of the first suggestion effect until it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result. short (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A is longer than the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed in a non-special state, the period from which the predetermined display result is controlled to the special state is lengthened, thereby suitably increasing the player's sense of expectation. In addition, if the predetermined display result is displayed during a period after the end of the special state where there is a risk of giving a negative impression due to the end of the special state, it is possible to return to the special state at a good tempo without executing the suggestive effect. Since it is possible to suitably dispel a player's sense of regret, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
In a non-special state, when the variable display of the first identification information reaches a predetermined display result, the result display period from when the display result is displayed until the next variable display can start is the period when the second identification information is displayed during the predetermined period. It is longer than the result display period when the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in Figure 284-35, the variable display result is displayed in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is normal). The symbol confirmation period in the case of a time-saver failure is 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time-save state, that is, when the gaming state is normal, The pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds when the variable display result is a time-saving result),
The game medium has a first route and a second route different from the first route as a route through which the game media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the gaming medium to the second path (for example, the right gaming area),
The means of performing the performance is
When controlled in a special state, it is possible to perform a promotion effect that promotes the firing of the game medium to the second path (for example, a portion that displays an image of right-handed hit notification on the image display device 5),
When the variable display of the first identification information results in a predetermined display result, a promotional effect can be executed during the result display period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-57, 284-63, and 284-64, a game If the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure when the state is the normal state is a time saving result, the image display device 5 displays an image of right hit notification during the period including the symbol confirmation period. part),
When the variable display of the second identification information results in a predetermined display result during the predetermined period, the promotion effect is not executed during the result display period (for example, the second feature is not executed immediately after the end of the time saving state, that is, when the gaming state is the normal state). If the variable display result in the variable display of the figure is a time-saving result, the pattern confirmation period is extremely short at 0.5 seconds, so the rush effect including the display of the right hit notification image will not be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by providing a long result display period in which variable display is not performed when transitioning from a non-special state to a special state after a predetermined display result, the player is suitably notified of the state change. Can be done.

Type 1-2 gaming machines are
The result display period when the variable display of the second identification information results in a predetermined display result during the predetermined period is that the variable display of the second identification information in the predetermined period is a display result different from the predetermined display result and is not controlled to an advantageous state. This is the same period as the result display period when the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 284-35, the variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state) The symbol confirmation period when the variable display result is A with a time saver and a loss with a time saver or B with a time saver is the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is immediately after the end of the time saver state (normal state). (The part that is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the pattern confirmation period in case of a miss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the period from when the predetermined display result is displayed in the predetermined period until the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result can be suitably returned to the special state without prolonging the period excessively.

Type 1-3 gaming machines are
During the predetermined period, the variable display of the first identification information becomes the predetermined display result during the period from the start of the variable display until the start of the second suggestion effect, when the variable display of the first identification information becomes the predetermined display result in the non-special state. It is shorter than the period from the start of the variable display that is the display result until the execution of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figure 284-80, based on the remaining reservation immediately after the time saving state in the second special figure) The period L3 from the start of the variable display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance performance starts when time-saving winning chance A is won in the variable display is variable when time-saving winning winning A is won in the variable display of the first special symbol. The period from the start of the display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance effect starts (the part that is set shorter than L1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably return to the special state without excessively prolonging the period until the start of the second suggestion effect.

Type 1-4 gaming machines are
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestive performance (for example, a preview performance during variable display) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state;
It is better to perform a variable display in which the variable display of the second identification information becomes the predetermined display result in a predetermined period than to perform a variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information becomes the predetermined display result in a non-special state. There are few types of specific suggestion effects executed by the effect execution means (for example, as shown in Fig. 284-81, when the time-saving winning result A is won in the variable display of the remaining reservation in the time-saving state in the second special drawing, , the part where the number of performance patterns of the notice performance during the variable display that can be executed is smaller than when the winning time-saving A is won in the variable display of the first special symbol),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably return to the special state without excessively stirring up the specific suggestive performance.

[Form 2]
The type 2-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting shown in FIG. 284-19). the part that executes the processing), and
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
A variable display pattern determined when a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state is a variable display pattern determined when a display result is not displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state and is not controlled to an advantageous state. It consists of a variable display period that is different from the pattern (for example, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is deviated from the time saving, the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is deviated) The part that differs from the special figure fluctuation time in the case of),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is such that the display result is not displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state in the special state after the advantageous state and is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It is composed of a common variable display period with at least one variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns that are determined when the The special figure fluctuation time in this case is partially common to the special figure fluctuation time in the case where the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when transitioning from a non-special state to a special state after a predetermined display result, which is more advantageous because the starting conditions are more easily satisfied than in a non-special state, a special feeling is enhanced by having a dedicated variable display pattern. In addition, there is not much change in the advantage when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result in a situation where the special state is already controlled, so by making the variable display pattern common to other variable display patterns, Since the storage capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means can be reduced, the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a part where a variable display of decorative patterns can be executed in the image display device 5),
By setting the variable display performance of performance identification information to a predetermined reach mode, it is possible to execute a reach performance that suggests that the game is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion where the reach performance can be displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the variable display of the variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, the execution of the reach effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-21(C) In addition, in the case where the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C is a time saving result, the non-reach variation pattern The part where PA2-5 is selected and reach effect is not executed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach effect is executed, there is a risk that the display result of the variable display will attract attention, so by restricting the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result. It can be made difficult.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
As variable display patterns that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after an advantageous state, there are multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the special symbol variation time is 50 seconds (50,000 ms) and the variable display pattern is variable. PA3-5 where the display result is a miss, PC3-3 where the special figure variation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure variation time is 55 seconds (55000ms) and the variable display result is PC3-3), which will result in a loss of time saving.
The multiple types of variable display patterns include a first variable display pattern consisting of a first variable display period (for example, a variable pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is 55 seconds), and a second variable display pattern that is shorter than the first variable display period. At least a second variable display pattern configured by a display period (for example, a variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is 50 seconds),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is configured with a variable display period common to the second variable display pattern (for example, as shown in a modified example). , when the variable display result of the second special figure is a loss when the gaming state is the time-saving state A1, and when the variable display result is a loss with the time-saving display, a common special figure fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the variable display period to be short, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result.

Type 2-3 gaming machines are
The result display period from when the display result is displayed until the next variable display can start is when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, and when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-36, in time saving state A, the variable display pattern when the variable display result is A with time saving not included or B without time saving) The confirmation time is the part that is set to be the same as the variable display symbol confirmation time when the variable display result is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by preventing a situation in which the player focuses on the displayed results due to different result display periods, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as the predetermined display result.

Type 2-4 gaming machines are
Equipped with a reservation storage means (for example, special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reservation storage information,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a hold preview effect (for example, a hold display preview effect) that indicates that hold memory information of a variable display that results in a specific display result is stored in the hold storage means,
While it is possible to execute a pending notice effect that targets pending memory information regarding a variable display in which a variable display is not displayed with a specific display result or a predetermined display result, it is possible to execute a pending notice performance that targets pending memory information regarding a variable display in which a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result. Do not execute the target pending notice effect (for example, as shown in Figure 284-82 (A), Figure 284-82 (B), and Figure 284-82 (C), when the variable display result is a loss or a jackpot) While it is possible to execute the pending display notice performance in cases where the above is the case, the pending display notice performance is not executed in the case where the variable display result is a time-saving result),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display is displayed as the predetermined display result by preventing a situation where the player focuses on the predetermined display result because the pending storage information that becomes the predetermined display result becomes the target of the pending preview performance. It can make it difficult to draw attention to things.

Type 2-5 gaming machines are
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
Even if the pending storage information other than the pending storage information that is the target of the pending notice performance is the variable display pending storage information that is displayed with the predetermined display result, the variable display pending storage information that is displayed with the predetermined display result. It is possible to execute a pending notice performance across a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a plurality of pending storage information including Even if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is time-saving and misses, the pending display preview performance can be executed over multiple variable displays),
The pending notice effect is executed by continuously displaying a similar or common display on the display means over a plurality of variable displays (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-84, A part where a pending display based on a pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot is continuously displayed in any of performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the variable display that is the target of the pending notice performance, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result.

[Form 3]
The type 3-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B). ,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on what is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, time saving is not included),
The performance execution means includes a first special notification performance (for example, performance pattern D) and a ratio of being controlled to a second advantageous state compared to the first special notification performance, as a special notification performance that notifies that the control will be in an advantageous state. It is possible to perform a second special notification effect (for example, effect pattern E) with a high
The execution rate of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 and 284-92 (B), from time-saving state A1 to time-saving state In A3 and time saving state C2, the proportions in which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern D and performance pattern E when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B are different)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification performance relatively high in the special state after the advantageous state, the special state after the advantageous state is a state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, so when playing consecutive games On the other hand, for example, if the user is controlled to be in a special state without going through an advantageous state, the expectation of becoming an advantageous state is heightened. 2. By increasing the execution rate of the special notification performance, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the players and improve their interest in the game, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of special notification performances (for example, a portion where a variable display notice performance can be executed in a performance pattern D and a performance pattern E),
There are more timings at which special notification effects can be executed when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, during the variable display in the time saving states A1 to A3). The execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern of the preview performance is 2, and the execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern of the preview performance during variable display in the time saving state C2 is 0),
There are more types of special notification effects that can be executed when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, the types of special notification effects that can be executed in the time saving states A1 to A3 The number of accurate performance patterns is 2, and the number of executable accurate performance patterns in time saving state C2 is 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the advantageous state in which the player expects to win consecutive games after the end of the advantageous state, the special notification effects are diversified, so it is possible to improve the interest during the consecutive winnings.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is
The effect execution means can execute the special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to be advantageous and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, in FIG. 284-93 As shown in the figure, the portion where the preview effect during variable display can be executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from the first timing and the second timing),
The special state after a predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after an advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state C2, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; Time saving control can be executed once in time saving state A1 and 7 times in variable display in time saving state A2)

When the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the proportion of special notification effects executed at the first timing is higher than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C2, A portion that increases the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern D or performance pattern E at the first timing compared to time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special notification performance is likely to be executed at an early timing in the special state after the predetermined display result, which is controlled for a relatively long period of time, so it is possible to prevent a feeling of prolongation from occurring and suppress a decline in game interest. Can be done.

Type 3-3 gaming machines are
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a first predetermined post-result special state (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display) and a special state after the first period (for example, time saving state C1). There is a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
When the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a lower rate than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C1, the special notification effect is executed at a lower rate than in the time saving state A). The part that sets the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern D or performance pattern E to be low),
When the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C2, the special notification effect is executed at a higher rate than in the time saving state A. Also, the part that sets the rate at which the preview performance is executed during the variable display in performance pattern D or performance pattern E) is set high),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the second predetermined display result, which is controlled for a relatively long period, the execution rate of the special notification performance is high, so that it is possible to create a sharpness and improve the game interest.

Type 3-4 gaming machines are
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a first predetermined post-result special state (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display) and a special state after the first period (for example, time saving state C1). There is a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
The execution rate of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after the first predetermined display result and the special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, the rate at which the variable display notice effect is executed in the effect pattern E in the time saving state C2) is made higher than the rate at which the variable display notice effect is executed in the effect pattern E in the time saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the first predetermined display result in which the controllable period in the special state is short, after the first predetermined display result While it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to the second advantageous state during the special state, for example, after the second predetermined display result in which the controllable period to the special state is long, it is relatively difficult to By increasing the height, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the sense of delay due to the fact that the special state does not become an advantageous state after the second predetermined display result, thereby increasing the marketability of gaming machines equipped with the special state. be able to.

[Form 4]
The type 4-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B). ,
As a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays has reached 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed, a special state (for example, , time-saving state B), and the special state (for example, time-saving state C1, time saving state C2),
The performance execution means includes a first special notification performance (for example, performance pattern D) and a ratio of being controlled to a second advantageous state compared to the first special notification performance, as a special notification performance that notifies that the control will be in an advantageous state. It is possible to perform a second special notification effect (for example, effect pattern E) with a high
The execution rate of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after reaching the specific number of times and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. Regarding state C1, the execution ratio of the performance pattern E is different between the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the predetermined display result, the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled by making the variable display become the predetermined display result. Therefore, by increasing the execution rate of the second special notification effect, it is possible to increase the special feeling when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result. By making it relatively high in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the second special notification is set because the special state after reaching the specific number of times is a special state that is controlled by executing the variable display that is controlled to be advantageous a specific number of times. By increasing the execution rate of the effects, it is possible to increase the special feeling of being controlled into an advantageous state after a specific number of variable displays, thereby increasing the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states. .

The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of special notification performances (for example, a portion where a variable display notice performance can be executed in a performance pattern D and a performance pattern E),
When the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, there are more timings at which special notification effects can be executed than when the special state is controlled after the specified number of times is reached (for example, the variable display notice in the time saving state C1 The execution start timing of the correct performance pattern of the performance is 2, and the execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern of the variable display notice performance in time saving state B is 0),
There are more types of special notification effects that can be executed when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result than when the special state is controlled after the specified number of display results are reached (for example, the types of special notification effects that can be executed in the time saving state C1 The number of performance patterns is 1, and the number of executable accurate performance patterns in time saving state B is 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result, where expectations for becoming an advantageous state are heightened by being controlled without going through an advantageous state, the special notification effects will be diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The effect execution means can execute the special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to be advantageous and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, in FIG. 284-93 As shown in the figure, the part where the preview effect during variable display can be executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from the first timing and the second timing),
The period in which the special state can be controlled in the special state after reaching a specific number of times is longer than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in time-saving state B, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; , the time-saving state C1 is a part where time-saving control can be executed once),
The rate at which the special notification effect is executed at the first timing is higher when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, in time saving state B , a part that makes the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E at the first timing higher than in the time saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special notification effect is likely to be executed at an early timing in the special state where the controlled period is relatively long and the specific number of times reached is relatively long, so it is possible to prevent the feeling of prolongation from occurring and suppress a decline in gaming interest. can.

[Form 5]
The form 5-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a notification performance (for example, a blessing performance) that indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. can be,
The period in which the special state can be controlled in the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, time saving state B) is longer than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in time saving state B, time saving control is performed over 685 variable displays) (while the time saving state C1 is a part where the time saving control can be executed for one time),
As an execution pattern of the notification performance, a first execution pattern in which the notification performance is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion performance that suggests that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, PB3 which is a fluctuation pattern of a non-reach jackpot) By executing the variable display in -1, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display) and a specific suggestion performance. A second execution pattern (for example, a variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, and a variable display is executed at a second timing later than the first timing) At least a part in which a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 50 second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, Fig. 284- 28 and FIG. 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display will be executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. (The part where a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 2 second non-reach performance is performed during variable display),
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after a predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, Fig. 284- 28 and FIG. 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. (The part where a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 50 second performance including the reach performance of Super Reach δ is performed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed. Therefore, the second execution pattern is made easier to execute during the special state after a predetermined display result in which the expectation of becoming an advantageous state is increased by being controlled to the special state without passing through the advantageous state. Since this can increase players' expectations and improve their interest in gaming, it is possible to enhance the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special conditions.

The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state,
The notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after reaching a certain number of times than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, As shown in Figure 284-28, when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state A, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, PB3-2 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern, and super reach δ is By executing the variable display in any of the variable patterns PB3-3, in the time saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variable pattern compared to the entire time saving state A. (parts that are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been executed for a specific number of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to select the first execution pattern. .

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1) that can be controlled in the special state over the first period (e.g., one variable display); There is also a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result is as follows: lower than the rate of execution;
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result is as follows: It is the same as the execution rate (for example, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B, it is higher than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1) While the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern in proportion, the non-reach jackpot varies in the same proportion as when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2. The part where variable display is executed in pattern PB3-1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is selected in the second predetermined post-display result special state in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is longer than in the first predetermined post-display result special state in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is short. By making it easier to play, it is possible to reduce the feeling of prolongation and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The state control means includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B) as the advantageous states. can be controlled to
The performance execution means is capable of executing a re-notification performance (for example, a promotion performance) that notifies that the vehicle will be controlled to the second advantageous state after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification performance;
After reaching the specific number of times, it is better to be informed that the first advantageous state will be controlled by the notification effect in the special state than after it is notified that the first advantageous state will be controlled by the notification effect in the non-special state. Also, there is a high rate of execution of the re-notification effect (for example, if the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination (when jackpot A is announced) during the variable display in the time-saving state B, the variable display in the normal state If there is a temporary stop with an even number of decorative symbols in the middle (the part where the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when jackpot A is announced),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching a specific number of times that is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, even if it is announced that the control will be changed to the first advantageous state with a lower advantage, the re-notification will be Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, it is possible to play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the notification performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest due to the notification that the control will be in the first advantageous state can be avoided. It can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state for jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state for jackpot B). can be,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a re-notification performance (for example, a promotion performance) that notifies that the control will be controlled to a second advantageous state after being notified that the first advantageous state will be controlled by the notification performance;
After reaching a certain number of times, it was announced that the special state would be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification performance. The rate at which the re-notification effect is executed is higher than that after (for example, if the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination (when jackpot A is announced) during the variable display of time-saving state B, When the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination during the variable display of (the part where the jackpot B is re-announced), the promotion performance is executed at a higher rate than the one where the jackpot A is announced (the part where the jackpot B is re-announced),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching a specific number of times that is controlled after a specific number of variable displays are executed, even if it is announced that the control will be changed to the first advantageous state with a lower advantage, the re-notification will be Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the notification performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest due to the notification that the control will be controlled to the first advantageous state can be avoided. It can be prevented.

[Form 6]
The form 6-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a notification performance (for example, a blessing performance) that indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. can be,
The special state after an advantageous state has a longer controllable period than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in the time-saving state A3, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; (The time saving state C1 is a part where time saving control can be executed over one variable display)
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29 As shown in , by executing a variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. is executed), and a second execution pattern that executes the notification effect at a second timing after the first timing after passing through the specific suggestion effect (for example, PB3-, which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot) 3, the variable display is executed during the variable display, and after a 50-second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.
The means of performing the performance is
The notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result,
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C1 When the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot, in the time saving state A3, the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the super reach δ jackpot changes to PB3-3. If the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. The part where the variable display is executed in PB3-1 which is the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during the special state after the advantageous state where the period in which the special state can be controlled is long, and after the advantageous state. During the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state, by making it easier to execute the second execution pattern, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest in the game. , it is possible to improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, As shown in Figure 284-28, the rate is higher when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3. (The part where variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, a decrease in interest due to the player's sense of prolongation is suppressed. can do.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a first predetermined post-result special state (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display) and a special state after the first period (for example, time saving state C1). There is a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
The special state after the first predetermined display result has a shorter controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state C1, the time-saving control can be executed over one variable display; , time saving state A2 is a part where time saving control can be executed over 7 variable displays),
The special state after the second predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state C2, the time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; , time saving state A2 is a part where time saving control can be executed over 7 variable displays),
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result is as follows: lower than the rate of execution;
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result is as follows: (For example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, it is higher than the second special symbol in the time-saving state C1. The rate of variable display being executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, is higher than when the variable display result of the figure is a jackpot, and the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot in time saving state C2. (The part where the variable display is executed at a higher rate in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, than in the case where the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the second predetermined display result, in which the special state is controlled for a long period of time, the first execution pattern is more likely to be executed, thereby preventing a feeling of prolongation and suppressing a drop in player's interest. In the special state after the first predetermined display result in which the period of time during which the special state is controlled is short, the execution rate of the notification effect of the first execution pattern is low, that is, the execution rate of the notification effect of the second execution pattern is relatively By increasing the value, it is possible to execute a specific suggestive performance and effectively increase expectations for the gaming machine, thereby improving interest.

[Form 7]
The form 7-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means sets the special state (time saving state C1, time saving state C ) can be controlled to
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a notification performance (for example, a blessing performance) that indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. can be,
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a first predetermined post-result special state (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display) and a special state after the first period (for example, time saving state C1). There is a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
As an execution pattern of the notification performance, a first execution pattern in which the notification performance is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion performance that suggests that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, PB3 which is a fluctuation pattern of a non-reach jackpot) By executing variable display only in -1, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display) and a specific suggestion performance. Then, a second execution pattern (for example, a variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, and a variable display is executed at a second timing after the first timing) At least a part in which a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 50-second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed during display,
The means of performing the performance is
The notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the second predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result. ,
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the second predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-29, the case where the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C2 is better than the case where the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. In PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, the quota for which variable display is executed is set high, and when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1, the time-saving state is better. (The part where the quota for variable display to be executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than in the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot in C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is more likely to be executed during the special state after the second predetermined display result for which the period during which the special state can be controlled is long, thereby preventing a sense of prolongation and suppressing a drop in player interest. During the first predetermined post-display-result special state, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the second predetermined post-display-result special state, the second execution pattern is more likely to be executed. Since it is possible to increase expectations and improve gaming interest, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special condition.

The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state,
The notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state A3 If the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or PB3-2, which is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. During this period, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance, while the variable display result of the second special figure is displayed in the time-saving state C2. In the case of a jackpot, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots. the part where the blessing performance is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the post-advantageous state special state that is controlled after the advantageous state, the execution rate of the notification effect of the first execution pattern becomes high and excessive gaming value is given in a short period of time, thereby reducing the gambling quality. can be prevented from becoming excessively high.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state,
The special state after an advantageous state has a longer controllable period than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in the time-saving state A3, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; , the time saving state C1 is a part where time saving control can be executed over one variable display),
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result;
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, Fig. 284- 27 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A3, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern or PB3 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing the variable display in -2, a 15-second blessing performance will be executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. So, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, and the super reach is displayed during the variable display. The part where a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 50 second performance including δ's reach performance is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during the special state after an advantageous state where the period in which the special state can be controlled is long, and after the advantageous state. During the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state, by making it easier to execute the second execution pattern, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest in the game. , it is possible to improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

[Form 8]
The form 8-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 is configured to determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 shown in FIG. - The part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an effect based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, The specified number of times is reached when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) is satisfied based on the fact that the variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed has been executed a specific number of times. can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B) after
The average variable display period of a variable display pattern determined for a variable display that does not result in either a specific display result or a predetermined display result is longer in the special state after a predetermined display result than in the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, As shown in Figure 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state B)
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive performances that suggest control to be in an advantageous state (for example, a line preview performance and a movable body preview performance as a variable display preview performance shown in a modified example),
There are more types of suggestion effects that can be executed when the special state after the predetermined display result is not controlled to be more advantageous than the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, as shown as a modification, during the variable display of time-saving state C) (the part in which the number of variable display preview performances that can be executed during variable display is greater than the number of variable display preview performances that can be executed during variable display in time saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, increases the number of variable displays per unit period by variable display with a short variable display period, so that the player can In addition to reducing stress, we have increased the types of suggestive effects in the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed in the special state after the predetermined display result, which can shift at any time including during the non-special state due to the predetermined display result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from losing interest in the case where a predetermined display result is displayed multiple times before being controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern (e.g., an unsuccessful variation pattern) as a variable display pattern when not controlled to an advantageous state;
The effect execution means can execute multiple types of suggestive effects even when they are not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-47 and 284-48, in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure) (portion where preview effects can be executed during variable display),
The types of suggested effects that can be executed by the effect execution means when the specific variable display pattern is determined are those when the display is controlled to be in a special state after a predetermined display result, and when it is controlled to be in a special state after reaching a specific number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 284-52, the type of preview performance during variable display that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure (when the fluctuation pattern of failure is determined) is larger when controlled by time-saving state C than when controlled by time-saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of performance patterns can be increased without increasing the number of variable display patterns, so the storage capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display), and a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays), and the number of variable displays is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 variable displays). There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a variable display);
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either a specific display result or a predetermined display result is longer in the special state after the first predetermined display result than in the special state after reaching the specific number of times ( For example, as shown in Figure 284-51, the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C1 is greater than the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state B. (long part),
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the predetermined display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the specific display result and the predetermined display result in the special state after reaching the specific number of times. The difference between the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in any of the display results is the difference between the average variable display period of the variable display pattern that is determined for the variable display that does not result in any of the display results, and the difference between the specific display result and the predetermined display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result. The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in a specific display result and the average of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either a specific display result or a predetermined display result in the special state after the first predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state C1 is smaller than the difference between the variable display period and the variable display period when the variable display result is off in time saving state B. The average variable display time is set longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state C2, and the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state B. The difference from the time is smaller than the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time-saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time-saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player play the game without stressing the player in the special state after a predetermined display result for which the period during which the special state can be controlled is long.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is common to a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after the second predetermined display result and when the special state is not controlled to be advantageous after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, the common fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a failure is that the non-reach is a failure. (a part where PA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display pattern can be shared in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after reaching the specific number of times, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (with or without time saving) is displayed,
The post-advantageous state special state includes a first post-advantageous state special state (e.g., time-saving state A1) and a second post-advantageous state special state (e.g., time-saving state A2, including a time saving state A3),
The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state after the predetermined display result is not controlled to an advantageous state and when at least one of the special states after the plurality of advantageous states is not controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result is a loss in the time saving state A3, a variable display pattern common to PA3 that is a non-reach loss can be determined. -1, PA3-2 is a non-reach variation pattern, PA3-3 is a non-reach variation pattern, and PA3-4 is a normal reach variation pattern, and is variable display in time saving state C3. If the result is a failure, PA3-1, which is a non-reach failure pattern, and PA3-10, which is a non-reach failure pattern, can be selected);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced, which improves the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states. can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display), and a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays), and the number of variable displays is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 variable displays). There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a variable display);
The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state after the first predetermined display result is not controlled to an advantageous state, and when the state is not controlled to an advantageous state in at least one of the plurality of post-advantageous state special states. It is possible to determine a variable display pattern that is common to the display pattern (as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display results are off in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, the super reach δ is off). The part where it is possible to select the variable pattern PA3-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
The state control means sets a special state (for example, after reaching a specific number of times) when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed. , can be controlled to short-time state B),
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display), and a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays), and the number of variable displays is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 variable displays). There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a variable display);
The variable display pattern determining means, when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the second predetermined display result, selects a variable display pattern common to a variable display pattern that can be determined when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after reaching a specific number of times. can be determined. (a part where PA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
The state control means sets a special state (for example, after reaching a specific number of times) when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed. , can be controlled to short-time state B),
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B). ,
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern, which is a variable display pattern that is not determined when controlled to the first advantageous state, when controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the characteristic portion 130SG As shown in -4, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, when the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B, a special fluctuation pattern different from the case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A is determined. (part that makes it possible),
The special variable display pattern is common to the special state after an advantageous state, the special state after a predetermined display result, and the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, as shown in the feature section 130SG-4, the special variable pattern is , a portion that can be selected as a common jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot type becomes jackpot B in time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
A production that can perform a common production after being controlled to an advantageous state in the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after an advantageous state, the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a predetermined display result, and after being controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, as shown as a modified example, when the time saving state A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and when the time saving state C is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the performance control CPU 120 executes these jackpot gaming (a part where a common performance can be performed as a state-based performance),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance after being controlled to an advantageous state can be shared by a plurality of types of special states, so the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

The form 9-5 gaming machine is
Performance execution that allows different performances to be performed after being controlled to an advantageous state in the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after an advantageous state, the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a predetermined display result, and the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a prescribed display result. (For example, as shown in a modified example, when the time-saving state A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and when the time-saving state C is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the jackpot gaming state. (a part where different performances can be performed based on)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the difference in special conditions, so that the game enjoyment after being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be improved.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means sets a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state is controlled to be an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. Based on what is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, time saving is not included), it is possible to control to a special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2),
The period in which the special state can be controlled in the special state after a predetermined display result is longer than the special state after an advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state A1, time-saving control is performed over one variable display, while in the time-saving state C2 is the part that performs time-saving control over 685 variable displays),
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the control is not in an advantageous state is shorter in the special state after a predetermined display result than in the special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, in the time saving state The average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in C2 is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3),
There are fewer types of variable display patterns determined when control is not made into an advantageous state in the special state after a predetermined display result than in the special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, In time saving state C2, if the variable display result is off, two types of variation patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display result If it is off, you can select from 5 types of fluctuation patterns: PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4, PA3-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the controllable period in the special state is longer than in the special state after the advantageous state, expectations are raised excessively due to the long average variable display period, creating a feeling of prolongation. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which interest in gaming is reduced, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern), and suggests that the variable display performance of the performance identification information is controlled to an advantageous state by setting it in a predetermined reach mode. (For example, the part where the reach effect is executed on the image display device 5 when a variable display is executed in a change pattern of the reach),
In a variable display where a specific display result is not displayed, a special state after a predetermined display result is more advantageous than a special state after a state, the rate at which a reach effect is executed is lower (for example, as shown in a modified example, when the variable display result is off) In this case, the rate at which the variable display is executed (the rate at which the reach effect is executed) is lower in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A in the variation pattern of normal reach off and super reach off),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result in which the controllable period for the special state is longer than that in the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the reach effect raising expectations too much. It can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A production execution means (for example, , a production control CPU 120),
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29 As shown in , by executing a variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. is executed), and a second execution pattern that executes the notification effect at a second timing after the first timing after passing through the specific suggestion effect (for example, PB3-, which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot) 3, the variable display is executed during the variable display, and after a 50-second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, Fig. 284-27 And as shown in Figure 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A1, the variable display will be executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. Then, after a 50-second performance including the super reach δ reach performance is executed during the variable display, a 15-second blessing performance is executed, and in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot. By executing the variable display only in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is made easier to execute during the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than the special state after the advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from losing interest; During the special state after an advantageous state in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state after a predetermined display result, the second execution pattern is made easier to execute, thereby increasing the player's expectation and improving the interest in the game. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display), and a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) There is also a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern common to a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after the second predetermined display result and when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after reaching a specific number of times. can be determined. (The part where PA3-1, which is the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display pattern can be shared in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after reaching the specific number of times, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A reservation storage means (for example, the special figure reservation storage section 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reservation storage information;
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
The period in which the special state can be controlled in the special state after a predetermined display result is longer than the special state after an advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state A1, time-saving control can be executed over one variable display; State C2 is a part where time saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays),
The performance execution means are
A suspension notice performance (for example, a suspension display notice performance) that suggests that suspension storage information that is controlled in an advantageous state is stored in the suspension storage means is created using multiple types of suspension notice performance patterns (for example, production pattern α, production It can be executed with either pattern β or production pattern γ),
The suspension notice performance can be executed even when suspension storage information that is controlled in an advantageous state is not stored in the suspension storage means (for example, as shown in FIG. Part where a pending display notice performance (pre-read notice) can be executed for memory),
The number of pending notice presentation patterns when the pending memory information that is controlled to be in an advantageous state is not stored is that when the control is in a special state after a predetermined display result, it is higher than when it is controlled in a special state after an advantageous state. There are few
The rate at which the pending notice performance is executed when the pending memory information that is controlled to be in an advantageous state is not stored is that it is controlled to be in a special state after a predetermined display result, and it is controlled to be in a special state after a predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-82, the number of performance patterns that can be executed as a pending display preview performance is smaller in time saving state C2 than in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3, and the variable display result is lower than that in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3. The rate at which the pending display notice performance is executed when there is no pending memory that will become a jackpot is lower in time saving state C2 than in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than in the special state after an advantageous state, the execution rate of the pending notice performance is relatively low, and the performance pattern of the pending notice performance is also Since the number of games is small, it is possible to prevent interest in the game from decreasing due to excessively heightened expectations due to the suspension notice performance, and therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a pending notice performance using a common pending notice performance pattern when being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result and when being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, , as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 in the characteristic portion 130SG-2, both are parts where the pending display notice performance can be executed with the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by sharing the pending notice presentation pattern, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the pending notice presentation.

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
Different background displays (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means depending on when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state and when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result,
The plurality of types of suspension notice performance patterns include a specific suspension notice performance pattern (for example, a panel image of a panel display performance) that can be executed in common in the special condition after an advantageous state and the special state after a predetermined display result,
When executing a pending notice performance according to a specific pending notice performance pattern, the performance execution means prioritizes the specific display over the background display by using a display layer higher than the display layer of the background display, and displays a plurality of variables. (For example, as shown in Figures 284-88 and 284-89, when drawing these images, the number of reserved special figures, the number of reserved special figures, and the number of decorations The image of the first image data that has the highest display priority for images such as small symbols that correspond to the variable display of symbols, and the display priority of pre-read images such as panel display effects and pending display preview effects than the images of the first image data. The image of the second image data with the lowest display priority, the background image such as the first background image or the second background image is drawn as the image of the third image data with the lowest display priority, and the image of the first image data, the second image, etc. a part that creates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by combining the image of the data and the image of the third image data),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the same pending notice performance is executed, different visual impressions can be given depending on the combination with the background, so it is possible to suitably enhance the performance effect of the pending notice performance while reducing development costs. can.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The plurality of types of suspension notice performance patterns include specific suspension notice performance patterns (for example, performance pattern β and performance pattern γ) that can be executed in common in the special condition after an advantageous state and the special state after a predetermined display result,
When a specific pending notice performance pattern is executed in a special state after a predetermined display result, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific pending notice performance pattern is executed in a special state after an advantageous state (e.g. , as shown in FIGS. 284-82(A) and 284-82(C), in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2, the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ are used as the performance patterns of the pending display notice performance. is possible to execute, but the rate at which the suspended display notice performance is controlled to the jackpot gaming state by executing performance pattern β or performance pattern γ (jackpot expectation level) is higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A2 and The part higher than time saving state A3),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing specific pending notice performance patterns in different special states, development costs can be reduced by suppressing the increase in the number of pending notice performance patterns, and the expectation level of specific pending notice performance patterns depends on the special state. Since the values are different, it is possible to suitably heighten the expectations of the player during the special state after the predetermined display result.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and also displays a specific display result. When a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 sections) based on a specific number of executions of a variable display that is not displayed is satisfied, it is possible to control to a special state (time saving state B) after reaching a specific number of times,
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the control is not controlled to an advantageous state is shorter in the special state after reaching a certain number of times than in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the time saving state (The part where the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in time saving state B is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in A),
The variable display pattern with the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns determined when controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after reaching a specific number of times is determined when controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state. The variable display period is longer than the variable display pattern that has the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns that The variation pattern is a part where the special symbol variation time is longer than the variation pattern with the shortest special symbol variation time among the variation patterns selectable in time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by preventing a feeling of prolongation during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a variable display that does not result in a specific display result for a specific number of times, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest, and Since it is possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the sense of blessing when the special state is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to improve the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the special state.

The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B). ,
The variable display pattern determining means determines a special variable display pattern that is not determined when the control is performed to the first advantageous state when the control is performed to the second advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in the feature section 130SG-4, when the jackpot type becomes jackpot B in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, the special variation pattern can be determined as a common jackpot variation pattern. selectable part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced by sharing the special variable display pattern in different special states.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, displaying a stage image) that is not executed during the non-special state after the end of the specific period during a specific period after being controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state (For example, a production control CPU 120),
The performance execution means does not execute the specific performance during the specific period after the special state is controlled to the non-special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-55, after the end of the time saving state A, While the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 for 10 variable displays, the dedicated stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5 after the end of the time saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during a specific period after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, a special special effect is executed by executing a special special effect, and a specific number of times is controlled after the variable display of a specific number of times is executed. During a specific period after the end of the post-special state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the specific performance increasing the regret of not being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
A production execution means (for example, , a production control CPU 120),
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29 As shown in , by executing a variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. is executed), and a second execution pattern that executes the notification effect at a second timing after the first timing after passing through the specific suggestion effect (for example, PB3-, which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot) 3, the variable display is executed during the variable display, and after a 50-second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.
The performance execution means are
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, Fig. 284- As shown in 28, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, and the variable display is executed. (The part where a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed.)
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state than when controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, Fig. 284- 27 and FIG. 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. (The part where a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 50 second performance including the reach performance of Super Reach δ is performed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been executed for a specific number of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern. .

[Form 13]
The state 13-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on what is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, time saving is not included),
When a variable display executed during a special state after an advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is off with time saving on and off during time saving state A2 and time saving state A3, and the type of time saving on and off is B, the time saving state C2 will change after time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 are completed. controllable parts),
The variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is shorter than the variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state (for example, in FIG. -6 and Figure 284-27, in the normal state, if the variable display result of the first special figure is ``No with time saving'' and the type of ``No with time saving'' is ``No with time saving'', the special figure variation time is 53 seconds. While a certain variation pattern PA2-4 is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state A2 and time-saving state A3 is a time-saving result, then the special figure variation time is PA3-6 of 2 seconds. , the part where either PA3-7 whose special figure variation time is 20 seconds, PA3-8 or PA3-9 whose special figure variation time is 50 seconds is selected),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably play the game in the special state after the advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort on the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, so that the game machine equipped with the special state has good marketability. can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
The state control means is
If the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after an advantageous state, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, if it is controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state A1) The variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A22, 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3. part),
If the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state C1) (The part where the variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state C2 and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling to the normal state),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times. In comparison, if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, while if the special number of times is less than the remaining number of times. , it is possible to control to a non-special state after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the gaming state is any of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (total time saving number counter α and the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α is 1 or more), if the variable display result is not with time-saving, then the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α at that time (time-saving state A1, the remaining variable display number of times when time saving control can be executed in time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B) is compared with the value (1 or 685) corresponding to the type of time saving applied or not applied, and If the value is larger than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α, the game state is shortened at the end of the current time-saving state (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B). While controlling to the time saving state (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2) according to the type of time saving and losing, execute if the value according to the type of time saving and losing is less than the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter α. After the end of the time-saving state (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B), the part that controls the time-saving state to the normal state without controlling to the time-saving state according to the type of time-saving and disconnection),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the control is changed to the special state after a predetermined display result after the end of the special state after an advantageous state. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
A variable display that is determined when the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled after the end of the special state after the advantageous state by displaying the variable display with a predetermined display result during the special state after the advantageous state. The average variable display period of the pattern is shorter than the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when not controlled to the advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, in the time saving state C2 The average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is a failure is set shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the period during which the special state is controlled by the special state after a predetermined display result becomes long, the variable display period can be switched to a short variation pattern in which the number of variable displays executed in a unit period increases. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to giving players a sense of delay.

The gaming machine of form 13-3 is
The variable display period of the variable display pattern that is determined when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to be in the advantageous state while the display result is not displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state. It is common to the variable display period of at least one variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns determined when In the variable display of the second special figure in state A2 and time-saving state A3, the variable display can be executed at a common special figure variation time in the case where the variable display result is a loss and when the result is a loss with time-saving),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by not being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 13-4 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestive performance (for example, a preview performance during variable display) that suggests that the system will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The means of performing the performance is
As the specific suggestion performance, there is a first specific suggestion performance (for example, performance pattern A) and a second specific suggestion performance (for example, performance pattern B) that has a higher execution rate in a variable display that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first specific suggestion performance. ～Production pattern E) is possible,
When a variable display in which a predetermined display result is displayed in a special state after an advantageous state is executed, a higher percentage of the display result is displayed than when a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed in a special state after an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-90, if the variable display result is a failure with time saving in the time saving state A, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect.) (The part where the preview effect is executed in the effect pattern A during the variable display at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the display result becomes a predetermined display result in a special state after an advantageous state, by making it easier to execute the first specific suggestion effect that has a low expectation that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, the advantageous state can be changed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the display result has been displayed as a predetermined display result without making him expect that he will be controlled.

[Form 14]
The state 14-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state)
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The special state is a predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) after the advantageous state based on the fact that it has been controlled to an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on what is displayed (for example, time saving is on or off), and a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed can be executed a specific number of times. When a specific condition (for example, the number of variable display times reaches 685 volumes) based on the fact that the number of variable display times has been reached is established, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B) after reaching the specific number of times,
When a variable display executed during a special state after an advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is OFF with time saving during time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, and the type of time saving is OFF with time saving is B, the time saving state C2 is changed after the end of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, or time saving state A3. controlled part),
When a variable display executed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, a time saving state). When the variable display result during AB is OFF with time saving, and the type of change with time saving is OFF with time saving, the part is controlled to time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state B),
The performance execution means are
In the special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled by the end of the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a specific notification effect corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result,
In the special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled by the end of the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the execution of the specific notification effect corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, If the variable display result in time saving state A1 is OFF with time saving and the type of change in time saving is OFF (when the start condition of time saving state C2 is met), the final variable display of time saving state A1 (second When the rush effect (rush effect B) is executed in the first variable display of the special map, and the variable display result is OFF with time saver during time saver state B, and the type of error with time saver is FAIL with time saver B. (If the start conditions for time saving state C2 are met), the part where the rush effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the control from the special state after the advantageous state where the consecutive winning state continues to the special state after the predetermined display result gives a sense of security to the player, so a specific notification effect is executed, but the variable that does not result in an advantageous state In a special state after reaching a certain number of times, which is controlled after the display has been executed a certain number of times, a specific notification effect is limited when controlling to a special state after a predetermined display result that reminds us that a variable display that does not become an advantageous state continues. Since the stress on the player can be reduced, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
The state control means is
If the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after an advantageous state, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, if it is controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state A1) The variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A22, 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3. part),
If the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state C1) (The part where the variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state C2 and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling to the normal state),
If the specified number of variable displays are performed without being controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, it is possible to control to a non-special state (for example, control to a jackpot game state in time saving state B) (The part that is controlled to the normal state by executing variable display 685 times without being changed)
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times. When compared, if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state,
If the variable display executed during the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times and the special number after subtracting the number of variable displays executed in the special state after reaching the specific number of times from the specified number of times. If the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after a predetermined display result after the special state ends after reaching the specified number of times (for example, if the gaming state is in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state is When the state is in any of state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B (when the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are 1 or more), the variable display result shows that the time saving is off. In this case, the value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α at that point (remaining variable display number of times when time-saving control can be executed in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B) and the time-saving feature are determined. Compare the value (1 or 685) according to the type, and if the value according to the time-saving type is larger than the value of the second special symbol time-saving counter α, the time-saving state (time-saving state) A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B), the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (work-time saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) according to the type of time-saving with or without joining, while the game state is controlled depending on the type of time-saving with or without If the value is less than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α, time-saving is applied after the current time-saving state (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B) ends. (The part that controls the normal state without controlling the time saving state according to the type of failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state or during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, after the end of the special state after an advantageous state or a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the predetermined display result is displayed. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special state is controlled, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right gaming area to enter the second starting prize opening. part),
The performance execution means is capable of executing a promotion performance (for example, a rush performance) that promotes the firing of the game medium to the second route,
If a specific condition is met in a non-special state and the control is changed to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the period from when the display result of the variable display for which the specific condition is met is displayed until the next variable display can be started. The result display period is set as a special period, and the promotion performance is executed by the performance execution means during the special period,
If a specific condition is satisfied in a special state after a predetermined display result and the control is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the next variable display can be started after the display result of the variable display for which the specific condition is met is displayed. The result display period is set as a non-special period, which is shorter than the special period, and the promotion performance by the performance execution means is not executed during the non-special period (for example, Fig. 284-35, Fig. 284-38, Fig. 284- 45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 (the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied), the symbol confirmation period is set to 81.4 seconds, so that the symbol The entry performance is executed during the confirmation period, but if the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time-saving state C (the start condition of time-saving state B is satisfied), the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, The part where the transition from time saving state C to time saving state B is performed without executing the rush effect during the symbol confirmation period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when controlled from a non-special state to a special state after reaching a certain number of times, the advantageous path changes, so by ensuring an interval with a long result display period and firmly performing promotion effects, it is advantageous for the player. It is possible to recognize changes in the route. In addition, when the control is from a special state after a predetermined display result to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the advantageous route does not change, so the result display period is shortened and no promotion effect is performed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to suitably transition to the special state after reaching the specific number of times without any trouble.

The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right gaming area to enter the second starting prize opening. part),
The effect execution means includes a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
The display means is
When controlled in a special state after a predetermined display result, it is possible to continuously display a specific promotion display (for example, a right-handed promotion image) that promotes firing of the game medium to the second route,
If a specific condition is satisfied in the special state after the predetermined display result and the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times, the specific promotion display that was continuously displayed in the special state after the predetermined display result is carried over to the special state after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in a modified example, if the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state C and the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied, the image display device 5) where the right-handed driving promotion image displayed in the upper right corner continues to be displayed even in time-saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state changes from the special state after a predetermined display result to the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the player can easily recognize that the player should continue firing on the second route.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A reservation storage means (for example, the special figure reservation storage section 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reservation storage information;
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
The means of performing the performance is
Regarding the pending memory stored in the pending storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, a predetermined pending notice effect indicating that the variable display is the pending memory is displayed with a predetermined display result. (for example, a pending display notice effect),
Regarding a pending memory in which a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state after an advantageous state, a special display after the advantageous state of a predetermined pending notice effect that suggests that the variable display is a pending memory that is displayed with a predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in a modified example, in the case where the suspended display preview performance can be executed even for the suspended display corresponding to the suspended memory in which the variable display result is time-saving, for example, As shown in FIG. 284-85 and FIG. 284-86, if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not included in the time saving among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of the time saving, depending on the pending memory On the other hand, if a pending memory is derived in which the variable display result is not included in the time saving during the time saving state A, the pending display corresponding to the pending display is executed as a target. The part where the pending display preview effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined pending notice performance is not performed during the special state after an advantageous state where the starting condition is met frequently, and the special state after the advantageous state is an unfavorable situation where the starting condition is met with a low frequency. By performing a predetermined suspension notice effect when transitioning from a state to a non-special state, it is possible to give players a sense of tension and increase their interest in playing, thereby increasing the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states. can.

The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
When the variable display executed during the post-advantageous special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, the state control means can control the post-advantageous state special state to the predetermined post-display result special state after the end of the post-advantageous special state (e.g. , when the gaming state is one of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B (when the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are 1 or more) If the variable display result shows that time saving is not included, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α at that time (time saving control can be executed in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) Compare the remaining number of variable display times) with the value (1 or 685) corresponding to the type of time saving and missing, and if the value corresponding to the type of time saving and missing is larger than the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter α. , At the end of the current time saving state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B), the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state (working time saving state C1 or time saving state C2) according to the type of time saving and failure. On the other hand, if the value corresponding to the type of failure with time saving is less than the value of the second special figure time saving counter α, the time saving state in progress (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (The part that controls the normal state without controlling to the time saving state according to the type of time saving or failure after the completion of any of the following)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the predetermined display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The state control means is
If the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after an advantageous state, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, if it is controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state A1) The variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A22, 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state A3. part),
If the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, it is controlled to a non-special state (for example, controlled to a jackpot game state in time saving state C1) (The part where the variable display is executed once without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state C2 and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling to the normal state),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times. In comparison, if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, while if the special number of times is less than the remaining number of times. , it is possible to control to a non-special state after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the gaming state is any of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (total time saving number counter α and the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α is 1 or more), if the variable display result is not with time-saving, then the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α at that time (time-saving state A1, the remaining variable display number of times when time saving control can be executed in time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B) is compared with the value (1 or 685) corresponding to the type of time saving applied or not applied, and If the value is larger than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α, the game state is shortened at the end of the current time-saving state (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B). While controlling to the time saving state (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2) according to the type of time saving and losing, execute if the value according to the type of time saving and losing is less than the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter α. After the end of the time-saving state (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B), the part that controls the time-saving state to the normal state without controlling to the time-saving state according to the type of time-saving and disconnection),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the control is changed to the special state after a predetermined display result after the end of the special state after an advantageous state. , it is possible to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special figure) or second identification information (for example, second special figure) as a variable display,
The suspension storage means can store information regarding variable display of the first identification information as first suspension storage information, and can store information regarding variable display of the second identification information as second suspension storage information (for example, A part in which the reserved memory related to the variable display of the first special figure is stored as a reserved memory with a starting port buffer value of 1, and the reserved memory related to the variable display of the second special symbol is stored as a pending memory with a starting port buffer value of 2),
The means of performing the performance is
Regarding the second suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a predetermined suspension notice performance (for example, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 , if the suspended memory occurred during the time-saving state B or time-saving state C2, it is possible to execute the suspended display preview performance for the suspended memory even if the variable display based on the suspended memory is executed in the normal state. part),
Regarding the first suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, execution of the predetermined suspension notice effect is restricted (for example, FIG. 284-82(A) , as shown in FIG. 284-81(B) and FIG. 284-82(C), the part where the pending display preview performance is not executed in the case where the variable display result is a time-saving result in any state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by restricting the predetermined pending preview performance for the first pending storage information, the processing of the predetermined pending preview performance becomes complicated by determining whether the predetermined display result is obtained for the first pending storage information. It is possible to prevent this and simplify the performance control program.

The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special figure) or second identification information (for example, second special figure) as a variable display,
The suspension storage means can store information regarding variable display of the first identification information as first suspension storage information, and can store information regarding variable display of the second identification information as second suspension storage information (for example, A part in which the reserved memory related to the variable display of the first special figure is stored as a reserved memory with a starting port buffer value of 1, and the reserved memory related to the variable display of the second special symbol is stored as a pending memory with a starting port buffer value of 2),
The means of performing the performance is
When the variable display of the first identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result in a non-special state, execute a first predetermined effect (for example, entry effect A) that can notify that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result. It is possible and
When the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result in the special state, the second predetermined effect is different from the first predetermined effect and can notify that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result. It is possible to execute a predetermined performance (for example, rush performance B),
When the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the second pending storage information stored in the pending storage means when controlled from a special state to a non-special state after an advantageous state, and after an advantageous state. In either case, the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage information stored in the pending storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state. , it is possible to execute a common predetermined effect that can notify that the special state will be controlled after a predetermined display result (for example, as shown in a modified example, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, and during the time saving state) If the result of the variable display based on the reserved memory that occurs in the above is a time-saving result, the variable display is controlled to the time-saving state C regardless of whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure. part where rush performance B can be performed as a performance to notify that something is going on),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there is a rare situation in which the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the first pending storage information stored when the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state. By sharing the second pending storage information with the effect that notifies that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result, it is possible to reduce the man-hours for development of the effect and also reduce the capacity of the effect data.

The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
When the performance execution means is controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, if the suspension storage means stores suspension storage information that is controlled to be in the advantageous state, the performance execution means limits the execution of the predetermined suspension notice performance. (For example, even if it is possible to execute a pending display preview performance for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, the time saving state A, as shown in FIG. 284-87, There is a pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state B and time saving state C, and the variable display result occurs before the pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If there is a pending memory that results in a time-saving hit or miss, a pending display preview effect is executed for the pending display that corresponds to the pending memory that results in a variable display result that results in a time-saving loss, while a hold display that results in a variable display result that results in a jackpot. part where the pending display preview effect is not executed for the pending display according to the memory),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined display result is reached before being controlled to an advantageous state, the period during which the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result is significantly shortened, giving a sense of waste. Since there is fear, by restricting the execution of the predetermined pending notice performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of wastefulness.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As a special state, the variable display is controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., time saving added/off). possible, and when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed, a special state (for example, , can be controlled to short-time state B),
When a variable display executed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, a time saving state). If the variable display result in B is ``No with time saving'' and the type of ``No'' with time saving is B, the part that is controlled to time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state B),
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
When controlled to the special state, a corresponding display indicating the period during which the control can be performed in the special state (for example, a display of the remaining number of variable display times during which the time saving control can be executed in the time saving state) can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the corresponding display being displayed is not changed to a corresponding display indicating a period different from the period indicated by the corresponding display (for example, in Fig. 284 As shown in -45, even if the variable display result shows that time saving is on or off in time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of times in time saving state B will not be performed in time saving state C, which is controlled after time saving state B ends. The part that does not change to the number of executable variable display times remaining),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display becomes a predetermined display result during the special state after reaching the specific number of times and the special states overlap, the period shown by the corresponding display can be changed in the middle of the special state after reaching the specific number of times. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance execution means.

The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
If a specific condition is satisfied during the special state after a predetermined display result, the special state after the predetermined display result can be ended and the special state can be controlled after a specific number of times has been reached (for example, variable display in time saving state C1 and time saving state C2). When the number of times reaches 685, the time saving state C1 and the part controlled from the time saving state C2 to the time saving state B),
In both cases, when a specific condition is met during a non-special state, and when a specific condition is met during a special state after a predetermined display result, the corresponding display is displayed when controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times. (For example, if the variable display number reaches 685 in the normal state, the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to the time saving state B will start from the time the time saving state B is controlled, and the gaming state will change.) When transitioning from time saving state C to time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time savings corresponding to time saving state C is switched to the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to time saving state B by executing a shutter effect on the image display device 5. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can accurately recognize that the special state has been entered after reaching the specific number of times.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
When controlled to be in a special state after a predetermined display result, a background image (for example, a first background image or a second background image shown in FIG. 284-55) corresponding to the special state after a predetermined display result can be displayed on the display means. can be,
When controlled to be in a special state after reaching a specific number of times, a background image (for example, a first background image or a second background image shown in FIG. 284-55) corresponding to the special state after reaching the specific number of times can be displayed on the display means. can be,
When a specific condition is satisfied during a special state after a predetermined display result and the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, a specific effect of hiding the background image displayed in the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, shutter effect) can be performed,
The background image corresponding to the special state becomes visible after the specified number of times is reached as the concealment is resolved by the end of the specific effect (for example, when the game state changes from time saving state C to time saving state B, the shutter effect is (The part in which the entire display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by a shutter image by executing the above, and the background image corresponding to the time saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state B) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the background image is hidden by the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable due to a sudden change in the background image.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
The performance execution means are
When a predetermined display result is displayed during a non-special state and the control is changed to a special state after the predetermined display result, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time savings) is displayed on the display means,
When a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and when the special state after reaching the specific number of times is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, display of the corresponding display is restricted. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-45, if the variable display result in time saving state B is ``Not with time saving'' and the type of ``Not with saving time'' is ``Not with saving time B'', the variable display result is ``Not with saving time''. After the time saving state ends, the time saving state C2 is entered, but the remaining time saving number is not displayed in the time saving state C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on when the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the period during which the predetermined display result is controlled to be in the special state may become extremely short, giving a sense of waste. Therefore, by restricting the display of corresponding displays, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of wastefulness.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
Based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., with or without time saving), the variable display can be controlled to a special state (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result;
When a variable display executed during a special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, if the variable display result in time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2 is "with time saving on" and "off with time saving on" and the time saving on/off type is "with time saving on/off B", these time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, Time saving state B, time saving state C1, the part controlled to time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
In the pre-end period before the special state ends, it is possible to perform an end suggestion effect (for example, a time-saving end countdown) that suggests the end of the special state,
Even if a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state and is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the variable display ends in the pre-end period before the end of the special state. Suggestive effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is B with time saving in the time saving state C and the time saving state C2 is newly controlled after the time saving state C, , the part where the time saving end countdown display is executed for the originally controlled time saving state C (time saving state C2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state in which the predetermined display result is displayed ends because the control becomes complicated if the execution mode of the termination suggestion effect is switched depending on whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state. Until now, by performing the end suggestion effect in the same way regardless of whether or not a predetermined display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent the control of the end suggestion effect from becoming complicated, thereby increasing the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
When the special state is controlled, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time reductions) indicating a period during which the special state can be controlled can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, even if the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the period during which the corresponding display is showing the corresponding display being displayed. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-45, for the display of the remaining number of time savers, even if the start condition for the time saver state C is newly established in the time saver state being executed, Until the start condition is again controlled to the time saving state C, the display of the remaining time saving number according to the running time saving state is maintained (the part where the display of the remaining time saving number is not changed);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is not necessary to provide multiple counters as counters for displaying the correspondence display, so it is possible to prevent the processing for displaying the correspondence from becoming complicated, and the production control program executed by the production execution means data capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
Display means (for example, image display device 5
), including
When the special state is controlled, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time reductions) indicating a period during which the special state can be controlled can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the display of the corresponding display is restricted (for example, in Figure 284-45 As shown in , when the variable display result shows that the time saving is successful in the normal state, the remaining number of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5. However, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time saving state B, the time saving state C2 is controlled. , a portion where the remaining number of time savings in the time saving state C2 is not displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result, the period during which the variable display is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result may become extremely short, giving a sense of waste. By restricting the display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the sense of wastefulness.

The gaming machine of form 17-3 is
The effect execution means (for example, the image display device 5) is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
When the special state is controlled, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time reductions) indicating a period during which the special state can be controlled can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, and when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, an end suggestion effect is executed in the special state after the predetermined display result. However, the display of the corresponding display is limited (for example, as shown in a modified example, if the variable display result is OFF with time saving during any of the time saving states and the type of failure with time saving is FAIL with time saving, the corresponding display is In the time saving state C2 based on the failure B, the remaining number of time saving is not displayed, but the time saving end countdown is executed),
The corresponding display continues for a longer period of time during the execution of variable display 1 than the end suggestion effect (for example, as shown in the modified example, the display of the remaining number of time savers has a longer display period than the time saver end countdown) is the short part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display period of the end suggestion effect that notifies the end period of the special state after the predetermined display result is short, the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled depending on the timing when the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state. Even if the period is short, it is possible to appropriately notify the end timing of the special state after the predetermined display result while preventing an excessively wasteful feeling.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-0 is
A variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a starting prize), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (). A gaming machine that can be controlled to
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As the special state, the variable display can be controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result,
When the variable display executed during the special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state,
The performance execution means are
including display means;
A special display regarding the granting of gaming value can be displayed on the display means when the special state ends,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, even if the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the special display is displayed on the display means when the special state ends. can be displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special display is displayed when the special state ends regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result was displayed during the special state, so that the control for displaying the special display can be prevented from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
The state control means can control the special state after the advantageous state based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to be an advantageous state, and the specific condition is set based on the fact that a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed has been executed a specific number of times. When established, it can be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a special display on the display means when the special state ends after the advantageous state, while restricting the display of the special display when the special state ends after reaching a specific number of times.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state ends after reaching a certain number of times, it means that the special state has never been controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to being displayed.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
The performance execution means are
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state and is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result, the display of the special display is restricted;
If a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a special state after an advantageous state, and the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, the special state after the predetermined display result ends. In some cases, a special display can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figure 284-45, for the result performance, in the normal state, the variable display result is ``time saving'', ``missing'', and the ``time saving''``missing'' type is ``time saving'', ``missing B''). If the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state in the time-saving state C2 based on the fact that the result effect is not executed, the variable display is not performed in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3. If the result is ``Loss with Time Saving'' and ``Loss with Time Saving'' and the type of ``Loss with Time Saving'' is ``B'' with Time Saving. The part where the result effect is executed when variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled by the gaming state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the special state ends after the predetermined display result after transitioning from the non-special state, the situation will be such that it has never been controlled to an advantageous state, so the special display will not be displayed in such a situation. This can prevent a loss of interest. In addition, if the special state ends after the predetermined display result that transitions from the special state after an advantageous state, the game value given by displaying the special display will be reduced because the situation has been controlled to be an advantageous state at least once. By appealing, you can increase your interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
The effect execution means executes the predetermined display result when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the post-predetermined display result special state and is controlled again to the predetermined post-display result special state after the predetermined display result special state ends. When the special state ends after the display result, the display of the special display is restricted (for example, in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display result is "Time saving" is not applied and the type of "Time saving" is "No" and "Time saving is not applied" is "B"). In this case (when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), 685 variable displays are executed in the time saving state C2 without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Then, the result effect is executed, but if the variable display result is OFF with time saving in the normal state, time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, and the type of Error with time saving is OFF with time saving, B (time saving state A1 , when the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3 are controlled to the time-saving state C2 after the end of the time-saving state A3), the time-saving state C2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in these time-saving states is a failure with the time-saving state. (The part where the result display is not executed even if variable display is executed 685 times without any change)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the special state after the predetermined display result that has transitioned again from the special state after the predetermined display result ends, the situation may be such that it has never been controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to the display.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-5>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
A state control means (e.g., CPU03) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
When a variable display executed during a special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, if the variable display result is displayed in any time saving state) If the time saving is not applied and the type of time saving is not applied and the time saving is not applied and the type is B, the part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the running time saving state),
The means of performing the performance is
Including production sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
After a predetermined display result, the predetermined background sound can be output by the effect sound output means when the special state is controlled (for example, when the time saving state C2 is controlled as shown in FIG. 285-3(A)) (a part where the production control CPU 120 outputs BGM from the speakers 8L and 8Rk based on any of the sound patterns R10, R20, and R30),
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result ends after the special state ends, the background sound being output can be changed to a specific background sound and output. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), if the variable display result is OFF with time saving in any time saving state and the type of FAIL with time saving is B, the corresponding time saving state After the BGM based on the sound pattern R10 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the BGM for the rushing performance B and the right-handed promotion performance F after the end of the BGM, the BGM based on the sound pattern R20 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state, the specific background sound is output by being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, so the specific background sound is output. Since the control can be prevented from becoming complicated, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a part where a variable display of decorative patterns can be executed),
Variable display of performance identification information By setting the performance to a predetermined reach mode, it is possible to execute a reach performance that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 displays any of the reach fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6) By selecting the part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance),
Background sound can be output during a period when reach effect is not being executed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (A), BGM can be output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern N10 during high-speed scrolling in the normal state. ),
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the specific background sound is output after outputting a specific sound different from the background sound. Output (for example, see Figure 285-8),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific background sound is terminated after the specific sound different from the background sound is once output, so that the player can easily recognize the transition to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
Including light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.),
In the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light using the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), in the time saving state A1 and A part where light emission control of each LED is performed based on different brightness data tables in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3),
In the special state after a predetermined display result, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit light using the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), in the time saving state A part where light emission control of each LED is performed based on different brightness data tables between C1 and time saving state C2),
The first control data of the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result is control data that does not cause the light emitting means to emit light (for example, brightness data "000" for turning off),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result, the light emitting means is initially set in a mode in which it does not emit light, so that the player can easily recognize the transition to the special state after the predetermined display result.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-6>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The means of performing the performance is
Production means (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, movable body 32, frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970, etc. ), including
In a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), During the variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image in a rainbow mode, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode, and a movable body effect in which the movable body 32 is operated. ),
In a variable arrival display in which a specific display result is not displayed for a specific number of times, a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode is not executed during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B)). As shown in the figure, there are variable displays where the variable display result is changed to time saving state (control is made to time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 after variable display), or when the variable display odd number reaches 685 times (time saving state B is changed after variable display). (portions where rainbow effects or movable object effects are not executed in variable displays controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a variable display that results in a specific display result even though a specific condition is met, so by not performing a special effect that is a special mode in the variable arrival display, a specific display that results in a specific display result is Since it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a variable display, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a part where a variable display of decorative patterns can be executed),
In a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is controlled in an advantageous state by setting the variable display effect of the effect identification information to a predetermined reach mode (for example, (The part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance by the CPU 103 selecting one of the jackpot reach fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6),
It is possible to set the presentation means to a special mode in the period before the variable display reaches the reach mode, and also to make the mode of the production means into the special mode during the period after the variable display becomes the reach mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), in a variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, a rainbow effect and a movable body effect can be performed before and after reaching the reach),
Reach effects can also be executed in variable reach displays (for example, as shown in Figures 284-6, 284-26, 284-27, and 284-28, normal reach is off and super reach is off in the 685th variable display). (the part where it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern),
In both the period before reaching the reach mode and the period after reaching the reach mode in the variable reach display, the mode of the production means is not set to a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), When the number of displays reaches 685 times, the part where the rainbow effect and the movable body effect are not performed before and after the reach during the 685th variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing a reach effect in a variable reach display, if there is a period before and after the reach mode becomes the same as in a specific variable display where the display result becomes a specific display result, it is possible to determine which period. Also, by not using a special mode, it is possible to further prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken as a specific variable display.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
The presentation means includes light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (for example, an image display device). 5),
The performance execution means are
When it is a specific variable display, it is possible to set both the light emitting means and the display means in a special mode in the special effect (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (C), the variable display result If it is a jackpot, each LED will emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image will be displayed on the image display device 5).
When it is a variable reach display, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is set in a special mode (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3(B), for the 685th variable display, the 685th A portion where each LED does not emit light in a rainbow mode and the image display device 5 does not display a rainbow image by not performing a rainbow effect before reaching and after reaching during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, a plurality of presentation means are used as special modes to excite the player, and for a variable arrival display that is controlled to a special state, any presentation means is By not using a special mode, it is possible to more reliably prevent the variable arrival display from being mistaken for a variable display that is a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
During a special notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period of variable jackpot display) when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, Fig. 285- 5 (Q11), the part that displays the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the display result of the variable arrival display is displayed, the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number in a specific notification period (for example, the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display) when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a part that displays a message "BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5) indicating that,
During the specific notification period, it is possible to set the presentation means to a special mode (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (B), during the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display, each LED may emitting light in a rainbow manner and displaying a rainbow image on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special announcement effect is executed that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during the special announcement period, and furthermore, after reaching a specific number of times, the control will be controlled in a special state. During the specific announcement period after the variable arrival display, a specific announcement effect indicating that the special state will be entered after reaching the specific number of times will be executed. It is possible to prevent the period from being misunderstood, and by setting the presentation means to be a special mode, it is possible to increase the sense of excitement of being controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times, which increases the interest in the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 20-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
During a special notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period of jackpot variable display) when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, Fig. 285- 5 (Q11), the part that displays the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the display result of the variable arrival display is displayed, the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times during a specific notification period (for example, the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display) when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect indicating that (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a part that displays a message "BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5),
During the specific notification period, the mode of the presentation means is not set to a special mode (for example, as shown in a modified example, during the pattern confirmation period of the 685th variable display, the rainbow mode of each LED is emitted and the image is displayed as a rainbow effect) portion where the rainbow image is not displayed on the display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special announcement effect indicating that the display will be controlled to an advantageous state during the special notice period is executed, and furthermore, after reaching a specific number of times, the display will be controlled to a special state. During the specific notification period after the variable reach display, a specific notification effect indicating that the special state will be entered after reaching the specific number of times is executed, and the mode of the effect is not set to a special mode. It is possible to prevent the period and the special notification period after the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed from being misunderstood, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 20-5 is
The performance execution means can set the mode of the performance means to a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state after reaching a specified number of times controlled after the variable display (for example, , In the jackpot variable display during time saving state B, a rainbow-colored image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the mode of the effect means is set to the special mode in the variable display that provides a specific display result when controlled to a special state, thereby making it possible to excite the players and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 20-6 is
The presentation data for setting the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state sets the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a non-special state. This data is different from the performance data for , but the performance mode is the same for some parts (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (C), the rainbow performance in the normal state and the rainbow performance in the time saving state) (The part where the performance control CPU 120 uses the same brightness data table to cause each LED to emit light in the same light emission mode in the normal state and the time saving state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively high attention to players is made different between the special state and the non-special state, while the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively low attention to players is kept the same. By doing so, it is possible to excite the players while suppressing an increase in the amount of performance data.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-6>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
Production means (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, movable body 32, frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970, etc. ), including
In a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), During the variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image in a rainbow mode, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode, and a movable body effect in which the movable body 32 is operated. ),
In a predetermined variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result, a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode is not executed during the predetermined variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), the variable If the display result is time saving or not (if it is controlled to time saving state C1 or time saving love C2 after variable display), the part where rainbow effect or movable object effect is not executed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display that is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is not a variable display that results in a specific display result, by not performing a special effect that makes the predetermined variable display a special mode, it is possible to obtain a specific display result. Since it is possible to prevent the user from misidentifying the specific variable display as the specific variable display, it is possible to improve the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a part where a variable display of decorative patterns can be executed),
In a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is controlled in an advantageous state by setting the variable display effect of the effect identification information to a predetermined reach mode (for example, (The part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance by the CPU 103 selecting one of the jackpot reach fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6),
It is possible to set the presentation means to a special mode in the period before the variable display reaches the reach mode, and also to make the mode of the production means into the special mode during the period after the variable display becomes the reach mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), in a variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, a rainbow effect and a movable body effect can be performed before and after reaching the reach),
It is also possible to perform a reach effect in a predetermined variable display where the display result is a predetermined display result (for example, if the variable display result in Figure 284-6 is a time-saving result, the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach δ is selected. possible),
In both the period before reaching the ready mode and the period after reaching the ready mode in the predetermined variable display, the mode of the presentation means is not set to a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), In a variable display where the display result is time-saving or not, the part where the rainbow effect and movable body effect are not performed before and after the reach during the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing a reach effect in a predetermined variable display, if there are periods before and after the reach mode becomes like the specific variable display where the display result becomes a specific display result, which period Also, by not using a special mode, it is possible to more reliably prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken for a variable display resulting in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The presentation means includes light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, panel LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (for example, an image display device). 5),
The performance execution means are
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to set both the light emitting means and the display means in a special mode in the special effect (for example, Fig. 285-3 (C) As shown in , if the variable display result is a jackpot, each LED is made to emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5).
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is set as a special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), when the variable display result is Regarding the variable display that results in time saving and failure, by not performing the rainbow effect before reaching and after reaching during the variable display, each LED will emit light in a rainbow mode and the image display device 5 will display a rainbow image. (parts that are missing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, a plurality of presentation means are used as special modes to excite the player, and for a predetermined variable display that is controlled to a special state, any presentation means is By not using a special mode, it is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken as a variable display resulting in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
During a special notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period of jackpot variable display) when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, Fig. 285- 5 (Q11), the part that displays the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5) can be executed,
During a predetermined notification period (for example, a symbol confirmation period for a variable display with time saving) when the predetermined display result is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is displayed, a notification that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state is given. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5),
During the predetermined notification period, it is possible to set the mode of the production means to a special mode (for example, as shown in a modified example, if the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss, during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, (a portion that enables each LED to emit light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect and display a rainbow image on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special announcement effect is executed that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during the special announcement period, and furthermore, after the predetermined display result, the control will be in a special state. During the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, a predetermined notification effect indicating that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being mistakenly recognized as such, and by setting the mode of presentation means to be a special mode, it is possible to increase the excitement of being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, which increases the interest in the game. You can improve.

The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
During a special notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period of jackpot variable display) when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, Fig. 285- 5 (Q11), the part that displays the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5) can be executed,
During a predetermined notification period (for example, a symbol confirmation period for a variable display with time saving) when the predetermined display result is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is displayed, a notification that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state is given. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5),
During the predetermined notification period, the mode of the production means is not set to a special mode (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (B), during the symbol confirmation period of variable display with time saving, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow display is not set) (portions where no light is emitted and no rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special announcement effect is executed that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during the special announcement period, and furthermore, after the predetermined display result, the control will be in a special state. During the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, a predetermined notification effect indicating that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result is executed, and the mode of the presentation means is not set to the special mode, so the predetermined notification after the predetermined variable display It is possible to prevent the period and the special notification period after the specified variable display from being mistakenly recognized, and to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 21-5 is
The performance execution means can set the mode of the performance means to a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a variable display in a special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled after a predetermined variable display (for example, , In the jackpot variable display during time saving state B, a rainbow-colored image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the mode of the effect means is set to the special mode in the variable display that provides a specific display result when controlled to a special state, thereby making it possible to excite the players and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 21-6 is
The presentation data for setting the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state sets the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a non-special state. This data is different from the performance data for , but the performance mode is the same for some parts (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (C), the rainbow performance in the normal state and the rainbow performance in the time saving state) (The part in which the performance control CPU 120 uses the same light emission control data to cause each LED to emit light in the same light emission mode in the normal state and the time saving state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively high attention to players is made different between the special state and the non-special state, while the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively low attention to players is kept the same. By doing so, it is possible to excite the players while suppressing an increase in the amount of performance data.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-7>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern),
In a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the production identification information before the display result is displayed as confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(E), In the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the stop symbol action is displayed),
In a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times, the effect identification information is not highlighted before the display result is displayed as confirmed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E) , the part where the stop symbol action is not displayed in the 685th variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the arrival variable display that is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times is not a specific variable display that displays a specific display result, so the production identification information is emphasized before the display result is confirmed and displayed. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking the display for a specific variable display, thereby increasing the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
In the variable display performance of performance identification information when the variable display results in a specific display result, it is possible to display the same performance identification information together as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, if the variable display result is a jackpot, , parts where decorative patterns can be displayed with the same numbers such as "111" and "222"),
During variable display, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) that can notify that the performance will be controlled in an advantageous state depending on the performance result,
When the performance result of a specific performance is shown, the performance identification information is enlarged with the performance identification information aligned, then reduced and displayed at a predetermined position, and an effect display in which light moves with respect to the performance identification information displayed at the predetermined position. (For example, as shown in Figure 285-3(E), Figure 285-5, and Figure 285-9, the part where the stop symbol action is displayed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a jackpot combination) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the aspects of the performance identification information in a uniform state, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
In a variable display performance of performance identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical performance identification information as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, if the variable display result is incorrect or has a time reduction) If it is a mistake, use a different combination of numbers such as "234" as shown in Figure 285-6 (R4)),
During variable display, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) that can notify that the performance will be controlled in an advantageous state depending on the performance result,
When the performance result of a specific performance is shown, the combination of non-identical performance identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of non-identical performance identification information is not enlarged, reduced, or moved, and the non-identical performance identification information is not displayed. The effect display in which the light moves with respect to the identification information is also not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E) and Figure 285-6, the display stops when the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of a miss or a combination of a time saver and a miss). (portion where no symbol action is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the combination of non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, it is possible to further prevent the user from mistaking the display for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
including a movable body (for example, movable body 32),
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body effect that moves the movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B) (If the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the movable body effect can be executed before and after the reach),
If the variable display result is not displayed and the variable display number reaches a specific number, the movable body is not operated before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U12-3 (B), In the 685th variable display, the part where the movable body effect is not executed before and after the reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent a reaching variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state from being mistaken as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on the presence or absence of the movement of the movable body.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-7>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
A state control means (for example, CPU03) capable of controlling a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern),
In a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the presentation identification information before the display result is displayed as confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(E), In the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the stop symbol action is displayed),
In a predetermined variable display in which a predetermined display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the display result is confirmed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E), the variable display result is displayed in a time-saving manner). The part where the stop symbol action is not displayed in the variable display that is not included),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed is not the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the display result is displayed as confirmed. Since the display can be prevented from being mistaken for a specific variable display, the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
The performance execution means are
In the variable display performance of performance identification information when the variable display results in a specific display result, it is possible to display the same performance identification information together as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, if the variable display result becomes a jackpot, , parts where decorative patterns can be displayed with the same numbers such as "111" and "222"),
During variable display, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) that can notify that the performance will be controlled in an advantageous state depending on the performance result,
When the performance result of a specific performance is shown, the performance identification information is enlarged with the performance identification information aligned, then reduced and displayed at a predetermined position, and an effect display in which light moves in response to the performance identification information displayed at the predetermined position. (For example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E), Figure 285-5, and Figure 285-9, the part where the stop symbol action is displayed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a jackpot combination) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the aspects of the production identification information in a uniform state, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the interest of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
In a variable display performance of performance identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical performance identification information as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, if the variable display result is incorrect or has a time reduction) If it is a mistake, use a combination of different numbers such as "234" as shown in Figure 285-6 (R4)),
During variable display, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) that can notify that the performance will be controlled in an advantageous state depending on the performance result,
When the performance result of a specific performance is shown, the combination of non-identical performance identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of non-identical performance identification information is not enlarged, reduced, or moved, and the non-identical performance identification information is not displayed. The effect display in which the light moves with respect to the identification information is also not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E) and Figure 285-6, the display stops when the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of a miss or a combination of a time saver and a miss). (portions where no symbol action is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the combination of non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, it is possible to further prevent the user from mistaking the display for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
The performance execution means are
including a movable body (for example, movable body 32),
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body effect that moves the movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B) (If the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the movable body effect can be executed before and after the reach),
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, do not operate the movable body before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U. 12-3 (B), a variable display with a time saving effect) (The part where the moving body effect is not performed before and after reaching)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent a predetermined variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state from being mistaken as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-8>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means are
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) including,
A special announcement corresponding to the special announcement period that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during a special announcement period (for example, during a fanfare production period) when the particular display result is controlled to be in an advantageous state after being displayed. A display can be displayed on a display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5, a portion of the image display device 5 that displays an image of a fanfare performance),
In the specific notification period (for example, symbol confirmation period) when the display result is displayed in the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed and the variable display reaches a specific number of times, it is controlled to a special state after reaching the specific number of times. A specific notification display indicating that the special state will be entered after reaching the number of times and corresponding to the specific notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, a portion of the image display device 5 that displays the image of rush effect B) can be displayed on the display means. ),
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (A), during the fanfare performance period, the luminance data table The part where each LED emits light based on WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1),
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using the specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (A), during the period of rush effect B, the luminance data table The part where each LED emits light based on WA3-7, WL3-7, WR3-7, EL3-7, ER3-7, LL3-7, AT3-7),
The first control data of the special light emission control data and the first control data of the specific light emission control data are different, so that the first light emission mode of the light emission means in the specific notification period and the first light emission mode of the light emission means in the specific notification period are different. (For example, as shown in Figures 285-28 (A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush production part A, and the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush production part B) The first grandchild table WA31 is different, so the initial light emission mode (luminance data) of the various lamps during the fanfare performance period and the rush performance B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state even though a specific condition is satisfied, so in the variable arrival display, the mode of the display means and the mode of the light emitting means are specified and variable. In particular, by changing the initial control data and changing the initial light emitting mode, it becomes clear that the light emitting mode of the light emitting means is different. Since it is possible to prevent misidentification, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
At least the emission color data included in the control data of the special emission control data is different from the control data of the specific emission control data (see FIG. 285-28),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least the emitted light color of the light emitting means is different between the special notice period and the specific notice period, and it becomes even clearer that the light emitting manner of the light emitting means is different, so that the control is performed in an even more advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
The first control data of the special light emission control data is light emission control data,
The first control data of the specific light emission control data is non-light emission control data (for example, the first brightness data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part is brightness data that specifies "lighting", The first luminance data of the grandchild table WA31 of the production B (scene 1) part is the luminance data that specifies "lights out" (see Figures 285-28 (A) and (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first mode of the light emitting means in the special notice period and the specific notice period is light emitting and non-light emitting, which makes it even clearer that the light emitting modes of the light emitting means are different, which makes the situation even more advantageous. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled by the user.

The gaming machine of form 24-3 is
The second control data after the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see Figure 285-28 (A)) is the light emission data of the first color (for example, red). but does not include emission data of a second color (e.g., reddish-purple) and a third color (e.g., yellow),
The second control data following the first control data in the specific light emission control data (for example, grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28(C)) is the second color (for example, control data that includes luminescence data of a reddish-purple color but does not include luminescence data of a first color (e.g., red) and a third color (e.g., yellow) (modified example);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the emitted light color of the light emitting means differs between the special notification period and the specific notification period, and it becomes much clearer that the light emitting manner of the light emitting means is different, so that the control is more reliably controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-8>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) including,
A special announcement corresponding to the special announcement period that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during a special announcement period (for example, during a fanfare production period) when the particular display result is controlled to be in an advantageous state after being displayed. A display can be displayed on a display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5, a portion of the image display device 5 that displays an image of a fanfare performance),
In a predetermined notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period) when the predetermined display result is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is displayed, the predetermined display indicates that the predetermined display result will be controlled to the special state. A predetermined notification display corresponding to the notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 285-5 and 285-6, images of rush effect A and rush effect B are displayed on the image display device 5. part),
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), during the fanfare performance period, the luminance data table WA1 , WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1),
During the predetermined notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the predetermined light emission control data corresponding to the predetermined notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. Based on the brightness data table WA3-7, WL3-7, WR3-7, EL3-7, ER3-7, LL3-7, AT3-7 in the part where each LED emits light and in the rush effect B. (The part where the LED lights up)
The first control data of the special light emission control data and the first control data of the predetermined light emission control data are different, so that the first light emission mode of the light emission means in the specific notification period and the first light emission mode of the light emission means in the predetermined notification period are different. (For example, as shown in Figures 285-28 (A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush production part A, and the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush production part B) The first grandchild table WA31 is different, so the initial light emission mode (luminance data) of the various lamps during the fanfare performance period and the rush performance B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result is not a specific variable display that is controlled to a special state but is controlled to an advantageous state. By making the mode different from the specific variable display, in particular, by changing the initial control data and making the initial light emission mode different, it becomes clear that the light emission mode of the light emitting means is different, so that control can be performed in an advantageous state. Since the special variable display can be prevented from being mistaken for the specific variable display, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
At least the emission color data included in the control data of the special emission control data is different from the control data of the predetermined emission control data (see FIG. 285-28);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least the emitted light color of the light emitting means is different between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, and it becomes clearer that the light emitting manner of the light emitting means is different, so that the control is performed in an even more advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The first control data of the special light emission control data is light emission control data,
The first control data of the predetermined light emission control data is control data for non-light emission (for example, the first brightness data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part is brightness data that specifies "lighting up", The first luminance data of the grandchild table WA31 of the production B (scene 1) part is the luminance data that specifies "lights out" (see Figures 285-28 (A) and (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first mode of the light emitting means in the special notice period and the predetermined notice period is light emission and non-light emission, which makes it even clearer that the light emission modes of the light emitting means are different, which makes the situation even more advantageous. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled by the user.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The second control data after the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see Figure 285-28 (A)) is the light emission data of the first color (for example, red). but does not include emission data of a second color (e.g., reddish-purple) and a third color (e.g., yellow),
The second control data following the first control data in the predetermined light emission control data (for example, the grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28 (C)) is the third color (for example, control data that includes luminescence data of a first color (for example, red) and luminescence data of a second color (for example, red-purple);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the emitted light color of the light emitting means is different between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, and it becomes much clearer that the light emission mode of the light emitting means is different, so that the control is more reliably controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-9>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched towards the right game area),
The means of performing the performance is
The presentation means includes a display means (e.g., image display device 5) and a light emitting means (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992, attacker LEDs 993, and attacker LEDs 994),
During the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period when the variable display result becomes a jackpot) when the specific display result is controlled to be advantageous, it is a display that indicates that it will be controlled to be advantageous. A special announcement display corresponding to the special announcement period (for example, a name display in right-handed hitting promotion performance A) can be displayed on the display means,
A specific notification period (for example, when the variable display is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times after the display result is displayed in a variable display that reaches a specific number of times without displaying a specific display result (for example, when the number of variable displays reaches 685) During the symbol confirmation period when reaching the specified number of times, a specific notification display corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, the name display in the right hitting promotion effect F) is displayed indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specific number of times. is visible on the means;
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the light emission control of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, the attacker LED 993, and the attacker LED 994 is performed),
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the light emission control of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, the attacker LED 993, and the attacker LED 994 is performed),
The control data constituting the special light emission control data is the first control data for giving a promotion notification that promotes the firing of game media to the second route (for example, in right-handed promotion effect A, the LED corresponding to the right-handed route) control data S1) for sequentially emitting light in a rainbow color scheme;
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data is the second control data for giving a promotion notification that promotes the firing of game media to the second path (for example, in the right-hand hitting promotion effect F, the LED corresponding to the right-hand hitting path control data S3) for sequentially emitting white light;
The light emitting means is a special light emitting means provided corresponding to a first state in which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a variable means that can change to a second state in which it is difficult for the game medium to enter the first state. (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992),
The first control data is control data that causes the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-34 to 36), but the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 do not emit light in right-handed promotion effect F. (See Figures 285-34 to 36).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state even though a specific condition is satisfied, so in the variable arrival display, the special light emitting means is emphasized when promoting the second route. By doing so, by not making the variable means stand out, it is possible to prevent people from mistaking it as a specific variable display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states. be able to.

The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (for example, the gate switch 21) that is advantageous for the player when the game medium enters in the special state,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner, but causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the specific notification period after the variable arrival display, the specific light emitting means rather than the special light emitting means is emitted in an emphasized manner to make the specific area stand out, thereby controlling the situation to an advantageous state. Since it becomes clear that the specific variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking it as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
The first control data is control data that causes the special light emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasis mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), a part that causes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to blink in rainbow colors). ,
The second control data is control data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasis mode different from the special mode (for example, a part that causes the attacker LED 994 to blink white as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means is an emphasis mode different from the special mode that is the emphasis mode of the special light emitting means, so it becomes further clear that it is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
The light emitting means is
A special path light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, and an attacker LED 991, 992) consisting of a plurality of light emitting bodies provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
A specific route light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp, a movable lamp 9d, an attacker LED 994), which is composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including;
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) that causes the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a special manner,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) that causes the light emitters constituting the specific route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) (Fig. 285-34~ 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so it becomes clearer that this is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
Including production sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
During the special notification period and the specific notification period, the effect sound corresponding to each period can be output from the effect sound output means (for example, the effect sound can be output in right-handed hitting promotion performance A and right-handed hitting promotion performance F). part),
When the light emitting bodies constituting the special route light emitting means are caused to emit light in sequence according to the first control data, the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means is higher than the degree of emphasis of the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means according to the second control data. is greater than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when sequentially emitting the (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), the effect sound output in the right-handed driving promotion effect The part that is louder than the production sound output in the right-handed promotion production F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the production sound is different between the specific announcement period and the special announcement period, so it becomes clearer that the specific variable display is not controlled to be advantageous, so it becomes even more advantageous. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled by the state.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-9>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched towards the right game area),
The means of performing the performance is
The presentation means includes a display means (e.g., image display device 5) and a light emitting means (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992, attacker LEDs 993, and attacker LEDs 994),
During the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period when the variable display result becomes a jackpot) when the specific display result is controlled to be advantageous, it is a display that indicates that it will be controlled to be advantageous. A special notice display corresponding to the special notice period (for example, the name display in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A) can be displayed on the display means,
In a variable display where a specific display result is not displayed and the variable display reaches a specific number of times (for example, the symbol confirmation period when the variable display number reaches 685 times), a special state will be activated after the display result is displayed and the specific number of displays is reached. During the specific notification period when the game is controlled, a specific notification display corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, an image of the right-handed hitting promotion effect F) is displayed indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specific number of times. is visible on the means;
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. the part where the light emission control of the attacker LEDs 991, 992, attacker LED 993, and attacker LED 994 is performed),
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is made to emit light using specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the light emission control of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, the attacker LED 993, and the attacker LED 994 is performed),
The control data constituting the special light emission control data is the first control data for giving a promotion notification that promotes the firing of game media to the second route (for example, in right-handed promotion effect A, the LED corresponding to the right-handed route) control data S1) for sequentially emitting light in a rainbow color scheme;
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data is the second control data for giving a promotion notification that promotes the firing of game media to the second path (for example, in the right-hand hitting promotion effect F, the LED corresponding to the right-hand hitting path control data S3) for sequentially emitting white light;
The light emitting means is a special light emitting means provided corresponding to a first state in which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a variable means that can change to a second state in which it is difficult for the game medium to enter the first state. (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992),
The first control data is control data that causes the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner (for example, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are made to emit light (blinking in rainbow colors), but in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F is the part where the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 do not emit light (see Figures 285-34 to 285-36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display that results in the predetermined display result is not a specific variable display that is controlled to a special state but is controlled to an advantageous state, in the predetermined variable display, when promoting notification to the second route, By emphasizing the special light emitting means so that the variable means does not stand out, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking it as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to improve the marketability of the machine.

The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (for example, the gate switch 21) that is advantageous for the player when the game medium enters in the special state,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner, but causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during a predetermined notification period after a predetermined variable display, the specific light emitting means rather than the special light emitting means is emitted in an emphasized manner to make a specific area stand out, thereby controlling the situation to an advantageous state. Since it becomes clear that the specific variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking the specific variable display as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
The first control data is control data that causes the special light emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasis mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), a part that causes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to blink in rainbow colors). ,
The second control data is control data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasis mode different from the special mode (for example, a part that causes the attacker LED 994 to flash white as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means is an emphasis mode different from the special mode that is the emphasis mode of the special light emitting means, so it becomes further clear that it is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-3 is
The light emitting means is
A special path light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, and an attacker LED 991, 992) consisting of a plurality of light emitting bodies provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
A specific route light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, an attacker LED 994), which is composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including;
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) that causes the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a special manner,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) that causes the light emitters constituting the specific path light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) (Fig. 285-34~ 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so it becomes clearer that this is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
including production sound output means (for example, speakers 8L8R),
A production sound corresponding to each period (for example, a right-handed production sound) can be outputted from the production sound output means during the special notice period and the specific notice period,
When the light emitting bodies constituting the special route light emitting means are caused to emit light in sequence according to the first control data, the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means is higher than the degree of emphasis of the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means according to the second control data. is larger than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when sequentially emitting the (The part that is louder than the right-handed hitting effect sound of hitting promotion effect F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the production sound is different between the specific announcement period and the special announcement period, so it becomes clearer that the specific variable display is not controlled to be advantageous, so it becomes even more advantageous. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled by the state.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-10>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched towards the right game area),
The performance execution means are
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
During a special notification period when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed (for example, symbol confirmation period of variable jackpot display), this is a display indicating that the control will be in an advantageous state and corresponds to the special notification period. It is possible to display on the display means a special notice display (for example, the name display in the right-handed driving promotion effect A), and a promotion display (for example, It is possible to display the promotion display in right-handed hitting promotion performance A),
A specific notification period (for example, when the variable display is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times after the display result is displayed in a variable display that reaches a specific number of times without displaying a specific display result (for example, when the number of variable displays reaches 685) During the symbol confirmation period when the symbol is reached), a promotion display (for example, a promotion display in right-handed promotion performance F) that promotes the firing of the game medium to the second route can be displayed on the display means, and the display of the promotion display It is possible to display on the display means a specific notification display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching a specific number of times and that corresponds to a specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (F) as a modified example). In the right-handed driving promotion effect F, the part where the name display is displayed after the promotion display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification display is simply different between the special notification period after the specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state and the specific notification period after the attainment variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state even though the specific condition is satisfied. Instead, the display order will be different from the promotion display, and it will be possible to clearly distinguish whether it is a special notice period or a specific notice period, so the specific variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. Since it is possible to prevent the game from being mistakenly recognized as a special state, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
The performance execution means are
When displaying a promotion display during the special notice period, a character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that displays the character),
When displaying a promotion display during a specific notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of characters displayed will be different between the special announcement period and the specific announcement period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special announcement period and the specific announcement period. It is possible to further prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-2 is
The effect execution means can display on the display means the promotion display during the special notice period in a manner with a higher degree of emphasis than the promotion display during the specific notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), In promotion effect A, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed batting promotion image (a message of "right-handed batting" and an image of a right-pointing arrow) and a semicircular, rainbow-colored arrow image, and in right-handed batting promotion performance F, the image is displayed. In the device 5, the right-handed hitting promotion image (the image with the message "Aim here!!") is displayed as an image smaller in size than the right-handed hitting promotion image in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, and a semicircular white arrow is displayed. (the part where the image is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the promotional display will be different between the special notice period and the specific notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period. It is possible to further prevent the variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-3 is
The performance execution means are
During the special notification period, it is possible to display a special notification display that includes the name display of the advantageous state and does not include the entry display (for example, the message image of "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)),
During the specific notification period, after reaching a specific number of times, a specific notification display including the name display of the special state and a rush display (for example, the message image of "BATTLE RUSH" and the message image of "rush" shown in Figure 285-7 (S10)) will be displayed. can be displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of a rush display in the notice display will be different between the special notice period and the specific notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period. , it is possible to further prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a special notification performance (for example, a fanfare performance) to notify that the control is in an advantageous state,
During the specific notification period, it is possible to display an explanatory display regarding the special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a message image saying "If the movable object falls, you win the jackpot" is displayed on the image display device 5. part),
During the special announcement period, an explanatory display regarding the special announcement performance is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), a portion where only the message image of "FEVER" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an explanation display will be different between the special notice period and the specific notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period, making it possible to change the reach. It is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-10>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
A first route (for example, a left gaming area) and a second route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the first route as a route through which the gaming media can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to fire the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched towards the right game area),
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
During the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period when the variable display result becomes a jackpot) when the specific display result is controlled to be advantageous, it is a display that indicates that it will be controlled to be advantageous. A special notice display corresponding to the special notice period (for example, a name display in the right-hand hitting promotion effect A) can be displayed on the display means, and the game medium can be ejected to the second route after the special notice display is displayed. It is possible to display a promotion display to promote (for example, a promotion display in right-hand hitting promotion presentation A),
During the predetermined notification period when the predetermined display result is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is displayed (for example, the symbol confirmation period when the variable display result is a loss with a time reduction), the game to the second route A promotion display that promotes the firing of the medium (for example, a promotion display in the right-handed promotion effect F) can be displayed on the display means, and after displaying the promotion display, it is indicated that the special state will be controlled after a predetermined display result. A predetermined notification display corresponding to a predetermined notification period (for example, a name display in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F) can be displayed on the display means;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification display is simply different between a special notification period after a specific variable display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state and a predetermined notification period after a predetermined variable display that is controlled to be in a special state but not controlled to be in an advantageous state. Not only that, but the display order will also be different from the promotion display, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the predetermined notice period. Since it is possible to prevent this from being mistaken for a display, it is possible to improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
The means of performing the performance is
When displaying a promotion display during the special notice period, a character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that displays the character),
When displaying a promotion display during a predetermined notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of characters displayed will be different between the special announcement period and the predetermined announcement period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special announcement period and the predetermined announcement period. It is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-2 is
The effect execution means can display the promotion display during the special notice period on the display means in a manner with a higher degree of emphasis than the promotion display during the predetermined notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), In the promotion effect A, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed batting promotion image (a message of "right-handed batting" and an image of a right-pointing arrow) and a semicircular, rainbow-colored arrow image, and in the right-handed batting promotion production F, the image is displayed. In the device 5, the right-handed batting promotion image (the image with the message "Aim here!!") is displayed as an image smaller in size than the right-handed batting promoting image in the right-handed batting promotion performance A, and a semicircular white arrow is displayed. the part where the image is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the promotional display differs between the specific notice period and the special notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period, and It is possible to further prevent the variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-3 is
The performance execution means are
During the special notification period, it is possible to display a special notification display that includes the name display of the advantageous state and does not include the entry display (for example, the message image of "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)),
During the predetermined notification period, after the predetermined display result, a predetermined notification display including the name display of the special state and a rush display (for example, the "BATTLE RUSH" message image and the "rush" message image shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) is displayed. can be displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of a rush display in the notice display will be different between the special notice period and the prescribed notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the prescribed notice period. , it is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-4 is
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a special notification performance (for example, a fanfare performance) to notify that the control is in an advantageous state,
During a predetermined notification period, an explanatory display regarding the special notification performance can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a message image saying "If the movable object falls, you win the jackpot" is displayed on the image display device 5. part),
During the special announcement period, an explanatory display regarding the special announcement performance is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), a portion where only the message image of "FEVER" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an explanation display will differ between the special notice period and the specified notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specified notice period, making it possible to It is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 274 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three locations on the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 276, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 278. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 278, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 278 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. This includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 280 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 280(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. A configuration example of the second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 280(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 280(A).

As shown in FIG. 280(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned to "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, the above-mentioned hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 280(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 281, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common winning judgment value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot determination value within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 282. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 282 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 283, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the production process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 130SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 130SG of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 284-1 to 284-79.
(Where the form is written)

In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in this feature section 130SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1", "Normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", etc. ” is sometimes abbreviated as “. Furthermore, in the feature section 130SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 284-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Embodiment 1 of the characteristic section 130SG will be described below. As explained with reference to FIG. 280, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a jackpot display result set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different display ratios. It will be explained as a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/200, and the jackpot probability is not settable.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present feature section 130SG is provided with a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B as operation means that can be operated by the player, instead of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Both the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are connected to the push sensor 35B.

FIG. 284-1 is a front view showing the pachinko gaming machine of the feature section 130SG. The pachinko game machine 1 with the characteristic part 130SG has an opening/closing door frame 50 which is attached to a game machine frame 3 which is removably equipped with a game board 2 on which a main board 11 and a production control board 12 are mounted. A first presentation unit 130SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second presentation unit 130SG200 attached to the upper left side of the opening/closing door frame 50, and a third presentation unit attached to the upper right side of the opening/closing door frame 50. It has three production units of 130SG300. The opening/closing door frame 50 includes the glass door frame 3a, and is a door frame that can open and close the entire front surface of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, in the center of the lower part of the opening/closing door frame 50, there is an operation unit 600 equipped with a chance button 631B on the upper part and a lever body 631A that can be pushed and pulled in the front and back directions by the player and is rotatably provided. In addition, a cross key constituting a selection button 130SG35 for making settings related to effects such as volume is provided on the upper plate.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 284-2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, as well as detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push/pull sensor 625Y consisting of a push sensor (not shown) and a pull sensor (not shown) is provided, and a protrusion position sensor 625C is provided to detect that the lever body 631A is in the protrusion position. . In addition, the selection button 130SG35 has an up/down/left/right sensor 130SG36 (see Figure 284-2) consisting of an upper sensor, a lower sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detect operations of the cross key of the selection button 130SG35 in the up/down/left/right directions. It is provided.

Detection signals from the origin position sensor and performance position sensor provided in the first production unit 130SG100, second production unit 130SG200, and third production unit 130SG300, and the push/pull sensor of the operation unit 600 provided in the opening/closing door frame 50. 625Y, the protrusion position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, and the detection signals of the upper, lower, left, and right sensors 130SG36 of the selection button 130SG35 are serial signals provided on the relay board (not shown) of each production unit 130SG100 to 130SG300 and the opening/closing door frame 50. By converting it into one serial signal by the signal conversion circuit and inputting it to the performance control CPU 120, the performance control CPU 120, which performs control regarding the performance, can grasp the detection status of each sensor.

The first performance unit 130SG100 is provided with an elevating body 130SG121 that is movable between the origin position and the performance position by a drive means (not shown) provided in the first performance unit 130SG100. In addition, the second production unit 130SG200 and the third production unit 130SG300 include a wing 130SG221 as a movable body (opening/closing body) that is attached to the opening/closing door frame 50 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction; 130SG321, and character panels 130SG400A to 130SG400D as movable bodies (rotating bodies) rotatably provided on the inner surfaces of the respective characters. Each production unit is provided with a drive motor for driving these movable bodies, an origin position sensor, a production position sensor, a frame LED, etc. for detecting whether the movable body is located at the origin position or production position. (See Figure 284-2).

Furthermore, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 685 times) in succession after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, the next When a jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state B (also referred to as a relief time-saving state or rescue time-saving state) among a plurality of types of time-saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , in this example, is a gaming state called "play time".

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 130SG, in addition to "big hit" and "loss", "small win" and "time-save loss" are provided as variable display results. Among these, when the variable display result is a "small win", the opening control of the large winning opening is performed as a small winning game in the same way as the jackpot game, and after the small winning game ends, the game state immediately before the small winning is inherited.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-1 and 284-2, there are two count switches 130SG023 and 2nd count switch 130 on the downstream side of the first count switch in the big prize opening in the feature part 130SG. Two counting switches are provided. Among these, the first count switch 130SG023 is a count switch for paying out the prize ball by detecting the game ball entering the big prize opening, and the second count switch 130SG024 is for paying out the game ball during the small winning game. This is a count switch for controlling the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state by detecting (also called V winning).

If the variable display result is "time saving, loss", like "losing", the game will not be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the variable display ends, but the time saving state (time saving state C1 or It is controlled to the time saving state C2).

As shown in FIG. 284-1, in this feature section 130SG, the gaming area is the left gaming area which is the left side of the center decorative frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged at the approximate center of the gaming board 2, and the right side. The game ball is divided into a certain right playing area, and the game ball is hit weakly with the ball operating handle (left hit), flows down the left playing area, and is hit hard with the ball operating handle (right hit). The game ball flows down the right game area.

As shown in FIG. 284-1, the winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 so that the game balls flowing down the left gaming area can win, and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device The ball device 7 and the gate switch 21 are arranged on the right side of the winning ball device 6A so that game balls flowing down the right gaming area can win and game balls flowing down the left gaming area cannot win.

Although the details will be described later, the normal state in this feature section 130SG is a game state in which the game ball is mainly hit toward the left gaming area (left-handed hitting), and the time saving state and jackpot game in this feature section 130SG are The small hit game state is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area (hitting to the right). That is, in the normal state, the variable display of the first special figure is mainly executed, and in the time saving state, the variable display of the second special figure is mainly executed.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically explained.

In the pachinko game machine 1, after the normal pattern start condition for executing the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20, such as the game ball being detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 284-2, is satisfied. , For example, the variable display of the common pattern by the normal pattern display device 20 is started based on the satisfaction of the normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the completion of the previous variable display of the normal pattern. be done.

In this variable display of ordinary symbols, after a predetermined period of time, which is the variable display time of ordinary symbols, has elapsed after the fluctuation of the ordinary symbols has started, the fixed ordinary symbols that are the variable display result of the ordinary symbols are stopped and displayed (derivative display). . At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed regular symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "miss the regular symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", the movable piece disposed on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to advance and retreat with respect to the right game area. The game ball can enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable prize winning ball device 6B by rolling on the movable piece during the period when the movable piece advances to the right game area.

After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 284-2, For example, based on the first start condition being satisfied due to the completion of the previous special symbol game or jackpot game state, variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 284-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display of the special symbol based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state. .

In the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the special symbol Deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol (variable display result) that results in a variable display result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small win symbol) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result will be a "small win", and if a predetermined special symbol (loss symbol with a time saver) different from these jackpot symbols and small win symbols is stopped and displayed, it will be a "loss with a time saver". Further, if a special symbol that is neither a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, nor a losing symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "loser" symbol.

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as a specific game state in which rounds (also referred to as "round games") that are advantageous to the player are executed a predetermined number of times. Ru. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "small win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 130SG, as an example, special symbols showing numbers "3", "5", and "7" are used as jackpot symbols, and special symbols showing numbers "2" and "4" are used as jackpot symbols. A small winning symbol is used, a special symbol showing the numbers "6" and "8" is a winning symbol with time saving, and a special symbol showing a "-" symbol is a losing symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, a losing symbol with time saving, and a losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is the same as each symbol in the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be made to be a special symbol different from the symbol, or the common special symbol in the variable display of both special symbols may be a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, a losing symbol with time saving, and a losing symbol.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the variable display result is a time-saving result, two types of symbols can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B as a time-save result and a loss symbol. When the display result is a loss, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have exemplified a form in which one type of symbol can be displayed as a loss symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. It is possible to display multiple types of symbols or only one type of symbol in both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, depending on whether the variable display result is a time saving result or not. You can also use it as

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result is a time saving hit or miss, there are more symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B than when the variable display result is a miss. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a failure, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol There may be many symbols that can be displayed on the display device 4B.

In addition, in the present feature section 130SG, when the variable display result is a time-saving result, "6" or "8" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B as a time-saving symbol. , when the variable display result is a loss, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B display a "-" as a loss symbol with a time saving symbol, which can be easily identified as a loss symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving losing symbol and the losing symbol are symbols that are difficult to distinguish from the player because they are at least partially similar (for example, the time-saving losing symbol is the first While "8" is displayed as a 7-segment display on the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, as a missed symbol, the 7-segment display on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. "A" may be displayed as the display.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the winning symbols with time savings and the losing symbols are difficult for the player to distinguish, the jackpot symbols and small winning symbols are lit in common with the losing symbols with time saving and the losing symbols. By reducing the number of segments, etc., the symbols may be designed so that the player can easily distinguish them from the time-saving winning symbols and the losing symbols.

In addition, in the present feature section 130SG, a form is exemplified in which the time-saving losing symbols and the losing symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are symbols that are easy for the player to identify. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is configured to make it difficult for the player to recognize the time-saving winning symbol and the losing symbol. It is also possible to use similar designs.

In addition, in the present feature section 130SG, an example is given in which there are two types of time-saving losing symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have different numbers of time-saving and missed symbols that can be displayed (for example, the number of time-saving and missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is different. The number is made larger than the number of missed symbols with time saving that can be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, or the number of missed symbols with time saving that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is increased in the second special symbol display device 4B. The number of time-saving symbols that can be displayed may be less than the number of symbols that can be displayed.

In addition, in the present feature section 130SG, an example is given in which the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is one type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is different (for example, the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is different from the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A). Increase the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the display device 4B, or make the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A smaller than the number of missed symbols that can be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. ).

After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The grand prize opening is kept open until the upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) passes or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "3", "10", etc.). In addition, even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not enter the big prize opening). .

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning gaming state, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 The door is opened multiple times. The big prize opening door is opened multiple times until the total opening time reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or until a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) are generated. As a result, the special variable winning ball device 7 enters the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, in the small winning game state, the large winning opening door is opened multiple times until the total opening time reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1.8 seconds). The invention is not limited to this, and the large winning opening door in the small winning game state may be opened only once until a predetermined upper limit time elapses in the small winning gaming state.

In the small winning game state, when a game ball that enters the big winning slot passes the second count switch 130SG024 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, a "big hit" is generated based on the passing of the second count switch 130SG024 of the game ball. ” (V prize winning jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on detecting passage of the second count switch 130SG024 of the game ball.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, the game ball which entered the big prize opening always passes through the second count switch 130SG024. In other words, when a game ball enters the jackpot in the small win game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the second count switch 130SG024, and after the small win game ends, it is controlled to the jackpot game state by the CPU 103. . In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result becomes a small win, the game ball enters the big winning hole during the small winning game, so that the game is always controlled to the jackpot game state after the small winning game ends. It looks like this.

Then, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the passing of the second count switch 130SG024 of the game ball, the jackpot door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed. The grand prize opening is kept open during this period or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) which is advantageous to the player.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9", etc.). Incidentally, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the round game may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not enter the big winning hole).

In addition, after the jackpot game state in this feature section 130SG ends, a time saving state A (described later) in which time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variable display frequency range (for example, 1, 7, or 685 times) (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, or time saving state A3). By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on). The same control is performed as in the state in which the The time saving control is such that after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the game ball presses the second count switch 130SG024 in the small win game state. It is only necessary to terminate when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state, The variable display time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 (the variable display time of the ordinary symbol) is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol each time is Control to improve the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, and control time for controlling the advance and retreat of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit" compared to the normal state. The game ball makes it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting prize opening, such as control to make it longer than before and control to increase the number of advances and retreats than in the normal state, increasing the possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied. As a result, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening due to the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed in combination.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the game ball can win in the second starting prize opening is increased more than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or "small win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

Even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 685 times) in succession after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot will not be displayed. If this does not occur, the time saving state B described above is controlled, and if the variable display result shows "time saving applied or not", the time saving state C1 or C2 described above is controlled. In these time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, like the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. control to make the variable display time (special figure variable time) shorter than in the normal state, and control to make the variable display time (special figure variable display time) of the variable display of the common figure by the normal symbol display 20 shorter than in the normal state. control to shorten the time, and control to improve the probability that the variable display result of each variable display of the common map will be a "normal map hit" than in the normal state, and the variable display result will be a "normal map hit". Based on this, the game ball is activated for the second start, such as control to make the control time for advancing and retreating the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of advances and retreats than in the normal state. Control is performed that is advantageous to the player by making it easier to pass through (enter) the prize opening and increasing the possibility that the second starting condition will be met.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. An example of a form in which non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns (PA3-6, PA3-7, PA3-8, PA3-9) can be selected when the variable display result of the special map is a time-saving result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 284-52, when the gaming state is the time saving state A (any of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), If the variable display result of the second special figure is a time saving hit or miss, only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) may be selected. By doing this, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state A is a time-saving result, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result is a time-saving result because the reach effect is no longer executed. It can be made difficult.

In addition, in this modification, when the gaming state is the time saving state A (any of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a time saving result, , exemplifies a form in which the reach effect is not executed by allowing only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) to be selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention When the state is time-saving state A (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special symbol is "time-saving" or "missing", the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach Even if is selected, the reach effect may not be performed, or a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach may be selected at a lower rate than the characteristic part 130SG. In other words, restricting the execution of reach effects includes preventing normal reach and super reach variation patterns from being selected, and even if normal reach and super reach variation patterns are selected, normal reach and super reach variations may be restricted during variable display. This includes not executing a reach effect and selecting a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach at a lower rate than the characteristic section 130SG.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type is exemplified as a form in which only jackpot B can be won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special drawing, multiple types of jackpots (for example, jackpot A and jackpot B as shown in Figure 284-53 (A)) are selected as the jackpot type. It may be possible to win.

In addition, in this way, when the variable display result in the variable display of the second special drawing is a jackpot, if jackpot A and jackpot B are allowed to be won as the jackpot type, as shown in Figs. 284-54 (B) to 284 As shown in -54(D), the variation patterns selected may be different depending on whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. In particular, the fluctuation patterns selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A are time-saving state A (in this modification, time-saving state A3 after jackpot B), time-saving state B, and time-saving state C (in this modification, time-saving state C2). In addition, the fluctuation patterns selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B are set to time saving state A (in this modification, time saving state A3 after jackpot B), time saving state B, and time saving state C (in this modification). By making the time saving state C2) common, it is possible to easily understand which jackpot A or jackpot B has been won in the fluctuating pattern even if the gaming states are different, and the data capacity of the fluctuating pattern is reduced. Can be done.

In addition, in this modification, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is a part of time saving state A (time saving state A3 after jackpot B), a part of time saving state B, and a part of time saving state C (time saving state A3 after jackpot B). In addition, the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B is set as common in state C2), and a part of time saving state A (time saving state A3 after jackpot B), a part of time saving state B, and a part of time saving state C. (Time-saving state C2) is illustrated as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is applied to all time-saving states A and time-saving state. B and time saving state C may be made common, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B may be common to all time saving states A, time saving state B, and time saving state C.

Here, the image display device 5 in the main feature section 130SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 284-1 and FIG. 284-55 (A), in the image display device 5 in the present feature section 130SG, there is a pending prize at the lower left of the image display device 5 where the starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet. A pending storage display area 130SG005D that can display a pending display corresponding to the storage is provided, and an active display area 130SG005D is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5 to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display. A display area 130SG013 is provided. Further, in the upper left part of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area 5SL for displaying small symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol pending memory number, the second special symbol pending memory number, and the decorative symbol. The small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 284-55(A) to 284-55(D), the image displayed on the image display device 5 in the feature section 130SG differs depending on the gaming state. For example, as shown in Figure 284-55 (A), variable display of the second special figure after time saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special figure that occurred but was not consumed during the time saving state) And in the normal state other than the 10 variable displays after the variable display of these second special images, an image of the city at daytime (first background image) is displayed as the background image of the image display device 5. There is. Also, regarding the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed), FIG. As shown in -55(B), although in the normal state, a background image (dedicated stage image) different from the above-described first background image is displayed on the image display device 5. The dedicated stage image is the one after the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A (the variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed) as described above. This is a background image that can only be displayed 10 times, and is not displayed after time saving state B or time saving state C ends.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-55 (A) and 284-55 (B), in the normal state, the right side of the image display device 5 reaches the ceiling (RAM clear or 685 times since the end of the previous jackpot game). A remaining number of ceiling reaching times display 130SG202 indicating the remaining number of variable display times until the end of the variable display is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-55 (C), the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE described later) supports variable display of each second special figure as a panel effect described later. 5 panel images (panel image No. 1 according to the variable display of the second special figure being executed, and panels “No. 2” to “No. 5” according to the pending memory of the second special figure) images) can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55(D), in the image display device 5 in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH to be described later), the background image of the image display device 5 is An image of the city at night (second background image) is displayed.

FIG. 284-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 130SG. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 284-3 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 284-3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variable display time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B." Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "missing with time saving" and the type of "missing with time saving" is "missing with time saving A." Command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command that notifies the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "Failed with time saving" and the type of failure with time saving is "Failed with time saving B."

Command 8FXXH is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (confirmation) of variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Further, the symbol confirmation command is also an effect control command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until the start of the next variable display. In the symbol confirmation command, different EXT data is set depending on the symbol confirmation period, for example.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(B), as a specific example, command 8F00H is a first symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the first symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds). , Command 8F01H is a second symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the second symbol confirmation period (6 seconds), and command 8F02H is the second symbol confirmation period that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the third symbol confirmation period (20 seconds). This is a third symbol confirmation command that specifies something, and command 8F03H is a fourth symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the fourth symbol confirmation period (81.4 seconds).

The command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of ceiling time reductions at the time of restoration, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the ceiling variable display counter into hexadecimal and specifying it when the power is restored. For example, as shown in Figure 284-4 (C), the command to specify the number of times the ceiling time is shortened at the time of power restoration is used to specify each digit (first digit, second digit, (3rd digit), different EXT data is set.

For example, as shown in Figure 284-4 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH specify the number of ceiling time reductions during recovery, which specifies the first digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter. It is a command. Commands 9110H to 911FH are commands for specifying the number of times the ceiling time is shortened during recovery 2, which specifies the second digit of the value of the variable ceiling display counter. Commands 9130H to 913FH are commands for specifying the number of times the ceiling time is shortened during recovery by 3, which specifies the third digit of the value of the variable ceiling display counter.

Command 94XXH is a ceiling time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until ceiling time reduction (time reduction state B) is achieved. In the ceiling time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in Figure 284-4 (D), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the ceiling time is reduced. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-4(D), a command 9400H is a ceiling time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the ceiling time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a ceiling time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 times remaining until the ceiling time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a ceiling time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 times remaining until the ceiling time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a ceiling time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more times remaining until the ceiling time reduction is reached.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(E), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state A1) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. . Command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state A3) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is. Command 9503H is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state A2) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot C jackpot game. It is. Command 9504H is a fifth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state A3) in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D. It is. Command 9505H performs time saving control in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times due to the variable display being executed 685 times after any jackpot game or after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold started. This is a sixth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (high base state, time saving state B) in which the game is performed. Command 9506H is a game state (high base) in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol once, because the variable display result is "time saving and loss" and the time saving and loss type is "time saving and loss A". This is a seventh gaming state designation command corresponding to the time-saving state C1). Command 9507H is a game state in which the time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special symbol up to 685 times (because the variable display result is "time saving, missed" and the time saving, losing type is "time saving, missed B". This is the eighth gaming state designation command corresponding to the high base state and time saving state C2).

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a big winning opening notifying command that notifies that the big winning opening is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set depending on the number of rounds to be executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the jackpot game state or the small win game state. be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 130SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 130SG005D etc. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V winning has been won, that is, the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024 and the second count switch 130SG024 has been turned on. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 284-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 284-5, in this feature section 130SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of a numerical value MR3, a random numerical value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, a random numerical value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, and a random numerical value MR6 for determining the type of failure with time saving are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

FIG. 284-6 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 130SG. In this feature section 130SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable Multiple fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit", when the variable display result is a "small win", when the variable display result is a "loss with time saving", etc. . In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "small win" is referred to as a small win variation pattern. The variation pattern that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "missing with time saving" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern with time saving"). The variation pattern that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "time saving and loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach time saving and loss variation pattern"). Ru.

Among these fluctuation patterns, for the jackpot fluctuation pattern, after the same special symbol fluctuation time as the losing fluctuation pattern, a special symbol is displayed for a uniform 15 seconds to execute a blessing effect to celebrate that the variable display result is a jackpot. Additional time is provided.

Here, regarding the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature section 130SG, the period until the variable display result is announced is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is announced. This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern in this feature section 130SG, an example is shown in which a 15-second special symbol variation time is additionally provided for executing a blessing performance after the same special symbol variation time as the losing variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variation time for executing the blessing performance provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds, but may be different depending on the game state. For example, for jackpot fluctuation patterns selected in the normal state, time-saving state A1, and time-saving state C1, an additional 15 seconds of special symbol fluctuation time is provided to execute the blessing effect, but it is mainly used in the time-saving state during consecutive winnings. In the jackpot variation pattern selected in the time saving state A2 and time saving state A3, a special symbol variation time shorter than 15 seconds may be additionally provided as a special symbol variation time for executing the blessing performance. Furthermore, for time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, which may not have gone through the first hit, an additional 15 seconds of special symbol fluctuation time is provided to execute the blessing effect, making it variable for the player. It is also possible to clearly notify that the display result is a jackpot to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-6(A) and FIG. 284-6(B), in this characteristic part 130SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol to perform variable display.

As shown in Figure 284-6 (A), as the variation patterns of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, the super reach α, and the super reach variation pattern. There are super reach variation patterns in which super reach effects such as β and super reach γ are executed, and non-reach variation patterns in which neither reach effect is executed. In addition, although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in this feature section 130SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, four or more super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, in the super reach α fluctuation pattern in the first special symbol, there is a time saving acquisition chance effect that suggests that after the reach effect of super reach α, the variable display result will be a time saving result (a time saving result A). It also includes the variation patterns to be executed. In other words, the variation patterns for executing the reach performance and the time-saving acquisition chance performance of Super Reach α include a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a failure, and a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a failure in the time-saving acquisition. Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern of the first special symbol also includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss with a time saver (a loss B with a time saver).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-6(B), the variation pattern of the second special symbol in this feature section 130SG includes the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the jackpot variation pattern, the small hit variation pattern, and the loss variation pattern. A non-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern (a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach δ variation pattern in which a super reach δ reach effect is executed) that have special symbol variation times different from the above are provided. It is being In addition, each variation pattern of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach δ of the second special symbol also includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, such as those shown in FIG. 284-7, prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. Variation pattern tables (see FIGS. 284-20 to 284-25) that store a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored.

The judgment tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 284-7(A), display result judgment table 2 shown in FIG. 284-7(B), and jackpot shown in FIG. 284-7(C). Type determination table (for the first special symbol), jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 284-7 (D) (for the second special symbol), small hit type determination table shown in Figure 284-7 (E), Figure 284- In addition to the time-saving loss type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 7(F), the time-saving loss type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 284-7(G), various first special symbols fluctuation pattern determination table for various second special symbols (see Figures 284-22 to 284-25), regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 284-20 and 284-21), ) etc. are included.

FIGS. 284-7(A) and 284-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination table 1 and display result determination table 2. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a winning determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table 1, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 1 (first), that is, , for the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for determining a jackpot, a determination value for determining a small hit, and a determination value for determining a loss with a time saver are set. In the display result determination table 2, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (the value set by the CPU 103 when executing the special symbol normal processing as a value for specifying the special symbol to perform variable display) is 2 (second), that is. , for the case where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for determining a jackpot, a determination value for determining a small hit, and a determination value for determining a loss with a time saver are set.

As shown in Figure 284-7 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot and a judgment value corresponding to a loss with a time saving are set, but a small A judgment value corresponding to a hit is not set, and therefore, if the first special symbol is subject to variable display, it is possible to win a jackpot and a time-saving hit, and a small win will not occur. . In addition, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/200, and the probability of winning a loss with a time saving is about 1/329.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-7 (B), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the time-saving hit or loss, and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. A judgment value has been set. In addition, when the variable display special designation buffer is the second, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/200, the probability of winning a loss with a time saving is 1/100, and the probability of winning a small hit is approximately 1/7. It is.

In other words, the CPU 103 determines that when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the first special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in Figure 284-7 (A). If it matches any of the hit determination values shown in Figure 284-7(A), it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), and the value of MR1 corresponds to the time-saving hit or loss shown in Figure 284-7(A). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the variable display result is a loss with a time saver (a loss with a time saver A or a loss with a time saver B). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the second special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIG. 284-7 (B). If it matches any of the hit determination values shown in Figure 284-7 (B), it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), and the value of MR1 corresponds to the time-saving hit or loss shown in Figure 284-7 (B). If it matches the hit judgment value, it is decided that the variable display result will be a loss with a time saver (a loss with a time saver or a loss with a time saver B), and the value of MR1 will be a small win as shown in Figure 284-7 (B). If it matches any of the corresponding hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit.

In addition, the "probability" shown in Figure 284-7 (A) and Figure 284-7 (B) is the probability (proportion) of hitting the jackpot, the probability (proportion) of winning a small hit, and the probability (proportion) of losing the time-saving hit. shows. In addition, deciding whether to make a jackpot means deciding whether to control to a jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to use the jackpot symbol. Also, deciding whether to make a small win means deciding whether to control the small win game state or not, but whether to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B a small win symbol or not. It also means deciding whether or not to do so. Similarly, deciding whether to disable the time saving mode means deciding whether to control to either the time saving state (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2), but the first special symbol display This also means determining whether or not the stop symbol in the device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is to be a time-saving losing symbol.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result as either a jackpot, a small win, or a loss with a time saving, using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 284-7(A) and 284-7(B). However, a jackpot judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a time-saving loss judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the jackpot is determined based on the first special, regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. A common table is used for the variable display of symbols and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the judgment of small hits and time-savers is determined separately according to the variable display special symbol designation buffer. This may be done using a table.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it was designed to prevent winning, a portion of the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the jackpot may be set as the determination value corresponding to the small win, so that the small win may be won.

FIG. 284-7(C) and FIG. 284-7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 284-7 (C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when In addition, in FIG. 284-7 (D), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type to jackpot A or jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is the referenced table. In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7(C) and (D), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot B, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot B.

FIG. 284-7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the game ball passes the second count switch 130SG024 during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot C is executed. If the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 during a small winning game of small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot D is executed. It is supposed to be done. In other words, these jackpot C and jackpot D are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but are played during the game of either small winning A or small winning B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 130SG024.

Figures 284-7 (F) and 284-7 (G) are a table for determining the type of loss with a time saver (for the first special symbol) and a table for determining the type of loss with a time saver (for the second special symbol), which are stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among these, Fig. 284-7 (F) is a loss type with time saving using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for determining. In addition, Fig. 284-7 (G) shows the type of loss with time saving using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting winning hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for making decisions.

When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a time saving or losing symbol, the time saving or losing type determination table changes the type of time saving or losing based on the random number (MR6) for determining the time saving or losing type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether it is a failure A or a failure B with a time saving. In addition, in this feature part 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (F) and (G), the time-saving and losing type determination table (for the first special symbol) includes time-saving and missing A and time-saving and missing B. While two types of time-saving on/off are provided, only one type of time-saving on/off, ie, time-saving on/off B, is provided in the time-saving/off-on type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the time-saving loss that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of the two types of time-saving loss A and time-saving loss B, while the second special symbol As the time saving error that occurs when the variable display is performed, only the time saving error B occurs.

Here, to explain the jackpot type in this feature section 130SG using FIG. 284-8(A), in this feature section 130SG, the jackpot type is jackpot A in which time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ~Jackpot D is set.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot D, jackpot A is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed three times (so-called three rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, the special pattern will be played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The time saving control is executed in the time saving state A1 until the figure game is executed.

Jackpot B is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot B ends, until the special pattern game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A maximum of 689 times in total (actually 685 times if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 685 times in total and is controlled to time saving state B) Time saving control is executed in time saving state A3 until the special figure game is executed.

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called nine rounds) of changing the jackpot into a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot C, until the special pattern game is executed up to 7 times with the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The time saving control is executed in the time saving state A2 until the special figure game is executed a maximum of 11 times in total for the variable display.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, until the special pattern game is executed a maximum of 685 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A maximum of 689 times in total (actually 685 times if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 685 times in total and is controlled to time saving state B) Time saving control is executed in time saving state A3 until the special figure game is executed.

In addition, in each time saving state, as the probability of "normal pattern winning" increases, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second starting winning becomes easier. This makes it easier to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, making it easier for small hits to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state A1 after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, so the second special The variable display result is a jackpot or small hit by either variable display of the symbol or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol at one time. The ratio (the sum of the ratio at which a jackpot or small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio at which a jackpot occurs when the game ball wins a V prize) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the second special symbol The variable display result will be a jackpot or a small hit with either the variable display of the 2nd special symbol or the variable display of the 2nd special symbol based on up to 4 reserved memories that occur during the variable display of the 7th second special symbol. The percentage (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small wins occurring in the variable display of the second special symbol 11 times in total and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time-saving state A3 after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B or jackpot D, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to 685, so the number of special symbol games is set to 685. The variable display result is a jackpot or The percentage of small hits (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small hits occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 685 times in total and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V) is set to almost 100%. ing.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, four types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot D, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided, Moreover, three or less types may be provided.

Further, to explain the types of time saving on/off in this feature section 130SG using FIG. 284-8(B), in this feature section 130SG, time saving on/off A and time saving on/off B are set as the time saving on/off types. ing.

Time-saving failure A is performed once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1.

Time-saving failure A is performed once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and until the special symbol game is executed up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1.

Time-saving failure B can be performed up to 685 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to 689 times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol). When the variable display count of the display and the second special symbol reaches 685 times in total and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving control is executed as the time saving state C2 until the special symbol game (actually 685 times) is executed. .

In other words, as shown in FIG. 284-9(A), in this feature section 130SG, there are provided time saving states A1, A2, and A3, which are controlled after the end of the jackpot game, as time saving states. The time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 are ended by being controlled to a jackpot game state or by performing a variable display of the number of times according to each time saving state.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as a time saving state, a time saving state B is controlled in response to the RAM clearing or the variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaching 685 times from the end of the jackpot game. The time saving state B ends when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state or when variable display is executed 685 times. In addition, if the variable display is executed 685 times in the time saving state B and the gaming state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state, until it is newly controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the RAM is cleared. It will not be controlled to the time saving state B again.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as the time saving state, there is a time saving state C1 which is controlled when the variable display result is ``with time saving'' and the ``loss with time saving'' type is ``A'' with time saving, and the variable display result is ``with time saving''. There is a time saving state C2 which is controlled when the game is a loss and the time saving type and the time saving loss type is time saving and loss B, and these time saving states C1 and C2 are controlled to a jackpot gaming state, It ends when the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 685 times (the start condition for time saving state B is met), or when variable display is executed the number of times according to each time saving state. .

As shown in FIG. 284-9(B), details will be described later, but when the gaming state is the normal state, the start condition of the time saving state B (from the RAM clear or the end of the jackpot game to the first special symbol) is set. 685 variable displays have been executed with the second special symbol) is established, the time saving control of time saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and the variable display result is A with time saving. In this case, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 is executed from the next variable display, and when the variable display result is B with time saving, the time saving control in the time saving state C2 is executed from the next variable display.

In addition, when the gaming state is one of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the start condition of time saving state B (after RAM clear or jackpot game ends), the first special symbol and the second special symbol 685 variable displays have been executed), the time saving control of time saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and if the variable display result is ``No A'' with time saving or ``No B'' with time saving, then , while maintaining the controlled time-saving state (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3), and managing the remaining number of variable display times for performing time-saving control in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3. In addition to the counters (total time saving number counter α and second special figure time saving number counter α to be described later), there is also a counter for managing the remaining variable display number for time saving control in time saving state C1 and time saving state C2 (to be described later). The operation of the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β) is started. Then, when the time-saving state (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3) controlled by the execution of the variable display ends (the value of the total time-saving number counter α or the second special symbol time-saving number counter α) becomes 0), if the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β are still in operation, the time saving state that has ended (any of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) ), the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, if the start condition for the time saving state is further satisfied during the execution of any time saving state, the operation of the counter corresponding to the time saving state in which the start condition is satisfied is started. Setting a value corresponding to a time-saving state in a counter corresponding to the time-saving state) is sometimes referred to as "overlapping time-saving states" or simply "overlapping".

In addition, when the gaming state is time saving state B, if the variable display result becomes time saving with no change A or time saving with no change B, the controlled time saving state (time saving state B) is maintained and the time saving state is changed. In addition to the counter for managing the remaining variable display number for time saving control in B (total time saving number counter α and second special symbol time saving number counter α described later), there is a counter for managing the remaining variable display number for time saving control in time saving state C1 and time saving state C2. The operation of counters (total time saving number counter β and second special symbol time saving number counter β to be described later) for managing the variable display number is started. When the time saving state (time saving state B) controlled by the execution of the variable display ends (when the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter α becomes 0), the total time saving state is If the number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β are still in operation, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started instead of the finished time saving state (time saving state B).

Also, when the gaming state is time saving state C1, the start condition for time saving state B (variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been executed 685 times after RAM clearing or the end of the jackpot game) If this is true, the switching from the time saving state C1 to the time saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result is A with time saving or B without time saving, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or C2 is executed. The time saving state is set by setting a value corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 to a counter for managing the remaining number of variable display times (total time saving number counter β and second special symbol time saving number counter β described later). Overlap.

In addition, when the gaming state is time saving state C2, the start condition for time saving state B (variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been executed 685 times after RAM clearing or the end of the jackpot game) If this is established, the switching from time saving state C2 to time saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result is A with time saving, the second special symbol time saving number counter β at that time is set. The value of the second special symbol is compared with the value of "1 time" which is the number of time savings of the second special symbol in the time saving state C1, and the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter β which is the larger value in this comparison is the second special symbol time saving number. The number counter β is set. Furthermore, when the variable display result is B with time saving, the value set in the second special symbol time saving number counter β at that time is "685" which is the number of time saving times of the second special symbol in time saving state C2. "685", which is the larger value in the comparison, is set in the second special symbol time-saving counter β. That is, "685" is reset to the second special symbol time saving number counter β.

As described above, the first special symbol is mainly displayed variably in the normal state, and the second special symbol is variably displayed in each time saving state, so that the game state is basically as shown in FIG. 284-10. transitions. Furthermore, even in the time saving state, if we consider the case where the variable display result is a time saving loss A or a time saving loss B due to the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 284-11. Game state changes.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 284-2 may be a backup RAM whose part or whole is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source is discharged and the backup power source is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the gaming state, that is, the control state of the gaming control means (such as the special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 130SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 130SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a setting section 130SG154 and a game control buffer setting section 130SG155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 stores a special figure game that has not yet been started although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. (Special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) and the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and winning the starting prize. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 4B) which has occurred but has not yet been started (second starting winning) is stored in order of winning.

As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole with the holding number, and calculates the starting opening buffer value, the passing of the game ball. Random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment of the first starting condition in (approach) Numerical data indicating , etc. are stored as pending data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). Note that the number of pending data stored in response to winnings in the first starting winning hole and the number of pending data stored in response to winnings in the second starting winning hole are each at maximum four.

The pending data stored in the special figure pending storage unit 130SG151 indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and these special figure This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in the game.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a separate reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. Furthermore, the reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening in this way, and the game ball passing through the second starting winning opening ( In the case where the reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize due to the entry) is stored in association with the reservation number in the individual reservation storage unit, the variable information based on the first reservation information One of the display and the variable display based on the second pending storage information may be executed with priority over the variable display based on the other pending information.

The normal figure reservation storage section 130SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 130SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 130SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 130SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 130SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 130SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 130SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 130SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 and MR6, are stored in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 as random count values, and are stored in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 284-2 stores various data tables used to control the effect operation in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, etc. There is.

As an example, the ROM 121 includes a performance control CPU 120 for controlling performance operations by various performance devices (for example, the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The performance control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, various performance control patterns, and the like.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of a performance operation that is a preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The special figure variable display performance control pattern may include, for example, a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variable pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 has an area for holding various data used to control performance operations, such as data storage for performance control as shown in FIG. 284-13(A). Area 130SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 130SG190 shown in FIG. 284-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 130SG191, a production control timer setting section 130SG192, a production control counter setting section 130SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 130SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 130SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 130SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 130SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 130SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 130SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 130SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 130SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 130SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 130SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 130SG194A as shown in FIG. 284-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 130SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers ``1'' to ``8'') corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of pending memories (for example, ``8'') of the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. 8), and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to buffer number 0). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command and the number of pending memories. Three commands called notification commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are sent as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In the storage area of the starting winning reception command buffer 130SG194A, these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and pending storage number notification commands are associated, and the first special figure pending storage and the second special symbol storage are stored. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the data separately from the figure pending storage.

The memory contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as described later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending memory (buffer number "1") begins. As time progresses, the memory contents of the buffer number "0" that stores the contents of the suspended memory where the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when the variable display ends. ing.

Furthermore, in the startup winning reception command buffer 130SG194A of this feature section 130SG, a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of pending display or active display is set in the prefetch notice setting process (FIG. 284-42) to be described later. , and a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display compatible panel and the second special figure hold memory compatible panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and time saving state C1. A storage area is reserved for each buffer number.

At the time of starting winning, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning of the empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the starting winning receiving command buffer 130SG194A. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when a command is received, the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer number corresponding to the pending storage in this order. This will continue to be the case.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 130SG194A shown in FIG. 284-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer What is stored in the buffer number "0") is deleted, and what is stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1") and the start The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be stored are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative symbols ends in the stored state shown in Figure 284-13(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1". At the same time, each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number ``2'' is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number ``1'', and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number ``1'' is shifted to buffer number ``3''. ” and “4”, respectively, are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the production control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the pending storage number notification command are received, and these If commands have been received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the free area of the starting winning reception command buffer 130SG194A as a reserved memory of each special symbol.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 130SG will be explained. FIG. 284-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process shown in FIG. 277.

In the game control main processing in the feature section 130SG, when the CPU 103 executes the processing in step S7, the CPU 103 specifies the value of a variable display counter (described later) from the recovered information, and performs recovery according to the value of the specified variable display counter. A ceiling time reduction number designation command and a ceiling time reduction number designation command are transmitted (step 130SGS007a, step 130SGS007b), and the process advances to step S10. In addition, when the CPU 103 executes the process of step S9, it sets the value of the variable ceiling display counter to 685, and transmits a command for specifying the number of times the ceiling time is shortened during recovery according to the value (685) of the variable ceiling display counter. (step 130SGS009a, step 130SGS009b), and the process proceeds to step S10.

FIG. 284-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process processing in the feature section 130SG. In the special symbol process process in the feature section 130SG, the special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit", "small hit", "miss with time saving" or "big hit". The jackpot type in the case of ``Small hit'', the small hit type in the case of ``Small hit'', and the loss type with time saver in the case of ``Low time saving'' are determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. . Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (one of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, a losing symbol with a time saver, and a losing symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Ru. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, this feature section 130SG stores the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole, and establishes the start condition of the special drawing game in the winning order (also called winning order ending). say).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is set based on the predetermined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit", "small hit", "time-saving loss", or "loss". This includes processing to determine one of multiple types of variation patterns using In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss" or "miss with time saving", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening processing includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a jackpot based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a process that changes the probability in response to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023, etc. This process includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the grand prize opening from an open state to a closed state, a process of determining whether a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 130SGS024, etc. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a production operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, if the game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SGS024 when the small winning game state ends, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the small winning process ends. Furthermore, if no game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SGS024 when the small winning game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering into the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" and the small winning ending process ends.

FIG. 284-16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (130SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (130SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (130SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 130SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 130SGS102 (130SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 is set to "1" (130SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 130SGS101 (130SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit at 130SGS102 (130SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (130SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (130SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (130SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 130SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 130SGS105 (130SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 is set to "2" (130SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 130SGS103 and 130SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (130SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (130SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 130SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the processing of 130SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section 130SG154. 130SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (130SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. The random number value MR6 for determining the type of time saving and losing is used to determine the type of time saving and losing when the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is "time saving and losing". By executing the process of 130SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 130SGS110, transmission settings for a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (130SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

Following the processing of 130SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (130SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (130SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 130SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (130SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (Y in 130SGS114), the starting port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS115), and the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (N at 130SGS114), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS116), and then the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 284-40(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 130SGS 112 of FIG. 284-39 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 130SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIGS. 279 and 284-15) is performed to display special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols). It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state as a "jackpot", whether to control to the small winning gaming state as a "small hit", and whether to control to any time saving state as a "time saving hit". It will be done. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 279, S111 in FIG. 284-15, FIG. 284-19), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol with time saving are derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a jackpot or to make a small win. Before it is determined whether or not it is a loss with a time saver, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "big hit", "small hit", or "a loss with a time saver", and based on this judgment result. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-read preview such as a panel display performance or a pending preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 284-17, the CPU 103 first specifies whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 130SGS121). Then, it is determined whether the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS122a). If the starting port buffer value is 1, select the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 284-7(A) and proceed to step 130SGS123a (step 130SGS122b); The display result determination table 2 shown in 284-7(B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 130SGS123a (step 130SGS122c).

In step 130SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted in step 130SGS109 with the selected display result determination table, and determines whether the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number MR1 is outside the jackpot determination range, it is determined whether the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step 130SGS123b). If the random number value MR1 is outside the small hit determination range, it is further determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the time saving loss determination range (step 130SGS123c).

When the random number value MR1 is within the time-save attachment/loss determination range, a symbol designation command transmission setting is performed in accordance with the time-saving attachment/loss (step 130SGS124). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS125a). If the starting opening buffer value is 1, select the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. If there is, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 284-24(D) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS125c).

In step 130SGS123c, if the random number value MR1 is outside the time saving judgment value range, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command according to the loss (step 130SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS126b). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, if the gaming state is the normal state, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 284-20 (A), and if the gaming state is the time saving state. If so, select the first special symbol variation pattern determination table G and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126c).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-22 (A), the gaming state is the time saving state When the state is A2 or the time-saving state A3, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-24(A) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126d).

Further, in step 130SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command according to the small hit (step 130SGS127). Then, when the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 284-22(C), and when the gaming state is time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, The second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-23(C), and when the gaming state is one of the normal state, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2, 2 special symbol variation pattern determination table K is selected and the process proceeds to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS128).

Further, in step 130SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 130SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS130a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 284-20 (C), and the gaming state is either the time saving state. If so, select the first special symbol variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-21(B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (130SGS130b).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the normal state, the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 284-22 (B) if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1. Pattern determination table B, when the gaming state is time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 284-23(B), gaming state is normal state, time saving state B, time saving If it is in any of the states C2, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 284-24(B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS130c).

In step 130SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random value MR3 extracted in step 130SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and other (normal reach). Then, transmission settings are made for a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIG. 284-17(B)) according to the determination result, and the winning random value determination process is ended (step 130SGS132).

In addition, the commands set to be transmitted in step 130SGS124, step 130SGS126a, step 130SGS127, step 130SGS129, and step 130SGS132 are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG.

FIG. 284-18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal processing (step S110) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a pending memory in the special symbol pending storage section 130SGS151 (step 130SGS541). If there is no pending memory in the special symbol pending storage section 130SGS151, the demonstration display setting is performed and the special symbol normal processing is ended (step 130SGS572). In addition, if there is a hold memory in the special figure hold storage unit 130SGS151, the start opening buffer value, random numbers MR1 to MR3, and MR6 are read out from the hold number “1” in the special figure hold storage unit 130SGS151 and identified (step 130SGS542). . In addition, the value of the special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number for the variable display object is decreased by 1, and the storage contents of the special figure pending storage section 130SGS151 are shifted (step 130SGS543).

Further, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value specified in step 130SGS542 is 1 (step 130SGS554a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 130SGS544b), and when the starting opening buffer value is 2, when the starting opening buffer value is 2, The variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 130SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special figure designation buffer value (step 130SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read out in step 130SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set in step 130SGS555, and it is determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 130SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of the jackpot, it is further determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the small win (step 130SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small win range, that is, if the variable display result is a small win, a small win flag is set (step 130SGS588). Then, the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 284-7 (E)) is selected (step 130SGS588a), and the selected small hit type determination table is compared with the random number value MR2 read out in step 130SGS542. The type is determined (step 130SGS588b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS588c).

Further, when the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of a small hit, it is further determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of a time saving winning or losing (step 130SGS559). If the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of time savings, that is, if the variable display result is a failure, the process proceeds to step 130SGS564, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of time savings, that is, When the variable display result indicates that the time saving has been applied or not, a time saving application or failure flag is set (step 130SGS560). Then, select the time-save and miss type determination table (see Figures 284-7 (F) and 284-7 (G)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer, and use the selected time-save and miss type determination table and step By comparing the random number value MR6 read out at step 130SGS542, the type of failure with time saving is determined (step 130SGS562). Then, a buffer value for the failure type with time saving function is set in accordance with the determined failure type with time saving function, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS563).

Further, if the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 130SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS566). Then, the jackpot type determination table (see Figures 284-7(C) and 284-7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer is selected (step 130SGS567), and the selected jackpot type determination table and step The type of jackpot is determined by comparing it with the random number MR1 read out at step 130SGS542 (step 130SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS569).

In step 130SGS564, the CPU 103 determines whether the ceiling has been reached flag indicating that the time saving state B has been controlled due to the RAM being cleared or the variable display being executed 685 times since the end of the previous jackpot game has been set. do. If the ceiling reached flag is set, the process advances to step 130SGS570; if the ceiling reached flag is not set, the value of the ceiling variable display counter is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS565), and the value of the ceiling variable display counter is After setting the transmission of the ceiling time reduction number designation command according to the above, the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS565a).

Incidentally, the ceiling time reduction number designation command set to be transmitted in step 130SGS565a is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

In step 130SGS570, the CPU 103 determines a confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variation pattern setting process, and the special symbol normal process is ended (step 130SGS571).

FIG. 284-19 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure (step 130SGS131). Whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined by, for example, whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1 or not. In the case of variable display of the first special figure, select a variable pattern determination table from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21 according to the variable display result, gaming status, and number of reserved memories, and step The process advances to 130SGS135 (step 130SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is off, the gaming state is normal, and the number of first special symbols pending is 2 or less, select the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 284-20 (A). However, if the variable display result is off, the gaming state is normal, and the number of stored first special symbols is 3 or more, select variable pattern determination table B for the first special symbol shown in Figure 284-20 (B). However, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is normal, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 284-20 (C), and the variable display result is a time-saver. If the winning/losing type is time-saving winning/losing A and the gaming state is the normal state, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in Figure 284-20 (D), and the variable display result is time-saving winning/losing. When the time-saving winning/loss type is time-saving winning/missing B, the gaming state is normal, and the number of 1st special symbols pending is 2 or less, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in Figure 284-20 (E) If you select , the variable display result is ``Time-saving, ``No,'' the type of ``Time-saving, ``No,'' is ``B,'' the gaming state is normal, and the number of 1st special symbols pending is 3 or more. ) is selected. Select the first special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in ).

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is one of time saving states A to time saving states C, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-21(A) and display the variable display. If the result is a jackpot and the gaming state is one of time saving states A to time saving states C, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table H shown in Figure 284-21(B), and the variable display result will be displayed with time saving. If the game state is one of time saving states A to time saving states C, the first special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-21(C) is selected.

In addition, when the variable display executed in step 130SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, whether any of the time saving flags is set, that is, any of the time saving states from time saving state A to time saving state C. (Step 130SGS133a). If none of the time-saving flags is set, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the process advances to step 130SGS134a, and if any of the time-saving flags is set, the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state The value of the time saving state variable display number counter for counting the number of times is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS134a (step 130SGS133b).

In step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the variable display result, the gaming state, the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time-saving state), etc. -25 is selected from the variation pattern determination table, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS134b (step 130SGS134a).

For example, if the variable display result is wrong and the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-22(A), and the variable display result is a jackpot, If the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 284-22(B), the variable display result is a small hit, and the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1. If the time saving state C1 is selected, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 284-22(D).

Also, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is any of the 1st to 7th and 12th to 685th times of time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D, Figure 284-23 Select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in (A), the variable display result is jackpot, the gaming state is time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D 1~ If it is the 7th time or any of the 12th to 685th times, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in Figure 284-23 (B), the variable display result will be a small hit, and the gaming state will be after the jackpot B. If it is either time saving state A3 or time saving state A2, or the 1st to 7th time or 12th to 685th time of time saving state A3 after jackpot D, the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in Figure 284-23(C) If the variable display result shows time saving or not, and the gaming state is either time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D, 1st to 7th or 12th to 685th time. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-23(D).

In addition, the variable display result is wrong, the gaming state is normal, the 8th to 10th variable display in time saving state A3 after jackpot D, time saving in time saving state B, time saving state C2, winning notification non-execution flag not set, and 2 If it is any of the variable displays after the first time, select the second special pattern variation determination table I shown in Figure 284-24 (A), the variable display result is a jackpot, the gaming state is normal, and after the jackpot D If it is the 8th to 10th variable display in time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, select the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 284-24 (B), and select variable display. If the result is a small hit, the gaming state is normal, the 8th to 10th variable display in time-saving state A3 after jackpot D, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, the game state shown in FIG. 284-24(C) is displayed. 2. Select variable pattern determination table K for special symbols, the variable display result is time saving, the game state is either the 8th to 10th variable display in time saving state A3 after jackpot D, time saving state B, or time saving state C2. If so, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table L shown in Figure 284-24 (D), and if the variable display result is ``Time-saving'' or ``No'' and the gaming state is normal, then the table shown in Figure 284-24 (E) is selected. Select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table M shown in FIG. If either is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table N shown in FIG. 284-24(F) is selected.

The non-execution flag for winning notification of failure with time saving means that when the variable display result in any of time saving state A or time saving state B becomes ``losing with time saving B'', the time saving state under execution is This is a flag that is set to notify that after the end of the game, the time-saving state C2 will be controlled again due to the winning of "Time-saving winning B".

In addition, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table O shown in FIG. 284-25 (A), If the variable display result is a jackpot and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table P shown in FIG. 284-25 (B) and change the variable display. If the result is a small hit and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table Q shown in FIG. 284-25(C) and change the variable display result. If the time saving is off and the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, the second special pattern variation pattern determination table R shown in FIG. 284-25(D) is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 284-23 to 284-25, whether the time saving state A3 is after jackpot B or after jackpot D can be determined from the gaming state designation command stored in the jackpot end process described later. (See step 130SGS340 in FIG. 284-41).

After executing step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving winning notification non-execution flag if it is set, and proceeds to step 130SGS135 (step 130SGS134b).

In step 130SGS135, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern by comparing the variation pattern determination table selected in step 130SGS132 or step 130SGS134b with the random number value MR3 read in step 130SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing. Then, settings are made to start variable display of the special symbol (step 130SGS136), and settings are made to send various commands for starting variable display, such as a variation pattern designation command and a variable display result designation command according to the determined variation pattern ( Step 130SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the fluctuation pattern (Step 130SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is ended (step 130SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 130SGS137 are transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in Figure 284-26, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol variation time is 12000ms. Non-reach is off (PA1-1), special figure variation time is 5000ms, shortened non-reach is off (PA1-2), special figure variation time is 20000ms, normal reach is off (PA2-1), special figure variation time is off Super reach α with 43000ms is off (PA2-2), super reach β with special figure variation time of 53000ms is off (PA2-3), and super reach α with special figure variation time of 53000ms is in the middle (PA2-4). If the variable display result is "Jackpot", a normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) with a special pattern fluctuation time of 20,000 + 15,000ms, and a super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) with a special pattern fluctuation time of 43,000 + 15,000ms. , determine the fluctuation pattern from among the Super Reach β jackpots (PB1-3) where the special figure fluctuation time is 53000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "Long time", Super Reach α whose special figure fluctuation time is 55000ms. Variable from among the following: non-reach time shortening (PA2-6), special figure fluctuation time 12,000 ms (PA2-7), and non-reach time shortening losing (PA2-8) with special figure fluctuation time 5000ms. Decide on a pattern.

In addition, regarding the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal control state, the random number MR3 allocation is set as shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21, so the non-reach fluctuation pattern The pattern is the easiest to determine, and the variation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are the most difficult to determine. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21, so the super reach β The variation pattern is the easiest to determine, and the variation patterns of super reach α and normal reach are the most difficult to determine. Therefore, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed with a non-reach variation pattern, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is lowest, and the normal reach, It is set so that the percentage of variable display results that become jackpots increases in the order of the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special figure variation time is, the lower the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and the longer the special figure variation time is set, the higher the rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot.

In addition, if the gaming state is in any of the time saving states, as shown in Figure 284-26, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol fluctuation time is 500 ms and the non-reach is off (PA1-3 ), and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", it is decided to be the variation pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot (PB1-4) where the special figure variation time is 50000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "With time saving". If it is a "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach time shortened/miss (PA2-5) with a special figure variation time of 500 ms.

Regarding the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 284-27 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol variation time is The fluctuation pattern is decided to be non-reach jackpot (PA3-1) which is 2000ms, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is decided to be non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 2000 + 15000ms. However, if the variable display result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with special figure fluctuation time of 2000ms, and if the variable display result is "Lose with short time" , the special figure fluctuation time is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of non-reach time reduction and loss (PA3-9) with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (B), when the gaming state is time saving state A1, if the variable display result is "miss", the super reach δ with the special figure variation time of 50000 ms is off ( PA3-5) is determined, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the variable display result is determined to be the Super Reach δ Jackpot (PB3-3), where the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000+15000ms, and the variable display result is If it is a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ small hit (PC3-3) with the special figure fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "miss with time saving", the special figure fluctuation time The fluctuation pattern of super reach δ time reduction with 50000 ms (PA3-8) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-27(C), when the gaming state is the time saving state A3 after jackpot B, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms. If the fluctuation pattern is determined to be out of reach (PA3-1) and the variable display result is "jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with special symbol fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and the variable display is If the result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with special pattern fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms is decided, and if the variable display result is "Low with short time", special pattern fluctuation A variation pattern of non-reach time reduction and failure (PA3-6) with a time of 2000 ms is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (D), if the gaming state is the 1st to 7th variable display in time saving state A2, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure variation time is The fluctuation pattern is determined from the non-reach deviation (PA3-2) which is 7000ms and the normal reach deviation (PA3-4) where the special figure fluctuation time is 20000ms, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the special figure fluctuation time If the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) where is 20000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern is set to a normal reach small hit (PC3-2) where the special figure fluctuation time is 20000 + 15000ms. If the variable display result is "miss with short time", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be normal reach with short time (PA3-7) where the special figure fluctuation time is 20000 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-27(E), when the gaming state is the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, when the gaming state is the first to seventh variable display in the time saving state A3, the variable display If the result is "miss", determine the variation pattern from the non-reach miss (PA3-2) where the special symbol variation time is 7000ms and the normal reach miss (PA3-4) where the special symbol variation time is 20000ms, and change the variation pattern. If the display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) is decided, where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20,000 + 15,000ms, and if the variable display result is "Small hit", the special symbol fluctuation time is 20,000 + 15,000ms. If the variable display result is "Normal Reach Small Hit (PC3-2)", the fluctuation pattern is set to "Normal Reach Short Hit (PA3-7)" where the special figure fluctuation time is 20000ms. Determine.

In addition, when the gaming state is the 8th to 10th variable display in time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern of non-reach miss (PA3-1) where the special figure variation time is 2000 ms , and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the special symbol variation time is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) fluctuation pattern of 2000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "Small hit", If the fluctuation pattern of a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms is decided, and the variable display result is "Loss with time saving", then a non-reach short hit with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 ms is selected. (PA3-6) is determined as the fluctuation pattern.

Also, when the gaming state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss (PA3-3) with a special figure variation time of 15000 ms. However, if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the variation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) with special figure variation time of 20000 + 15000ms is decided, and if the variable display result is "Small hit", the special figure variation is decided. If the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach small hit (PC3-2) whose time is 20000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "miss with time saving", then normal reach with short winning time when the special figure variation time is 20000 ms (PA3-7) to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Then, when the game state is the 12th to 685th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure is marked as a non-reach miss (PA3-2) with a special figure variation time of 7000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal reach miss (PA3-4) where the fluctuation time is 20000ms, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20000 + 15000ms. If the variable display result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined to normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with special figure fluctuation time of 20,000 + 15,000 ms, and even if the variable display result is "Short hit". For example, the variation pattern is determined to be normal reach time shortened and missed (PA3-7) where the special figure variation time is 20000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-28, when the gaming state is time saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms and the non-reach is off (PA3-1). If the variable display result is a "big hit", the variable display result is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with a special symbol variation time of 2000+15000ms, and the variable display result is a "small hit". If there is, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "miss with time saving", a non-reach with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000ms. The fluctuation pattern of time saving and failure (PA3-6) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-29 (A), when the gaming state is the time saving state C1, if the variable display result is "miss", the super reach δ with the special figure variation time of 50000 ms is off ( PA3-5) is determined, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the variable display result is determined to be the Super Reach δ Jackpot (PB3-3), where the special symbol fluctuation time is 50000+15000ms, and the variable display result is If it is a "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ small hit (PC3-3) with the special figure fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "miss with time saving", the special figure fluctuation time The fluctuation pattern of super reach δ time reduction with 50000 ms (PA3-8) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-29(B), when the gaming state is the time saving state C2, the winning notification non-execution flag with time saving is set, or the first variable in the time saving state C2 is set. In the case of display, if the variable display result is "miss", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss (PA3-10) with special symbol fluctuation time of 30000ms is decided, and even if the variable display result is "jackpot" For example, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) in which the special figure fluctuation time is 2000+15000ms, and the variable display result is "small hit", the non-reach small hit (PB3-1) whose special figure fluctuation time is 2000+15000ms is determined. PC3-1) is determined to be the variation pattern, and if the variable display result is ``miss with time reduction'', the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach time reduction with failure (PA3-6) in which the special figure variation time is 2000 ms.

In addition, when the gaming state is the 2nd to 685th variable display in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure variation time is 2000 ms and the non-reach miss (PA3-1) If the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit", the variable pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with a special symbol fluctuation time of 2000+15000ms, and if the variable display result is a "small hit". For example, if the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) where the special figure fluctuation time is 2000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "miss with time saving", then the non-reach time shortening whose special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms is determined. The fluctuation pattern of hit/miss (PA3-6) is determined.

Next, the average variable display time of the second special symbol when the variable display result is wrong in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2 in the present characteristic part 130SG. will be explained based on FIGS. 284-30 to 284-32.

First, in the case where the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1, only PA3-5 where the special figure variation time is 50000 ms is determined (see Figure 284-22 (A) and Figure 284-27 (B)) ) Therefore, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1 is 50000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(A).

In addition, regarding the case where the variable display result is blurred in time-saving state A2, PA3-2 with a special figure variation time of 7000ms has a ratio of 100/997, and PA3-4 with a special figure variation time of 20000ms has a ratio of 897/997. Since each variable pattern is determined at a rate of 997 (see Figure 284-23 (A) and Figure 284-27 (D)), the average variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in time saving state A2. The time is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(B).

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off in the time saving state A3 after jackpot B, the ratio of PA3-2 whose special figure fluctuation time is 7000ms is 100/997, and the ratio of PA3-2 whose special figure fluctuation time is 20000ms. 4 is determined as a variation pattern at a ratio of 897/997 (see Figures 284-23(A) and 284-27(C)). The average variable display time in the figure is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(C).

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off for the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, for the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display, PA3-2 whose special figure variation time is 7000ms is Since PA3-4 with a ratio of 100/997 and a special figure fluctuation time of 20000ms is determined as a fluctuation pattern at a ratio of 897/997 (see Figure 284-23 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)) , the average variable display time of the second special symbols of the 1st to 7th times and the 12th to 685th times in which the variable display result is a loss in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D is 18696. It becomes 08825ms. Furthermore, for the 5th to 8th variable displays, only PA3-6 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined as a variation pattern (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)), In the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, the average variable display time of the 8th to 10th second special symbols in which the variable display result is a loss is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). Then, for the 11th variable display, only PA3-3 with a special figure variation time of 15000ms is determined as a variation pattern (see Figure 284-25 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)), so it is a jackpot. In the time saving state A3 after D, the average variable display time of the 11th second special figure in which the variable display result is off is 15000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special symbol in which the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D is 18617.57093 ms.

Then, based on the values calculated in Figures 284-30 (C) and 284-30 (D), calculate the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is off in the entire time saving state A3. Then, according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(E), the time becomes 18656.82959 ms.

From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1 to time saving state A3 is 22904.91502 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (F).

In addition, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is a loss in the time-saving state A3 calculated in Figure 284-30 (D) is the case where the variable display result is a loss in the time-saving state A3. This is the value when the time saving state A3 ends after the variable display is executed 685 times without winning in any of the winning states and without being controlled by the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variable display results are changed in time-saving state A3 in consideration of the case where a jackpot, small win, or time-saving win is won during time-saving state A3, or the case where time-saving state B is controlled during time-saving state A3. You may calculate the average variable display time of the second special figure in the case where it becomes.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is incorrect in time saving state B, only PA3-1 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-28). In the time saving state B, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-31.

In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect in the time saving state C1, only PA3-5 with a special figure variation time of 50000 ms is determined (see Figure 284-22 (A) and Figure 284-29 (A)) ) Therefore, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state C1 is 50000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32(A).

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off in the time saving state C2, only PA3-10 with a special figure variation time of 30000 ms is determined as the variation pattern for the first variable display (Figure 284-24 ( F) and Figure 284-29 (B)), the average variable display time of the second special figure for the first time in which the variable display result is off in time saving state C2 is 30000 ms according to the formula shown in Figure 284-32 (B). Become. Then, for the 2nd to 685th variable display, only PA3-1 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined as the variation pattern (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-29 (B)), In time saving state C2, the average variable display time of the 2nd to 685th special symbols in which the variable display result is off is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32(B). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state C2 is 2040.875912 ms.

Then, based on the numerical values calculated in these Figures 284-32 (A) and 284-32 (B), the average variable of the second special figure when the variable display result is off in the entire time saving state C1 and time saving state C2 The display time is calculated as 20620.43795 ms using the formula shown in FIG. 284-32(C).

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 284-30 to 284-32, in this feature section 130SG, when comparing the time saving state B and the entire time saving state C, the variable display result in the time saving state C is higher than that in the time saving state B. The average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure that is off is set to be long. Further, when comparing the time saving state B and the time saving state C1, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure that causes the variable display result to be off is set longer in the time saving state C1 than in the time saving state B. Furthermore, when comparing the entire time-saving state A and the time-saving state C2, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure that causes the variable display result to be off is set longer in the overall time-saving state A than in the time-saving state C2. has been done.

284-33 and 284-34 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 130SGS201). If the symbol confirmation period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 130SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command is performed ( Step 130SGS203). The symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS204). When the jackpot flag is set, if any time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is cleared (step 130SGS205), and the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 130SGS206). Furthermore, the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command is performed depending on the jackpot type, and the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS207 , step 130SGS208). The winning start designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

Furthermore, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 130SGS201, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 130SGS209), and determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 130SGS210). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out, it is further determined whether the stopped symbol being derived or displayed is a missed symbol or a missed symbol with a short time reduction. It is determined whether or not (step 130SGS211). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a missed symbol or a time-save missed symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 130SGS212). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is not a winning symbol or a short-time winning symbol, it is determined whether the derived and displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 130SGS213). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, the special symbol stop process is ended (step 130SGS214), and the derived and displayed symbol is If the current stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process and the special symbol stop process is ended (step 130SGS215).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 130SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time saving counter α is 1 or more (step 130SGS216). In addition, the total time saving number counter α is the sum of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol in the time saving state A and time saving state B ("5", "11", " 689) is the counter to be set.

When the value of the total time saving number counter α is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter α is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the finished variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 130SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, the process advances to step 130SGS220, and if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (if the finished variable display is the variable display of the second special figure), the process proceeds to step 130SGS220. The value of the 2 special figure time saving counter α is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS220 (step 130SGS219). In addition, the second special symbol time saving number counter α is set to the maximum time saving control number (any one of "1", "7", and "685") of the second special symbol in time saving state A and time saving state B. It is a counter.

In step 130SGS220, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time saving counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS220). In addition, the total time saving number counter β is a counter to which the sum value ("5" or "689") of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol is set in the time saving state C. It is.

When the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter β is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS221). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the finished variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 130SGS222). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, the process advances to step 130SGS224, and if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (if the finished variable display is the variable display of the second special figure), the process proceeds to step 130SGS224. 2. The value of the special figure time saving number counter β is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS224 (step 130SGS223). The second special symbol time saving number counter β is a counter to which the maximum time saving control number (“1” or “685”) of the second special symbol is set in the time saving state C.

In step 130SGS224, the CPU 103 selects one of the time-saving A flags (the time-saving A1 flag indicating that the time-saving state is A1, the time-saving A2 flag indicating that the time-saving state is A2, and the time-saving A3 flag indicating that the time-saving state is A3). ) is set. If any of the time saving A flags is not set, the process advances to step 130SGS230, and if any of the time saving A flags is not set, the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter α is It is determined whether or not has become 0, that is, whether the variable display of the maximum number of times of time saving control has ended in the controlled time saving state (step 130SGS225). If the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are not 0, proceed to step 130SGS230, and if the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter α is 0 clears the set time saving A flag (step 130SGS226) and also clears the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α (step 130SGS227).

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time saving counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS228). If the value of the total time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, the process advances to step 130SGS230, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the time saving C2 flag indicating that the time saving state C2 is set is set and the process proceeds to step 130. The process advances to 130SGS230 (step 130SGS229).

In step 130SGS230, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving B flag indicating the time saving state B is set. If the time saving B flag is not set, the process advances to step 130SGS236, and if the time saving B flag is set, it is further checked whether the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0. Determination is made (step 130SGS231). If the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are not 0, the process advances to step 130SGS236, and if the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter α is 0, the time saving number counter α is 0. The B flag is cleared (step 130SGS232), and the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are cleared (step 130SGS233).

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time reduction counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS234). If the value of the total time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step 130SGS236, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the time saving C2 flag indicating that the time saving state C2 is set is set and the process proceeds to step 130. The process advances to 130SGS236 (step 130SGS235).

In step 130SGS236, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time saving C flags (the time saving C1 flag indicating that the time saving state is C1 or the time saving C2 flag indicating that the time saving state C2 is in effect) is set. If none of the time saving C flags is set, the process advances to step 130SGS240, and if any of the time saving C flags is set, the value of the total time saving number counter β or the second special symbol time saving number counter β is 0. It is determined whether or not (step 130SGS237). If the values of the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β are not 0, proceed to step 130SGS240, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β or the second special symbol time saving number counter β is 0, set The current time saving C flag is cleared (step 130SGS238), and the values of the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β are cleared, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS240 (step 130SGS239).

In step 130SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small win flag is set, transmission settings for a win start 3 designation command or a win 4 start designation command are performed depending on the small win type, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242. In addition, the winning start 3 designation command and the winning 4 start designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 has already cleared the RAM or set the ceiling reached flag indicating that variable display has been executed 685 times since the end of the previous jackpot game and the time saving state B has been controlled. It is determined whether or not there is one (step 130SGS251a). If the ceiling reached flag is set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS258, and if the ceiling reached flag is not set, the value of the ceiling variable display counter is 0, that is, the finished variable display is cleared from RAM or the previous one. It is determined whether the variable display is 685 times since the end of the jackpot game (step 130SGS251b). If the value of the variable ceiling display counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 130SGS258, and if the value of the variable ceiling display counter is 0, the ceiling reached flag and time saving B flag are set (step 130SGS251c, step 130SGS252). Further, the total time saving number counter is set to "689" and the second special symbol time saving number counter α is set to "685", and the process proceeds to step 130SGS255 (step 130SGS253, step 130SGS254).

In step 130SGS255, the CPU 103 determines whether any time saving C flag is set. If none of the time saving C flags is set, the process advances to step 130SGS242, and if any of the time saving C flags is set, the set time saving C flag is cleared, and the total time saving number counter β and The value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is cleared (step 130SGS256, step 130SGS257a). Further, the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS257b).

In step 130SGS258, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set. If the time saving addition/off flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS242, and if the time saving addition/off flag is set, the time saving addition/off type is specified (step 130SGS259), and the specified time saving addition/off type is set. It is determined whether the deviation is A (step 130SGS260).

When the specified time saving attachment/missing type is time saving attachment/missing A, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter β is 1 or more. If the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the process advances to step 130SGS242, and if the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, either the time saving A flag or the time saving B It is determined whether the flag is set (step 130SGS262a). If either the time-saving A flag or the time-saving B flag is set, the process advances to step 130SGS263, and if neither the time-saving A flag nor the time-saving B flag is set, the time-saving C1 flag is set, and the time-saving state variable The display count counter is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS263 (step 130SGS262b, step 130SGS262c).

In step 130SGS263, the CPU 103 sets the total time saving counter β to "5". Further, the second special symbol time saving number counter is set to "1" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS264).

On the other hand, in step 130SGS260, when the specified time saving with loss type is time saving with loss B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is the normal state (step 130SGS265). If the gaming state is not the normal state, the process advances to step 130SGS267, and if the gaming state is the normal state, it is further determined whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2, that is, the finished variable display is the second feature. It is determined whether the diagram is a variable display (step 130SGS266). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 130SGS267, and if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2, the process proceeds to step 130SGS268.

In step 130SGS267, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set. If either the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set, the process advances to step 130SGS268. In step 130SGS268, a time-saving winning notification non-execution flag is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS272.

Further, if neither the time saving A flag nor the time saving B flag is set in step 130SGS268, the CPU 103 determines whether the time saving C2 flag has already been set (step 130SGS269). If the time saving C2 flag has not already been set, the time saving C2 flag is set (step 130SGS270), the time saving state variable display count counter is set to "0", and the process proceeds to step 130SGS272.

In step 130SGS272, the CPU 103 sets the second special symbol time saving counter β to "685". Further, the total time reduction counter β is set to "689" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS273).

If the time saving C2 flag has already been set in step 130SGS269, the CPU 103 compares the value set in the second special figure time saving counter with "685" (step 130SGS274), and sets the second special figure time saving number. It is determined whether the value set in the counter is 685 or less (step 130SGS275). If the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is not 685 or less, proceed to step 130SGS242, and if the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is 685 or less, step 130SGS271, 130SGS272 , 130SGS273 are executed and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242.

Then, in step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value in accordance with the situation in the symbol determination period timer, and performs transmission settings for a symbol determination period designation command in accordance with the set value. Furthermore, the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command according to the gaming state is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 130SGS243).

The symbol confirmation period designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. If the variable display result shows that the time saving is not included (when the value of the special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more), the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β are displayed according to the type of the time saving not being included. When the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, a value of 1 or more is set in the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the game state is If the variable display result shows that the time saving is not included in any of the states B (when the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α are 1 or more), the time saving number is not included. The value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α (remaining variable display number of times when time-saving control can be executed in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B) and the value (1 or 685), and if the value corresponding to the type of failure with time saving is larger than the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter α, the time saving state in progress (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, at the end of the time-saving state B), the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) according to the type of time-saving addition/loss, while the value corresponding to the time-saving/loss type is set to the second characteristic. If the value is less than the value of the time saving counter α, after the current time saving state (any of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, or time saving state B) ends, the time saving state will change to the time saving state according to the type of time saving. It may be controlled to the normal state without any control. As a result, if the variable display result shows time saving or not in any of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B, these time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 , time-saving state B can be followed by time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, making it possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2 is controlled, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

FIGS. 284-35 to 284-38 are diagrams showing symbol determination periods according to each situation. In the process of step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 may set the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to the symbol determination period for each situation shown in FIGS. 284-35 to 284-38.

In this feature section 130SG, four types of symbol confirmation periods, 0.5 seconds, 6 seconds, 20 seconds, and 81.4 seconds, are set as the pattern confirmation period, as shown in FIGS. 284-35 to 284-38. There is. In particular, in some cases, such as when the variable display result is a time-shortening error or when the variable display result is incorrect and the variable display is the 685th time, the symbol confirmation period will be 6 seconds, 20 seconds, or 81.4 seconds. As a result, it is possible to execute a rush performance for being controlled to the corresponding time saving state during these symbol determination periods. On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a time-saving result, the symbol confirmation period becomes 0.5 seconds, making it impossible to execute the rush effect for being controlled to the corresponding time-saving state during these symbol confirmation periods. There are also those who do. The shortest of these multiple symbol confirmation periods, 0.5 seconds, is sufficient time for the player to visually recognize the stopped decorative symbol, and the next variable display will not be executed (or the performance will not be executed). The time has been set to minimize the stress caused by (not progressing) as much as possible.

FIG. 284-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 284-15 as the small win opening process. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the opening time timer. -1 (130SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the open time timer has timed out (130SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process moves to 130SGS293, and if the opening time timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (130SGS283). If it is the timing to open the big winning hole, the CPU 103 controls the big winning hole to open by driving the solenoid 130SG083 (130SGS284). Then, the transmission setting of the big prize opening designation command corresponding to the round is performed (130SGS285), and the process moves to 130SGS286. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 130SGS285, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the timing to open the big prize opening, the process moves to 130SGS286 without going through 130SGS284 and 130SGS285.

At 130SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the big prize opening (130SGS286). When it is the closing timing of the big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 130SG083 (130SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the specified command after opening the big winning hole according to the round is performed (130SGS288), and the process moves to 130SGS289. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 130SGS288, is transmitted to the performance control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the timing to close the big prize opening, the process moves to 130SGS289 without passing through 130SGS287 and 130SGS288.

At 130SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on (130SGS289). If the second count switch 130SG024 is not turned on, the small winning opening process is finished, and if the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on, it means that the second count switch 130SG024 is already turned on; That is, it is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024 is set (130SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win opening process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (130SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a V winning prize notification command to the production control board 12 (130SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 130SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10", which is the value corresponding to the small hit ending process (S120) (130SGS293), and ends the small hit opening process.

FIG. 284-40 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 130SGS 120 in FIG. 284-15 as the small hit ending process. In the small winning ending process, the CPU 103 It is determined whether there is one (130SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (130SGS301; N), clear the small hit flag (130SGS302), and set to send a win end designation command according to the small win to the production control board 12 (130SGS303) ). The winning end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Then, a value corresponding to the small winning end display time is set in the small winning end display timer (130SGS304), and the small winning ending process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is in operation, the value of the small win end display timer is decreased by 1 (130SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (130SGS306). If the small hit end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on (130SGS307). If the second count switch 130SG024 is not turned on, the small winning end process is finished, and if the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on, it means that the second count switch 130SG024 has already been turned on, i.e. It is determined whether the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024 is set (130SGS308). If the V winning flag is set, the small win ending process is ended, and if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (130SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the performance control board 12 (130SGS310), and ends the small winning end process. Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Further, when the small winning end display time has elapsed in 130SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (130SGS311). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (130SGS312, 130SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (130SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 284-7 (E), if the small hit type in which the V winning occurred is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C", and the corresponding When the small win type in which the V winning occurs is "small win B", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D". Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 (130SGS315), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 130SGS316, step 130SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) ( 130SGS318), the small hit end process is ended.

In other words, in this feature section 130SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 not only during the small winning game but also during the period after the small winning game ends until the small winning end display time elapses. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening just before the end of the small hit game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 and the jackpot game is executed after the small win end process is completed. It looks like this.

In addition, if the V winning flag is not set in 130SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (130SGS319), which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the small hit is Finish the termination process.

FIG. 284-41 is a flowchart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 284-15. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 130SGS322a), and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 130SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. In addition, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 130SGS322c). .

In addition, if the jackpot end display timer is operating in step 130SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is -1 (step 130SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 130SGS324). ). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end processing is ended, and if the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 130SGS325) . If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special figure time saving number counter α is set to “1”, and the total time saving number counter α is set to “5” (step 130SGS326, step 130SGS327). Then, the time saving A1 flag indicating that the time saving state A1 is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS327a).

Further, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D (step 130SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D, the second special figure time saving number counter α is set to “685” and the total time saving number counter α is set to “689” (step 130SGS329, step 130SGS330). Then, the time saving A3 flag indicating that the time saving state A3 is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS330a).

In addition, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot D, the jackpot type is jackpot C, and the second special figure time saving number counter α is set to “7”, and the total time saving number counter α is set to “7”. "11" is set (step 130SGS335, step 130SGS336). Then, the time saving A2 flag indicating that the time saving state A2 is controlled is set and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS336a).

In step 130SGS339, the CPU 103 clears the ceiling reached flag if it has been set. Then, the ceiling variable display counter is set to "685" (step 130SGS339a), and the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command according to the executed jackpot type is performed (step 130SGS339b). Incidentally, the game state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Further, the gaming state specifying command for which transmission settings have been made is stored (step 130SGS340), and the time-saving state variable display count counter is set to "0", thereby terminating the jackpot termination process.

FIG. 284-42 is a flowchart showing the production control process processing in the feature section 130SG. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 284-42, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read notice setting process in the feature unit 130SG, based on the production control command at the time of start-up winning transmitted from the main board 11, in the normal state, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2, As a pre-read notice, there is a pending display notice effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the display mode of the pending display, and one variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 and the second one immediately after that. 2 Panel images are displayed on the image display device 5 for four variable displays of special symbols, and the panel effect suggests that the variable display results will be a jackpot at different ratios depending on the display mode of these panel images. is now executable. In addition, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as a pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the performance target in the start winning reception command buffer 130SGS194A. , when it is decided to execute the panel display effect, by setting a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display as the panel display flag value corresponding to the reserved memory of the effect target in the start winning reception command buffer 130SGS194A. , it is sufficient to start displaying these pending displays and panel displays (see FIG. 284-14(B)).

Further, the performance control CPU 120 executes a result performance execution process (step 130SGS162). In the result performance execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and the last variable display in the time saving state (time saving state A1 and time saving state C1 is When the four variable displays (immediately after the end of the time saving state) are finished and the control is returned to the normal state (during the pattern confirmation period), the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are displayed on the image display device. Processing for executing the result presentation displayed in step 5 is performed. In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the time saving state A3 is controlled, the result effect may be exceptionally executed from the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special symbol to the 11th variable display. be.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 executes a rush performance execution process (step 130SGS162). In the entry performance execution process, for example, the time saving state A (any of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3) is controlled from the ending performance of the jackpot game to the first variable display after the jackpot game. Or, the time saving state was controlled to the time saving state B during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display for the 685th time after clearing the RAM or the previous jackpot game, and the time saving state during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display where the variable display result was "time saving with loss" A rush effect is executed to notify that the control is set to C (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S170 to S172 as in FIG. 284. The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 sends commands (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command, Based on receiving either the confirmation command or the fourth symbol confirmation command, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped for the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (entering performance or result performance shown in FIG. 284-44) according to the variable display result, the variable display number, and the transition of the game state. Although the details will be described later, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the rush performance not only during the waiting process for a special figure, but also during some variable display (during execution of the variable display performance process).

Further, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command specifying to start a jackpot game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11 at the end of the symbol determination period. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to "4". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small winning game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6", which is a value corresponding to the small winning performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit production process in step 130SGS176 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "7" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

FIG. 284-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 284 and 284-42. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received. Determination is made (step 130SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold memory in the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A are transferred to the buffer. The number is shifted upward by one number (step 130SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process ends. After executing step 130SGS602, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 130SGS605), and selects the stop symbol of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 130SGS606).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 controls the ceiling for displaying on the image display device 5 the remaining number of variable display times until the variable display number reaches 685 after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the previous jackpot game. A display process for displaying the remaining number of times the time has been reached (step 130SGS607), a process for displaying the remaining number of time-saving controls (step 130SGS608) for displaying the remaining number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state on the image display device 5 (step 130SGS608), and displaying the number of remaining time-saving controls in the time-saving state. Time-saving end countdown display processing (step 130SGS609) for displaying a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (countdown effect, also referred to as time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 when the predetermined number of times has been reached (step 130SGS609), variable display A variable display preview performance determination process (step 130SGS610) is executed to execute a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variable pattern, gaming state, and variable display result (step 130SGS611), and starts a process timer (step 130SGS612).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Note that, as will be described later, in this feature section 130SG, a mode in which the remaining number of time savings is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A2, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage etc. during variable display when it is controlled in any of the time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, the power Even if the system recovers, the display of the remaining number of time savings will not be restarted during the relevant variable display, and even if the display of the remaining number of time savings is restarted at the start of the next variable display (timing when the value of the time savings counter is updated). good. In addition, when the power supply is controlled to any of the time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, but there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed (while waiting for a customer), Even if it is stopped, the display of the remaining number of time savings will not be restarted even when the power is restored, and the remaining number of time savings will be displayed from the variable display at the start of the next variable display or after the value of the time savings counter is updated. All you have to do is restart.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (130SGS613). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (130SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (130SGS615). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (130SGS616).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is displayed according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S173).

By executing the processing included in the performance control process processing by the performance control CPU 120 as described above, in the time saving state in the characteristic section 130SG, as shown in FIG. BATTLE performance, BATTLE RUSH performance, result performance A, and result performance B can be executed. Among these performances, rush performance A is a performance that is executed when time saving control is started, and is a performance that notifies the start of time saving state A1 and time saving state C1, and rush performance B is a performance that is executed when time saving control is started. This is a performance that is executed when the time saving state is started, and is a performance that notifies the start of the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2.

The FINAL BATTLE performance is a performance that is executed during the variable display of time saving state A1 and time saving state C1 and the subsequent variable display of the second special figure up to four times in the normal state. The character displayed in the display effect) battles with the enemy character and wins to acquire BATTLE RUSH. This is an effect that notifies you that the game will be controlled to the time saving state A2 or the time saving state A3 after the end of the game.

The BATTLE RUSH production is a production executed in the variable display of Time Saving State A2, Time Saving State A3, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C2, in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, and a movable object falls during the variable display. (the ally character wins), BATTLE RUSH continues (by being controlled to the jackpot game state or small win game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving state A2 or time saving state A3 is established after the jackpot game ends) This is a performance to notify that the government will be controlled by the government.

Result performance A is a performance that is executed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends up to four times after the time saving control ends in time saving state A1 and time saving state C1, and is a performance that is executed from the first hit to the time saving state. This is an effect that notifies the end of the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE) by displaying on the image display device 5 the number of jackpots and the number of prize balls won until the end of the time saving state A1 or C1 (FINAL BATTLE).

Result performance B is a performance that is executed when time saving control ends in time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, and includes the number of jackpots and the acquisition from the first hit to the end of the time saving state. This is an effect that notifies the end of time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH) by displaying the number of prize balls won on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the result performance B may exceptionally be executed during the 11th variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A3.

Of these performances, rush performance A and rush performance B are executed according to the timing when the variable display result becomes time-saving or not, or when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous variable display reaches 685 times. The presence or absence and execution timing are different. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (A), in the normal state, if the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous variable display reaches 685 (the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied), If rush effect B is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the ceiling time saving variable display (685th variable display) and the variable display result is A with time saving (the start condition of time saving state C1 is met), with time saving. If the entry effect A is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the losing A winning variable display, and the variable display result becomes losing B with time saving (the start condition of time saving state C2 is established), the winning variable display of losing B winning with time saving is executed. Run performance B is executed during the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, in the time saving state A1, if the variable display result becomes A with time saving and failure (the start condition of time saving state C1 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes B with time saving. If (the start condition for the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the entry effect B is executed during the variable display in the time saving state A1.

In addition, in time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, the variable display result was "With time saving off A" or "With time saving off B" (the start condition for time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 was satisfied). In either case, the rush effect is not executed.

In time saving state C1, when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous variable display reaches 685 (the start condition for time saving state B is met), the ceiling time saving variable display (variable display of time saving state C1 In addition, if rush performance B is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display), and the variable display result is B with a time saver (the start condition for the time saver state C2 is met), a B win with a time saver is executed. Run-in effect B is executed during variable display of the display (variable display of time saving state C1). Incidentally, when the variable display result is time saving with failure A (the start condition of the time saving state C1 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed.

Furthermore, with respect to result performance A and result performance B, whether or not to execute them and the execution timing thereof differ depending on the target time saving state. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (D), when the target is time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1, result effect A is changed to the fourth variable of the second special figure immediately after time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1. If it is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the display and the time saving state A2 is targeted, the result performance B is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the final variable display (variable display of the 7th second special symbol). In addition, for time-saving state A3 and time-saving state B after jackpot B, neither result performance A nor result performance B is executed, and for time-saving state A3 after jackpot D, the second special figure in time-saving state A3 is executed. Result performance B is executed from the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display to the 11th variable display, and in the symbol confirmation period of the final variable display (685th variable display of the second special symbol), result production A is executed. Neither result performance B nor result performance B is executed.

As described above, the variable display in the feature section 130SG can display the remaining number of time savings and count down the end of time savings. The time saving remaining number display and time saving end countdown are generally displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 284-46. For example, regarding the time-saving end countdown, in the final 10 variable displays in the time-saving state, a number corresponding to the number of variable displays is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start timing of the variable display. be done. In addition, regarding the remaining number of times of time saving, display on the image display device 5 is started from the first variable display start timing when the time saving state is controlled. Further, the numerical value displayed as the remaining number of times of time saving (a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays) is updated at the timing when each variable display is started. The example shown in FIG. 284-46 is a display of the time saving end countdown and the remaining number of time saving times for time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, but for time saving state A2, a variable display indicating that time saving control is executed is displayed. Since the number of times is 7, the time saving state end countdown and the display of the remaining time saving number are started from the start timing of the first variable display.

Here, the display of the remaining number of time-savings and the time-saving end countdown differ in whether or not they are executed or not and in how they are displayed, depending on the starting situation of the target time-saving state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45(B), in the time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal time saving remaining amount is displayed on the image display device 5. Displays the number of times. In addition, regarding the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 at the time when the start condition is satisfied is The display is maintained without changing from the display to the display of the number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction state C1.

Further, for the time saving state C2 where the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the display of the remaining number of time saving times may be changed from the display corresponding to the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3. Maintain without. Then, when the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 are ended and the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state C2, the display of the remaining number of time saving times is not changed to the display of the remaining time saving number according to the time saving state C2. It will be hidden.

Further, for the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time reductions in the time saving state B at the time when the start condition is satisfied is changed to the display of the number of time reductions corresponding to the time saving state C1. Maintain display without any problems.

Further, in the time saving state C2 where the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving times is maintained without changing from the display corresponding to the time saving state B. Then, when the time saving state B ends and the time saving state C2 is controlled, the display of the remaining time saving number is not changed to the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to the time saving state C2, but is hidden.

In addition, for the time saving state B in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, first, the shutter is activated in the display area of the image display device 5 where the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is displayed. By displaying the image, a shutter effect is executed to temporarily make the image displayed in the display area invisible or difficult to see. Then, when the shutter image is not displayed due to being controlled to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time savings is switched to the display of the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving state B.

In addition, for the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 that is being executed (the first time saving state shown in FIG. 284-45(B)) is The display of the remaining number of times is maintained without changing to the display of the remaining number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving state C1 (second time-saving state shown in FIG. 284-45(B)) in which the start condition is satisfied.

In addition, for the time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, first, the display of the remaining number of working hours according to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 as the first time saving state is displayed as the second time saving state. The display of the remaining number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction state C2 is maintained without being changed. After the time saving state C1 or C2 as the first time saving state ends, the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C1 or C2 as the first time saving state is displayed as the second time saving state. The remaining time saving count is not displayed without being changed to the display corresponding to the time saving state C2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45(C), in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, regardless of whether the start condition for any of the time saving states is satisfied during these time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1. The image display device 5 does not display a countdown effect (time saving end countdown).

In addition, in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2, there are cases in which the start conditions for any of the time saving states are not satisfied during the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2, and a case in which the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, When the start conditions for the time saving state C2 are met, a countdown effect (time saving end countdown) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the final 10 variable displays for the currently running time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state C2. Perform display. In addition, when the countdown effect (time saving end countdown) is already being displayed on the image display device 5 in the final 10 variable displays for these time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state C2, the time saving state is displayed. When the start condition of B is satisfied, the display of the countdown effect (time-saving end countdown) is interrupted after the variable display where the start condition of the time-saving state B is satisfied.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, if the start conditions for any time-saving state are not satisfied during the time-saving state B, and when the start conditions for the time-saving state C1 and time-saving state C2 are satisfied, the time-saving state B is targeted. In the final 10 variable displays, a countdown effect (time saving end countdown) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-43, in the variable display start setting process in the feature section 130SG, by executing the variable display preview performance determination process (step 130SGS610), the variable display preview performance is started during the variable display. It is executable. In addition, in the variable display preview performance determination process, when the gaming state is in the normal state, only the variable display of the first special figure is targeted, and whether or not the variable display preview performance is executed and the performance pattern of the variable display preview performance are determined. If the game state is in any of the time-saving states, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance during the variable display and the performance pattern of the preview performance during the variable display only for the variable display of the second special figure. It is possible.

The execution determination ratio of the variable display notice performance and the determination ratio of each performance pattern in the normal state vary depending on the variable pattern and jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 284-47. Here, as shown in FIG. 284-47, in the normal state, the performance pattern of the preview performance during variable display can be determined from among the five performance patterns of performance pattern A to performance pattern E.

Regarding the execution decision ratio of the preview performance during variable display and the decision ratio of each performance pattern, the ratio of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set to be the lowest when non-execution of the preview performance during variable display is decided. has been done. When it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance in performance pattern A, the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than when it is decided not to execute the variable display preview performance. Therefore, when it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern B, the proportion of variable display results that become a jackpot (jackpot (expectation level) is set high, and when it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance in production pattern C, the variable display result is higher than when it is decided to execute the variable display preview production in production pattern B. The probability of hitting the jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set high, and if it is decided to perform the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E of the variable display preview performance, then the performance pattern C of the variable display preview performance will be executed. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) is set higher than when execution is determined.

Here, if we pay attention to performance pattern D and performance pattern E, performance pattern D is a performance pattern that can be determined only when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot A, and performance pattern E is a performance pattern that can be determined only when the variable display result is jackpot A. This is a performance pattern that can be determined only when there is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B.

In other words, when the preview performance during variable display is executed in performance pattern D or performance pattern E, the variable display result will always be a jackpot (the jackpot expectation level is 100%). Performance pattern D is a performance pattern for notifying that the jackpot type is jackpot A, and performance pattern E is a performance pattern for notifying that the jackpot type is jackpot B.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is one of the time-saving states (and variable display of the second special symbol), as shown in Figure 284-48, when the fluctuation pattern is PA3-10, which is out of reach, Except for the execution of the variable display preview performance in performance pattern A at a rate of 100%, the variable display preview performance is now determined not to be executed regardless of the variable pattern or variable display result. There is.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-49 and 284-50 (A) to 284-50 (F), the effect pattern A is a effect pattern in which the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. The effect pattern B is a effect pattern in which the image of character B is displayed next to the image of character A on the image display device 5 during variable display, and the effect pattern C is a effect pattern in which the image of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is a production pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, and an image of character C are displayed in order, and production pattern D is a production pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, and an image of character C are displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. , character D is displayed in order, and in the production pattern E, the image of character A, the image of character B, the image of character C, the image of character D, and the image of character E are displayed in order on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is the performance pattern that is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-50(F), the effect pattern E is also an effect pattern in which a rainbow-colored (rainbow style) background image is displayed as the background image of the character E.

As described above, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-51(A), the average variable display time in the case where the variable display result in the time saving state A1 is a failure is 50000 ms, and the variable display time in the time saving state A2 is The average variable display time when the result is wrong is 18696.08825 ms, and the average variable display time when the variable display result in time saving state A3 is wrong is 18656.82959 ms, and the variable display result in the entire time saving state A is wrong. In this case, the average variable display time is 22904.91502 ms.

Further, the average variable display time in the case where the variable display result in the time saving state B is a failure is 2000 ms. Further, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state C1 is a failure is 50000 ms, and the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state C2 is a failure is 2040.875912 ms. The average variable display time in the case where the variable display results for the entire C are off is 26020.43795 ms.

As shown in FIG. 284-52, in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2, the variable display notice effect has a variation pattern of PA3-10. It is only possible to do so in certain cases. That is, among these time-saving states, the only time-saving state in which the variable display notice performance can be executed is the time-saving state C2 in which the variable display can be performed in the variation pattern PA3-10, and it is executable in the variation pattern PA3-10. The performance pattern for the preview performance during variable display is only the performance pattern A.

Next, the flow of presentation in the variable display in the feature section 130SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 284-56, when the gaming state is the normal state, the reach effect of the super reach effect is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special symbol, and when a predetermined period has elapsed, the reach effect of the reach effect is started. As part of the image display device 5, an operation promotion image that prompts the user to operate the second push button 3631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable object effect in which the movable object 32 falls as part of the reach effect is executed. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (X6 to X10). Thereafter, after a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the variable display result has become a jackpot, the jackpot game state is indicated to the player by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. Accordingly, a right hit notification that informs that these game balls are in a state to be entered into the big winning hole and a round performance during a round game are displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 284-57 and 284-58, when the jackpot game ends, a rush effect indicating that the jackpot ending effect is controlled to the time-saving state A1. A is executed. During the execution of the rush effect A, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A1, as the entry performance A, the time-saving state A1 launches the game ball toward the right gaming area for the player, so that the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. A right hit notification is executed to notify that the player has won a prize and is in a state where the variable display of the second special figure is executed (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the entry effect A, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, and variable display of the second special figure is started. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure as a panel effect. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole by the player continuing to drive the game ball toward the right game area, the image display device 5 displays a panel according to each pending memory of the second special symbol as a panel effect. Additional images will be displayed. Incidentally, a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of reserved memories ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state A1 is completed, the gaming state is controlled from the time-saving state A1 to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory of the second special figure is changed. will be started. In the variable display, when the decorative symbols stop at a reach combination, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, after the movable body effect in which the movable body 32 falls is executed. Decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in combinations indicating small wins. Thereafter, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. images) are displayed (B1 to B3).

When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image notifying that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small winning game, that is, that a V winning has occurred, is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot game will be controlled (the "FEVER" image) is displayed. will be displayed (B4 to B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop at the combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is lost. It is reported that this is the case. Thereafter, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memory of the second special figure, after the image display device 5 is notified of the number of variable display times of the remaining second special figure, the number of variable displays of the second special figure is Images similar to the first reserved memory are displayed (B6 to B8).

If all the variable displays corresponding to the hold memory of the second special figure are off, the second special figure is held on the image display device 5 during the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display of the second special figure. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays according to the memory have been completed is displayed. Thereafter, the variable display of the first special figure is executed 10 times while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left gaming area is also displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In any of the time saving states, when the player hits the game ball into the right game area, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. After the end of the jackpot game via the small hit of these second special symbols, the control is made to the time saving state A2 or the time saving state A3.

When the time saving state A2 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A, first, as shown in Figure 284-59, the second special figure is As a variable display, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in combinations indicating small wins. Thereafter, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area. image) is displayed. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image notifying that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small winning game, that is, that a V winning has occurred, is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot game will be controlled (the "FEVER" image) is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small win ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the time saving state has been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is performed. will be started. In the time-saving state A2, variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a night city (second background image) is being displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

In addition, if the 7 variable displays (7 variable displays of the 2nd special symbol) are completed in the time saving state A2 without any of the variable display results becoming a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss of the time saver, the corresponding The result performance is started in the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display. As the result performance, a value is displayed according to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any time-saving state, and the total number of prize balls won. In addition, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol at the start of the result performance, the second special symbol will be displayed variablely up to four times depending on the remaining pending memory of the second special symbol (remaining pending memory). is executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) (C9 to C11).

If there is no big hit, small hit, or time saving win in any of the variable displays according to the remaining reservation memory, the image display device 5 starts displaying the stage background image, and the display continues for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). During this period, an image is also displayed instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left gaming area. Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until the ten variable displays are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when the time saving state A3 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game via the small hit, that is, when the time saving state A3 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot D, first, it is the same as the case where the time saving state A2 is controlled. In addition, a stop display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, a display of an image displaying "Aim for V!" on the image display device 5, and a display of an image notifying that a V win has occurred during a small win game. , displaying an image (image of "FEVER") indicating that the jackpot game is controlled, displaying an image according to the number of prize balls obtained in the jackpot game, displaying an image according to the number of times the time-saving state has already been controlled. Entering effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the device 5 is different, a decorative pattern variable display is executed seven times with the second background image being displayed (C1 to C9 in Figure 284-59)

Here, as shown in Figure 284-60, the variable display result is neither a jackpot, a small hit, nor a time-saving loss, and the seventh decorative pattern is variablely displayed (the seventh variable display of the second special symbol). When the period ends, the result effect is started during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. In addition, as the result performance, a value is displayed according to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any time-saving state, and the total number of prize balls won. Further, during the execution period of the result production, variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed three times in an extremely short special symbol variation time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result does not become a jackpot, a small hit, or a time-saving loss in the three variable displays of decorative symbols (8th to 10th variable displays), the variable display of decorative symbols (11 variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is neither a jackpot, a small hit, nor a time-saving loss, the movable body 32 falls and the image display device 5 emits light in response to the fall of the movable body 32. The effect image is displayed. After the movable body 32 falls, when the movable body 32 returns to the standby position before falling (the position above the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened (displayed in black). . After the dark display ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, an operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period of the second push button 3631B ends, the image display device 5 confirms that the number of times of time saving control in the time saving state is 685, that is, the actual Specifically, during the time saving state, a V stock effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win. Thereafter, when the V stock effect is also completed due to the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7 to D9). In particular, as shown in Figures 284-60 (D2) to 284-60 (D8), in the V stock performance from the result performance in the time saving state A3, the result performance differs from the result performance according to the time saving state A2. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the game ends, the right hit notification image at the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. Note that the right-handed hit notification image at the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the 12th variable display.

In addition, if the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display special figure is the first special figure, and the variable display result is a time-save-on loss and the time-save-on loss type is time-save and loss A, the decorative pattern will not come off. After the combination shown is stopped and displayed, a rush effect A similar to A2 to A4 in FIG. 284-57 is executed during the symbol stop period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-61, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is the first special figure, the variable display result is ``Lost with time saving'' and ``Loss with time saving'' type is ``Loss with time saving A''. If so, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss, and then the rush effect B is executed. As the rush performance B at this time, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in black (displayed in black). After the blackout display is completed, the image of a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5, and then a whiteout (white display) is performed, and the blackout display is performed again (E1 to E6).

After the blackout display ends, the image display device 5 displays the image of the predetermined character again, and then displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the second push button 3631B ends, the image display device 5 indicates that the gaming state has been controlled to the time saving state B, that is, the number of time saving control times. Since this is 685 times, a V stock performance is executed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot or a small win during the time saving state (E7 to E9).

Thereafter, the game player will be notified that the image display device 5 has been controlled to the time saving state B and that the movable body 32 falls during the variable display in the time saving state B and that the variable display result will be a jackpot. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to put the game ball into the second starting prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area on the image display device 5. (An image that says "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed in accordance with the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is time saving state B). Display starts (E10-E12).

Next, a case will be described in which the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 0 when the gaming state is the normal state, that is, the variable display is executed 685 times since the RAM is cleared or the previous jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 284-62, in the normal state, a ceiling reaching remaining number of times display 130SG202 is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Here, when the value of the variable ceiling display counter is one of 101 to 685, the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached display 130SG202 is displayed in the first mode. Furthermore, when the value of the variable ceiling display counter is between 11 and 100, the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached display 130SG202 is displayed in the second mode, which is larger in vertical and horizontal size than the first mode (F1, F2 ).

In addition, if the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) cannot normally receive the ceiling time reduction number designation command when the power is restored, or when the production control board 12 receives the ceiling time reduction number designation command at the time of power restoration, If the performance control CPU 120 is unable to recognize the current value of the ceiling variable display counter due to the occurrence of a momentary power outage or the like even though the reception is normal, the display of the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached may be limited. In this case, only the number displaying the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached may be hidden, or the entire interface (the image display device 5 in the case of this feature section 130SG) on which the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached may be hidden. Furthermore, when displaying the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached is limited in this way, the display of the remaining number of times the ceiling can be reached may be restarted when the ceiling time reduction number designation command is normally received.

Then, when the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 10 by executing the variable display, a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second ), the remaining 10 variable displays are executed in the center of the image display device 5, and a display indicating that the time saving state B is being controlled is performed (display of "10 times until BATTLE RUSH"). . From then on, every time a new variable display is started, the remaining variable display is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start of the variable display until the central part of the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B. The display count ("9 times until BATTLE RUSH", . . . "0 times until BATTLE RUSH") is displayed (F3 to F6).

When the variable display in which the value of the ceiling variable display counter finally becomes 0 (RAM clear or the 685th variable display since the end of the previous jackpot game) starts, the variable display result of the variable display will be a jackpot, a small hit, If there is no time-saving hit or miss, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss (F7 to F9), and then the rush effect B shown in FIG. 284-61 is executed, and then the second In a state where the background image is displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in accordance with the variable display of the second special figure (E2 to E12 shown in FIG. 284-61).

Next, a case will be described in which the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state is a time saving win/win. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-63 and 284-73, when the time-save and loss type is time-save and loss A, the decorative symbol temporarily indicates a loss as a reach effect result of super reach α on the image display device 5. When the combination is displayed (oscillating display), a time-saving acquisition chance effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result is ``loss with time saving'' and the type of ``loss with time saving'' is ``loss A'' with time saving. G1-G5).

As the time-saving acquisition chance effect, an operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the second push button 3631B. At this time, if the variable display result is ``Time saving on/off'' and the ``Time saving on/off'' type is ``Time saving on/off'' A, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the movable body 32 will fall. Then, a notification image indicating the winning of the time-saving winner A is displayed on the image display device 5 (G5 to G8). Then, when the variable display ends and the time saving C1 flag is set, the entry effect A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 is started from the symbol determination period of the variable display. Furthermore, during the execution of the rush effect, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be displayed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). executed. After the rush performance A ends, the variable display of the decorative pattern is based on the variable display of the second special symbol once as in the time saving state A1, and then the second special symbol is displayed four times after being controlled to the normal state. The variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the figure is executed (see FIG. 284-57).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, an effect image in which the decorative pattern cracks is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (G9, G10).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-64 and 284-73, when the time saving and losing type is time saving and losing B, the image display device 5 stops displaying the decorative symbols in a combination of non-reach and missing. Then, in the symbol determination period of the variable display, the rush effects B and V stock effects shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed. Thereafter, the game player will be informed that the image display device 5 has been controlled to the time saving state C2 and that the variable display result will be a jackpot due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to put the game ball into the second starting prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area on the image display device 5. (An image that says "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed according to the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is the time saving state C2). Display starts (H2 to H12).

Next, a case will be described in which when the game state is the time saving state A1, the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure is ``not with the time saving'' and ``not with the time saving''. As shown in FIG. 284-74, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure during the execution of rush performance A after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the first special figure will be played up to four times based on the hold memory of these first special figures. The variable display of the special figure is executed, but in any of these up to four variable displays of the first special figure, the variable display result is ``with time saving'' and ``missing'', and the type of ``with time saving'' is ``missing with time saving''. (Loss A wins), the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β are set with the numerical values corresponding to the time saving winning number A, but the time saving C1 flag is not set. Become. In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state A1 is executed once, the value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α that was set at the end of the jackpot game and the winning of the time-saving prize A, The gaming state is controlled from the time saving state A1 to the normal state when the set value of the second special figure time saving number counter β both becomes 0. Thereafter, as in the normal state after the time saving state A1, variable display of the second special figure is executed up to four times (see FIG. 284-58).

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-65 and 284-74, in any of the maximum four variable displays of the 1st special figure, the variable display result is ``No time saving'' and the ``Time saving'' ``missing'' type is ``Time saving'' ``No B''. If it becomes (B wins with time saving), the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β will be set with the numerical values corresponding to the time saving winning number B, but the time saving C2 flag will not be set. (I1, I2). In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is started, the rush effects B and V stock effects shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed in the variable display. Thereafter, the game player will be informed that the image display device 5 has been controlled to the time saving state C2 and that the variable display result will be a jackpot due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to put the game ball into the second starting prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area on the image display device 5. (An image that says "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed according to the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is the time saving state C2). Display starts (I3 to I12).

Next, a case will be described in which the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure is a time saving win or loss when the game state is the time saving state A2. As shown in FIG. 284-75, for example, when the variable display of the second special symbol has already been executed in the time saving state A2, a game ball accidentally enters the first starting winning hole, and the variable display based on the starting winning When the variable display result is ``Loss with time saving'' and ``Loss with time saving'' and ``Loss with time saving'' type is ``Lose with time saving'' (A is won with ``Time saving''), time saving is added to the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β. Although the numerical value corresponding to the deviation B is set, the time saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state A2 is executed once, the value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α that was set at the end of the jackpot game and the winning of the time-saving prize A, The set value of the second special figure time-saving number counter β is both reduced to -1, and the value of the second special figure time-saving number counter β becomes 0. Therefore, the time saving state A2 (the state in which the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C1 flag being set. In other words, if the winning time-saver A is won in the variable display of the first special figure in the time-saving state A2, the game will continue to be controlled by the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state will continue even after the time-saving state A2 ends. It is not controlled by C1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 284-66 and 284-75, when the variable display of the second special symbol has already been executed in the time saving state A2, a game ball accidentally enters the first starting prize opening, When the variable display result of the variable display based on the starting winning is ``Win with time saving'' and the type of ``Win with time saving'' is ``Win with time saving B'' (B is won with ``B'' with time saving), the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number are set. Although the setting of a numerical value corresponding to the time-saving addition/removal B to the counter β is performed, the time-saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, if there is no jackpot, small hit, or time-saving win or loss, and seven variable displays are executed without being controlled by time-saving state B, the time-saving A2 flag is flagged at the stop timing of the seventh variable display. is cleared, and the time saving C2 flag is newly set based on the fact that the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter β is not yet 0.

Further, in the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display and at the beginning of the eighth variable display in the time saving state A2, result effect B is executed. As the result effect B, from the timing when the 8th variable display starts, a shooting star image (shooting star effect) is displayed as an effect to notify that the winner B with the time saver was won during the time saver state A2. (J1-J3). After the result performance B ends, the V stock performance is executed on the image display device 5, and the eighth variable display (the first variable display in the time saving state C2) ends. Thereafter, as the time saving state C2, variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time saving state A2 (J4 ~J8). In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-66 (J2) to FIG. 284-66 (J3), when the variable display result becomes ``No with time saving applied'' during the time saving state A2 and the type of failure with time saving is ``Without B'' with time saving, During the result performance, the right hit notification image in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden in order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time saving state C2 will be controlled after the end of the time saving state A2. becomes. In addition, the right hit notification image on the upper right of the image display device 5 shows that in the V stock performance from the result performance in the time saving state A2, unlike the result performance according to the time saving state A2, even if the result performance ends, the time saving will continue. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the control will continue to be executed, the right-hitting notification image at the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. Note that the right-hand hit notification image on the upper right corner of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the first variable display in the time saving state C2.

Next, when the game state is time saving state A1, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is ``lost with time saving'' and the type of ``lost with time saving'' is ``win with time saving'' (B is the winner with time saving). This section explains the following cases. As shown in FIG. 284-67 and FIG. 284-76, if there is a pending memory of the first special symbol during the execution of rush performance A after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the maximum The variable display of the first special figure is performed four times. After the end of the entry performance A and the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is executed. If the variable display result in the variable display of the second special drawing is a loss with a time saver and the type of loss with a time saver is B (if the winner B with a time saver is won), the variable display result is a loss. Similarly, panel effects are executed in the variable display (K1, K2). Then, after the panel effect is executed, immediately after the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss as a display result of the variable display, the rush effects B and V stock effects shown in FIG. 284-64 are executed (K3~ K7, H3-H10). After the entry performance B and the V stock performance are completed and the variable display in the time saving state A1 is completed, the time saving A1 flag is cleared and the time saving C2 flag is set to control the time saving state C2. Thereafter, while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second special figure.

Next, in the variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred in the time-saving state A1 (variable display of the second special figure up to four times immediately after the time-saving state A1 (normal state)), the variable display result is A case where the winner and the winner with time savings is the winner B with time saver (the case where B wins with time saver) will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 284-76, if there is a pending memory of the first special symbol during the execution of the rush performance A after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, then there will be a maximum of four times based on the pending memory of these first special symbols. Variable display of the first special figure is executed. After the end of the entry performance A and the variable display of the first special figure, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is executed. If the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is a loss, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss on the image display device 5, and the variable display ends. At this time, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state by clearing the time saving A1 flag. If the time-saving winning B is won in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol up to four times in the gaming state, the decorative symbol will be the same as the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the normal time-saving state A1. is displayed in a combination indicating a miss, and immediately after that, the rush effects B and V stock effects shown in FIG. 284-64 are executed (H3 to H10). After the entry performance B and the V stock performance are completed and the variable display in the normal state is completed, the time saving state C2 is newly set, thereby controlling to the time saving state C2. Thereafter, while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second special figure.

Next, a case where the game state is the time saving state A2, the variable display result is ``win with time saving'', and the type of loss with ``time saving'' is ``win with time saving B'' (case where B with time saving is won) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 284-68 and FIG. 284-77, if you win B with time saving in any variable display in time saving state A2, time saving is applied to the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β. Although the numerical value corresponding to the hit/miss B is set, the time saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, each time the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special symbol time-saving number counter α that was set when the time-saving state A2 was controlled, and the time-saving winning result B is won. As a result, the set value of the second special symbol time saving counter β is also decreased by 1. Therefore, the time saving state A2 (the state in which the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C2 flag being set. In other words, if time saving with winning B is won in the variable display of time saving state A2, the game proceeds while being controlled to time saving state A2.

The variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning any of the jackpot, small hit, or time-saving win, and is not controlled by the time-saving state B, that is, the second special symbol When the time saving A2 flag is cleared due to the value of the figure time saving number counter α becoming 0, the time saving C2 flag is set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is still 1 or more (time saving (controlled to state C2).

Then, in the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2 and at the beginning of the first variable display in the time saving state C2, the result effect B is executed. As the result performance B, from the timing when the first variable display in the time saving state C2 is started, an image of a shooting star (shooting star performance) is displayed as a performance to notify that the winner B with time saving has been won during the time saving state B. is displayed (L1 to L3). After the result effect B ends, the V stock effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the first variable display in the time saving state C2 is completed. Thereafter, as a time-saving state C2, variable display of decorative patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time-saving state B (L4 ~L8).

Next, variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred during the seventh variable display in time-saving state A2 (variable display of the second special figure up to four times immediately after time-saving state A2 (normal state)) A case will be described in which the variable display result is ``Lose with time saving'' and the type of ``Lose with time saving'' is ``Lose with time saving B'' (a case where ``B'' with time saving is won).

First, as shown in Figures 284-69 and 284-77, the variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A2 does not result in a jackpot, small hit, or time-saving loss, and also in time-saving state B. It is executed up to 7 times without being controlled, that is, when the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, the time saving A2 flag is cleared (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state). Then, the result performance B is executed from the start timing of the symbol determination period of the variable display. During execution of the result effect B, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol, variable display based on the pending memory of the second special symbol will be executed in an extremely short special symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). (M1, M2).

Here, if you win the time-saving winning winning B in any of the variable displays of the second special symbol during the execution of the result effect B, you will be notified that the time-saving winning winning B has been won from the timing when the variable display starts. An image of a shooting star (shooting star effect) is displayed as a notification effect. After the result effect B ends, the V stock effect is executed on the image display device 5, and the variable display in the normal state ends. Thereafter, as a time saving state C2 due to the time saving C2 flag being set, a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in a state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time saving state A2. A variable display of is executed (M3 to M8).

Next, when the game state is time saving state A2, if the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is ``lost with time saving'' and the type of ``lost with time saving'' is ``win with time saving'' (B is the winner with time saving). This section explains the following cases. As shown in FIGS. 284-70 and 284-78, if you win B with time saving in any of the variable displays in time saving state A2, time saving will be applied to the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β. Although the numerical value corresponding to the hit/miss B is set, the time saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, each time the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special symbol time-saving number counter α that was set when the time-saving state A2 was controlled, and the time-saving winning result B is won. As a result, the set value of the second special symbol time saving counter β is also decreased by 1. Therefore, the time saving state A2 (the state in which the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C2 flag being set. In other words, if time saving with winning B is won in the variable display of time saving state A2, the game proceeds while being controlled to time saving state A2.

The variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning any of the jackpot, small hit, or time-saving win, and is not controlled by the time-saving state B, that is, the second special symbol When the time saving A2 flag is cleared due to the value of the figure time saving number counter α becoming 0, the time saving C2 flag is set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is still 1 or more (time saving (controlled to state C2).

Then, during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2, no performance is executed, and the variable display in the time saving state C2 is newly started. That is, in the image display device 5, the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the second background image is displayed as in the time saving state A2 (N1, N2).

Next, immediately after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state C1, the RAM is cleared in the variable display of the first special figure before the variable display of the second special figure, or the number of variable displays from the previous jackpot game is 685 times. A case will be described in which the time reduction state B is controlled as a result of reaching the time limit. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-71 and 284-78, similar to the case where the time-saving winning loss A is won, the image display device 5 displays a combination in which the decorative symbol once shows a loss as a result of the reach effect of super reach α. After this is displayed (swinging display), time-saving acquisition and chance-to-gain effects are executed. As a result of the time-saving winning chance performance, the movable body 32 falls and a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating the winning of the time-saving win A (O1 to O8).

Note that when the variable display ends and the time saving C1 flag is set, the time saving state C1 is set. Then, during the symbol determination period, rush effect A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 is started. During execution of the rush effect, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be displayed for an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). However, when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous jackpot game reaches 685 in any variable display based on the reserved memory of these first special symbols, the start condition for time saving state B is established. Then, the time saving C1 flag is cleared and the time saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display in which the start condition for the time saving state B is satisfied is completed. That is, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B instead of the time saving state C1 (O9, O10).

Thereafter, the entry performance B and the V stock performance are executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display in which the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed according to the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is the time saving state C2). Display starts (H3 to H11 in Figure 284-64).

Next, immediately after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state C2, the RAM is cleared in the variable display of the first special figure before the variable display of the second special figure, or the number of variable displays from the previous jackpot game is 685 times. A case will be described in which the time reduction state B is controlled as a result of reaching the time limit. First, as shown in FIG. 284-72 and FIG. 284-79, when the time saving and loss type is time saving and loss B, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the combination of non-reach and loss on the image display device 5, and the game is stopped. The state is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C2. Then, in the symbol determination period of the variable display, the rush effects B and V stock effects shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed. Thereafter, the game player will be informed that the image display device 5 has been controlled to the time saving state C2 and that the variable display result will be a jackpot due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to put the game ball into the second starting prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area on the image display device 5. (An image displaying "Aim here!") is displayed (P1 to P10).

During execution of the rush effect, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be displayed for an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). However, when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous jackpot game reaches 685 in any variable display based on the reserved memory of these first special symbols, the start condition for time saving state B is established. Then, the time saving C2 flag is cleared and the time saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display in which the start condition for the time saving state B is satisfied ends. That is, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B instead of the time saving state C2. Then, when the symbol confirmation period ends, variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is started with the second background image being displayed on the image display device 5 (P11).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. In this case, the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds, whereas the variable display result is the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time saving state, that is, when the gaming state is in the normal state. The symbol confirmation period in the case of a short-time hit or miss is 0.5 seconds. In addition, as shown in Figure 284-57, Figure 284-63, and Figure 284-64, when the variable display result of the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state is a time-saving hit or miss. , the right hit notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the period including the symbol confirmation period, but immediately after the time saving state ends, that is, in the variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. If the variable display result is a time-save hit or miss, the entry performance including the display of the right-handed hit notification image is not executed because the symbol confirmation period is extremely short, 0.5 seconds. For this reason, by setting a long symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds in the case where the variable display result of the first special symbol is a time-saving error when the gaming state is the normal state, the game Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the switching of the gaming state. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a time saving result, the symbol confirmation period is set as short as 0.5 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to excessive switching of gaming states.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, if the variable display result of the variable display of the first special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state is a time saving result, the image display device 5 is Although the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is controlled from one of the time-saving states to the normal state, the image display device In step 5, a left-handed hitting notification image may be displayed to notify the player to hit the game ball toward the left gaming area. Immediately after being controlled from any time saving state to the gaming state, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a small hit, or a time saving loss due to the variable display based on the pending memory stored at that time. (For the player, there is a possibility that the state of hitting the game ball toward the right gaming area will continue.) Therefore, the display of the left-handed hitting notification image on the image display device 5 is a variable display based on the reserved memory that occurred in the time saving state. It is preferable to run it after everything is finished.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-35, the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure when the gaming state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state) is Time Saving Loss A or Time Saving Loss B. The symbol confirmation period in this case is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the symbol confirmation period when the variable display result is off in the variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state). is set to . Therefore, if the variable display result of the second special figure when the gaming state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state) is the time saving result A or the time saving result B, the variable display result will be displayed. It is possible to suitably return to the time saving state without excessively prolonging the period from when the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started to variable display.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-6, FIG. 284-26, and FIG. 284-27, the special symbol fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a time-saving hit or miss. is partly the same as the special symbol variation time when the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a failure, and when the variable display result of the second special symbol in the time saving state A is a success in the time saving condition. Although the special figure variation time has been exemplified in a form that is partially common to the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A is off, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is a time-saving error is the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is an error. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time-saving state A is a time-saving error is the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time-saving state A is a failure. It may be partially common to the variable time. By doing this, if the variable display result is a time-saving result in the normal state (when controlled to time-saving state C), the variable display is executed using a variation pattern that has a dedicated special figure variation time. This can increase the special feeling, and when the variable display result is again changed to the time saving state in a situation where the time saving state C is already controlled, the advantage for the player does not change much, so it is different from other fluctuation patterns. By executing a variable display using a variation pattern having a common special figure variation time, the storage capacity of the ROM 101 in the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 101 in the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time saving mode. You can increase your sexuality.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-21(C), when the gaming state is in one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C, the variable display result is displayed with time saving in the variable display of the first special figure. In the case of a miss, the non-reach variation pattern PA2-5 is selected, that is, the reach effect is not executed during variable display. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variable display result is a time-saving mistake.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is a time saving result or a loss. , the non-reach variation pattern PA2-5 is selected, that is, the reach effect is not executed during variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , when the game state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C and the variable display result of the first special figure is a time saving result, the rate is lower than in the normal state. By determining the reach variation pattern in the variable display, it may be possible to execute the reach effect, or even if the reach variation pattern is determined at the same rate as in the normal state, effects other than the reach effect may be executed during the variable display. You may. In other words, to limit the execution of the reach effect, it is necessary to not select a reach variation pattern, to be able to select a reach variation pattern at a lower rate than the normal state, and to be able to display a variable display when a reach variation pattern is selected. This includes performing a performance different from the reach performance.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, regarding the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is a time saving result, Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the reach effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is any one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C. Restricts the execution of the reach effect when the variable display result of the second special figure when the gaming state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C is a time saving result. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-22, in the case where the variable display result is other than a jackpot in the variable display of the second special figure when the gaming state is the time saving state A1, the special figure fluctuation PA3-5 where the time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a miss, PC3-3 where the special figure variation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure variation time is 55 seconds (55000 ms), and the variable display result is a time-saving error.PC3-3 is provided, and when the gaming state is the time-saving state A1, the variable display result is an error in the variable display of the second special figure. Although the example shows a form in which the special symbol fluctuation time is the same for cases where the variable display result is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the time saving state A1. A common special figure variation time (for example, 50 seconds) may be used in a case where the variable display result is a failure in the variable display of the second special figure in a certain case and a case where the variable display result is a failure with a time reduction. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result of the second special figure is a time saving result in the time saving state A1.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-36, in the time saving state A, the symbol confirmation time of the variable display when the variable display result is a loss with time saving A or a loss with time saving B is the same as the symbol confirmation time when the variable display result is a loss. Since it is set to be the same as the symbol confirmation time of the variable display, it prevents the situation where the player focuses on the variable display result due to the difference in symbol confirmation time, and the variable display result is reduced in time. can make it difficult to attract attention.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, in the time saving state A, the symbol confirmation time of the variable display when the variable display result is a loss with time saving A or a loss with time saving B is the same as the symbol confirmation time of the variable display when the variable display result is a loss. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the symbol determination time is set to be the same as the symbol confirmation time, the present invention is not limited to this. The symbol confirmation time of the variable display may be set to be the same as the symbol confirmation time of the variable display when the variable display result is a small hit.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is displayed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing this, a 15-second blessing performance will be performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display, but in the time saving state C1, the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and after the 50 second performance including the reach effect of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15 A second-long blessing performance is performed. Therefore, in time-saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that the reach effect is displayed during the variable display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to excessive execution of performances with long execution periods such as By executing a variable display in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the δ jackpot, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and improve their enjoyment of the game, which improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving mode. can be increased.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state A, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, and PB3 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. -2, variable display is executed in either PB3-3, which is a variation pattern of super reach δ. In other words, in time-saving state B, the proportion of variable display executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variation pattern, is high compared to the entire time-saving state A. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest due to excessive execution of performances with long execution periods.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display result of the super reach δ jackpot is variable in PB3-3. By executing the display, a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is performed during the variable display, and then a 15-second blessing performance is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display will be executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, and the variable display will last for 2 seconds during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the non-reach is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern occurs at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1. While a variable display is executed on a certain PB3-1, a variable display is performed on PB3-1 which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern at the same rate as when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C2. Display is executed. Therefore, in time-saving state C2, where the maximum number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is 685, variable display (non-reach) occurs in a shorter period than in time-saving state C1, where the number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is only one. By making it easier to execute the performance during the corresponding variable display and the blessing performance, it is possible to reduce the feeling of prolongation and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display result in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, By executing the display, a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is performed during the variable display, and then a 15-second blessing performance is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or PB3-2, which is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. As a result, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance is performed during variable display. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot occurs at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A3. The variable display is executed at PB3-3. In addition, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach jackpots will occur at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1. Variable display is executed at PB3-1. Therefore, in the time saving state A3 where the maximum number of variable displays for time saving control is 685, the variable display is executed in PB3-1 which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, thereby suppressing a decline in player interest. In the time-saving state C1, where the number of variable displays for time-saving control is 1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variable pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, increasing the player's expectations. Since it is possible to improve the game interest, it is possible to improve the marketability of the Pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is displayed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing this, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed for 2 seconds during the variable display. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or PB3-2, which is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. As a result, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance is performed during variable display. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is higher than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3. Since the variable display is executed at PB3-1, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest due to the player's sense of procrastination in the time saving state B.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, PB3-1, which is a variation pattern of non-reach jackpot, or normal reach jackpot. By executing a variable display in the variable pattern PB3-2, a 15-second blessing display is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach δ is changed during the variable display. After a 50-second performance including a reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only on PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, for 2 seconds during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the non-reach is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.

In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. -1, the rate of execution of variable display is high, and when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C2, the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A2. The rate at which variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, is set higher than in the case. Therefore, in time saving state C2, where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, thereby preventing the game from feeling delayed. In time-saving state C1, in which the number of variable displays in which time-saving control is executed is one, variable display is not executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, in other words, relative In addition, by increasing the rate at which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, the reach effect of the super reach δ is executed and the expectation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is effectively increased. This can increase interest.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. Thus, after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is performed during variable display, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. -1, the quota for which the variable display is executed is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state C2 is higher. The allocation for which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in time saving state C2 where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling like it has been delayed. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in the time-saving state C1 where the number of variable displays for executing time-saving control is one, the variable display is executed in a variable pattern of super reach δ jackpot, thereby increasing the player's expectations. Since it is possible to enhance the feeling of playing the game and improve the interest in the game, the marketability of the Pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, PB3-1, which is a variation pattern of a non-reach jackpot, or a normal reach jackpot. By executing a variable display in the variable pattern PB3-2, a 15-second blessing display is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. For this reason, in time-saving state A3, the rate at which variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpots, increases, giving excessive gaming value in a short period of time, resulting in excessive gambling. This can prevent the price from becoming too high.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A3, PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or a normal reach jackpot. By executing a variable display in the variable pattern PB3-2, a 15-second blessing display is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach δ is changed during the variable display. After a 50-second performance including a reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. Therefore, in time-saving state A3 where the maximum number of variable displays in which time-saving control is executed is 685 times, variable display is likely to be executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpots, which may reduce player's interest. In the time-saving state C1, where the number of variable displays in which the time-saving control is executed is one, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, and the player Since it is possible to increase expectations and improve the interest in the game, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C1 is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state B. The difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state B is set as follows: Since it is set smaller than the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure and the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C1, the period during which time saving control can be executed. In the time saving state C2 where the time is relatively long, the player can play the game without stressing the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, a common variation pattern when the variable display result is out of reach is PA3, which is a non-reach out of reach variation pattern. -1 can be selected. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display results are off in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, all variation patterns may be selectable in common when the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, it is possible to execute a so-called step-up effect in which the displayed character changes in stages as a preview effect during the variable display that suggests that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display preview effect may include multiple types of effects (for example, a display that suggests the rate of control to a jackpot game state depending on the displayed dialogue). It may also be possible to perform a speech preview performance, a movable body preview performance that suggests the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, etc.). In this way, in the case where multiple types of performances can be executed as preview performances during variable display, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in time saving state C is set in time saving state B, similar to this feature section 130SG. In addition to setting the average variable display time to be longer than the average variable display time in the case where the variable display result is a failure (see Figure 284-51), the number of variable display preview performances that can be executed during variable display in time saving state C is set to may be set to be larger than the number of variable display preview effects that can be executed during the variable display. By doing so, in time saving state B, the player's stress is reduced by increasing the number of variable displays per unit period by variable display with a short variable display time, and in time saving state C, variable display results are By increasing the number of variable display preview performances that can be performed in the event of a loss, the player's interest decreases when the variable display result becomes a time-saving loss multiple times before the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. Since this can be prevented, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-52, the types of variable display notice performances that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure (when the fluctuation pattern of failure is determined) are time saving. Since there are more times when the state is controlled in state C than when it is controlled in time saving state B, the number of variable display performance patterns can be increased without increasing the number of variable patterns. storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-7, FIG. 284-44, FIG. 284-57, FIG. 284-63, FIG. If the variable display result of the figure shows that the time saving option has not been applied, rush effect A can be executed as an effect to inform that the time saving state C1 is controlled, and the variable display result of the second special figure indicates that the time saving option has not been applied. If this happens, rush effect B is executed as an effect to notify that the time saving state C2 is being controlled.In other words, if the variable display result of the first special figure is not with the time saver and the variable display of the second special figure Although the embodiment is exemplified in which a different entry performance can be executed as a performance to notify that the time saving state C is controlled in the case where the result is a time saving result or a failure, the present invention is not limited to this. However, depending on the situation, it is controlled to time-saving state C depending on the case where the variable display result of the first special figure is ``not with time saving'' or the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is ``with time saving'' or not. It may also be possible to perform a common rush performance as a performance to notify the user of this. For example, if the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state except immediately after the end of the time-saving state is that the time-saving state is not included, it is possible to execute the rush effect A as a performance to notify that the time-saving state C1 will be controlled. When the variable display result of the second special figure in any of the time-saving states is that the time-saving state is not applied, a rush performance B is executed as a performance to notify that the time-saving state B will be controlled. Then, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result based on the reserved memory that occurred during the time saving state is different from the time saving, the variable display is different from the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In either of the variable displays shown in the figure, a rush effect B may be performed as an effect to notify that the time saving state C is being controlled. By doing this, in the rare situation where the variable display result corresponds to the first special figure holding memory that was stored immediately after the end of the time saving state, the time saving result is not included, the second special figure holding memory can be used. By sharing this with the effect that notifies that the time-saving state C is being controlled (by executing the rush effect B), it is possible to reduce the number of man-hours for developing the effect and also reduce the amount of effect data.

In addition, in this modification, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result based on the pending memory that occurred during the time saving state is a time saving result, the variable display is changed to the first special figure. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rush effect B is executed as an effect to notify that the time saving state C is controlled regardless of whether the variable display or the variable display of the second special symbol is used, the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state is If the variable display result based on the reserved memory that occurred during the time-saving state is a time-saving result, the time-saving display will be applied regardless of whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure. As a performance to notify that the state is controlled to state C, a performance different from rush performance A and rush performance B may be performed. In other words, the common predetermined performance in the present invention may be rush performance B that corresponds to the second predetermined performance, rush performance A that corresponds to the first predetermined performance, or rush performance B that corresponds to the second predetermined performance. may be performed differently.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display results are off in the time saving state A3, PA3-1 is a non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern, and PA3 is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. -2, it is possible to select PA3-3, which is a variation pattern for non-reach, and PA3-4, which is a variation pattern for normal reach. It is possible to select PA3-1, which is a variable pattern, and PA3-10, which is a non-reach variable pattern. In other words, in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, when the variable display result is out of reach, PA3-1, which is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, can be selected in common. Therefore, even if multiple types of time-saving states are provided, the variation pattern can be shared among different time-saving states, so the data capacity of the variation patterns can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving state is improved. be able to.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display results are out of place in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, PA3-5, which is a variation pattern in which the super reach δ is out, is selected. If the variable display results are different between time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C1, select PA3-5 as a common variation pattern, so that even if there are multiple types of time-saving states, the variation pattern can be shared between different time-saving states. Therefore, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, a common variation pattern when the variable display result is out of reach is PA3, which is a non-reach out of reach variation pattern. -1 can be selected. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display results are off in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, all variation patterns may be selectable in common when the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C are controlled to the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance (round performance, etc.) based on the corresponding jackpot game state. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to control from two or more time saving states to a jackpot gaming state (for example, when controlling from a time saving state A to a jackpot gaming state). In the case of controlling from the time saving state C to the jackpot gaming state), the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a common performance as a performance based on these jackpot gaming states. By doing so, the performance after being controlled to the jackpot game state can be shared in multiple types of time-saving states, so the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C are controlled to the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (round performance, etc.) based on the corresponding jackpot game state. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to control from two or more time saving states to a jackpot gaming state (for example, when controlling from a time saving state A to a jackpot gaming state). In the case of controlling from the time saving state C to the jackpot gaming state), the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute different performances as performances based on these jackpot gaming states. By doing so, after the jackpot game state is controlled, an appropriate performance can be executed according to the difference in the time saving state, so that the game interest after the jackpot game state is controlled can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-27, 284-29, and 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is incorrect in time saving state C2 is as follows: time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state This is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in A3. Furthermore, in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is off, two types of variation patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3. If the variable display result is a failure, five types of variation patterns can be selected: PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4, and PA3-5. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2, it is possible to prevent a situation where expectations are excessively heightened due to the long average variable display time, creating a feeling of delay and reducing the interest in the game, and pachinko games equipped with the time-saving state can be prevented. The marketability of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A1, the variable display result in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, By executing the display, a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is performed during the variable display, and then a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A1. -1, the variable display result is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A1, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state C2 is higher. The allocation for which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in time saving state C2 where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling like it has been delayed. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in time-saving state A1 where the number of variable displays for executing time-saving control is one, variable displays are executed in a variable pattern of super reach δ jackpot, thereby increasing player's expectations. It is possible to increase the feeling of playing the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, a common variation pattern when the variable display result is out of reach is PA3, which is a non-reach out of reach variation pattern. -1 can be selected. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display results are off in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, all variation patterns may be selectable in common when the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-29, in the time saving state C2, variable display can be executed in a non-reach variation pattern, while normal reach and super reach Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to perform variable display with the variation pattern of normal reach or super reach even in the time saving state C2. Good too. In particular, when the variable display result is off, the rate at which variable display is executed in the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach is higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A (the rate at which reach effects are executed). ) may be set low. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to excessively high expectations due to the reach effect in the time saving state C2, where the period during which time saving control can be executed is longer than in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2. .

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is displayed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing this, a 15-second blessing performance will be performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display, but in the time-saving state A1, the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and after the 50 second performance including the reach effect of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15 A second-long blessing performance is performed. Therefore, in time-saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that the reach effect is displayed during the variable display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to excessive execution of performances with long execution periods such as By executing a variable display in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the δ jackpot, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and improve their enjoyment of the game, which improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving mode. can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55, after the end of the time saving state A, the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 for 10 variable displays, while after the end of the time saving state B and the time saving state C. In this case, the dedicated stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, after the variable display of the second special figure after time saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special figure that occurred but was not consumed during the time saving state) and after the variable display of these second special figures, In the 10-time variable display, a special stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 to enhance the special feeling, and in the variable display after the end of the time-saving state B, a jackpot game state is displayed during the time-saving state B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the display of the dedicated stage image increasing the sense of regret that the performance is not controlled.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-6, FIG. 284-27, and FIG. In A, the variable display result is set to be equal to or less than the length of the special symbol fluctuation time that results in a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the most special symbol among the selectable fluctuation patterns in time saving state B is set. The variation pattern with a short variation time may have a longer special figure variation time than the variation pattern with the shortest special figure variation time among the selectable variation patterns in the time saving state A. In this way, when setting the length of the special symbol fluctuation time in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot in time saving state B to be longer than the length of the special symbol variation time in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot in time saving state A, this Similarly to the characteristic part 130SG, by making the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state B shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state A, By preventing delays during time-saving state B, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest, and by increasing the sense of celebration when the jackpot gaming state is controlled during time-saving state B, it is possible to improve gaming interest. It is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the status information.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-27, in the normal state, if the variable display result of the first special figure is Error with time saver and the type of Error with time saver is Error A with time saver, the special figure fluctuation time While the variation pattern PA2-4 in which is 53 seconds is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3 is ``with time saving'', then the special figure variation time is 2 seconds. One of PA3-6, PA3-7 with special figure variation time of 20 seconds, PA3-8 and PA3-9 with special figure variation time of 50 seconds is selected, that is, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state A3 is ``missing with time saving'', the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is ``missing with time saving'' and the type of ``missing with time saving'' is ``missing with time saving''. The special figure fluctuation time is set shorter than the case. For this reason, it is possible to suitably play games in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3 without giving the player a sense of discomfort in the variable display where the variable display result is either time-saving or not. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-68 and 284-77, in time saving state A (time saving state A2 in the examples shown in FIGS. 284-68 and 284-77), the variable display results indicate that time saving has not been applied and the type of time saving has not been applied. If the time saving condition is B, the time saving state A is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the time saving state A ends. As shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result in time saving state C2 is a failure is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in time saving state A is a failure. Since this is set, if the variable display result in the time saving state A is OFF with time saving, and the type of change with time saving is OFF with time saving, and the period in which the time saving state is controlled becomes longer, it is executed in the unit period. By switching the variation pattern so that the number of variable display times is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to giving the player a delay.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-6 and 284-27, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, if the variable display result is a failure, the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds. If the variation pattern PA3-5 that misses the reach δ is selected, and the variable display result is a miss with a time saver, the variation pattern PA3-8 of the super reach δ with a time saver with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds is selected. . In addition, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2, if the variable display result is an error, the variation pattern PA3-4 of the normal reach with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds can be selected. If the variable display result shows that the winning time is short, then the normal reach time shorting and losing variation pattern PA3-7 in which the special figure fluctuation time is 20 seconds is selected. In the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A3, when the variable display result is out of reach, the special figure change time is 2 seconds and the non-reach out of reach variation pattern PA3-1 and the special figure change time are Variation pattern PA3-4 with a normal reach of 20 seconds can be selected, and if the variable display result is a loss with a time reduction, a variation with a non-reach time reduction of 2 seconds is selected. Pattern PA3-6 and normal reach time shortening variation pattern PA3-7, which has a special figure variation time of 20 seconds, can be selected. In other words, in the variable display of the second special figure in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3, the variable display result is variable at the same special figure fluctuation time in cases where the variable display result is a loss and when it is a loss with time-saving. Display can now be performed. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, when the variable display result is a time saving result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by not being controlled to the time saving state C2. Can be done.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, some of the variables are Although a form in which the displayed special figure variation time is common is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display time is the same. The special figure variation time of some of the variable displays may be made common in cases where the display result is a failure and when the display result is a failure with time saving.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is ``ON/OFF with time saving'' during time saving state A1 and the type of ``ON/OFF with time saving'' is ``ON/OFF with time saving B'' (when the start conditions for time saving state C2 are met), , while executing the rush effect (rush effect B) in the final variable display of the time saving state A1 (the first variable display of the second special figure), the variable display result during the time saving state B is deviated from the time saving display and the time saving display is not included. When the failure type is time saving and failure B (when the start condition of time saving state C2 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed. In other words, the rush performance is executed because the player feels safe in controlling from the time-saving state A1 where the continuous game state continues to the time-saving state C2, but in the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state 685 times. In the time saving state C2, which is controlled after the variable display is executed, the stress given to the player is further reduced by restricting the execution of the rush effect that reminds the player that the variable display will continue without being controlled by the jackpot game state. Since it is possible to reduce this, it is possible to improve the marketability in a time-saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the variable display result becomes ``With time saving on/off'' during the time saving state B and the type of Error with time saving on/off becomes ``With time saving on/off B'' (when the start conditions for the time saving state C2 are met), the entry effect is Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if the variable display result is OFF with time saving during time saving state B, and the type of failure with time saving is OFF with time saving, the present invention is not limited to this. , during time saving state A or time saving state C, the variable display result may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display result is "with time saving" or "missing with time saving" and the type of "with time saving" is "with time saving or not B". The variable display result may be executed in a smaller display area than in the case where the variable display result is ``Time saving with error'' and the time saving with error type is ``Time saving with error B''. The entry effect may be executed in a shorter period than when the display result is ``FAIL'' with time saving and the type of ``FAIL'' with time saving is B. In other words, restricting the execution of the rush effect includes reducing the frequency of execution of the rush effect, reducing the range in which the image of the rush effect is displayed, and shortening the execution period of the rush effect. ing.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-35, 284-38, and 284-45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 (the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied), By setting the symbol confirmation period to 81.4 seconds, the rush effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period, but when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state C (the start condition of time saving state B is satisfied) By setting the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds, the time saving state C is shifted to the time saving state B without executing the rush performance during the symbol confirmation period. For this reason, when the control is changed from the normal state to the time saving state B, the path that is advantageous for the player (whether to hit the game ball towards the left gaming area or the right gaming area) changes, ensuring a long pattern determination period. By performing a rush effect, it is possible to make the player aware of a change in the route that will be advantageous to the player. In addition, when controlled from time-saving state C to time-saving state B, the path that is advantageous for the player does not change (the player continues to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area), so the symbol confirmation period is shortened and a rush effect is executed. By not doing so, it is possible to suitably shift to the time saving state B without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-56 to 11-72, in the jackpot gaming state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, time-saving state C, etc., in the game states in which the player shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area, Although an example is shown in which an image promoting right-handed hitting is displayed along with an arrow in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. , continues when transitioning from a specific time saving state to another time saving state, when moving from a time saving state to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state, or when moving from a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state to a time saving state. It may also be displayed as follows. In particular, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the time-saving state C and the start condition for the time-saving state B is satisfied, the right-hand hitting promotion image displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5 in the time-saving state C. By continuing to display it even in the time saving state B, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the player should continue to enter the game level into the right gaming area.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-9, if the variable display result shows that time saving is not included in time saving state C, it is possible to control to time saving state C again after the current time saving state C ends. Even if the variable display result in the time saving state C turns out to be a time saving result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being controlled to the time saving state C again.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this feature section 130SG, the remaining variable display number of times that time saving control can be executed in the time saving state (remaining time saving number display) can be displayed on the image display device 5. , even if the variable display result in time saving state B shows that time saving has been applied or not, the remaining count display for time saving state B will be a remaining variable display in which time saving control can be executed in time saving state C, which is controlled after time saving state B ends. It does not change to the value obtained by adding the number of times (it does not change from the display of the remaining time saving number in time saving state B). As a result, when the variable display result in time saving state B shows that the time saving is successful, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated due to changing the remaining time saving number display in the middle of time saving state B, and to control the effect. It is possible to reduce the data capacity of the production control program that is executed differently by the CPU 120.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this feature section 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state C, the gaming state shifts (changes) from time saving state C to time saving state B. It has become. Here, if the variable display number reaches 685 in the normal state, the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to the time saving state B will start from the time when the time saving state B is controlled, and the gaming state will change from the time saving state C. When transitioning to time saving state B, the image display device 5 performs a shutter effect to switch the display of the remaining number of time savings corresponding to time saving state C to the display of the remaining number of time saving corresponding to time saving state B. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the state B has been reached.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, by executing a shutter effect when the gaming state shifts from time saving state C to time saving state B, the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to time saving state C is temporarily hidden by the shutter image, and Although the display of the remaining number of time savers corresponding to the time saver state C is switched to the display of the remaining time saver number corresponding to the time saver state B, the present invention is not limited to this. When transitioning to the time saving state B, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the shutter image by executing a shutter effect, and the background image corresponding to the time saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 is You may switch to the background image corresponding to time saving state B. By doing this, the background image is once hidden by the shutter effect, and it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort due to a sudden switch from the background image corresponding to the time saving state C to the background image corresponding to the time saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result indicates that the time saving is successful in the normal state, the remaining number of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5, but after the time saving state B ends, the time saving state C2 In this case, the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of time savings in the time saving state C2. In particular, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is ``With Time Saving'' or ``Not With Time Saving'' in any time saving state, and the type of ``With Time Saving'' is ``Not With Time Saving'', the variable display After the end of the time saving state in which the result is "time saving", the time saving state C2 is entered, but the remaining time saving number is not displayed in the time saving state C2. In other words, when the remaining number of time savings is displayed in the time saving state B, the period during which the time saving control is executed after being controlled to the time saving state C2 becomes extremely short depending on the timing at which the remaining number of time savings is displayed, resulting in waste. Since this may give a feeling of being drawn back, by not displaying the remaining number of times saved in the time saving state C2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to this feeling of wasted drawing.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time saving state B, the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time saving state B, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving state C2 in a shorter period than in the time saving state B. Alternatively, the remaining number of time savings in the time saving state C2 may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller area than in the time saving state B. In other words, limiting the display of the remaining number of time savings includes not displaying the remaining number of time savings, reducing the display range of the remaining number of time savings, and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, when the variable display result becomes time saving ON/OFF B during time saving state C and the time saving state C2 is newly controlled after time saving state C, the time saving state that was originally controlled A time saving end countdown display is executed for C (time saving state C2). In other words, in this feature section 130SG, if the execution mode of the time saving end countdown is switched depending on whether or not the variable display result shows the time saving result during the time saving state C, the control becomes complicated, so the original time saving state C ends. Until now, by performing the time-saving end countdown in the same way regardless of whether or not the variable display result was a time-saving result, it was possible to prevent the control of the time-saving end countdown from becoming complicated. The marketability of item 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-45, regarding the display of the remaining number of time savings, even if a start condition for a new time saver state C is met in the current time saver state, the time saver state C is displayed again when the start condition is met. By maintaining the display of the remaining time saving number according to the current time saving state (do not change the display of the remaining time saving number) until it is controlled, multiple time saving number counters can be used as a counter for displaying the remaining number of time saving. Since it is not necessary to provide a time saving remaining number of times, it is possible to prevent the processing for displaying the remaining number of time reductions from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance control CPU 120.

Further, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-46, the display period of the time saving end countdown is shorter than the display of the remaining number of time saving times, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, the display period of the remaining number of time savings may be shorter than that of the time savings end countdown. In addition, for forms where the display period of the remaining number of time savers is shorter than the time saver end countdown, the variable display result is set to OFF during any time saver state, and the type of time saver is set to OFF when time saver is set to B. In this case, the time saving end countdown may be executed while not displaying the remaining number of time saving in the time saving state C2 based on the time saving difference B. By doing this, even if the period during which the time saving state C2 is controlled is short, the end timing of the time saving state C2 can be appropriately notified to the player while preventing the player from feeling excessively wasted. I can do that.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45, regarding the time saving end countdown, if the variable display result in the time saving state C2 is OFF with time saving, and the type of FAIL with time saving is B (after the end of time saving state C2, When the variable display result is controlled to the time saving state C2), the time saving end countdown is executed for the time saving state C2 in which the variable display result has changed to the time saving state C2, so whether the variable display result has changed to the time saving state C2 or not. Regardless of whether the time saving state C2 ends, the time saving end countdown is displayed on the image display device 5, so it is possible to prevent the control for displaying the time saving end countdown from becoming complicated. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-45, regarding the result performance, the result performance is executed when time saving state A1 and time saving state A2 end, while the result performance is performed when time saving state B ends. Never. In other words, when the variable display result is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in time saving state B, the result performance is executed in a situation where the variable display result is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state even once. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games due to

Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a mode in which the result performance is executed when the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2 end, but the result performance is not performed when the time saving state B ends. The invention is not limited to this, and when the time saving state B ends, the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends, or the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends. The result performance may be performed in a smaller display area than when the time saving state A2 ends, or the result performance may be performed in a shorter period than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends. In other words, restricting the execution of result effects includes lowering the execution rate of result effects, reducing the display area for displaying images of result effects, and shortening the execution period of result effects. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, regarding the result performance, in the normal state, the variable display result is a time-saving result, and the time-saving result is a loss type, and the time-saving result is a loss type. If the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled, the result presentation will not be executed, but in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display result is deviated with time saving and the type of time saving is deviated. In the case of failure B (when controlled to time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3), variable display is performed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in time saving state C2. When is executed, the result presentation is executed. In other words, when the time saving state C2 ends based on the variable display result being time saving winning/losing in the normal state and the time saving winning/losing type being time saving winning/losing B (variable 685 times without being controlled by the jackpot game state) If the display is executed), the situation is such that the jackpot gaming state has never been controlled, so it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the execution of the result presentation in such a situation. . In addition, when the variable display result in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 is a time saving result or loss, and the time saving result or loss type is the time saving result or loss type, the time saving state C2 ends (in the jackpot game state). If the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled), the situation is such that the jackpot game state is controlled at least once, so the number of prize balls awarded is appealed by executing the result presentation. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as described above, when the variable display result is OFF with time saving in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, and the type of change with time saving is OFF is B (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, In the case where the time-saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the state A3), when the variable display is executed 685 times in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the result performance is executed, but in the normal state, When the variable display result is OFF with time saving in time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, and the type of change in time saving is OFF with time saving, the time saving state is set to OFF after time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 ends. Regarding the case where the variable display is controlled by C2), even if the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result in these time saving states is a time saving result or a loss. Result performance is not executed. That is, in the case where the time saving states C2 overlap, the result performance is not executed even if the overlapping time saving states C2 end. For this reason, if the variable display result in the normal state turns out to be a time saving result, and in the time saving state C2, the variable display result becomes a time saving result (if the time saving states C2 overlap), the overlapping time saving state When C2 ends, the game may be in a state where it has never been controlled to a jackpot game state, so it is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to execution of the result performance in such a situation.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, a mode has been exemplified in which when the time saving states C2 overlap, the result presentation is not executed when the overlapping time saving states C2 end, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the time-saving states C2 overlap, when the overlapping time-saving states C2 end, the result performance may be performed at a lower rate than when the other time-saving states end, or the other time-saving states end. The result performance may be performed in a smaller display area than the current time, or the result performance may be performed in a shorter period than when another time saving state ends. In other words, restricting the execution of the result effect when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends includes executing the result effect at a lower rate than when the other time saving state ends, and limiting the execution of the result effect when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends. This includes executing the result effect in a smaller display area than the actual time, executing the result effect in a shorter period than when another time-saving state ends, etc.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

(Characteristic part 130SG-1)
For example, in the feature section 130SG, a mode in which the time-saving acquisition chance effect can be executed only in the variable display of the first special symbol has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the feature section 130SG-1 is shown in the figure. As shown in 284-80, the time-saving acquisition chance effect may be executed in both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In this way, when the time-saving acquisition chance production can be performed with both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, PA2-4, which is a variable pattern for executing the time-saving acquisition chance production, By making it possible to perform PA2-6 with a variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure, variable displays other than the variable display of the first special figure and the remaining reservation immediately after the time saving state of the second special figure can be performed. (Variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state) allows variable display to be performed with the above-mentioned variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-6, and the remaining reservation immediately after the time-saving state in the second special figure. In the variable display (variable display of the second special figure immediately after being controlled to the normal state), the variable display may be executed in a variation pattern other than the above-mentioned PA2-4 and PA2-6.

Furthermore, when executing the variable display of the first special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, and when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6. , the start timing of the reach performance of each super reach is the same time, while the reach performance of the super reach differs in the performance period and at least part of the content (super reach α- shown in Figure 284-80). 1 reach performance and super reach α-2 reach performance), and perform the time-saving acquisition chance performance with different performance periods and at least a part of the content (time-saving acquisition chance performance A shown in Figure 284-80). What is necessary is to execute time-saving acquisition chance performance B).

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-80, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the PA2-4 or PA2-6 variation pattern, the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach α-1 is set to PA2-4. Or, set it shorter than the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach α-2 when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the variable pattern of PA2-6 (from the start of variable display to the execution period of the reach effect of Super Reach α-1). L1 is the period from the start of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect of Super Reach α-2 (temporarily stopped when the decorative pattern is a missed combination). L2 is the period up to (timing) when L2 > L1) and execution of time-saving acquisition chance effect A when variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 The period T1 is longer than the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 (execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance performance: T1 >T2). In other words, when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, it is better to execute the variable display of the first special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6. The period from the start of the time-saving acquisition chance performance to the end of the time-saving acquisition chance performance and the end of the variable display (until the time-saving C1 flag is set) is set shorter than that.

In addition, in the variable display of the remaining reservation immediately after the time-saving state in the second special figure (variable display of the second special figure immediately after being controlled to the normal state), by executing time-saving acquisition chance performance B as a time-saving acquisition chance performance. , if the period from the start of the variable display to the timing at which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to a combination of failures (the start timing of the time-saving acquisition chance production) is L3, the variable display based on the remaining hold immediately after the time-saving state in the second special symbol. The period L3 from the start of the variable display to the timing at which the time-saving acquisition chance performance starts when time-saving winnings A is won is variable display starts when time-saving winnings A is winning in the variable display of the first special symbol. The period is set to be shorter than the period L1 from the time to the timing at which the time-saving acquisition chance effect is started.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special figure is executed in the normal state, the execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance performance is relatively long T1, so that the player is not affected by being controlled to the time-saving state C1. In addition to suitably increasing expectations, the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display due to remaining reservations) is performed up to four times immediately after the time-saving state, which may give a negative impression due to the end of the time-saving state. During the period, if the execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance production is T2, which is shorter than T1, and the time-saving winning chance A is won, the game is returned to the time-saving state at a good tempo, thereby suitably dispelling the player's sense of regret. Therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a time saving mode.

In addition, when comparing the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A and the executable period X of the preview performance during variable display, the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A is set longer than the executable period X of the preview performance during variable display. (T1 > Y and variable display notice performance executable period Z are set shorter than time-saving acquisition chance performance B execution period T2 (Y>T2, Z>T2). In other words, the time-saving acquisition chance production A suggests a transition to the time-saving state C1 in the normal state, so even if the transition to the time-saving state C1 is encouraged for a long period of time, it will not cause much stress to the player. If the player is already controlled to one of the time-saving states, it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the small-winning gaming state rather than shifting to the time-saving state C1, so time-saving acquisition chance performance B Because there is a risk that the transition to the time-saving state C1 for a long period of time may actually lead to a decline in interest, the time-saving acquisition chance performance Bwo is now executed for a shorter period than the variable display notice performance. There is.

Furthermore, during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times immediately after the time-saving state (variable display due to remaining reservation), in the variable display in which the winning A with time-saving is won, the time-saving display will be performed from the start of the variable display. The period L3 from the start timing of the winning chance performance B is the period L1 from the start of the variable display to the start timing A of the time saving chance performance in the case where time-saving win A wins in the variable display of the first special symbol, and Period L2 from the start of the variable display to the start timing of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B when the time-saving winning prize A is won in variable displays other than the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time-saving state in the second special symbol. By setting it shorter than , it is possible to suitably return to the time saving state without excessively prolonging the period until the start of the time saving acquisition chance production B.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off, a notice effect will be executed during the variable display for the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-6. Possible variable display notice performance executable period The period from to the start of the normal reach is the period Y during which the variable display notice performance can be executed, and from the start of the variable display when executing the variable display of the remaining reservation in the time saving state in the second special map. Assuming that the period until the start of normal reach is the executable period Z during which the variable display preview performance can be performed, as shown in Figure 284-81, these variable display preview performance executable periods X, variable The performance patterns that can be executed as the variable display preview performance may be different between the display preview performance executable period Y and the variable display preview performance executable period Z.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-81, the number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed during the variable display preview performance executable period Z is changed to the variable display that can be executed during the variable display preview performance executable period X. Less than the number of performance patterns of the preview performance, that is, if A is won with a time saver in the variable display of the remaining reservation in the time saver state in the second special figure, the winner with a time saver is won in the variable display of the first special figure. The number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed may be smaller than that in the case where A wins. By doing this, in the case where the winning A with time saving is won in the variable display of the remaining reservation in the time saving state in the second special drawing, the time saving state can be suitably set without being excessively excited by the notice performance during the variable display. It can be reinstated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-81, if the winning A with time saving is won in the variable display of remaining reservation in the time saving state in the second special drawing, the variable display of the first special drawing Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the number of performance patterns of the variable display notice performance that can be executed is smaller than that in the case where winning A wins with a time saving, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving in the second special figure is shown as an example. In the case where time-saving winning A is won in the variable display of remaining reservations in the state, the preview performance may be made impossible to execute during the variable display. In other words, in this feature section, "the number of types of specific suggestion effects that are executed is small" includes that the preview effect during variable display is not executed in any of the effect patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-1, a form is exemplified in which the time-saving acquisition chance production B can be executed with both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the variable display of the second special figure is executed, in the time saving states where the number of times of time saving control is relatively small, such as time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state C1, time saving acquisition chance effect B is used. On the other hand, in time-saving states where the number of times of time-saving control is large, such as time-saving state A3 and time-saving state C2 (time-saving states in which the jackpot game state is controlled with an extremely high probability), time-saving acquisition chance production B may be restricted. good. In addition, if a variable pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is executed in the time-saving state A3 and time-saving state C2 is selected, the special reach performance and variable display preview performance will continue until the end of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B. may be executed.

In addition, as mentioned above, when the variable pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is executed in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2 is selected, the special reach performance and variable are performed until the end of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B. In the case of executing the preview performance during display, as shown in FIG. 284-80, since the execution period (T2) of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B is shorter than the execution period (T1) of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A, To suppress the sense of incongruity caused by not executing a time-saving acquisition chance performance B to a player even if a dedicated ready-to-win performance or a notice performance during variable display is executed, and to suitably adjust the length of the variable display.

In the above example, the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is not executed in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, but if a variation pattern is selected in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is performed in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2. exemplified a form in which the length of the variable display is adjusted while minimizing the sense of discomfort given to the player by executing a dedicated effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state A3, the time saving state In C2, the variation pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is executed may not be selected in the first place.

(Characteristic part 130SG-2)
In addition, in the feature section 130SG, a mode has been exemplified in which it is possible to execute a pending display notice effect, and in the prefetch notice setting process (S161), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect pattern. Regarding the execution or non-execution of the pending display notice effect and the effect pattern, the characteristic part 130SG-2 is determined in the proportions shown in Figures 284-82 (A), 284-82 (B), and 284-82 (C). All you have to do is decide. In addition, in the hold display preview performance, the performance pattern α is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in blue, the performance pattern β is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in green, and the performance pattern γ is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in red. This is the performance pattern displayed in .

In the examples shown in Figures 284-82(A), 284-82(B), and 284-82(C), if the variable display results tend to be negative, the suspension display preview performance is not executed (the suspension The ratio of execution (white display) is the highest, the execution rate of the pending display preview performance in the performance pattern α is lower than the non-execution rate of the pending display preview performance, and the execution ratio of the pending display preview performance in the performance pattern β is the pending display The execution rate of the preview performance in the performance pattern α is set lower than that of the performance pattern α, and the execution rate of the suspended display preview performance in the performance pattern γ is set lower than the execution rate of the performance pattern β of the hold display preview performance. In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution rate of the pending display notice performance (white display of the pending display) is the lowest, and the execution rate of the pending display notice performance in performance pattern α is the non-execution rate of the pending display notice performance. The execution rate is higher than the execution rate of the performance pattern β of the pending display notice performance, and the execution rate of the performance pattern β of the pending display notice performance is higher than the execution ratio of the performance pattern α of the pending display notice performance, and the execution rate of the performance pattern γ of the pending display notice performance is the performance pattern β of the pending display notice performance. The execution rate is set higher than the execution rate in the performance pattern β of the performance.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 284-82(A), 284-82(B), and 284-82(C), there is a pending display notice effect when the variable display result is a loss and when it is a jackpot. On the other hand, if the variable display result shows that the time will be shortened, then the pending display notice effect will not be executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the pending display corresponding to the variable display in which the variable display result is time-saving or not always to be displayed in white (the pending display notice effect is not executed), that is, the variable display result By displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display in which the time saver has been applied or missed in a color such as blue, green, red, etc., the player is prevented from focusing on the fact that the time saver has been applied or not. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in an incorrect combination.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-82(B), there are three pending display preview performances for the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3: performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ. In addition, if the variable display result is out of reach, the performance pattern α of the pending display preview performance is determined at 5%, and the variable display result is If the normal reach is out of reach, the performance pattern α of the pending display notice performance is determined to be executed at 20%, and if the variable display result is out of the super reach, the performance pattern α of the pending display notice performance is determined to be executed at 30%. The performance pattern β of the hold display preview performance is determined to be executed at 20%, and the performance pattern γ of the hold display preview performance is determined to be executed at 10%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), as a hold display notice effect for the second special figure in the time saving state C2, the hold display is held in two effect patterns, effect pattern β and effect pattern γ. It is possible to execute the display preview effect, and if the variable display result is out of reach or normal reach, execution of the preview effect is not decided, and if the variable display result is out of super reach, the display is on hold. The execution of the performance pattern β of the preview performance is determined at 10%, and the execution of the performance pattern γ of the suspended display preview performance is determined at 5%.

In other words, the number of performance patterns that can be executed as a pending display notice performance is smaller in time saving state C2 than in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3. The rate of execution is lower in time saving state C2 than in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2 of the feature section 130SG-2, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to an excessively heightened sense of expectation due to the hold display notice performance, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko game equipped with the time-saving state from decreasing the interest in the game. The marketability of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), in both the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 in this feature section 130SG-2, the pending display notice performance can be executed with the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ. It has become. In particular, in the time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, the data capacity required for the pending display notice performance is reduced by allowing the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ to be executed at the same rate. be able to.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A) and 284-82 (C), in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2, the performance pattern β and the performance pattern are used as the performance patterns of the pending display notice performance. γ is executable, but the rate at which the pending display notice performance is controlled to the jackpot gaming state by executing performance pattern β or performance pattern γ (jackpot expectation level) is higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A2. and is set higher than the time saving state A3. In this way, in this feature section 130SG-2, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of performance patterns of the hold display notice performance by making it possible to execute a part of the performance patterns of the hold display notice performance in common in different time saving states. It is possible to reduce the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1, and the expectation level of jackpot between performance pattern β and performance pattern γ is higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A2 and time-saving state A3. It is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations regarding the hold display preview effect during state C2.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-82 (A), Figure 284-82 (B), and Figure 284-82 (C), the hold-up that occurred during the time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2 If it is a memory, even if the variable display based on the suspended memory is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute the suspended display preview performance for the suspended memory, and the variable display result can be displayed in a short time in either state. The pending display notice performance will not be executed in case of failure. Therefore, as shown in Figure 284-83, regarding the hold display based on up to four hold memories stored immediately after the end of the time saving state, either the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory is displayed. Even if there is, the variable display is executed during the execution of the result performance without executing the pending display notice performance, and the shooting star performance or the V stock performance is executed based on the fact that the variable display result is a time saving result.

In addition, as described above, in this feature section 130SG-2, the pending display preview effect is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is time-saving or not.As shown in FIG. 284-84, After holding memory where the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss, there may be a hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. In this case, while the pending display based on the pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot over multiple variable displays is continuously displayed in any of production pattern α, production pattern β, and production pattern γ. After the variable display of the time-saving error is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach α and the time-saving acquisition chance effect are executed without the variable display of the jackpot being executed, and the variable display stops, the gaming state changes to the time-saving state C1. It will be controlled. Therefore, in this feature section 130SG-2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pending display of the jackpot behind it, rather than the pending display of the time-saver winning or losing, so that the combination of special symbols and decorative symbols indicating the time-saving winning or losing is possible. It is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to what is displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as a pending display preview performance, the target pending display is displayed in a common display mode (any of performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ) over multiple variable displays. Although the display form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a hold display preview performance, at least a part of the display form of the target hold display is displayed in a plurality of variable displays. It may be allowed to change. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may vary depending on the change pattern of the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the pending display preview performance.

Further, in the feature section 130SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which the pending display preview effect is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is time-saving, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to perform a pending display preview effect also for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result.

In this way, in the case where it is possible to execute a pending display notice effect even for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-85 and 284-86, , If there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is not included in the time saver among the maximum 4 hold memories stored at the end of time saving, it is possible to perform a hold display preview effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory. On the other hand, when a suspension memory is derived in which the variable display result is a time saving result or a failure during the time saving state A, the suspension display preview effect may not be executed for the suspension display corresponding to the suspension memory. By doing this, the variable display immediately after the time-saving state ends can give the player a sense of tension and improve the game's interest, thereby increasing the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time-saving state. Can be done.

Furthermore, even if it is possible to perform a pending display notice performance for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, as shown in FIG. 284-87, the time saving state B. There is a pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state C, and the variable display result is time saved before the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. If there is a pending memory that results in a loss, a pending display preview performance is executed for the pending display that corresponds to the pending memory that results in a time-saving variable display result and a loss, while a pending memory that results in a variable display result that becomes a jackpot. The hold display preview effect may not be executed for the corresponding hold display.

By doing this, the variable display result in the hold memory (second special figure hold memory) stored at the end of the time saving state A, time saver state B, and time saver state C is before the hold memory where the variable display result becomes a jackpot. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is time saving/losing A, the time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 will be controlled before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 will be controlled. Even if the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the first variable display, the time saving state C is achieved by not executing the pending display notice performance for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory where the variable display result becomes a jackpot. It is possible to reduce the feeling of wasted effort due to a significantly shortened controlled period.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-2, there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum of 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C, and , If there is a pending memory where the variable display result is a time-saving loss before the jackpot holding memory, a pending display preview performance is performed for the pending display corresponding to the variable display result that is a time-saving loss. While executing the above, the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. Among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C, there is a pending memory whose variable display result is a jackpot, and before the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result results in a time saving result, a pending display notice effect is executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result results in a time saving result, while the variable display result is A pending display preview performance targeting a pending display corresponding to a pending memory that becomes a jackpot is executed at a lower rate than when there is a pending memory that results in a variable display result that is a time-saving loss before the pending memory that becomes a jackpot. Alternatively, the variable display result may be executed in a production pattern rather than when the target is a suspended display according to a suspended memory in which the time-saving result is a failure.

In other words, there is a pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state C, and the variable display result is time saving before the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. The form of restricting the execution of the pending display preview performance when there is a pending memory that results in a loss includes not executing the pending display preview performance that targets the pending display corresponding to the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot; The variable display result is lower than the case where there is no pending memory where the variable display result becomes a time-saving loss before the pending memory that becomes the jackpot. The variable display result can be executed in proportion, and the variable display result is a hold display that targets the hold display that corresponds to the hold memory that becomes a jackpot, and the variable display result is a hold that is shortened in time before the hold memory that becomes the jackpot. This includes making it possible to execute with fewer performance patterns than in the case where no memory exists.

In addition, the present feature section 130SG-2 exemplifies a form in which a pending display preview performance can be executed even for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this. This is not limited to, but if there are multiple suspended memories in which the variable display results are time-saving or not, the first of the multiple suspended memories in which the variable display results are time-saving or not is stored. It is also possible to perform the hold display preview effect only on the hold memory where the variable display is performed, and not to execute the hold display preview effect on other hold memories. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of wasted play due to the variable display result showing the time saving result again after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state C.

In addition, in the feature section 130SG-2, in the image display device 5, the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, small symbols corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns, panel display effects, and pending display notices. This example shows a form in which prefetched images for effects, background images such as a first background image, a second background image, etc. are displayed. For example, as shown in Figures 284-88 and 284-89, these images may be When doing so, images of the first image data with the highest display priority, panel display effects, images such as small patterns corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure reservation memory number, the second special figure reservation memory number, and the variable display of decorative symbols are displayed. Prefetched images such as pre-fetched images and pending display preview effects are images of second image data that have a lower display priority than images of first image data, and background images such as the first background image and second background image have the lowest display priority. The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be created by drawing as an image of the third image data and combining the image of the first image data, the image of the second image data, and the image of the third image data. . By doing this, even if a common look-ahead notice is executed in the time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C2, it is possible to give a visually different impression depending on the background image, so the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced. After reducing the amount, it is possible to create a sound that suitably enhances the presentation effect of the pre-read notice.

(Characteristic part 130SG-3)
In addition, in the feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-48, the execution rate of the variable display notice performance in the variable display of the second special symbol is made common in all time saving states, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92 as the characteristic part 130SG-3, the execution rate of the preview effect during the variable display in the variable display of the second special figure is set to the time saving state A1. ~The time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2 may each be different.

As shown in Figure 284-90 and Figure 284-92 (B), in time saving state A1 to time saving state A3 and time saving state C2, the variable display notice when the variable display result is jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B The rate at which the performance is performed in the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E is different. In particular, in time-saving states A1 to A3, the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern E is set higher than in time-saving state A1 to time-saving state A3. By executing the preview performance during the variable display in the performance pattern E, it is possible to enhance the special feeling when playing consecutive games, and it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving state.

In addition, regarding the variable display preview performance when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the variable display preview performance is in production pattern E in time saving state C2 than in time saving states A1 to A3. It is also possible to set a high execution rate, but in this case, the variable display notice effect is executed in the effect pattern E during the time saving state C2, thereby effectively raising the player's expectations. It is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the time saving mode, and it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a time saving mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-90, when the variable display result in time saving state A is a failure in time saving, the variable display preview effect is displayed at a higher rate than in the case in time saving state A when the variable display result is negative. It is designed to be executed in production pattern A. Therefore, by executing some kind of variable display preview performance, the player is not made to expect that the special symbols will be displayed in a time-saving combination, and the variable display preview performance is in production pattern A. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of time-saving hits and misses without making the players expect that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by being executed. .

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-91 and 284-92 (A), for the time saving state B and the time saving state C1, among the performance patterns D and E, which are the performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, The execution rate of production pattern E is different. In particular, in this feature section 130SG-2, since the execution rate of the performance pattern E is set higher in the time saving state B than in the time saving state C1, the jackpot gaming state is controlled during the time saving state B. It is possible to enhance the special feeling of the pachinko game machine 1 and improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode.

It is also possible to set the execution rate of the performance pattern E higher in the time-saving state C1 than in the time-saving state B, but in this case, it is possible to increase the special feeling when the time-saving state C1 is controlled. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92, in the time-saving state A, both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, can be executed, and in the time-saving state B. In this case, both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns for the preview performance during variable display, cannot be executed, and in the time saving state C1, the performance pattern D and the performance pattern, which are the performance patterns for the preview performance during variable display, cannot be executed. Of E, only performance pattern E is executable, and in the time saving state C2, both performance pattern D and performance pattern E, which are performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, are not executable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-93(A), in this feature section 130SG-3, the execution start timing of the variable display notice effect for each variation pattern is a first timing and a timing later than the first timing. A certain second timing is provided, and the execution start timing of the variable display notice effect in each time saving state is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 284-93(B).

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 284-93(C), there are two execution start timings of the guaranteed performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display notice performance in the time saving states A1 to A3. The number of possible correct performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) is two. In addition, the execution start timing of the accurate performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the preview performance during variable display in the time saving state C1 is two, and the number of possible performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) that can be executed is two. is one piece. Then, the execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display preview performance in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 is 0, and the execution timing of the possible performance pattern (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) is 0. Pattern E) The number is 0.

In this way, in the time-saving states A1 to A3, the number of possible performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display notice performance that can be executed and the execution start timing of the corresponding probability performance patterns are higher than in the time-saving state A1 to time-saving state A3. By increasing the number of characters, the preview performance during the variable display in the time-saving states A1 to A3 becomes more diverse, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment during consecutive viewings in these time-saving states A1 to A3.

In addition, the time-saving state C1 is a time-saving state because the number of execution patterns (performance pattern D and production pattern E) of the variable display notice performance that can be executed and the execution start timing of the corresponding probability performance pattern are greater than the time-saving state B. Since the preview performance during the variable display in C1 is diversified, the interest in the time saving state C1 can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-3, as shown in FIG. 284-93, an example is given in which the preview performance during variable display cannot be executed in the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to execute the variable display preview performance even in the time saving state C2. In particular, in the case where the variable display preview effect can be executed even in the time saving state C2, the variable display notice effect can be performed at the first timing in the production pattern D or the production pattern E (accurate performance pattern) in the time reduction state C2. The execution rate may be set higher than in time saving state A. By doing this, in the time-saving state C2 where the controlled period is relatively long, the variable display notice performance is likely to be executed from an early timing (first timing) in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E, so the extended period It is possible to prevent this from occurring and suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the variable display notice performance can be performed even in the time-saving state C2, in the time-saving state C2, the variable display notice performance is performed in production pattern D or production pattern E (probability performance) rather than in the time-saving state A. At the same time, in the time saving state C1, the execution rate of the variable display notice effect is set lower in the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E (probable effect pattern) than in the time saving state A. (Percentage of execution of the correct performance pattern: Time saving state C2>Time saving state A>Time saving state C1). By doing this, in the time-saving state C2 where the controlled period is relatively long, the proportion of the variable display notice performance being executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E is high, so the game becomes more interesting and the game becomes more interesting. can be improved. Furthermore, by making the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in the production pattern E in the time saving state C2 higher than the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in the production pattern E in the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 Since it is possible to prevent the game interest from decreasing due to the delay caused by not being controlled to the jackpot game state, the marketability of the Pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state can be improved.

In addition, as the modified example, the ratio of executing the variable display preview performance in the production pattern E in the time saving state C2 is made higher than the ratio of executing the variable display notice performance in the production pattern E in the time saving state C1. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the variable display notice effect is executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E in the time saving state C1 is changed to the variable display notice effect in the time saver state C2. The rate may be higher than the rate at which the performance is executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E. By doing this, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot B during the time saving state C1, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time saving state. can be increased.

Furthermore, in this feature section 130SG-3, as shown in FIG. 284-93, a mode is exemplified in which the preview performance during variable display cannot be executed in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to perform the variable display preview performance even in the time saving state B. In particular, when making it possible to perform a variable display preview performance even in time-saving state B, in time-saving state B, the variable display notice performance is performed at the first timing using performance pattern D or performance pattern E (probability performance pattern). The execution rate may be set higher than in the time saving state C1. By doing this, in the time saving state B where the controlled period is relatively long, the variable display notice performance is likely to be executed from an early timing (first timing) in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E, so the extended period It is possible to prevent this from occurring and suppress a decline in gaming interest.

(Characteristic part 130SG-4)
In addition, in the feature section 130SG, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined to be only jackpot B, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as shown in FIGS. 284-94(A) and 284-94(B) as the characteristic part 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot. It may be possible to determine jackpot A and jackpot B as the jackpot type in both cases of a jackpot.

In this way, when it is possible to determine jackpot A and jackpot B as the jackpot types both when the variable display result of the first special drawing becomes a jackpot and when the variable display result of the second special drawing becomes a jackpot. As shown in Figures 284-94(C) and 284-94(D), if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the decorative symbols are arranged in an even number combination (for example, " 222'', ``444'', ``666'', ``888''), and as part of the blessing performance until the end timing of the variable display, the promotion suggestion performance and jackpot that suggest that the jackpot type is jackpot B. It may also be possible to execute a jackpot type notification effect to notify which type is jackpot A or jackpot B. On the other hand, if the hit type is jackpot B, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at an even number combination (for example, "222", "444", "666", "888") at the end timing of the reach effect. , As part of the blessing performance until the end timing of the variable display, a promotion suggestion performance that suggests that the jackpot type is jackpot B and a jackpot type notification display that informs whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B are performed. While making it executable, at the end timing of the reach effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at odd number combinations (for example, "111", "333", "555", "777") until the end timing of the variable display. A blessing performance that does not include the aforementioned promotion suggestion performance and jackpot type notification performance may be performed.

In this way, when the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped at the end of the reach effect and the execution or non-execution of the promotion suggestion effect and the jackpot type notification effect are different depending on the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 284-94 (E). Furthermore, the proportion of even numbers and odd numbers, which are the temporary stopping modes of the decorative symbols, may be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of jackpot. Furthermore, if the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols is determined to be an even number (if it is decided to execute a promotion suggestion performance and a jackpot notification performance as part of the blessing performance), a production that is a production pattern of the promotion suggestion production. Pattern X and effect pattern Y may be determined at different ratios depending on the type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 284-96, the performance pattern X of the promotion suggestion performance displays a continuous hit promotion image that instructs the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 631B on the image display device 5, and This is an effect in which the jackpot type is repeatedly switched between jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5) in response to repeated hits of the button 631B. On the other hand, the performance pattern Y of the promotion suggestion performance displays a continuous hit promotion image that instructs the player to press and hold the chance button 631B on the image display device 5, and responds to the long press of the chance button 631B by the player. This is an effect in which the jackpot type repeatedly switches between jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5).

Here, when determining the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols at the ratio shown in Figure 284-94(E), as shown in Figure 284-95, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even number combination (Jackpot When it is announced that the type is jackpot A), a promotion suggestion performance is further executed and jackpot B is announced as a jackpot type notification performance (the jackpot type is re-announced as jackpot B, also referred to as promotion). The ratio (promotion ratio) is set to be lowest in the normal state and increase in the order of time saving state A1 to time saving state A3, time saving state B, time saving state C1 to time saving state C2 (promotion ratio: time saving state C (working time saving state State C1, time-saving state C2)>time-saving state B>time-saving state A (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3)>normal state).

As mentioned above, when comparing the gaming state in the normal state and the case in the time-saving state B, the case where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even number combination during the variable display in the time-saving state B (the jackpot A is not announced) ), the promotion effect will be executed at a higher rate (when jackpot B is re-announced) than when the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination during the variable display in the normal state (when jackpot A is announced). ). In other words, in time saving state B, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display with an even number combination (jackpot A is notified), there is a higher possibility that jackpot B will be notified again as a jackpot type notification effect than in the normal state. Since the value is high, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the player temporarily stops when the decorative symbols are an even number combination during the variable display. This can prevent loss of interest.

Furthermore, when comparing the gaming state in the time-saving state A and the case in the time-saving state B, it is found that when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even number combination during the variable display of the time-saving state B (when jackpot A is announced) ), the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the time saving state A (when the jackpot A is announced) (when the jackpot B is re-announced). ). In other words, in time-saving state B, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during variable display with an even number of combinations (jackpot A is reported), jackpot B may be notified again as a jackpot type notification effect rather than time-saving state A. Because of the high degree of stability, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the player temporarily stops with an even number of decorative symbols during the variable display. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type can be determined from jackpot A and jackpot B, which has a larger number of rounds than the jackpot A. Although the example has been given, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A. It may also be possible to determine a special variation pattern different from the case. Further, the special fluctuation pattern may be selectable as a common jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot type becomes jackpot B in time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C. By doing this, even if a plurality of types of time saving states are provided, the variation pattern can be shared among different time saving states, so the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the feature section 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state A and time saving state C, the gaming state is controlled to time saving state B from the end of the 685th variable display. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in time saving state A and time saving state C, the time saving state in progress (time saving state A, time saving state C) The gaming state may be controlled to the time saving state B after the end of the game. By doing this, it is possible to unify the control when the start condition for another time saving state (second time saving state) is satisfied during one time saving state (first time saving state), so the control load on the CPU 103 is can be reduced.

In addition, in the feature section 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in the normal state (the start condition of time saving state B is satisfied), or when the variable display result is a failure to save time (the start of time saving state C 284-33, Fig. 284 -34), the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but may occur when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in the normal state (the start condition for time saving state B is met), or when the variable display result is changed from the time saving. If (the start condition for time saving state C is satisfied), the gaming state may be controlled to time saving state B or time saving state C at the end timing of the symbol determination period of these variable displays.

Furthermore, as in the feature section 130SG, if the number of variable displays reaches 685 in the normal state (the start condition for time-saving state B is satisfied), or if the variable display result is not successful in time-saving state (in time-saving state C), Regarding the form in which the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C from the end timing of these variable displays when the start condition is satisfied, From the control timing), a right-handed hitting promotion image may be started to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, with an arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" written thereon. By doing this, the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C and the timing at which the display of the right-hand hitting promotion image starts can be made to match, so that the game ball is directed to the right gaming area for the player. Launch can be facilitated in a more accurate period.

(Characteristic part 130SG-5 to 10)
As shown in FIG. 285-1, wings 130SG221 and 130SG321 provided on the left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 50 are provided with a plurality of frame LEDs as frame lamps 9b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-1(A), a plurality of frame LEDs 901 are vertically arranged in the upper left of the front edge of the left wing 130SG221, and a plurality of frame LEDs 902 are arranged in the lower left of the front edge. are arranged in rows in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a plurality of frame LEDs 903 are arranged in a vertical row at the upper right of the front edge of the right wing 130SG321, and a plurality of frame LEDs 904 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction at the lower right of the front edge.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 285-1(B), character panels 130SG400A to 130SG400D on which characters appearing in various performances are displayed are provided on the inner surfaces of the left and right wings 130SG221 and 130SG321, and the surrounding A plurality of frame LEDs are provided as frame lamps 9b. Specifically, a plurality of frame LEDs 911 to 916 are provided around the upper left character panel 130SG400A, a plurality of frame LEDs 917 to 922 are provided around the lower left character panel 130SG400B, and a plurality of frame LEDs 917 to 922 are provided around the upper right character panel 130SG400C. A plurality of frame LEDs 923 to 928 are provided, and a plurality of frame LEDs 929 to 934 are provided around the lower right character panel 130SG400D. Note that these frame LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(A), the game board 2 is formed with an opening 2c for making the image display device 5 visible, and a plurality of board LEDs are provided around the opening 2c. It is being Specifically, board LEDs 951 to 956 are provided on the upper left side of the game board 2, board LEDs 957 to 962 are provided on the lower left side, board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the upper right side, and board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the lower right side. is equipped with board LEDs 969 and 970. The left board LEDs 951 to 962 are arranged on the first downstream path of the game ball provided on the left side of the opening 2c, and the right board LEDs 963 to 970 are arranged on the second downstream path of the game ball provided on the right side of the opening 2c. has been done. Note that these panel LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

Further, the movable body 32 disposed above the opening 2c of the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of movable body LEDs as movable body lamps 9d. Specifically, the movable body LEDs 981 to 986 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front surface of the movable body 32, and the movable body LEDs 987 and 988 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front surface of the movable body 32. ” is placed at the position corresponding to . Note that these movable body LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

In this way, the upper left panel LEDs 951 to 956 and the lower left panel LEDs 957 to 962 are arranged along the first flow path, and the upper right panel LEDs 963 to 968, the movable body LEDs 981 to 986, and the lower right panel LEDs 969 to 970. It is arranged along the second downstream path.

Further, the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the lower right of the opening 2c of the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of attacker LEDs as an attacker lamp 9c. In detail, a plurality of attacker LEDs 991 are provided above the big winning opening door 7A, and a plurality of attacking LEDs 992 are provided in the area corresponding to the big winning opening (so-called "attacker") below the big winning opening door 7A. An attacker LED 993 is provided near the second count switch 130SG024, and a plurality of attacker LEDs 994 are provided near the second starting port switch 22B (variable winning ball device 6B) and below the gate switch 21. It is provided. That is, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are used as attacker LEDs that can emit light in the area corresponding to the big winning opening, and the attacker LED 993 is used as an attacker LED that can emit light in the area that corresponds to the second count switch 130SG024 (so-called V area). , the attacker LED 994 is an attacker LED that can emit light in the vicinity of the second starting port switch 22B and the area corresponding to the gate switch 21 (so-called "general electric power"), and is used for right-handed hitting promotion performance A and right-handed hitting promotion, which will be described later. In each of the performance V and the right-handed hitting promotion performance F, target areas can be individually illuminated. Note that these attacker LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(B), the frame LEDs 901 to 904 as the frame lamp 9b are based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "WAXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later. The frame LEDs 911 to 922 emit light based on the luminance data written in the column of the luminance data table "WLXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later, and the frame LEDs 923 to 934 emit light based on the luminance data described below. Light is emitted based on the brightness data written in the "WRXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) column of the brightness data table.

In addition, the panel LEDs 951 to 962 emit light based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "ELXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later, and the panel LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data described later. Light is emitted based on the luminance data written in the column of the table "ERXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character).

Furthermore, the movable LEDs 981 to 988 as the movable lamp 9d emit light based on luminance data written in a column of a luminance data table "LLXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) to be described later. Furthermore, the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 as the attacker lamps 9c emit light based on brightness data written in a column of a brightness data table "ATXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) to be described later.

<Production mode in various game states>
Next, the sound patterns of BGM (background sound) in the normal state, jackpot game state, time saving states A1, C1, time saving states A2, A3, B, C2, various lamps (frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, panel LED 951) 285-3(A), the luminance data table and main emitted light colors of the movable body LEDs 981 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994) will be explained.

In this feature section, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R and each LED (frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 ~968, 969~970) are different in their light emission modes.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), when the game state is the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 transmits BGM to the speaker based on the sound pattern N10 during the variable display (high-speed scrolling) period of decorative symbols. 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, panel LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on a brightness data table (not shown) for variable display. During the execution period of the reach effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern N20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness data table for the reach effect. (not shown). During the execution period of the notification effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern N30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, the panel LEDs 951 to 970, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness data table for the notification effect. (not shown).

In addition, when the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state, during the fanfare performance execution period (fanfare performance part), BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern F10, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WA1, Frame LEDs 911 to 934 are brightness data tables WL1 and WR1, board LEDs 951 to 962 are brightness data tables EL1, board LEDs 963 to 970 are brightness data tables ER1, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 are brightness data tables LL1, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are brightness data Light is emitted based on table AT1. During the execution period of the right-handed driving promotion effect A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 are displayed in the brightness data table WAA, frame LEDs 911 to 934 are displayed in the brightness data tables WLA and WRA, and board LEDs 951 to 962 are displayed in the brightness data table WAA. Light is emitted based on the table ELA, the panel LEDs 963 to 970 in the luminance data table ERA, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in the luminance data table LLA, and the attack LEDs 991 to 994 in the luminance data table ATA. During the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to brightness data table WAV, frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to brightness data tables WLV and WRV, and panel LEDs 951 to 962 are set to brightness data table WAV. Light is emitted based on the table ELV, the panel LEDs 963 to 970 in the luminance data table ERV, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in the luminance data table LLV, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 in the luminance data table ATV. During the execution period of the in-round effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the in-round effect. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of the ending effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness data table for the ending effect. (not shown).

Also, when the gaming state is either time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1 (during "FINAL BATTLE"), during the execution period of rush performance A (rush performance A part), the BGM is transmitted from speaker 8L based on sound pattern B10. , 8R, frame LEDs 901 to 904 to luminance data table WA2, frame LEDs 911 to 934 to luminance data table WL2, WR2, panel LEDs 951 to 962 to luminance data table EL2, panel LEDs 963 to 970 to luminance data table ER2, movable body The LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the brightness data table LL2, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the brightness data table AT2. During the execution period of the right-handed driving promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the panel LEDs 951 to 962 are set to the brightness data table WAF. Light is emitted based on table ELF, panel LEDs 963 to 970 in luminance data table ERF, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in luminance data table LLF, and attack LEDs 991 to 994 in luminance data table ATF. During the execution period of the short time production, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the FINAL BATTLE production. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of result performance A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness level for result performance A. Light emission control is performed based on a data table (not shown).

Also, when the gaming state is in any of the time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2 (during "BATTLE RUSH"), during the execution period of rush performance B (rush performance B part), the BGM is Output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern R10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 to brightness data table WA3 to 7, frame LEDs 911 to 934 to brightness data table WL3 to 7, WR3 to 7, panel LEDs 951 to 962 to brightness data table EL3 to 7, panel LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on brightness data tables ER3 to 7, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 to brightness data tables LL3 to 7, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 to emit light based on brightness data tables AT3 to AT7. During the execution period of the right-handed driving promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the panel LEDs 951 to 962 are set to the brightness data table WAF. Light is emitted based on table ELF, panel LEDs 963 to 970 in luminance data table ERF, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in luminance data table LLF, and attack LEDs 991 to 994 in luminance data table ATF. During the execution period of the short time production, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the BATTLE RUSH production. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of result performance B, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness level for result performance B. Light emission control is performed based on a data table (not shown).

In addition, in this feature part, if the variable display result is a jackpot or a time-saving win or a loss, or if the variable display number reaches 685 (when the start condition for time-saving state B is met), these jackpot or time-saving win or loss , the rainbow of each LED (frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970) It is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which light is emitted in a (rainbow color) mode, a rainbow image (an image in a rainbow mode) is displayed on the image display device 5, and a movable body effect in which the movable body 32 is operated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the variable display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot winning), the performance control CPU 120 controls the reach before the reach during the variable display where the variable display result becomes the jackpot. After that, while the rainbow performance and the movable body performance can be performed at each timing when control of the jackpot game state is started, the rainbow performance and the movable body performance are not performed during the pattern determination period.

In addition, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times (ceiling reaching variation), the production control CPU 120 executes the rainbow production and the movable body production at each timing before and after the reach during the 685th variable display. On the other hand, a rainbow effect and a movable object effect are executed during the symbol confirmation period and at the start of control in the time saving state B. That is, in this feature section, during variable display where the number of variable displays is 685 times, that is, during variable display where the start condition of time saving state B is satisfied, the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not executed.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is ``loss with time saving'' and the type of ``loss with time saving'' is ``loss with time saving'', the performance control CPU 120 controls the before and after reach during the variable display in which the variable display result is ``loss with time saving''. The rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not executed at each timing of the symbol determination period and the start of control in the time saving state C1.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is ``loss with time saving'' and the type of ``loss with time saving'' is ``loss with time saving'', the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance before reaching, after reaching during the variable display where the variable display result is ``losing with time saving'' While the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not executed at each timing, the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are executed at the timing when control is started in the time saving state C2. In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic section is time saving or not (when controlled to time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 after variable display), rainbow effect and movable body effect during the variable display and symbol confirmation period. is no longer executed.

In particular, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance mode of the rainbow effect differs depending on the gaming state in which the variable display is executed. For example, as shown in the left diagram of FIGS. 285-3(C) and 285-3(D), the rainbow effect when the gaming state is the normal state is a step-up effect (see FIG. 284-50) with five stages. When the image of the character E, which is the image of the eyes, is displayed, a rainbow-like image (background image) is also displayed. This is a performance that lights up the lights. On the other hand, as shown in the right figures of Figures 285-3 (C) and 285-3 (D), the rainbow effect when the gaming state is in the time saving state is an effect that is executed together with the rush effect B during the symbol confirmation period. In this case, the image display device 5 displays an image different from the rainbow mode (non-rainbow mode image), and each LED is displayed in the same way as when the image of the character E, which is the fifth stage image, is displayed as a step-up effect. This is a production that lights up in a rainbow pattern.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 285-3(C) and 285-3(D), in the rainbow effect executed in the normal state and the rainbow effect executed in the time saving state, the image is displayed on the image display device 5. While the display brightness data tables used to cause each LED to emit light are different, the light emission brightness data table used to cause each LED to emit light is common.

In addition, in the variable display in this characteristic part, as shown in FIGS. 285-9(A) to 285-9(E), when stopping the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 displays these decorative symbols normally. It is now possible to perform a stop pattern action display in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed after it has been enlarged once from the size of , and then returned to the normal size (reduced), and the reduced pattern is displayed in a glowing manner (flash display). However, whether or not the performance control CPU 120 performs the stop symbol action display depends on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss with a time saver, and whether the number of variable displays has reached 685 ( It differs depending on whether the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied or not.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E) and FIGS. 285-9 (A) to 285-9 (E), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 performs a stop symbol action. The display is executed, but if the variable display result is a time saving result or the variable display number reaches 685 (the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied), the performance control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol action display. do not. Although not particularly shown, even if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the stop symbol action display.

In this feature part, as shown in Fig. 285-4 (A), three types of right-handed hitting promotion effects (promotion displays) are provided: right-handed playing promotion effect A, right-handed playing promotion effect V, and right-handed hitting promotion effect F. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance.

Right-hitting promotion performance A is a performance that is executed when the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, during the execution period of the fanfare performance based on the variable display that became the jackpot, and is a performance that is performed to the player. On the other hand, this is a performance that urges the player to win the game ball into the grand prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right game area. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA. It has become so.

The right-hand hitting promotion performance V is a performance that is executed when the variable display result becomes a small hit, during the execution period of the fanfare performance based on the variable display that resulted in the small hit, and is This is an effect that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate a V winning prize) by launching the game ball toward the game area. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV. It has become so.

The right-handed hitting promotion performance F is a performance that is executed during the execution period of a rush performance (rush performance A or rush performance B) corresponding to the controlled time-saving state when controlled to any time-saving state. This is an effect that prompts the player to cause the gate switch 21 to detect the game ball (satisfying the starting condition for the normal symbol) by launching the game ball toward the right game area. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF. It has become so.

More precisely, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), as the promotion display of the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, a character image is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5, and a character image is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5. In the lower right corner, there is an image of the special variable winning ball device 7, and in the center of the image display device 5, there is a right-handed shot that prompts the player to hit the game ball into the big winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right gaming area. Promotional images (message "Right-handed" and images of right-pointing arrows), semicircular arrow images convex upward from the left to the right at the top of the image display device 5 are displayed in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow colors) be done.

In addition, in the image display device 5, these character images, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the right-handed hitting promotion image, and the upward semicircular arrow image are displayed as background images from the center of the image display device 5. An effect image in which a plurality of radial straight lines extend toward the edge of 5 is displayed. Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the parts corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are more noticeable than the parts corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 993 and 994. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed driving promotion effect A, the sound of "right-handed hitting" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed playing effect sound that urges the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. be done.

As a promotion display for the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 toward the right gaming area for the player. Right hitting promotion image (image with message “Aim for V!!”) that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate a V win) by launching the game ball, the upper part of the image display device 5 , a semicircular arrow image convex upward from left to right is displayed in white. In the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, the right-handed hitting promotion image is displayed in the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion image displayed in the right-handed hitting promotion performance A.

Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the part of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that corresponds to the placement position of the attacker LED 993 is more noticeable than the part that corresponds to the placement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 994. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the voice "Aim for V" will be heard from speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed playing effect sound to encourage the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. Output.

The promotion display for the right-handed hitting promotion effect F includes an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 at the center of the image display device 5 directed toward the right gaming area for the player. Right hitting promotion image (image with message “Aim here!!”) that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball (generates a V winning), upper part of image display device 5 , a semicircular arrow image convex upward from left to right is displayed in white. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion performance F, the right-handed hitting promotion image is displayed in a smaller size than the right-handed hitting promotion images displayed in the right-handed hitting promotion performance A and the right-handed hitting promotion performance V (the size of the right-handed hitting promotion image : Right-handed hitting promotion performance A = Right-handed hitting promotion performance V > Right-handed hitting promotion performance F).

Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, the part of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that corresponds to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 994 is more noticeable than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 991, 992 or the attacker LED 993. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the voice "Aim for V" will be heard from speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed acting effect urging the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. Output.

Here, if we pay attention to the light emission state of each attacker LED during the execution of the right-handed hitting promotion effect, as shown in FIG. , WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA, the light emission control is executed based on the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, so that the parts corresponding to the placement positions of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are changed to the positions of the attacker LEDs 993 and attackers. In response to the location of the LED 994 being highlighted more than the corresponding location, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 flash in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow colors), while the attacker LEDs 993 and 994 remain off. Ru.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is Among them, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 is highlighted more than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 994, and the attacker LED 993 blinks in white. , the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, and the attacker LED 994 remain off.

During the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is Among them, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 994 is highlighted by being displayed in a more conspicuous color or with higher brightness than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 993. , the attacker LED 994 blinks in white, while the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 and the attacker LED 993 remain off.

Furthermore, while right-handed batting promotion performance A is in progress, the LEDs corresponding to the right-handed batting path are sequentially illuminated in a rainbow color scheme, and for right-handed batting promotion performance V and right-handed batting promotion performance F, The LEDs corresponding to the right-handed hitting path are sequentially emitted in white.

Also, if we pay attention to the right-handed playing effect sound, as shown in Figure 285-4 (D), the speakers 8L and 8R are played at the same volume during execution of right-handed hitting promotion effect A and during execution of right-handed hitting promotion effect V. A right-handed performance sound is output from. On the other hand, while the right-handed player promotion effect F is being executed, the right-handed player effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a lower volume than during the execution of the right-handed person promotion effect A and the right-handed player promotion effect V ( Volume of right-handed hitting performance sound: Right-handed hitting promotion performance A = Right-handed hitting promotion performance V > Right-handed hitting promotion performance F).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed hitting promotion image has the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion effect V. In addition, this is an effect that is displayed in a larger size than the right-handed hitting promotion effect F. In addition, the right-handed driving promotion performance A includes the promotion display shown in (B) after displaying the name on the image display device 5 (displaying a message image of "FEVER" indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled). A promotion display of right-handed hitting promotion effect A) is displayed. In addition, when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed driving promotion effect A, a message image other than the name display is not displayed (for example, below the message image of "FEVER" which is the name display). Message images such as "entering" (entering display) and message images indicating conditions for the variable display result to become a jackpot (jackpot explanation display) are not displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), in the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, the character image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed hitting promotion image is the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion performance A, and is the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion performance A. This is a performance that is displayed in a larger size than the performance F. In addition, the right-handed driving promotion effect V is shown in FIG. 285-4 (B) after the name is displayed on the image display device 5 (display of a message image of "FEVER" indicating that the jackpot game state is controlled). A promotion display (promotion display of right-handed hitting promotion effect V) is displayed. In addition, when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed driving promotion effect V, a message image other than the name display is not displayed (for example, below the message image of "FEVER" which is the name display Message images such as "entering" (entering display) and message images indicating conditions for the variable display result to become a jackpot (jackpot explanation display) are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, the character image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed hitting promotion image is different from the right-handed hitting promotion effect A and the right-handed hitting promotion effect F. This is also a performance that is displayed in a small size. In addition, the right-handed driving promotion effect F includes a name display on the image display device 5 (a message image of "FINAL BATTLE" corresponding to the time-saving state A1 and the time-saving state C1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3, a time-saving state B, a time-saving After displaying the message image "BATTLE RUSH" according to state C2), the promotion display (promotion display of right-handed hitting promotion effect F) shown in FIG. 285-4(B) is displayed. In addition, when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed driving promotion effect F, in addition to the message image other than the name display, a message image of "Rush" (Rush display) and a variable display result are displayed as a jackpot. A message image (jackpot explanation display) indicating the condition (with this feature, if the movable body 32 falls during variable display, it will be a jackpot) is also displayed.

Regarding each of the right-handed hitting promotion effects shown in this feature section, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), after the name display is executed on the image display device 5, the promotion display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion effect is performed. (See Figure 285-4 (B)) is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For at least one of the right-handed hitting promotion performances, the name display may be displayed on the image display device 5 after the promotion display corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (F), in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, after a promotion display corresponding to the right-handed playing promotion effect F is displayed on the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting promotion effect F is displayed. While the name display corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance A and the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, the name display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 as in this feature section. After the game is played, a promotion display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion effect may be displayed.

In addition, in this feature part, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), when the number of variable displays reaches 685, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect during the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display. Although the embodiment of emitting light and displaying a rainbow image on the image display device 5 (executing a rainbow effect) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern determination period of the 685th variable display In this case, each LED may not emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and the rainbow image may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the rainbow effect may not be executed).

In addition, in this feature part, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), if the variable display result is a time saving result, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect is displayed during the symbol determination period of the variable display. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the rainbow image is not displayed on the image display device 5 and the rainbow image is not displayed (the rainbow effect is not executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be time-saving or not. In this case, during the pattern determination period of the variable display, each LED may emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect and a rainbow image may be displayed on the image display device 5 (the rainbow effect may be executed).

Next, FIG. 285-5 is a diagram showing the performance mode from the jackpot fluctuation to the rush performance A via the jackpot, and FIG. 285-6 is a diagram showing the performance mode of the winning fluctuation and ceiling reaching fluctuation in the time-saving loss B. FIG. 285-7 is a diagram showing the performance mode of the rush performance B, and FIG. 285-8 is a diagram showing the performance mode when the winning B with time saving is won during the time saving state A1.

285-5 to 285-8, extended commands generated corresponding to each production part and production scene, BGM (sound pattern) output as background sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and image display device 5 The display mode of the image displayed in and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b are shown. Note that the presentation mode shown in FIG. 285-8 corresponds to the presentation mode shown in FIG. 284-65.

In Figure 285-5, the production scenes (Q11) (Q12) correspond to the fanfare production part, the production scene (Q13) corresponds to the in-round production part, and the production scenes (Q14) to (Q16) onwards are rush production A. Applies to part-time. In addition, in FIG. 285-7, the production scenes (S2) to (S11) correspond to the rush production part B, and the production scenes (S12) and after correspond to the BATTLE RUSH production part. In addition, in Figure 285-8, the production scenes (T1) to (T3) correspond to the rush production part A, the production scenes (T4) to (T12) correspond to the rush production part B, and the production scenes (T13) onwards corresponds to the BATTLE RUSH production part. Note that the display mode displayed in each production scene is just an example, and a plurality of images not shown are actually displayed.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 285-10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/flashing/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the SP reach brightness used in each part of the SP reach (incitement part, winning epilogue part, loss epilogue part, role object movement part, etc.) It includes a data table and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low-accuracy low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed, and a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state where a fanfare performance is executed. The brightness data table for the jackpot background used during the round of the jackpot game state, the brightness data table for the ending background used in the ending state in which the ending performance to notify the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the brightness data table for the ending background used during the round of the low probability high base state (time saving and a time-saving background luminance data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states, such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-10, the priority when used is increased in the order of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table.

For example, when outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and SP reach develops, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after the end of SP reach, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control, and controls the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state under control. However, when it develops into SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the lamp control time measurement using the background brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, but the background brightness Since the brightness data included in the data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. Then, after the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

For example, if an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach during SP reach, the production control CPU 120 outputs the error brightness data table corresponding to the error to SP reach. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error brightness data table using priority over the error brightness data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, the game effect is controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for error is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is cleared and SP reach is in progress again. When returning to the gaming state, brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP ready-to-reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp 9b, board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, are "unlit,""almostunlit,""lit," and "blinking." etc. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and the brightness is 0. The term "substantially off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is on but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp 9b etc. is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance (see FIG. 285-19). In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

When the W (white) data defined as the brightness data of the movable lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, etc. is "0", the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (data of W) of the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c is "1", the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" refers to constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting in which a plurality of side-by-side lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in order, and wave lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is This includes haze lighting, which is dimly lit while changing the brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a mode other than "lights out" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F", This includes switching between cases where the brightness data is "0" and "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , and blinking differ from each other in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

<Explanation regarding game effect lamps>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 285-11 to 285-36.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub fluctuation time according to a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the ROM 121 and The display of the image display device 5 is controlled based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the RAM 122. The display control unit 123 sends extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, etc. (where “X” is an arbitrary (alphanumeric characters)) and transmits the extended command to the production control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123.

For example, FIG. 285-11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 285-11, when the display control unit 123 performs display control in the fanfare performance part, it transmits an extended command (BC02) for specifying the fanfare performance part to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the fanfare performance part.

The parent table contains information that specifies which lamps (lighting locations) are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information that specifies the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , information specifying a child table to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp (child table designation address) are stored. Note that in the parent table, only lamps that are subject to lamp control are specified, and lamps that are not subject to lamp control are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), which will be described later, the frame lamp 9b, panel lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c are specified as lamp control targets, and each lamp is 600000 ms is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. In the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 are specified for the frame lamp 9b, child tables EL1 and ER2 are specified for the board lamp, and the movable lamp Child table LL1 is specified for 9d, and child table AT1 is specified for attacker lamp 9c.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the parent table for the fanfare performance part, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp 9b, and the performance control CPU 120 In order to time this 600000ms (10 minutes), the counter is decremented by 1 every 10ms. That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the fanfare production part, WA1/WL1/WR1 are designated as child tables.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 285-13(B), which will be described later, grandchild tables (WA11-17/WL11-17/WR11-17, etc.) are referenced for each time such as ta1-ta15. is specified.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the child table WA1/WL1/WR1 for the fanfare production part, 800, 200, 130, . The performance control CPU 120 measures 800, 200, 130, . . . ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and continues to control the child until the time reaches 800, 200, 130, . . . ms. Lamp control is performed using grandchild tables designated by tables WA1/WL1/WR1, respectively. For example, in the child table WA1 for the fanfare performance part, RA11 and WA11 to WA17 are designated as grandchild tables.

The grandchild table stores information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data that is used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, in the grandchild tables RA11 to RA13 corresponding to time ta1, luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 40 ms is stored.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs made up of three elements such as "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the brightness data has current values divided into 16 levels from 0 to F. When the brightness data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0). The current value reaches its maximum value. For example, when luminance data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the luminance data of "A" flows to the "R" element, and "1" is output to the "G" element. When brightness data is output, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "F" element. A current corresponding to the luminance data flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp 9b can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to luminance data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp 9b can be lit in a color corresponding to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. For example, in a fanfare performance, data "F00" is outputted from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. In rush effect A, data "F0F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. In rush performance B, data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, for example, in the grandchild table WA11 corresponding to time ta2, "FFF" and "444" are alternately specified at 30 ms intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. ing. The production control CPU 120 measures 200 ms, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and reads the brightness data at 30 ms intervals based on the grandchild table WA11 until the time period reaches 200 ms. Output to LED driver. Based on the received brightness data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the brightness data to flow through the designated LED. Thereby, the performance control CPU 120 can perform lamp control on each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the production control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and while subtracting the timer at a constant cycle (for example, 10 ms cycle), Performs ramp control based on tables, child tables, and grandchild tables.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the drawings. FIG. 285-12 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 285-12, in the child table for the fanfare production part, 200 ms is specified as the time ta2 during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp 9b, and WA11, WL11, and WR11 are specified as the grandchild tables. ing. In the grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are alternately specified at 30 ms intervals as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "FFF" in the first 30 ms will be referred to as data 1, and the data "444" in the next 30 ms will be referred to as data 2.

The performance control CPU 120 measures 200 ms specified by the child table WA1 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and updates data 1 and data 2 at 30 ms intervals based on the grandchild table WA11 until the time reaches 200 ms. However, after outputting data 1 to data 2, if the time has not yet reached 200 ms, the luminance data is outputted to the LED driver again in order from data 1. When the time measurement reaches 200 ms, the production control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table WA11 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W12 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table shown in Figure 285-13 (A), which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table is used for troubleshooting purposes. Responsible for That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another from where a problem occurs. can do.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 285-13 (B), which will be described later, grandchild data is specified for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified point of the child table due to the timer of the parent table remaining. Responsible for

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 285-17, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table is When the value of the timer corresponding to becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the luminance data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. However, in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the fanfare production part]
FIG. 285-13(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanfare performance part. As shown in FIG. 285-13(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the fanfare production part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes), and each Information specifying child tables (WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1) that are referred to when controlling the game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-13(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the luminance data table used for the fanfare production part. As shown in FIG. 285-13(B), the child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of the frame lamp 9b subdivide the time of the fanfare production part for the frame lamp 9b, and the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period. is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta13, and ta15, grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-14 (A) to (C), in the grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13, seven colors (rainbow colors) are output at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. The data of various brightness corresponding to is sparsely specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13 to smoothly light up each of the frame lamps 9b in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

At times ta2, ta4, ta6, ta8, and ta10, grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 are designated. Grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 correspond to grandchild table WA11 for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 285-15(A), in the grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are specified alternately at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. has been done. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA11 to blink the frame lamp 9b in white. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 200 ms (30 ms x 6) based on the grandchild table WA11 at time ta2, thereby causing the frame lamp 9b to blink in white three times.

At times ta3, ta5, and ta7, grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15, and WR13-15 are designated. As shown in FIGS. 285-15 (C) to (E), the grandchild tables WA13 to WA15 output similar colors of green "0F0" at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. Various brightness data in the range of are specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15, and WR13-15 to light the frame lamp 9b in a greenish color.

At times ta9, ta11, ta12, and ta14, grandchild tables WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, and WR12, 16, 17 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-15(B), (F), and (G), the grandchild tables WA12, 16, and 17 output red color at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. Various brightness data in a range of colors similar to "F00" are specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, WR12, 16, 17, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a red color.

In this way, in the child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of the fanfare production part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b lights up/blinks while changing its color to greenish or redish colors with white blinking in between. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), it is possible to create a fanfare performance to celebrate the start of the jackpot game state.

[Brightness data table used in rush performance part A]
FIG. 285-16(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-16(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush effect part A, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). Information specifying child tables (WA2, WL2, WR2, EL2, ER2, LL2, AT2) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-16(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-16(B), the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of the frame lamp 9b subdivide the time of the rush effect part A for the frame lamp 9b, and subdivide the time of the rush effect part A, and the grandchildren that are referenced in each time period. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at times tb1 and tb2, grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21 are designated. As shown in FIGS. 285-17(A) to (C), in the grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21, "000" ( Luminance data corresponding to (off) is specified. Note that for the second luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "F0F" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21 to basically turn off the frame lamp 9b (instantly turns on in reddish-purple based on the second brightness data).

During times tb3 to tb24 (excluding tb10, tb19, and tb22), grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, and 29) is specified. Grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29) are the grandchild tables shown in Figures 285-17 (D) to (I). As in the tables WA22, 23, WL22, 23, and WR22, 23, "F0F" and "000" are specified at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, and 29). The lamp 9b blinks in reddish-purple color. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, 29) at each time tb3 to tb24. ) for a predetermined period of ms (30 ms×n times), the frame lamp 9b is blinked in reddish-purple a predetermined number of times.

At times tb10, tb19, and tb22, grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 are specified. The grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, 29 output red, purple, purple, and white flashing at 30ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. Various brightness data in a range of colors similar to the purple blinking "0F0" are specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a reddish-purple color.

In this way, in the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of the rush effect part A, the frame lamp 9b is turned off until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and then is basically turned on/flashing in a reddish-purple color. Since the brightness data switches as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q14) to (Q16), it is notified that the control (FINAL BATTLE effect) of time saving states A1 and C1 will start (enter). It is possible to liven up the rush performance A.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 1) part]
FIG. 285-18(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. As shown in FIG. 285-18(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 1) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA3, WL3, WR3, EL3, ER3, LL3, AT3) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-18(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. As shown in FIG. 285-18(B), in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the frame lamp 9b, a grandchild table to be referred to in the rush effect B (scene 1) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-19(A) to (C), in the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31, "000" ( Luminance data corresponding to (off) is specified. Note that for the second luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FF0" is designated, and for the third to fifth luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FFF" or "666" is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31 to basically turn off the frame lamp 9b (instantly turns on in yellow based on the second brightness data).

In this way, in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b is basically turned off from the start, so the brightness data is changed as shown in FIG. 285-7 ( As shown in S2) and (S6), it is possible to enhance the rush effect B that notifies that the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is started (entering).

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 2) part]
FIG. 285-20(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part. As shown in FIG. 285-20(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 2) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA4, WL4, WR4, EL4, ER4, LL4, AT4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-20(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part. As shown in FIG. 285-20(B), the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the frame lamp 9b subdivide the time of the rush performance B part for the frame lamp 9b, and subdivide the time of the rush performance B part, and the grandchildren that are referenced in each time period. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time td1, since no grandchild table is designated, the performance control CPU 120 basically turns off the frame lamp 9b.

During times td2 to td11, grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J are designated. The grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J are used for each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, like the grandchild tables WL41A, 41B, WR41A, and 41B shown in FIGS. 285-21(A) to (D). As the RGB data to be output, yellowish colors (low brightness) such as "ECA" and "000" are specified at 30 ms intervals (some 40 ms). The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low brightness). In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a predetermined period of ms (30 ms x n times) based on the grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J at each time td2 to td11. The frame lamp 9b is turned on in a yellowish color (low brightness).

In this way, in the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the rush effect part B (scene 2), the frame lamp 9b is turned off until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and then is basically changed to a yellowish color (low light). Since the brightness data switches to turn on/blink at the brightness), the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is controlled as shown in Figure 285-7 (S3) and (S4). It is possible to enliven the entry effect B that notifies the user that the entry is about to start (entering).

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 3) part]
FIG. 285-22(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. As shown in FIG. 285-22(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 3) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA5, WL5, WR5, EL5, ER5, LL5, AT5) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-22(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. As shown in FIG. 285-22(B), the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of the frame lamp 9b subdivide the time of the rush performance B part for the frame lamp 9b, and subdivide the time of the rush performance B part, and the grandchildren referenced in each time period. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time te1, only grandchild table WA52 is specified. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in the grandchild table WA52, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b is changed to a yellowish color (low brightness) such as "FC0" at 30ms intervals. Corresponding brightness data is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA52, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b basically in a yellowish color (low brightness).

During times te2 to te6, grandchild tables WA52, WL51A to 51C, and WR51A to 51C are designated. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in the grandchild table WA52, yellowish colors (such as "600" and "000") are output at 30ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. (low brightness) is specified. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 285-23(B) to (F), RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, such as grandchild tables WL51A to 51C and WR51A to 51C, is output at 30 ms intervals. Low brightness red, green, and blue colors such as "600", "006", and "060" are specified. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA52, WL51A to 51C, and WR51A to 51C, thereby lighting up the frame LEDs 901 to 904 of the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low brightness), and lighting the frame LEDs 911 to 934. lights up in red, green, and blue (low brightness).

In this way, in the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of the rush effect part B (scene 3), the brightness is set so that the frame lamps 9b mainly light up in low-intensity yellow, but also in low-intensity red, green, and blue. As the data switches, as shown in Figure 285-7 (S5), rush effect B is displayed to notify that the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 will start (enter). You can liven it up.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 4) part]
FIG. 285-24(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. As shown in FIG. 285-24(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 5000ms (500ms). seconds) and information specifying child tables (WA6, WL6, WR6, EL6, ER6, LL6, AT6) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-24(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. As shown in FIG. 285-24(B), in the child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of the frame lamp 9b, a grandchild table to be referred to in the rush effect B (scene 4) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tf1, only grandchild tables WA61 and WL61 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-25(A) and (B), in the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b corresponds to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 ms intervals. Various brightness data and brightness data corresponding to "000" (lights out) are alternately designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61, thereby causing each of the frame lamps 9b to blink in a rainbow color (also referred to as rainbow color) corresponding to a confirmed win.

In this way, in the child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of the rush effect part B (scene 4), the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b blinks in rainbow colors, so as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S9). As shown, it is possible to enliven the effect of "V STOCK", that is, to notify that there is a jackpot pending memory.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 5) part]
FIG. 285-26(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. As shown in FIG. 285-26(A), in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 5) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA7, WL7, WR7, EL7, ER7, LL7, AT7) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-26(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. As shown in FIG. 285-26(B), in the child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of the frame lamp 9b, the grandchild table referred to in the rush effect B (scene 5) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tg1, grandchild tables WA71, WL71, and WR71 are specified. As shown in FIG. 285-27(A), in the grandchild table WA71, luminance data corresponding to "000" (lights out) is output at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. specified. Note that for the fifth and subsequent luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FF0", "770", "000", etc. are specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA71 to WA74 to basically light the frame lamp 9b in yellow.

During times tg2-tg4, grandchild tables WA71-74, WL71-74, and WR71-74 are designated. As shown in FIGS. 285-27 (B) to (D), in the grandchild tables WA72 to WA74, "FF0", "440 ”, “310”, etc. are specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA71 to WA74, thereby lighting/blinking the frame lamp 9b basically in a yellowish color.

In this way, in the child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of the rush effect B (scene 5) part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b is basically lit in a yellowish color, so as shown in FIG. As shown in 7 (S10), it is possible to enhance the rush effect B that notifies that the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is started (entering).

[Comparison of lamp control between fanfare performance, rush performance A, and rush performance B]
FIGS. 285-28(A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control between the fanfare effect, the rush effect A, and the rush effect B. In the following, the lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in the frame lamp 9b will be explained as an example, and the explanation of the lamp control of the frame LEDs 911 to 934 will be omitted, but it is similar to the lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Good too.

First, using FIGS. 285-28(A) to 285-28(C), the first and second luminance data in the first grandchild table (first grandchild table) of each performance part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(A), at the start of the fanfare performance part, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, "F06", "F08", "F0A", and "F0C" (red color) are output in 40 ms as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. "F00" (red) is designated as the second RGB data at 40 ms. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table RA11 to light the frame lamp 9b in a red color in response to the start of the fanfare performance that notifies the start of control of the jackpot game state. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(B), at the start of the rush effect part A, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, "000" (lights off) is specified as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in 20 ms, and "000" (lights off) is specified as the second RGB data in 20 ms. F0F" (reddish-purple) is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table WA21, the performance control CPU 120 first turns off the frame lamp 9b in response to the start of the rush performance A that notifies the start of the control of the time saving states A1 and C1. After that, it is lit in reddish-purple, which is the main color of rush effect A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(C), at the start of the rush performance part B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, "000" (lights off) is specified as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in 20 ms, and "000" (lights off) is specified as the second RGB data in 10 ms. FF0" (yellow) is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA31 to control the frame lamp 9b in response to the start of the rush performance B that notifies the start of the control of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2. is first turned off, then turned on in yellow, which is the main color of rush effect B.

In this way, the variable display in which the time saving state B is reached, or the variable display in which the display result is the winning time saving state A or B, is not a variable display controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so the aspect of the image display device 5 and By changing the mode of the frame lamp 9b in a different manner from the jackpot variable display, in particular, by changing the initial luminance data and making the initial light emission mode different, it becomes clear that the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b is different. Since it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a jackpot variable display controlled by a jackpot gaming state, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving state can be improved.

Next, using FIGS. 285-28 (D) to (F), the main colors in the first and next grandchild tables (first and second grandchild tables) of each production part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(D), at the start of the fanfare production part, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Next, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA11. In the grandchild table WA11, luminance data corresponding to white blinking is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. In this way, at the start of the fanfare performance part, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables RA11 and WA11 to change the frame lamp 9b to a red-based color including the main color red (first color). Light it up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(E), at the start of the rush effect part A, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Next, in the rush effect part A, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA22. In the grandchild table WA22, luminance data corresponding to a reddish-purple color is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA21 and WA22 at the start of the rush performance A part, so that after first extinguishing the frame lamp 9b, the main color reddish-purple (the first Lights up in reddish-purple colors including 2 colors).

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(F), at the start of the rush performance B (scene 1) part, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Next, in the rush performance B (scene 2) part, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA41. In the grandchild table WA41, luminance data corresponding to yellow-based colors is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31 and WA41 at the start of the rush performance B part (scene 1, scene 2), so that after first extinguishing the frame lamp 9b, the main It is lit in a yellow-based color including yellow (third color).

Here, similar colors will be explained based on FIGS. 285-29. Colors have three attributes: hue (tint), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

The above example of "1. Combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue" is shown in Figure 285-29 (A ), (B), in the hue wheel of a predetermined number (24 colors in this case), the three primary colors of light are red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [ 00F] are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is a non-similar color to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel are "similar colors," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is used as the reference color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to red (R), When green (G) is used as the standard color, colors that belong to the range of 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to green (G), and blue When (B) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish-purple (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar colors to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors that have a hue difference within the angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel may be regarded as "similar colors."

Similar colors are combinations of warm colors such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that make you feel warm, and cool colors, which are chromatic colors that make you feel cold, such as blue and purple, as well as colors such as green and purple. It is preferable to include a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors located between warm colors and cool colors.

In this embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 285-28 (A) to (C), the first luminance data of the fanfare effect part is data corresponding to "lighting up", whereas the rush effect part A part The first brightness data of the rush performance B part is the data corresponding to "lights out", so the initial brightness data is different, but the fanfare performance part, the rush performance A part, and the rush performance B part are different. If all the initial luminance data are "lit", each luminance data may have a different color code. In this case, although the initial brightness data of the fanfare performance part, the rush performance part A, and the rush performance B part have different color codes, it is preferable that each of them be a color that does not belong to the above-mentioned "similar colors."

In addition, the second brightness data of the fanfare production part is the main color red "F00", the second luminance data of the rush production A part is the main color red purple "F0F", and the second luminance data of the rush production part B is the main color red "F00". The brightness data is set to the main color yellow "0FF", and each color is a color that does not belong to "similar colors" of other colors, as shown in Figure 285-29 (B). , it becomes possible to clearly indicate the difference between the jackpot gaming state and the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 285-28 (A) to (C), the first brightness of the first grandchild table of each of the fanfare performance part, rush performance A part, and rush performance B part Although the data and the second luminance data are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the luminance data of the first and second luminance data are the same, as explained in FIGS. It is sufficient that at least the main color of the first grandchild table of the first child table and the main color of the second grandchild table of the first child table are different.

In addition, the main colors of the fanfare production part, rush production part A, and rush production part B were red "F00", magenta "F0F", and yellow "0FF", but these colors do not belong to other similar colors. If so, it can be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the second control data following the first control data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part includes light emission data of the first color (for example, red), but also includes the light emission data of the second color (for example, reddish-purple) and the third color. The control data does not include light emission data of a color (for example, yellow), and the second control data after the first control data in the grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part is the control data that does not include light emission data of a third color (for example, yellow). Although the control data includes light emission data for a yellow color but does not include light emission data for a first color (e.g. red) and a second color (e.g. reddish-purple), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the first entry effect for entering the time-saving state B and the second entry effect for entering the time-saving states C1 and C2 can be executed separately, the first entry effect in the first entry effect may be executed separately. The second control data following the luminance data includes luminescence data of a second color (e.g., magenta), but also includes luminescence data of a first color (e.g., red) and a third color (e.g., yellow). The second control data after the first brightness data in the second rush performance includes light emission data of the first color (for example, red), but the second color (for example, reddish-purple) and the third Control data that does not include color (for example, yellow) light emission data may be used.

In addition, the "main color" refers to all the brightness data specified in the brightness data table used for lamp control of the frame lamp 9b in each of the fanfare performance part, rush performance A part, and rush performance B part (performance period). Among them, any predetermined color or systematic color that emit light for the longest time may be used.

As shown in Figure 285-28 (G), the "main color" of the fanfare production part is red "F00", the "main color" of the rush production part A is reddish-purple "F0F", and the rush production part B The "principal color" is yellow "0FF", but not only the longest time of emitting light with the brightness data corresponding to these color codes, but also the time of emitting light of similar colors of the predetermined brightness data It suffices if the luminance data is longer than similar colors.

Specifically, in the fanfare production part, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red color" is 40%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "yellow color" is 10%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "green color" is 40%. The percentage is 25%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red-purple color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "blue-based color" is 5%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "light blue color" is 5%. , the percentage of time that the light is emitted in a "white color" is 10%. Therefore, the "red-based colors" that emit light for the highest percentage of time (40%) are considered the "main colors."

In the rush effect part A, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "yellow color" is 5%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "green color" is 20%. , the percentage of time emitting light in "reddish-purple color" is 40%, the percentage of time emitting light in "blue color" is 20%, the percentage of time emitting light in "light blue color" is 5%, and the percentage of time emitting light in "white color" is 40%. The percentage of time that the light is emitted by "color" is said to be 5%. Therefore, the "reddish-purple color" that spends the most time emitting light (40%) is considered the "main color."

In part B of the rush effect, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red color" is 20%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "yellow color" is 40%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "green color" is 20%. , the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "reddish-purple color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the time is emitted in "blue-based color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the time is emitted in "light blue-based color" is 5%, and the percentage of time that is emitted in "white color" is 5%. The percentage of time that the light is emitted by "color" is said to be 5%. Therefore, the "yellow color", which has the highest luminescence time of 40%, is considered the "main color".

In addition, although the above example exemplifies a form in which the color that emit light for the highest proportion of time in each production part is the "main color," the present invention is not limited to this, and the luminance data table in each production part The color corresponding to the color code that is specified the most may be set as the "main color."

In addition, in FIG. 285-28, lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in the frame lamps 9b of the fanfare production part, rush production A, and rush production B, respectively, was explained, but other frame LEDs 911 to 934, panel lamps, and movable objects Regarding the lamp 9d, the same lamp control as that of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 may be performed in each of the fanfare performance part, rush performance A, and rush performance B, or different lamp control may be performed.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion effect part A]
FIG. 285-30(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the right-handed hitting promotion effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-30(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the right-handed driving promotion effect part A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information specifying child tables (WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, ATA) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-30(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, the movable lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-handed hitting promotion effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-30(B), in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed hitting promotion effect part A is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time th1, grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, LLA1, and ATA1 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-31 (A) to (C), in the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, RGB data is output at 20 ms intervals to each lamp included in the board lamp and movable lamp 9d. Luminance data corresponding to various colors such as "F00", "0F0", and "00F" are specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, thereby lighting up the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d in a plurality of colors.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-31(D), in the grandchild table ATA1, various RGB data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are output at 30 ms intervals to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c. Brightness data is specified, and as W data output to the attacker LEDs 992 to 994, brightness data corresponding to "0" (light off) is specified at 30 ms intervals. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATA1 to light only the attacker LED 991 in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the right-handed promoting performance part A, the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are oriented in the direction of movement of the game ball so as to follow the second downstream path of the game ball. At the same time, in the attacker lamp 9c, only the attacker LED 991 corresponding to the big prize opening lights up in rainbow colors, so as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q12). In addition, with the start of control of the jackpot game state, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (big winning opening) that the player aims at by playing the right-handed game.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion production V part]
FIG. 285-32(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 285-32 (A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information specifying child tables (WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, ATV) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-32(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, the movable lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 285-32(B), in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed hitting promotion effect V part is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time ti1, grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, LLV1, and ATV1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, and LLV1 are almost the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, so their description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 285-32(C), in the grandchild table ATV1, the RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c is changed at various brightness levels corresponding to "000" (off) at 30 ms intervals. Data is specified, and as the W data output to the attacker LEDs 992 and 994, luminance data corresponding to "0" (lights out) is specified at 30 ms intervals, while as the W data output to the attacker LED 993, Luminance data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (light off) is specified at 30 ms intervals. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATV1 to cause only the attacker LED 993 to blink in white.

In this way, in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the right-handed promoting performance V part, the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are oriented in the direction of movement of the game ball so as to follow the second downstream path of the game ball. 285-58 (B3) As shown in FIG. 2, with the start of control of the small winning game state, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (V winning hole) that the player aims at by playing the right-handed game.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion effect part F]
FIG. 285-33(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the right-handed hitting promotion effect F part. As shown in FIG. 285-33(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the right-handed driving promotion effect part F, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, ATF) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-33(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, the movable lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-handed driving promotion effect part F. As shown in FIG. 285-33(B), the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c specify the grandchild tables that are referenced in the right-handed driving promotion effect part F. ing. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tj1, grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, LLF1, and ATF1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, and LLF1 are almost the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, so their description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 285-33(C), in the grandchild table ATF1, the RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c is set at various brightness levels corresponding to "000" (off) at 30 ms intervals. Data is specified, and as the W data output to the attacker LEDs 992 to 993, luminance data corresponding to "0" (lights out) is specified at 30 ms intervals, while as the W data output to the attacker LED 994, Luminance data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (light off) are alternately designated at 30 ms intervals. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATF1 to cause only the attacker LED 994 to blink in white.

In this way, in the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the F part of the right-handed promotion performance, the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are oriented in the direction of movement of the game ball so as to follow the second downstream path of the game ball. At the same time, in the attacker lamp 9c, only the attacker LED 994 corresponding to the second starting port switch 22B and the gate switch 21 flashes in white. ), with the start of the time-saving state control, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (the second starting winning opening and gate) that the player aims for in the right-handed game.

[Comparison of lamp control between right-handed hitting promotion performance A, right-handed hitting promotion performance V, and right-handed hitting promotion performance F]
285-34 to 285-36 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control of right-handed hitting promotion performance A, right-handed hitting promotion performance V, and right-handed hitting promotion performance F. In the following, the lamp control of the panel lamp and the movable lamp 9d will be explained as an example, and the description of the lamp control of the frame lamp 9b will be omitted. It may also be control.

As shown in FIGS. 285-34 (A) to (D), in the right-handed hitting promotion effects A, V, and F, the user must perform a right-handed hitting operation aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 (attacker) on the image display device 5. At the same time, an image (for example, an arrow image Z101 and an attacker image Z102) that prompts the player to win is displayed, and the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are sequentially turned on along the second downstream route, and the attacker moves to the winning area. Lamp control is performed to blink the corresponding lamp.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-35, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 (see FIG. 285-31) used in the right-handed driving promotion effect part A. When the grandchild table corresponding to the body lamp 9d is arranged to correspond to the layout of each lamp on the game board 2, from the left side to the right side, the lower left board LEDs 957 to 962, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 956, and the movable body LED 981 ~988, upper right panel LEDs 963 to 968, and lower right panel LEDs 969 to 970.

As shown in FIG. 285-35, at time tk1, brightness data "000" (off) for all lamps is specified, but at time tk2, lighting data for LEDs 951 to 953 on the upper left panel is specified, and the time At tk3, the lighting data of the upper left panel LEDs 954 to 956 and the movable body LEDs 981, 982, 987, and 988 are specified, at time tk4, the lighting data of the movable body LEDs 983 and 984 is specified, and at time tk6, the lighting data of the movable body LEDs 985, 986 lighting data is specified, at time tk8, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 963 to 965 is specified, at time tk9, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified, and at time tk13, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified, and at time tk13, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified. Lighting data for LEDs 969 and 970 is specified. Note that the LEDs 957 to 962 on the lower left panel are arranged on the first downstream path and are not targeted, so turn-off data is specified.

Therefore, at times tk1 and tk2, the upper left panel LEDs 951 to 953 and 954 to 956 are lit in this order (see Figure 285-34 (A)), and at times tk3 to tk7, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 are lit in this order (see Figure 285-34 (A)). 285-34 (B)), from time tk8 to tk12, the upper right panel LEDs 963 to 968 light up in order (see Figure 285-34 (C)), and from time tk13 onwards, the lower right panel LEDs 969 and 970 light up in that order. It lights up (see Figure 285-34(D)). In this manner, in the right-handed hitting promotion performances A, V, and F, various lamps are lit in accordance with changes in the arrow image Z101 that extends in accordance with the movement of the game ball flowing down the second downstream path.

In addition, the brightness data of these lower left board LEDs 957 to 962, upper left board LEDs 951 to 956, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, upper right board LEDs 963 to 968, and lower right board LEDs 969 to 970, right-handed hitting promotion effect A and right-handed hitting. In the promotion effect V, the brightness data is specified to light up in seven colors (rainbow colors), but in the right-handed promotion effect F, the brightness data is set to light up in a single color other than the seven colors (rainbow colors) (for example, white, red, green, blue, etc.) Luminance data for lighting may be specified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (A), in the grandchild table ATA1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed driving promotion effect A, the data output to the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 placed in the big winning opening that is the winning target is , the brightness data corresponding to lights on and lights out are specified alternately, and the brightness data corresponding to lights out is specified alternately as the data output to the other attacker LEDs 993 to 994, so the attacker is eligible for winnings. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the big winning opening area.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (B), in the grandchild table ATV1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed driving promotion performance V, the light is lit as data output to the attacker LED 993 arranged in the big prize opening that is the winning target. The brightness data corresponding to lights out are specified alternately, and the brightness data corresponding to lights out are specified alternately as the data output to the other attacker LEDs 991 to 992, 994, so the attacker is eligible for winnings. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the V area.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (C), in the grandchild table ATF1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed driving promotion effect F, the data output to the attacker LED 994 placed in the second starting prize opening that is the winning target is , the brightness data corresponding to lights on and lights out are specified alternately, and the brightness data corresponding to lights out is specified alternately as the data output to the other attacker LEDs 991 to 993, so the attacker is eligible for winnings. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the normal power area.

Although the feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

Still other embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 286 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 286, it is provided on the right side of the gaming area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each capable of variably displaying special symbols as a plurality of types of special identification information. Special designs are also called "tokuzu." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game." The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. Regarding other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" similarly refers to displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. The production design is also called a decorative design or a decorative design. The variable display is also referred to as a variable display or simply a fluctuation. Variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scrolling display of a plurality of symbols, deformation, enlargement, and reduction of one or more symbols. The variation may include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. In the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are displayed in an updateable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, a plurality of types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of arbitrary symbols, a predetermined symbol is finally stopped and displayed as a display result. The stop display is also called a lead-out display or simply a lead-out display. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display is also referred to as the final stop symbol or final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special pattern game is also called a confirmed special symbol. The display results of the variable display include the display results of special symbols, and are also referred to as variable display results. The display result of the special symbol is also referred to as the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also referred to as the variable display time.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". A special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game." A special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game." The number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 286, it is provided on the left side of the gaming area. The normal symbol display device 20 can variably display normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary designs are also called ``fuzu''. The variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a "general symbol game." The normal symbol display 20 is constructed using a 7-segment LED or the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which some or all of a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and a pattern in which all of a plurality of LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in a regular pattern game is also called a fixed normal symbol. The display result of the normal pattern is also referred to as the normal pattern display result. The execution time during which the normal symbols are variably displayed in the general pattern game is also referred to as the normal pattern fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using any one of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a projector, and a screen. In addition, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various effect images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related images such as inspection images and setting images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of production symbols is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The production pattern is a display pattern that shows numbers, etc., and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern and the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 286, "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided, and the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game In synchronization with the game, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner by, for example, being scrolled up and down or updated. The special symbol game and the variable display of the production symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display. The synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which the variation of the symbol starts and the timing at which the variation ends and the symbol is finally stopped and displayed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop symbol in the variable display of performance symbols is also referred to as a determined performance symbol, a determined decorative symbol, or a determined decorative symbol. Since the variable display of the production symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the production symbols is the same as the special symbol variation time.

Even if a display area is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. good. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. The display area where the hold display is performed is also referred to as the hold display area. A display area where active display is performed is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The total value of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories. Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 286, a first reservation display device 25A and a second reservation display device 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided. . The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal symbol display 20 shown in FIG. 286, a normal symbol holding display 25C including a plurality of LEDs is provided. The ordinary figure holding display 25C displays the number of ordinary figures held stored by the number of LEDs lit. The number of reserved memories of common figures is the number of reserved memories corresponding to the common figure game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls, for example three, are paid out, and the first starting condition for executing the first special symbol game can be satisfied. The variable prize winning ball device 6B forms a second starting prize opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 287 as a normal electric accessory. The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, thereby causing the second start. The winning opening is in a closed state in which game balls do not enter. The fact that the variable prize winning ball device 6B is in the closed state is also said to be that the second starting prize opening is in the closed state. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by moving the movable wing pieces to the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the on state. The fact that the variable prize winning ball device 6B is in the open state is also said to be that the second starting prize opening is in the open state. When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls, for example three, are paid out, and the second starting condition for executing the second special symbol game can be satisfied. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

Entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as a first starting winning. Entering the game ball into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as a second starting winning. The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 21A shown in FIG. 287. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 21B shown in FIG. 287. Based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, it becomes possible to add and update the first reserved memory number, and as a first special symbol game, variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A becomes possible. Based on the occurrence of the second starting winning, it becomes possible to add and update the second reserved storage number, and as a second special symbol game, variable display of special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes possible.

A general prize opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2, and is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 286, general winning holes 10 are provided at two locations on the lower left side of the gaming area. When a game ball enters any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first route and a second route are provided as downstream routes for the game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left side area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a left side gaming area or a left gaming area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a right side gaming area or a right gaming area. The left side game area and the right side game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of game nails, or the like. Shooting the game ball toward the left side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is also called left-handed hitting. Shooting the game ball toward the right side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is also called right-handed hitting. The first route is also referred to as a left-handed batting route. The second route is also referred to as a right-handed batting route. The first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes.

A game ball is ejected from the ball launcher and driven into a game area in response to an operation of a ball operation handle provided on the ball launcher. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the left side game area and flows down the first path, it is guided along the array of game nails, for example, and is guided to the second path in the right side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the right side game area and flows down the second path, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, so that it does not flow to the first path in the left side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first route in the left side gaming area, and game balls flowing down the first route can enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B is provided on the second route in the right side game area, and allows the game balls flowing down the second route to enter. In addition, the variable prize winning ball device 6B may allow the game balls flowing down the first route in the left side game area to enter. The variable prize winning ball device 6B may be arranged so that the game balls flowing down the second route in the right side gaming area can more easily enter than the game balls flowing down the first route in the left side gaming area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second route in the right side gaming area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 287. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, it becomes possible to add and update the number of normal reserved memories, and it becomes possible to perform variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display 20 as a normal symbol game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 forms a big winning hole that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a big winning hole solenoid 82 as a special electric accessory. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide path having a width in the front and back direction that allows the game ball to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front side and the back side on both sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guiding path, there is formed an access entrance for a prize that serves as a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 movable in the front and back direction is provided as a big winning hole opening/closing member at a position where the big winning hole can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixing member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in a portion of the guiding passage where the big winning opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the big prize opening solenoid 82, and can move forward and backward to open and close the accessory entrance which becomes the big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Further, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. A plate-shaped distribution member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided above the V winning area 51 as a V winning opening opening/closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning area 51. A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. The game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24. The game ball that does not pass through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. The game balls that have passed through the V winning area 51 and the gaming balls that have passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are both detected by the ejection port switch 26 and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. is discharged to.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowest part of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting effects are provided around the gaming area. There is. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED. At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a movable body 32 is provided that operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-striking operation handle that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area using a ball-striking device. The batting operation handle is also referred to as an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a batting ball that holds game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the batting ball firing device. A feeding tray is provided. The batted ball supply tray is also called an upper tray. A prize ball storage tray is provided below the upper tray, in which prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided. The stick controller 31A can be held and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed or pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 287. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 287. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as operations by the player, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous Fuzu game is being executed, the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately. , for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number such as "4". In the common pattern game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a common pattern winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "common pattern winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal pattern winning pattern, such as a normal pattern loss pattern, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern loss". When it is a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second starting prize opening is in an open state.

When the game ball passes through and enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be started. When the game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B can be started. In addition, even if the game ball enters the starting prize opening and a starting prize occurs during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state or the small winning game state is controlled, the corresponding prize will not be awarded. Since the special figure game based on the starting winning cannot be executed immediately, the special drawing game based on the starting winning is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number such as "4" is reached, for example. In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol such as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "jackpot". On the other hand, when a predetermined special symbol different from the jackpot symbol, such as a small prize symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "small prize". Further, when a special symbol different from a jackpot symbol or a small prize symbol, such as a losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "losing". Furthermore, when a special symbol different from a jackpot symbol, small prize symbol, or loss symbol, such as a time-saving symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol may become "time-saving". . The special symbol may not include a time-saving symbol. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include "time saving".

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is until the timing when a predetermined period elapses, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period in which the big winning hole can be controlled to be open is the upper limit period during which the big winning hole can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the jackpot opening is open in the jackpot game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it becomes to the player.

When the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", it includes a plurality of jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the big winning opening such as the number of rounds and the upper limit opening period, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state such as the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state can be set in multiple types, and the jackpot can be set according to each setting. Type is specified. The plurality of jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that can get many prize balls, the jackpot types that can get few prize balls, or the jackpot types that can hardly get any prize balls. Alternatively, the prize balls that can be obtained may include jackpot types of the same degree. Being controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of a special symbol being a "jackpot" is also referred to as a symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot, a variable display jackpot, or a direct jackpot.

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. In the small winning game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same manner as the jackpot gaming state in some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big prize openings can be opened in the same manner by sharing the number of openings and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning gaming state, the big winning opening may be opened in a different opening manner from that in the jackpot gaming state. Similar to the jackpot type, a plurality of small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit." The jackpot type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big prize opening in the small winning game state is also referred to as the starting operation. When in the small winning game state, when the accessory entrance which becomes the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, The conditions for generating a jackpot are established, and it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state. The fact that the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V winning by passing through the V winning area 51 in the small winning gaming state is also referred to as a jackpot via small winning.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state can be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state in accordance with the jackpot type. Further, in the special figure game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "time saving", the gaming state is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state but is controlled to the time saving state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more easily executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second starting prize opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball can easily pass through the second starting prize opening is also referred to as base control. Base control in the normal state is also referred to as normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control in which the game ball is easier to pass through the second starting prize opening than the low base control, but it is more difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening than the high base control. The gaming state in which the medium base control is performed is also referred to as the medium base state. The gaming state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also referred to as high open control.

In the normal state, medium base state, and high base state, time-saving symbols can be stopped and displayed as a result of displaying special symbols. However, in the case of the medium base state and the case of the high base state, even if the time saving symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, the base control based on the time saving symbol is not performed, and the medium base state or the high base state No new control is initiated to transition to the high base state. In the time saving state, time saving control is possible in which the average variable display time is made shorter than in the normal state. Accordingly, the time saving state is also referred to as a time saving state.

The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. When the gaming state is in a variable probability state, in addition to time saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. In addition to improving the variation efficiency of special symbols, the variable probability state is a state in which a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of predetermined end conditions is satisfied first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times or the control to the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-of-time cut. The time-saving state where the number of times is cut is also referred to as the time-saving state where the number of times is cut. The number-cut definite variable state is also called the number-cut definite variable.

The gaming state that becomes the normal state is a gaming state that is not included in an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a predetermined state such as a small winning gaming state, or a special state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In the normal state, the probability that the displayed result in the general drawing game is a "normal drawing hit", the probability that the displayed result in the special drawing game is a "jackpot", etc. is controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is in a gaming state. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a control state after the initial setting process is executed without executing a predetermined recovery process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed, for example.

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a variable probability state as a gaming state.

After the small winning gaming state ends, there are cases where the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of a V winning, and cases where the gaming state before the small winning gaming state is not changed without a V winning occurring. be. However, if the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win" and the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times in the number cut, the control of the time saving state and variable probability state may end and the state returns to the normal state. . Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a small winning gaming state as a gaming state. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include a "small hit".

It may be possible to control the gaming state to a time saving state when a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the variable display is satisfied. This time-saving state is also called relief time-saving. The time saving condition is that even if variable display is performed a specific number of times, a new jackpot game state or Any condition may be satisfied as long as it can be satisfied when control to the time saving state is not performed.

(Progress of production, etc.)
The pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects as the game progresses. This performance includes a performance that notifies the progress of the game and a performance that makes the game more exciting. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and controlling the stick controller. It may include vibrating the push button 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it can be executed using any production device.

Performances that can be executed as the game progresses include variable display of performance symbols. In response to the start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L provided on the screen of the image display device 5, At 5C and 5R, variable display of performance symbols is started. When the confirmed special symbol that becomes the display result in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped and displayed, the confirmed performance symbol that becomes the display result in the variable display of the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. The confirmed performance symbols are composed of a combination of three performance symbols corresponding to the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of performance symbols, the display mode in the variable display of performance symbols may become a ready-to-reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which when the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 form a part of the jackpot combination, the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continue to fluctuate. . The fact that the display mode in the variable display of the performance symbols becomes the ready-to-reach mode is also said to be established.

A ready-to-win presentation can be executed in response to the variable display of the presentation symbol being in a ready-to-win mode. The pachinko game machine 1 is capable of executing a plurality of types of ready-to-win performances such that when the performance modes are different, the percentage of the display result of the variable display being a "jackpot" is different. The proportion of "jackpots" corresponding to the performance mode is also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach whose execution time is longer than the short reach, depending on the execution time of the reach effect.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", confirmed performance symbols forming a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed as the display result of the performance symbols on the screen of an image display device 5. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same production symbols, such as a production symbol showing the number "7", are all aligned on a predetermined effective line. will stop appearing. In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" which is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance symbols such as performance symbols showing the number "7" may be stopped and displayed all together. In the case of a "non-probable variable jackpot" which is not controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance symbols such as performance symbols showing the number "6" may be stopped and displayed all together. The "non-probable jackpot" is also referred to as the "normal jackpot." In this case, the odd-numbered production pattern is also referred to as a variable probability pattern. Even-numbered production symbols are also called non-probable variations or regular symbols. After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", confirmed performance symbols forming a predetermined small win combination are stopped and displayed as the display result of the performance symbols on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same production symbols, such as production symbols indicating numbers other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. It may be displayed stopped above. A common confirmed performance pattern may be stopped and displayed when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" and a "small win."

When the display result of the special figure game is "lose", the display result may be stopped and displayed without becoming a reach mode in the variable display of the performance symbols. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. A display result in which the fixed effect pattern of a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without becoming a reach mode is also referred to as a non-reach loss. When the display result of the special figure game is "lose", the variable display of the effect symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations that are not the jackpot combination or the small win combination are stopped and displayed. A display result in which the fixed effect pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed after reaching the reach mode is also referred to as reach loss.

Performances that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displays that support variable displays such as a pending display and an active display. In addition, for example, a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability can be executed while the performance symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a variable preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability that corresponds to the variable display that is being executed, and a look-ahead preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability that corresponds to the variable display that is pending before execution. May include. The pre-read preview effect may be a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display compatible display such as a hold display or an active display to a different mode than usual.

On the screen of the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the performance design during the variable display of the performance design and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be pseudo-like multiple variable display. It may also be possible to perform a pseudo-continuous effect that appears as follows. The pseudo-continuous performance may be set so that the jackpot reliability is higher when the number of re-variations in which the variable display is restarted after temporarily stopping the performance symbol is greater than when the number of re-variations is small. . The variable display of performance symbols may include a case where a pseudo-continuous performance is executed before the ready-to-win mode is reached, and a case where a pseudo-continuous presentation is executed after the ready-to-win mode is achieved. In addition, in the variable display of performance symbols, it may be possible to perform pseudo continuous performance at a plurality of timings.

During the control of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance that notifies the number of rounds, and a promotion performance that suggests or notifies that the advantage of the jackpot game state will improve. While controlling the small winning game state, it is possible to execute a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state. By executing a common effect while controlling the jackpot gaming state and the small winning gaming state, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state. It may be made to be unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

In a non-gaming state in which a special figure game or the like is not being executed and the game is not in progress, a demonstration image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The performance image for demonstration is also referred to as a demo image. Displaying a demo image is also referred to as demo display. Performances based on demonstration displays are also referred to as customer-waiting demonstration performances.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. as shown in FIG. 287, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states, such as the execution of special drawing games with pending management, the execution of regular drawing games with pending management, jackpot gaming states, small winning gaming states, time saving states, variable probability states, etc. including migration. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and a random number. It can be configured to include a circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. Part or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may have a configuration that can be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, or may have a configuration that is built in the game control microcomputer 100. good. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. Various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, starting ports switches such as a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and a discharge port switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a nonvolatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes variable patterns, performance control commands, and other various settings, judgments, and table data constituting a table used for determination. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that saves the storage contents in part or all of the storage area so that they can be restored within a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a storage area that can store various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and other storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processing corresponding to the program stored in the ROM 101. The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random values used when controlling the progress of the game. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers. A part or all of the gaming random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103. The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. Various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 include a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, It suffices if it includes a signal for controlling the ordinary figure holding display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 outputs, by the game control microcomputer 100, a performance control command according to the progress of the game to the performance control board 12 as part of the operation for controlling the progress of the game. The performance control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The production control commands include commands that specify various decision results on the main board 11, such as display results of special drawing games, winning types, and fluctuation patterns; Any command may be used as long as it includes a command that specifies the gaming situation, such as the occurrence of an error, the number of pending memories, and the gaming status, and a command that specifies the occurrence of an error.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving production control commands and controlling production based on the received production control commands. The performances that can be controlled by the performance control board 12 are various performances according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various notifications such as error notification and power failure recovery notification. The production control board 12 includes a production control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123. This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determining the effect to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data on various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be any signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and mainly executes effects related to display based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. control possible. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal specifies the lighting mode and extinguishing mode of the game effect lamp 9. By supplying the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, it becomes possible to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R and to turn on or off the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be able to supply a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or a solenoid of the movable body 32 or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. Separately from the production control board 12, a driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. The random numbers used to control the performance are also referred to as performance random numbers. The random number for presentation may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the presentation control CPU 120. The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 is an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. It is sufficient if it includes an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and operates the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn 9 on or off. In this way, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. Note that the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, the control of audio output and lighting and extinguishing of lamps, and the supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, are partially performed by the performance control CPU 120. Or all of them may be executed. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an alternating current power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared. The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending power-on by operating the power switch 91. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When starting the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). As a result, no other processing will be executed thereafter until interrupts are enabled. Next, the built-in device register is set (step S902). In setting the built-in device register, for example, a built-in device register setting table is used to store the built-in device register setting value at a specified built-in device address. The built-in device registers are compatible with various circuits and electronic components, such as a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) that is a timer circuit, a random number circuit 104, an input port of the I/O 105, a serial communication circuit, and an RWM access control circuit. It is acceptable as long as it is provided with a In addition, stack pointer initialization, interrupt vector setting, etc. may be performed.

Subsequently, RWM check processing (step S903) is executed, and it is determined whether a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S904). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in an off state, there is backup data, and the storage contents in the RAM 102 serving as the backup RAM are normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S904 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. The RWM check process in step S903 includes a checksum calculation process, and the checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the data stored in the checksum buffer, and if both data match, the storage content in the RAM 102 is determined. is judged to be normal. In step S904, it may be determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. in the RWM check process of step S903.

If the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S904; Yes), settings for recovery are performed. The settings for recovery include designation of a backup command transmission table (step S905) and designation of a backup setting table (step S906). The command transmission table at the time of backup includes table data for transmitting to the production control board 12 a power failure recovery designation command that designates that restoration using backup data has been performed. The backup setting table includes table data used to initialize the work area when recovery is performed using backup data. To specify a table, a value corresponding to the start address of the table stored in the ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or a table pointer. The same applies to other tables.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S904; No), initialization settings are performed. The initialization settings include RWM initial setting processing (step S907), designation of an initialization command transmission table (step S908), and designation of an initialization setting table (step S909). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 that will become the work area. The initialization command transmission table includes table data for transmitting to the production control board 12 a power-on designation command that designates that initial settings at power-on have been performed. The initialization setting table includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when initial setting is performed at power-on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific number of times counter to the specific number of times initial value. Further, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer to the specific number of times command upper limit value. The specific number of times is the number of times the variable display is executed, which becomes a time-saving condition for shifting the gaming state from the normal state to the time-saving state when a period in which the game is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the time-saving state continues.

Thereafter, command set processing (step S9010) and data set processing (step S9011) are executed. The command set process includes processing for transmitting a production control command to the production control board 12 by storing command data specified in the command transmission table in a serial communication data register. The data set process includes a process of storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using a data setting table specified by a pointer, and a process of clearing the stored contents of the address indicated by the table data.

After executing the wait process (step S9012), the specific number of times command transmission process (step S9013) is executed. In the wait process, by waiting until a predetermined period has elapsed, sub-boards such as the production control board 12 can be reliably activated. The specific number of times command process is a process for transmitting, to the production control board 12, a production control command that specifies the count value of the specific number of times counter when the power is turned on. The specific number of times counter may be provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102 and can count the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number corresponding to the time saving condition.

Following the specified number of times command transmission process in step S9013, interrupt initial settings (step S9014) are performed, and the PTC counter output value is set so that a regular timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time, for example, 4 milliseconds. , enters loop processing. In this loop process, interrupt prohibition (step S9015), initial value determination random number update process (step S9016), and interrupt enable (step S9017) are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, each time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 becomes able to execute timer interrupt processing. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals of, for example, 4 milliseconds.

FIG. 289(A) is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. The CPU 103 can execute game control timer interrupt processing by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 289(A) includes power-off process (step S9021), switch process (step S9022), main side error process (step S9023), and game random number update process (step S9024). ), special symbol process processing (step S9025), normal symbol process processing (step S9026), information output processing (step S9027), prize ball processing (step S9028), and main side display control processing (step S9029) Contains.

The power-off process in step S9021 includes a process of checking a power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 to determine whether a power-off has occurred. When a power outage occurs, checksum calculation processing is executed, checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, and then settings for power outage, such as prohibition of RWM access, are performed. The switch processing in step S9022 determines whether or not detection signals are received from various switches input via the switch circuit 110, such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. It includes processing to determine. The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main error processing in step S9023 includes processing for diagnosing an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S9024 includes a process of updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software.

FIG. 289(B) shows an example of random numbers for gaming. The random numbers for gaming include a random number MR1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol, a random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern. , a random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination, and a random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for special symbol determination is used when determining the display result of the special symbol, such as whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be a "big hit" or not, and whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be a "small hit". used for. The random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol selects multiple confirmed special symbols, such as a jackpot symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot" or a small win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small win." Used when selecting from special designs. The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used for selecting the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to determine the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. The random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination is used when determining the display result of the normal symbol, which is whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is to be a "normal symbol hit". The random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 and the random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 are used not only in the gaming random number update process of step S24 but also in the random number update process for initial value determination of step S9016 shown in FIG. It is good if it can be updated.

The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that is the pattern to be used in the current variable display from among one or more fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for fluctuation pattern type selection. It is determined using the value of a random number MR5 for determination. The variation pattern specifies various variable setting items including the special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game, the mode of variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect contents during the variable display of the effect symbols. The special figure variation time also becomes the execution time in the variable display of the effect design. The mode of variable display of the performance symbols includes the presence or absence of reach. The performance contents during the variable display of the performance symbols include the type of reach performance and the like. The variable pattern is also referred to as a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group that includes one or more variation patterns that are classified in advance based on, for example, the production mode during variable display of production symbols.

The special symbol process processing in step S9025 shown in FIG. 289(A) includes variable display of special symbols, such as management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state and small winning gaming state, and control of gaming state. Includes processing related to gaming status. The normal symbol process processing in step S9026 includes the control of the execution and suspension of the common symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "hitting the common symbol", etc. Processing related to display and state control of the second starting prize opening is included. The information output process in step S9027 sets an information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability fluctuation information. The jackpot information indicates the number of jackpot occurrences. The starting information indicates the number of starting prizes and the like. The probability variation information indicates the number of times the probability variation state has occurred. The prize ball process in step S9028 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses the prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when the switch is turned on, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the game ball to be paid out based on the detection of game balls. The main side display control process in step S9029 includes display settings for the first special symbol and display settings for the second special symbol. The display setting of the first special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A so that it can be updated by executing the special symbol control process. The display setting of the second special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B so that it can be updated by executing the special symbol control process.

FIG. 290(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 289(A) as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101). The starting winning determination process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number. When the occurrence of a starting winning is detected and the number of pending memories is less than the upper limit value, a random number value used to determine the display result, winning type, variation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random number value is stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After updating the storage of pending information and the number of pending memories, command settings are made to send a production control command to the production control board 12 that specifies determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading determination. It will be done. With such command settings, the production control command at the time of starting winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 reads out the special figure process code stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (step S102). The special pattern process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0B[H], and is also referred to as the special pattern process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special figure process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of special symbols.

FIG. 290(B) shows an example of a process that can be executed in response to the special symbol process code in the special symbol process process. Special pattern process processing is a special pattern normal process whose special pattern process code corresponds to 00[H] and a special pattern process code which corresponds to 01[H] as executable processing corresponding to the special pattern process code. Special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop processing that corresponds to the special symbol process code 02 [H], small hit pre-opening processing that corresponds to the special symbol process code 03 [H], and special symbol process code that corresponds to 04 [H]. Processing during opening of a small hit corresponding to [H], processing after opening of a small winning corresponding to a special figure process code of 05[H], and processing of waiting for a small winning ejected ball corresponding to a special figure process code of 06[H]. , Special figure process code corresponds to 07[H], small winning end process, special figure process code corresponds to 08[H], big prize opening pre-opening process, special figure process code corresponds to 09[H] It includes a process during the opening of the big winning hole, a process after opening the big winning hole whose special drawing process code corresponds to 0A[H], and a jackpot end process whose special drawing process code corresponds to 0B[H]. .

The special symbol normal processing includes processing that can determine whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reservation information. The special symbol normal processing determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination, and whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or not, and whether it is a "time saving" or not. It includes processing that can determine whether or not to do so. The special symbol normal processing includes a process of determining a fixed special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of special symbols in response to the determination of the display result. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining a variation pattern. In this way, in the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, various judgments and decisions regarding the variable display (pre-determination) are performed before the display result is derived and displayed. The special figure process code is updated to 01[H].

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when making various judgments and decisions based on random values. The same applies to other judgments and decisions using random numbers on the main board 11. Even when random numbers are not used, necessary tables may be read out from the ROM 101 and referred to to perform various judgments, decisions, settings, etc. The performance control board 12 may read various tables from the ROM 121 and refer to them to perform various judgments, decisions, settings, and the like.

In the special symbol normal processing, even if special symbol 2 priority digestion control is performed, in which the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol. good. Alternatively, in the special symbol normal processing, the winning order processing control is such that the starting conditions for the special symbol game are established in the winning order in correspondence with the order in which the game balls are won in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. may be performed.

In the special symbol fluctuation process, the time elapsed since the special symbol started to fluctuate in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed. It includes a process of determining whether or not. When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the finalized special symbol is set, the counts of various counters are updated, and the special symbol process code is updated to 02 [H]. The special symbol stop process measures the elapsed time after the special symbol stops changing on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and calculates the symbol stop time set in the special symbol variation process. This includes processing for determining whether or not the period has elapsed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "Jackpot", the special figure process code is updated to 08[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special figure process code is updated to 03[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "losing", the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H]. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "jackpot", settings corresponding to the start of the jackpot game state are performed. When the display result of the variable display is "small win", settings corresponding to the start of the small win game state are performed. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving", settings are made to control the gaming state to the time saving state.

In the small win opening preprocessing, based on the display result of the variable display being "small win," settings are made to open the large prize opening in the small win game state, and the special drawing process code is set to 04 [ H]. The small win opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened in the small winning game state and determining whether or not the small winning opening time has elapsed. When the small winning opening time has elapsed, the special drawing process code is updated to 05[H] along with the setting for closing the big winning opening. The small winning post release process detects winning of the big winning opening in the small winning gaming state, and updates the special figure process code to 06[H] after a predetermined time has elapsed. The small winning ejected ball standby process includes processing for setting a large winning hole ejecting ball error, determining passage of the V winning area 51, and determining completion of ejection of the large winning hole. When it is determined that the discharge of the big winning hole has been completed, the special drawing process code is updated to 07[H] along with the setting before the end of the small winning. The small winning end process includes a process of determining whether or not the V winning area 51 has been passed using the specific area passing flag. The specific area passing flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the on state when there is a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51. When the specific area passage flag is on, the special figure process code is updated to 08[H] along with the jackpot start setting. When the specific area flag is off, the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] along with the small winning end setting.

The pre-processing for opening the grand prize opening includes settings for controlling the grand prize opening in an open state, such as updating the grand prize opening number counter and setting when opening the grand prize opening, including operation settings for the grand prize opening. Update the special figure process code to 09[H]. The process of opening the big winning hole measures the elapsed time from when the big winning hole is opened in the jackpot gaming state, and also detects winnings in the big winning hole, and when the maximum number of big winning holes has been reached, When the jackpot opening time has elapsed, the special drawing process code is updated to 0A[H] along with the settings for closing the jackpot opening. In the process after opening the big winning hole, after setting the big winning hole discharge ball mismatch error, it is determined that the time after opening the big winning hole has ended, and when it is determined that the opening has ended, the big winning hole opening number counter is set. This includes processing to determine the count value of . When the count value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened is less than the maximum value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened, the special drawing process code is updated to 08 [H] and the next round is controlled to be able to start. When the count value of the grand prize opening number counter is the maximum number of openings of the grand prize opening, the special drawing process code is updated to 0B[H] along with the settings at the end of opening, including the setting of the jackpot end performance time. . The jackpot end process includes a process of determining whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed. When the jackpot end performance time has elapsed, the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] together with the jackpot end setting including the game state setting at the end of the jackpot.

The special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process includes a special symbol jackpot determination process and a special symbol small hit determination process. Moreover, the special symbol normal process may include a special symbol time saving determination process. In these determination processes, using the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read from the special symbol determination buffer, a special symbol determination value check is performed to determine which determination range the value is included in. For example, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol should be a "jackpot" by the special symbol jackpot determination process. Further, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the small hit determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit" by the special symbol small hit determination process. When the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the time saving determination range, it may be determined that the display result of the special symbol is to be "time saving" by the special symbol time saving determination process.

FIG. 291 shows an example of determination of the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbol. The starting opening winning designation value is set to "1" corresponding to the first starting winning due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening, and "1" corresponding to the case of the first starting winning due to the gaming ball entering the second starting winning opening. "2" is set corresponding to the case of second start winning. That is, when the starting opening winning designation value is "1", the first special symbol game which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is executed. On the other hand, when the starting opening winning designation value is "2", a second special symbol game, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, is executed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process, special symbol small hit determination process, and special symbol time saving determination process, the special symbol display results are changed depending on whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" or "2". An MR1 judgment value is set to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 so that one of "big hit", "small hit", "time saving", and "loss" is determined. The MR1 judgment value in which the special figure display result is assigned as a "jackpot" is also referred to as the jackpot judgment value. The MR1 judgment value in which the special figure display result is assigned to "small hit" is also referred to as the small hit judgment value. The MR1 determination value in which the special figure display result is assigned to "time saving" is also referred to as the time saving determination value. The jackpot probability based on the setting of the jackpot determination value indicates the percentage of jackpots achieved by the special drawing game. The small hit probability based on the setting of the small hit determination value indicates the percentage of small wins due to the special figure game. The time saving probability based on the setting of the time saving judgment value indicates the rate at which the base control can be changed by the special figure game.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the production control board 12 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the production control CPU 120 is activated and executes production control main processing.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control CPU 120 in the production control board 12. When starting the production control main process shown in FIG. 292, the production control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting a register for a timer circuit mounted on the production control board 12. At this time, initial operation control processing (step S72) is executed. The initial operation control process includes control for performing initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position, and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined period of time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses, based on register settings for the timer circuit, for example. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the process waits.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing (step S75) is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading out various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the command analysis process is performed based on the read production control commands. Includes processing such as corresponding settings and controls. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that it can be confirmed in the performance control process processing which production control command has been received or the content specified by the production control command. , and turns on the reception flag provided in the RAM 122. When the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process, the production control process process (step S76) is executed. The performance control process processing includes, for example, the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. This includes control for operating various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed based on the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices. Following the performance control process, a performance random number update process (step S77) is executed. In the performance random number update process, at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 293(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 shown in FIG. 292 as the production control process process. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read performance setting process (step S151). The pre-read effect setting process includes, for example, processing such as determination, determination, and setting regarding the execution of the pre-read notice effect based on the effect control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11. Also included is a process for displaying a pending display based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the pre-read effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the effect process code stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 122 (step S152). The production process code can be updated and set to any of 00[H] to 0A[H], and is also referred to as the production control process code. The production control CPU 120 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the production process code (step S153). This makes it possible to control the performance including variable display of performance symbols.

FIG. 293(B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the production process code in the production control process. The production control process process includes a variation pattern command waiting process whose production process code corresponds to 00[H] and a production pattern whose production process code corresponds to 01[H] as executable processes corresponding to the production process code. Fluctuation start processing, production pattern fluctuation process whose production process code corresponds to 02[H], production pattern fluctuation stop processing whose production process code corresponds to 03[H], and production process code corresponding to 04[H]. The corresponding small win display process, the small win opening process whose production process code corresponds to 05[H], the small win end production process whose production process code corresponds to 06[H], and the production process code 07[H]. jackpot display processing corresponding to [H], in-round processing corresponding to the production process code 08 [H], post-round processing corresponding to the production process code 09 [H], and production process code 0A[H] This includes a jackpot end performance process corresponding to the above.

The variable pattern command reception waiting process includes a process that can determine whether or not the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. For example, it is possible to determine whether a command has been received or not, depending on whether or not a variation pattern designation command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the production process code is updated to 01[H]. If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern designation command has not been received, the demonstration display is controlled. The performance symbol variation start process includes a process for controlling so that a variation time performance corresponding to the special symbol game is started. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, select the performance pattern of the variable time performance, start updating the time value of the performance process timer that measures the performance execution time, and update the performance process code to 02[H]. be done. The process during performance symbol variation includes a process capable of controlling the switching timing of each performance element constituting the performance pattern, and determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timed value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03[H]. The production symbol fluctuation stop processing performs control to end the variation production based on the completion condition of the variation production, such as the elapse of the production execution time or the reception of the production pattern confirmation command, and then finalizes the variation production. Includes processing to enable display of performance results corresponding to special symbols. Then, the production process code is updated and various settings are performed in response to the display results of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "Jackpot", the performance process code is updated to 07[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the performance process code is updated to 04[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "losing", the production process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00[H].

The small win display process includes a setting process for performing a small win fanfare effect when a small win occurs. The small win fanfare performance includes a small win display in which a performance image notifying the occurrence of a small win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the small win fanfare performance time elapses. When the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed, the small win fanfare performance is controlled to end, and the performance process code is updated to 05[H]. The processing during opening of small winnings performs settings for performing performance during opening of small winnings corresponding to the opening of the large prize opening in the small winning game state, and updates the performance process code to 06[H]. The small win end performance process includes a process for controlling the display device 5 to display a performance image that notifies the end of the small win game state on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the small winning game state, when a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 and it is determined that a V winning has occurred, execution control of a V winning effect is performed to notify the occurrence of a V winning. When a V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the performance process code is updated to 07[H]. When a V win does not occur in the small winning game state, the production process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00[H].

The jackpot display process includes a setting process for performing a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs. The fanfare performance includes a jackpot display in which a performance image notifying the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare performance time elapses. When the fanfare performance time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the end control of the fanfare performance. The in-round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot gaming state. When the round end condition is met, if the final round has not ended, the performance process code is updated to 09[H], and if the final round has ended, the performance process code is updated to 0A[H]. The post-round processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the production process code is updated to 08[H]. The jackpot end performance includes a process of controlling the display device 5 so that a performance image notifying the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the notification time of the end of the jackpot has elapsed, the production process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00[H].

(Variation example of basic explanation)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, function, processing, and operation described in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but may include some of the technical features described in the above embodiments so that at least one problem in the conventional technology can be solved. It may also have the following configuration. In the above embodiments, when a matter that is a subordinate concept is described, an invention of a generic concept using cognate matters or similar matters, or an invention of a generic concept using common properties is the claimed invention. , and may include some of the structures and characteristics described in the above embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, or an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses game media and awards points based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be a gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of special symbols may be, for example, only one type of symbol, such as a symbol indicating "-", and a variable display may be performed in which this symbol is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which no symbol indicating "-" is displayed and no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change in response to a plurality of setting values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, it may be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot and the ball payout rate by using different jackpot determination values for each set value. As a specific example, the setting value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot increases. It gets lower. In this case, if 6 is set as the setting value, it is the most advantageous for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side. During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion performance that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . The setting suggestion performance may be such that it is possible to suggest the expected level of jackpot by an arbitrary performance and also to make a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

The invention related to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the operation of a control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button by the player. Sometimes, when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a game can be executed in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for realizing various controls including the progress of the game and the execution of performances can be distributed and provided to the computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 using a removable recording medium. It may be possible to distribute and provide the information by installing it in a storage device of a computer device or the like in advance. Furthermore, it may include a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line or the like, and can be distributed or provided by downloading programs and data from the external device. The execution form of games and performances may also be one that can be executed by attaching a removable recording medium, or the program and data downloaded via a communication line etc. may be temporarily stored in an internal memory etc. It may be directly executable using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, or it may be directly executable using the hardware resources of an external device connected via a communication line or the like. It may also be possible to execute games and performances by exchanging data with other players via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as processing and data determination ratios, performance execution ratios, etc., expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" mean that one is "0%" or "100%". It may also include being. For example, regarding one decision result or execution content, it may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of 0%, or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of 100%.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 22AK)
FIG. 294-1 is an address map of the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 294-1, the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100 includes a memory area from address 0000[H] assigned to the ROM 101 to address 2FFF[H], and an address F000[H] assigned to the RAM 102. H] to address F3FF[H].

The memory areas of the ROM 101 include a game program area (addresses 0000[H] to 0BD5[H]) where game programs related to game control are stored, and a game data area (address 1000[H]) where game data used in the game programs are stored. H] to 1B7C[H]), a non-gaming program area (addresses 2000[H] to 250F[H]) where non-gaming programs related to various controls different from gaming control are stored, and a non-gaming program area (addresses 2000[H] to 250F[H]) used for non-gaming programs. Non-gaming data area (2510[H] to 25A1[H]) where gaming data is stored, unused area, etc. (addresses 0BD6[H] to 0FFF[H], 1B7D[H] to 1FFF[H], 25A2) [H] to 2FFF[H]).

The memory area of the RAM 102 includes a gaming work area (addresses F000[H] to F0DE[H]) used as a work area related to gaming control, and a gaming stack area (addresses F1EC[H] to F1FF[) where gaming programs save data. H]), a non-gaming work area (addresses F300[H] to F331[H]) used as a work area for various controls different from gaming control, and a non-gaming stack area (address F3F2[H] to F3FF[H]), unused areas, etc. (addresses F0DF[H] to F1EB[H], F200[H] to F2FF[H], F332[H] to F3F1[H]), including.

FIG. 294-2 shows a configuration example of a production control command sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte being MODE data indicating the type of command, and the second byte being EXT data indicating the specific content of the command. MODE data and EXT data are also collectively referred to as command data. The first bit of MODE data is always set to a bit value "1", and the first bit of EXT data is always set to a bit value "0". Thereby, it is possible to clearly and easily distinguish whether the received data in the production control board 12 is the first byte or the second byte of the production control command.

Command 80XX[H] is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern. In the command data, XX[H] indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set in accordance with the content specified by the production control command. The variation pattern designation command can set different EXT data depending on the specified content of the variation pattern. Command 8CXX[H] is an effect design designation command that designates the display result of the variable display. The production symbol designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the stored value of the production symbol information buffer. The performance symbol information buffer stores a value indicating the type of performance symbol to be stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Command 8D01[H] is a first fluctuation start designation command that designates the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Command 8D02[H] is a second fluctuation start designation command that designates the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol designation command, the first fluctuation start designation command, and the second fluctuation start designation command are included in the fluctuation start time command transmitted in response to the start of the variable display. However, the first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command correspond to the case where the execution of the first special pattern game is started and the case where the execution of the second special pattern game is started. One is sent and the other is not.

Command 8FXX[H] is an effect pattern confirmation command that specifies a stop display as the final display of the effect pattern. The performance symbol confirmation command can set different EXT data in response to a plurality of types of symbol stop settings. Command 9002[H] is a power-on designation command that designates RWM initialization at power-on. Command 91XX[H] is a first specific number specification command that specifies the count value of the specific number counter when the power is turned on. The first specific number designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the count value of the specific number counter. Command 9202[H] is a power failure recovery designation command that designates RWM backup recovery when the power is turned on. Command 94XX[H] is a second specific number of times designation command that designates the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer during game control. The second specific number of times designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. Command 95XX[H] is a background color designation command that designates the display color of the background screen. The background color designation command can set different EXT data depending on the display color of the background screen. Command 9F03[H] is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies demonstration display in a non-gaming state where gaming is stopped.

The command A0XX[H] is a jackpot start designation command that is transmitted in response to the start of a jackpot game that is a game in a jackpot game state, and can specify a fanfare display. The jackpot start designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with fanfare display settings and the like. The command A1XX[H] is a jackpot end designation command that is sent in response to the end of the jackpot game and can specify a jackpot end display. The jackpot end designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the setting of the jackpot end display. Command A6XX[H] is a small win start designation command that is transmitted in response to the start of a small win game that is a game in the small win game state, and can specify a small win fanfare display. For the small win start designation command, different EXT data can be set in accordance with the setting of the small win fanfare display. Command A7XX[H] is a small win end designation command that is sent in response to the end of the small win game and designates a small win end display. The small winning end designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the setting of the small winning end display.

The command AE00[H] is transmitted in response to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51, which is a specific area provided inside the special variable winning ball device 50, and is a specific area in which the V winning display can be specified. This is a passing command. Command C0XX[H] is a first performance storage information designation command that can specify the first pending storage number as the first performance storage information number. The first effect storage information designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the first pending storage number. Command C1XX[H] is a second performance storage information designation command that can specify the second pending storage number as the second performance storage information number. The second performance storage information designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the second pending storage number.

FIG. 294-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of RWM initial setting processing. For example, in step S7 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, the RWM initial setting process as shown in FIG. 294-3 is executed based on the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. In the RWM initial setting process shown in FIG. 294-3, the CPU 103 sets the transfer source address to F000[H] (step AKS011), sets the transfer destination address to F001[H] (step AKS012), and sets the transfer destination address to F001[H] (step AKS012). is set to 02FF[H] (step AKS013). Then, after storing the clear data in the transfer source address (step AKS014), a block transfer instruction is executed (step AKS015).

The address F000[H] set in step AKS011 is the top address assigned to the RAM 102, and its storage area is included in the game work area shown in FIG. 294-1. The address F001[H] set in step AKS012 is the next address after the address F000[H] set as the transfer source address, and enables writing of data indicating the same value to storage areas with consecutive addresses. . The number of transfers 02FF[H] set in step AKS013 corresponds to the size of the memory area including the game work area and the game stack area shown in FIG. 294-1. Therefore, after storing the clear data in step AKS014, by executing a block transfer instruction in step AKS015, the clear data is written to the memory area including the game work area and the game stack area, thereby initializing the memory area. . Initialization of the memory area by such RWM initialization processing is also referred to as initialization at power-on.

FIG. 294-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command set processing. When command set processing is executed, a value corresponding to the start address of the command transmission table is stored in the pointer in the calling process. A pointer used in command set processing holds an address value that is a table read position in the command transmission table. The pointer used in the command set processing may be configured using, for example, the HL register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. The HL register is a pair register that is a combination of the H register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register, and the L register, which is an 8-bit register also included in the general-purpose register, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. , 16-bit length calculations, etc., or as a pointer to specify the address of a memory area.

In the command set process, the CPU 103 first sets the table head data to the number of processes (step AKS021). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. In command set processing, a value corresponding to the number of processing is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022). The work area reference bit here may be any leading bit in the 1-byte table data read in step AKS021.

Corresponding to step AKS022, if the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS022; No), for example, by changing the value stored in the B register, the number of processes is set to "1". ” (step AKS023). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS024).

Thereafter, data for the upper byte of the command is read (step AKS025). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the A register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" in step AKS022, the process proceeds to step AKS025 without executing step AKS024, so that the data at the beginning of the table is read as data for the command upper byte. Subsequently, the read data in step AKS025 is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS026). The serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs it to the production control board 12 using a serial communication method. Therefore, by steps AKS025 and AKS026, MODE data, which is the upper byte of the command, can be transmitted toward the production control board 12.

After step AKS026, the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS027). Then, the data for the lower byte of the command is read (step AKS028). The command lower byte data is composed of 8 bits including a 1-bit leading bit serving as a work area reference bit and 7 data bits other than the work area reference bit. Subsequently, it is determined whether the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS029).

Corresponding to step AKS029, if the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS029; No), a command extended data address table is specified (step AKS030). For example, the address of the command transmission table is saved in a DE register included in the general-purpose registers, and then a value corresponding to the start address of the command extended data address table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, the command extension data is read (step AKS031). At this time, data in which the bit value in the work area reference bit is cleared to "0" indicates an offset value that specifies the read position in the command extended data address table. Table data at a read position obtained by adding an offset value to the start address of the command extended data address table is set as the lower byte of the command lower byte read address. Further, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the Q register included in the special registers stores F0[H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address allocated to the game work area. By setting the value stored in these special registers as the upper byte of the command lower byte read address, the data obtained from the command lower byte read address is stored in the A register as command extension data to be used for the command lower byte to be sent. Stored.

If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" corresponding to step AKS029 (step AKS029; Yes), or after step AKS031, the read data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS032). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0", the command lower byte data read in step AKS028 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted and stored in the serial communication data register. If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1", the command extension data read in step AKS031 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted and is stored in the serial communication data register. Thereby, the EXT data, which is the lower byte of the command, can be transmitted toward the production control board 12.

Next, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS033). At this time, it is determined whether the number of processes after the update has become "0" (step AKS034). Corresponding to step AKS034, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS034; No), the process proceeds to step AKS024, and control is performed to enable transmission of the effect control command using the next table data or the like. On the other hand, if the number of processes is "0" (step AKS034; Yes), the command set process is ended.

FIG. 294-5 shows an example of the configuration of the command transmission table. Of these, FIG. 294-5(A) is the command transmission table AKT01 when the number of transmitted commands is "2" or more. FIG. 294-5(B) is a command transmission table AKT02 when the number of transmitted commands is "1". In the command transmission table AKT01, the number of commands to be processed is specified by the table data of the table start address. In contrast, the command transmission table AKT02 does not include table data specifying the number of processes. Whether or not the command transmission table includes table data specifying the number of processes can be determined from the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table start address.

In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5 (A) when the number of transmission commands is "2" or more, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table start address is set to "0". . On the other hand, in the command transmission table AKT02 when the number of transmission commands shown in Figure 294-5(B) is "1", the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table start address is set to "1". has been done. In step AKS022 of the command set processing shown in FIG. 294-4, it is determined whether the bit value of the work area reference bit is "0" using the table head data read in step AKS021. Then, if the bit value of the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0", the processing number is overwritten to "1" in step AKS023. As a result, when the number of commands to be sent is "1", the number of processing can be set to "1" in command set processing without the command sending table including table data specifying the number of processing, so the data in the command sending table can be set to "1". Capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the command transmission table, it is possible to specify whether or not the table data serving as the command lower byte data refers to the command extended data address table by the bit value of the work area reference bit. For example, when referring to the command extended data address table to read out the command extended data serving as the command lower byte, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "1". In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5(A), the bit value of the work area reference bit in the data for the second command lower byte is set to "1", so the command extension data address table is referred to. Command extension data for setting the command lower byte will be read. On the other hand, when using the command lower byte data as it is as the lower byte of a command to be sent without referring to the command extension data address table, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "0". It is set. In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5(A), the bit value of the work area reference bit in the data for the first command lower byte is set to "0", so the command extension data address table is not referenced. In this case, the data for the lower byte of the command is used as is as the lower byte of the command. When referring to the command extended data address table, by using the bit values other than the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data as an offset value to the start address of the command extended data address table, reading in the command extended data address table can be performed. You can specify the location. In this way, whether or not to refer to the command extended data address table is made different depending on whether the bit value of the work area reference bit included in the command lower byte data is "0" or "1". This makes it possible to flexibly use a variety of data to set the command lower byte to be transmitted while preventing the data capacity of the command transmission table from increasing.

FIG. 294-6 shows a configuration example of the command extension data address table AKT11. The command extended data address table is composed of table data indicating a plurality of reference data lower addresses, such as reference data lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05 for command transmission. In step AKS031 of the command set processing shown in FIG. 294-4, the read position in the command extended data address table AKT11 is specified using the command lower byte data read out in step AKS028. The table data read from the read position constitutes the lower byte at the read address of the command extension data. For example, the table data indicating the lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05 of the reference data for command transmission can all constitute the lower byte of the read address of the command extension data. The command extension data thus obtained is stored in the serial communication data register in step AKS032 of the command set process. Thereby, the command extension data can be transmitted to the production control board 12 as EXT data which is the command lower byte.

FIG. 294-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of data set processing. When a data set process is executed, a value corresponding to the start address of the data setting table is stored in the pointer in the calling process. A pointer used in data set processing holds an address value that is a table read position in the data setting table. The pointer used in the data set processing may be configured using, for example, the HL register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103.

In the data set process, the CPU 103 first sets the table head data to the processing number (step AKS041). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. In data set processing, a value corresponding to the number of processing is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the number of processes is "0" (step AKS042).

Corresponding to step AKS042, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS042; No), the setting destination address and setting data are read (step AKS043). For example, the E register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, uses the table data read from the next address of the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer as the lower byte of the setting destination address. Store in. Further, table data read from an address corresponding to a value 2 greater than the value stored in the pointer is stored in the A register as setting data. Thereafter, the table read position is updated by adding 2 to the value stored in the pointer (step AKS044). The CPU 103 may be able to execute the processing corresponding to steps AKS043 and AKS044 using an INLD instruction prepared as one instruction with a 2-byte configuration.

After step AKS044, the setting data is stored in the setting destination address (step AKS045). For example, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the D register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, stores F0[H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address assigned to the game work area. . Then, by storing the data stored in the A register at the data setting address obtained from the value stored in the DE register, it becomes possible to set the data at the setting destination address. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS046), and it is determined whether the updated number of processes has become "0" (step AKS047). Corresponding to step AKS047, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS047; No), the process returns to step AKS043, and control is performed to enable data setting using the next table data or the like.

If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to either step AKS042 or AKS047 (step AKS042; Yes, step AKS047; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer. (Step AKS048). Then, the read position data is set to the number of processes (step AKS049). For example, table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the number of processes is "0" (step AKS050). If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS050 (step AKS050; Yes), the data set process is ended.

Corresponding to step AKS050, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS050; No), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS051). Then, the lower byte of the work address is read out (step AKS052). For example, table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the E register as the lower byte of the work address. Thereafter, the data of the work address is cleared (step AKS053). For example, data at the work address can be cleared by clearing the storage area for the work address obtained from the value stored in the DE register. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS054), and it is determined whether the updated number of processes has become "0" (step AKS055). Corresponding to step AKS055, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS055; No), the process returns to step AKS051, and control is performed to enable data clearing using the next table data or the like. If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS055 (step AKS055; Yes), the data set process is ended.

FIG. 294-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a specific number of times command transmission process. For example, in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, a specific number of command transmission process as shown in FIG. 294-8 is executed based on the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. The specific number of times command transmission process shown in FIG. 294-8 is a process for transmitting a first specific number of times designation command regarding the remaining number of executions of the variable display until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times corresponding to the time saving condition when the power is turned on. It is. A specific number of times counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The specific number of times counter can store 2-byte data indicating a count value, and counts the remaining number of times until the number of executions of variable display reaches a specific number in a specifiable manner. The count value of the specific number of times counter becomes numerical information that can be updated based on execution of variable display.

In the specific number of times command transmission process, the CPU 103 first sets the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command (step AKS061). For example, 91[H] is stored in the A register as the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific number designation command. Further, the lower byte of the specific number of times counter is read out (step AKS062). At this time, by storing the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the read specific number counter in the B register and the lower 4 bits in the C register, the count value shown in hexadecimal number is different for each digit. Store it in a register. Like the B register, the C register is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, and can be combined with the B register to form a BC register as a pair register. Thus, in step AKS062, the counter data read from the read address of the lower byte of the specific number of times counter is stored in the BC register. Subsequently, the upper byte of the first specific number designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS063). Thereafter, the first transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS064). The first transmission data may be, for example, data stored in the C register.

After step AKS064, second transmission data setting is performed (step AKS065). Here, for example, in the data stored in the B register, the bit value at bit number "4" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific number command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific number designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS066). Thereafter, the second transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS067). Note that step AKS066 may be performed first and step AKS065 may be performed later.

Furthermore, the upper byte of the specific number of times counter is read out (step AKS068). At this time, the counter data read from the read address of the upper byte of the specific number of times counter is stored in the C register. The upper byte of the specific number of times counter may be one-byte counter data. Subsequently, third transmission data setting is performed (step AKS069). Here, for example, in the data stored in the C register, the bit value at bit number "5" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific number command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific number designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS070). Thereafter, the third transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS071). Note that step AKS070 may be performed first and step AKS069 may be performed later.

In this way, in the specific number of times command transmission process, the CPU 103 creates each of the first transmission data, second transmission data, and third transmission data along with the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command. Each time, it is stored in the serial communication data register. For example, in the specific number command transmission process, after storing the upper byte of the first specific number designation command in the serial communication data register in step AKS063, the first transmission data is stored in step AKS064, and then in step AKS066. After storing the upper byte of the first specific number designation command in step AKS067, storing the upper byte of the first specific number designation command in step AKS070, the second transmission data is stored in step AKS071. 3 Store the transmission data. The serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs it to the production control board 12 using a serial communication method. In this way, in the specific number of times command transmission process, each time the data used to transmit the first specific number of times designation command is created, it is stored in the serial communication data register and transmitted to the production control board 12, thereby allowing the first number of times designation command to be transmitted. 1. It is possible to stably transmit the specified number of times designation command. Therefore, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state can be improved.

The specific number of times command transmission process is executed in step S13 of the gaming control main process shown in FIG. 288, so whether the recovery condition is satisfied or not in step S4, the first specific number of times designation command is Control to enable transmission. This facilitates the design of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby increasing the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1, which has a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

FIG. 294-9 shows a configuration example of the first specific number of times designation command. The first specific number of times designation command is transmitted by the specific number of times command transmission process when the power is turned on, and is the first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. The remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is indicated by the count value of the specific number of times counter at a predetermined address in the RAM 102. The count value of the specific number counter uses 2-byte data to specify the remaining number of times up to the specific number with 02AD[H] as the upper limit. For example, the initialization setting table specified in step S9 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288 is for setting 02AD[H] corresponding to the specific number initial value as the counter initial value in the specific number counter. Contains table data.

In steps AKS063 and AKS064 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the first set AKC01 shown in FIG. 294-9(A) is transmitted. The first specific number designation command of the first set AKC01 includes command type data and first transmission data. The command type data of the first specific number of times designation command is 1-byte first control data indicating that the command type is the first specific number of times designation command, and the MODE data of the first specific number of times designation command is 91 [H]. shows. The first transmission data indicates a value in the 1 [H] digit as the first digit in the count value of the specific number of times counter, and becomes 1-byte second control data regarding the count value. In the first transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned from the least significant bit to the most significant bit, the bit values at bit numbers "4" and "5" are both "0". ”, it is possible to identify that the command is the first specific number designation command of the first set AKC01.

In steps AKS066 and AKS067 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the second set AKC02 shown in FIG. 294-9(B) is transmitted. The first specific number designation command of the second set AKC02 includes command type data and second transmission data. The command type data indicates 91[H] as in the case of the first set AKC01. The second transmission data indicates a value in the 10[H] digit as the second digit of the count value of the specific number of times counter, and becomes 1-byte second control data regarding the count value. In the second transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same way as the first transmission data, the bit value at bit number "4" is set to "1", and the bit value at bit number "5" is set to "1". By setting the bit value to "0", it is possible to identify that this is the first specific number designation command of the second set AKC02.

In steps AKS070 and AKS071 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 shown in FIG. 294-9(C) is transmitted. The first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 includes command type data and third transmission data. The command type data indicates 91[H] similarly to the first set AKC01 and the second set AKC02. The third transmission data indicates a value in the 100 [H] digit as the third digit of the count value of the specific number of times counter, and becomes 1-byte second control data regarding the count value. In the third transmission data, among bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same way as the first transmission data and the second transmission data, the bit value at bit number "4" is set to "0", and the bit By setting the bit value of the number "5" to "1", it is possible to identify that the command is the first specific number designation command of the third set AKC03.

In this way, the first specific number of times designation command is composed of 2 bytes each from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, and since there are 3 sets in total, the command is used as a production control command of 6 bytes in total, and is used as a production control command from the main board 11. It is transmitted to the control board 12. In addition, the first specific number of times command includes command type data that is first control data, and first transmission data to third transmission data that is second control data that is set corresponding to the count value of the specific number of times counter. There are a predetermined number of command data in combination with either of these, such as a total of three sets, from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. Then, in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the specified number of times command transmission process as shown in FIG. 294-8. Create a specified command.

In the gaming control main process shown in FIG. 288, after executing the RWM check process in step S3, it is determined in step S4 whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied, so that the stored information in the RAM 102 serving as the backup RAM is normal. It is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether or not the above is true. Then, if the recovery condition is satisfied in step S4 and the determination result of the determination process is normal, the RWM initialization process of step S7 is not executed. As a result, the information stored in the RAM 102 is not changed from before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so the count value of the specific number of times counter is also stored in the RAM 102 from before the power is turned on. In this case, the specific number of times command processing in step S13 is executed based on the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information stored in the RAM 102. On the other hand, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 and the determination result from the determination process is not normal, the RWM initial setting process in step S7 is executed, and then the initialization setting table specified in step S9 is With reference to this, the data set process in step S11 is executed. As a result, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and the count value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[H] as the counter initial value corresponding to the specific number of times initial value. In this way, when the determination result of the determination process is not normal, the specific number of times command process in step S13 is executed based on the counter initial value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information corresponding to the set specific number of times initial value. If the recovery condition is satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started based on the backup information stored in the RAM 102. If the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started based on the stored information in the RAM 102 initialized by the RWM initial setting process or the like in step S7. In the game control main process, the specific number of times command process in step S13 can be executed whether the judgment result in the judgment process in step S4 is normal or not, so it can be executed both in the case of a hot start and in the case of a cold start. Also, a first specific number designation command can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be specified. Therefore, the design of the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after interrupts are disabled in step S1, a specific number of command transmission process in step S13 is executed, and then interrupts are enabled in step S17, so that timer interrupts etc. Other processing based on this becomes executable. Therefore, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute other processes while executing the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13. This makes it possible to prevent the count value of the specific number counter from being updated when the control for transmitting the first specific number of times designation command is performed. A command specifying a specific number of times can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 under stable conditions when the power is turned on, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including a time-saving state is enhanced. be able to.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after the wait process in step S12 is executed, the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 is executed. Therefore, the specific number of times command processing is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Furthermore, before executing the wait process in step S12, the command set process in step S10 is executed. The command set process in step S10 is performed based on the backup command transmission table specified in step S5 or the initial With reference to the production command transmission table, the production control command corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment process can be transmitted. In this way, the command set process in step S10 is controlled so that the effect control command corresponding to the determination result in the determination process can be transmitted before the predetermined period of time due to the wait process in step S12 has elapsed. The specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 is such that the first specific number of times designation command is sent to the main board 11 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times until the specific number of times can be specified in both the hot start and the cold start. It is controlled so that it can be transmitted from to the production control board 12. At this time, if the production control command that becomes the backup command, the production control command that serves as the initialization command, and the first specific number of times designation command are sent without interruption, the production control board 12 side will not function normally. may not be able to receive production control commands. Therefore, before making it possible to transmit the first specific number of times designation command through the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13, the wait process in step S12 is executed to enable reception preparation on the production control board 12 side. , each performance control command can be reliably transmitted and received, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state can be improved.

FIG. 294-10(A) is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the total number of pending memories is "0" (step AKS101). For example, it is determined whether the count value of the starting opening winning buffer storage counter is "0" or not. The starting opening winning buffer storage counter is a counter that counts the number of starting opening winning designation values stored in the starting opening winning buffer, and the count value indicates the total pending storage number.

Corresponding to step AKS101, if the total number of pending memories is other than "0" (step AKS101; No), the total number of pending memories is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). Furthermore, the contents stored in the starting opening winning buffer are shifted (step AKS103). The starting opening winning buffer stores the starting winning designation value when the number of pending memories is updated based on the occurrence of the starting winning by the starting winning determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 290(A). Data indicating the buffer number is stored in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the total number of pending memories. The starting opening winning designation value is a value indicating whether a first starting winning or a second starting winning has occurred, and "1" is set corresponding to the first starting winning, and "1" is set corresponding to the second starting winning. "2" is set. In step AKS103, for example, the address of the starting opening prize buffer with buffer number "0" is set as the transfer destination address, the address of the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "1" is set as the transfer source address, and Set the number of times to "8" and execute the block transfer instruction. As a result, it is only necessary to shift the storage contents of each storage area to which buffer numbers "0" to "8" of the starting slot winning buffer at consecutive addresses of the RAM 102 are allocated by transferring them one by one to the previous address. . Thereafter, the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "8" is cleared and the stored contents are initialized.

Following step AKS103, a second special symbol determination control table is designated (step AKS104). For example, a value corresponding to the start address of the second special symbol determination control table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS105). For example, the starting opening winning designation value stored in the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "0" is read out, and it is determined whether the value is "1" or not. When the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS105; Yes), the first special symbol determination control table is re-designated (step AKS106). For example, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing the value corresponding to the start address of the first special symbol determination control table in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. In this way, in the special symbol normal processing, after specifying the second special symbol determination control table in step AKS104, if the starting opening winning designation value is "1" in step AKS105, the first special symbol is specified in step AKS106. Reset the judgment control table using overwrite settings. As a result, when the frequency of use of the second special symbol determination control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, it is possible to reduce the program capacity of storage instructions used for table setting, and improve the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. can be increased. In addition, when the frequency of use of the second special symbol determination control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, processing by branch instructions is simplified, confirmation at the design stage is facilitated, and pachinko games are improved. The marketability of Machine 1 can be improved.

Corresponding to step AKS105, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS105; No), or after step AKS106, special symbol determination processing (step AKS107) and fluctuation pattern setting processing ( After executing step AKS108), the special symbol normal processing is ended.

Corresponding to step AKS101, if the total number of pending memories is "0" (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (step AKS109). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed. If the demonstration display flag is on (step AKS109; Yes), the special symbol normal processing ends.

If the demo display flag is off in response to step AKS109 (step AKS109; No), the demo display flag is set to on (step AKS110), and after specifying the standby command transmission table (step AKS111), After executing the command set process (step AKS112), the special symbol normal process ends.

FIG. 294-10(B) shows a configuration example of the standby command transmission table AKT15. The standby command transmission table AKT15 includes data indicating the number of processes as table head data. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, "3" may be specified as the number of processes. The standby command transmission table AKT15 includes table head data indicating the number of processes, as well as table data for transmitting a second specific number of times designation command, a background color designation command, and a customer waiting demo command. . The production control command that is controlled to be transmittable using the standby command transmission table AKT15 is also referred to as a standby command. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, table data for transmitting the second specific number of times designation command includes command type data that specifies 94[H] of MODE data as the upper byte of the second specific number of times designation command, and command extension data address. The table AKT11 includes lower byte data for obtaining the reference data lower address corresponding to the specific number of command buffers. The lower byte data here includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates a specific number of times command buffer offset value.

The specific number of times command buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H] when the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is "127" or more, and indicates the remaining number of times when the number of remaining times until the specified number of times is less than "127". It becomes a hexadecimal number. For example, the initialization setting table specified in step S9 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288 is a table for setting 7F[H] corresponding to the upper limit value as the buffer initial value in the specific number of command buffer. Contains data. In this way, the second specific number of times designation command includes the command type data that is the first control data, and the specific number of times command data that is the second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. It consists of a set of combined command data.

In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the background color specification command is the command type data that specifies 95 [H] of MODE data as the upper byte of the background color specification command, and the command extension data address table AKT11. It includes lower byte data for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the special symbol state designation buffer. The lower byte data here includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates a special symbol state designation buffer offset value. The special symbol state designation buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and stores a value indicating the state of the special symbol. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the storage value of the special symbol state designation buffer is set to either 00[H] or 03[H], and when the gaming state is the time saving state, the storage value of the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 00[H] or 03[H]. The stored value is set to 02[H]. When the game state is in the normal state, when the time saving state based on the end of the jackpot game state ends, the stored value of the special symbol state designation buffer is 03[ during the special period corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol game. H]. When the other gaming state is the normal state, the stored value of the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 00[H].

In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for sending the customer waiting demo command is command type data that specifies 9F[H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command, and the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command. It includes command lower byte data specifying 03[H] of EXT data. The command lower byte data here includes the work area reference bit with a bit value of "0" and is data indicating 03[H], which is the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command.

In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A), whether or not pending memory information is stored is determined in step AKS101 by determining whether or not the total number of pending memories is "0". It is possible to execute the pending storage determination process. The pending storage information includes, for example, data indicating the values of gaming random numbers including the random number MR1 for special symbol determination, and can be stored in a special symbol buffer provided at a predetermined address in the gaming work area of the RAM 102. . If it is determined in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing that no pending memory information is stored because the total number of pending memories is "0", refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. However, by the command set process in step AKS112, the production control command that is the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted. At this time, in the command set process of step AKS112, the value stored in the specified number of times command buffer is read, and the upper byte and lower byte of the second specified number of times specified command are sequentially stored in the serial communication data register. , controls to enable transmission of the second specific number of times designation command. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs a second specific number of times designation command to the production control board 12. In this way, when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, the second specific number of times designation command is controlled to be transmittable using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, which is the stored information. Ru. In this way, when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored based on step AKS101 as the pending storage determination process of the special symbol normal process, the command set process of step AKS112 is executed to specify the second specific number of times. Since the command is controlled so that the command can be transmitted, when the special figure game is not started because the pending memory information is not stored, the second specific number designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. can be sent to. As a result, by controlling the second specific number of times designation command that is transmitted in response to the execution of variable display in a special figure game, etc. to be stably transmitted, a pachinko game machine that is equipped with multiple states including a time-saving state It is possible to improve the marketability of item 1.

The production control command transmitted using the standby command transmission table AKT15 shown in FIG. 294-10(B) includes a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a demonstration display in a non-gaming state where the game is stopped. . If it is determined in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing that no pending memory information is stored because the total number of pending memories is "0", refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. Then, by the command set processing in step AKS112, the customer waiting demonstration command is controlled to be transmitted together with the second specific number of times designation command. In this way, when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored in the pending storage determination process, the second specific number of times designation command using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, which is the stored information, is sent to the customer regarding the non-gaming state. Controls the waiting demo command so that it can be sent. In this way, by transmitting the second specific number of times designation command and the customer waiting demonstration command at the same time, it becomes easier to design the processing and control related to the production control command on the production control board 12 side, including the time saving state. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved.

FIG. 294-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS107 of FIG. 294-10(A) as the special symbol determination process. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 specifies a special symbol buffer shift control table (step AKS201). For example, a value corresponding to the start address of the special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. The special symbol buffer shift control table is a control table used when shifting the stored contents of the special symbol buffer to which a predetermined address is assigned in the game work area of the RAM 102. In the special symbol buffer, the first pending memory number or the second pending memory number is updated based on the occurrence of a starting winning by the starting winning determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 290(A). Sometimes, data indicating the values of various extracted random numbers is stored in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the updated first pending storage number or second pending storage number. A special symbol buffer is prepared corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In step AKS201, in the case of the second special symbol determination control table designated by step AKS104 shown in FIG. 294-10(A), and in the case of the first special symbol determination control table designated by step AKS106, A different special symbol buffer shift control table is specified. For example, when the first special symbol game is executed in response to the starting opening winning designation value being "1", the first special symbol buffer shift control table is designated. On the other hand, when the second special symbol game is executed in response to the starting opening winning designation value being "2", the second special symbol buffer shift control table is designated.

After step AKS201, special symbol buffer shift processing is executed (step AKS202). Then, the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is read out (step AKS203). Subsequently, special symbol jackpot determination (step AKS204), special symbol small hit determination (step AKS205), and special symbol information setting (step AKS206) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined to be one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss", but is not determined to be "time saving".

The special symbol jackpot determination in step AKS204 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". . When it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in the special symbol jackpot determination, 01 [H], which is a jackpot designation value, is set in the hit flag. The special symbol small hit determination in step AKS205 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the small hit determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is a "small hit". Determine. When it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" in the special symbol small hit determination, 02 [H], which is the small hit designated value, is set in the hit flag.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS206 includes the setting of the jackpot symbol when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the special symbol display result when the special symbol is a "small hit" regarding the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This includes the setting of a small winning symbol when the result is a "hit" and the setting of a losing symbol when the special figure display result is a "losing". The data indicating the confirmed special symbol is stored and stored in the special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and is processed by the second special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS104 or step AKS106 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A). By referring to the specified first special symbol determination control table, it is possible to specify the address of the special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", a jackpot symbol designation value can be set by sorting using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. Further, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the specific display result is "small win", a small win symbol designation value can be set by sorting using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. In addition, the special symbol information setting in step AKS206 includes a pre-fluctuation start command transmission setting for transmitting a background color designation command. Following step AKS206, after specifying the post-judgment work setting table (step AKS207) and executing data set processing (step AKS208), the special symbol determination process ends.

FIG. 294-12(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS202 of FIG. 294-11 as the special symbol buffer shift process. In the special symbol buffer shift process, the CPU 103 sets the transfer source, transfer destination, and number of transfers (step AKS301). For example, set the address of the special symbol buffer with buffer number "1" as the transfer source address, set the address of the special symbol buffer with buffer number "0" as the transfer destination address, and also set the address of the special symbol buffer with buffer number "0" as the transfer destination address. 2 The multiplication value of "4" corresponding to the upper limit of the number of pending memories and the buffer size of each special symbol buffer is set as the number of transfers. Thereafter, a block transfer instruction is executed (step AKS302). As a result, the storage contents of each storage area assigned buffer numbers "0" to "4" of the special symbol buffer at consecutive addresses in the RAM 102 are transferred one by one to the storage area corresponding to the previous buffer number. You can shift it with . Further, the count value of the starting opening winning memory counter is decremented by 1 and updated (step AKS303), and the last buffer to which buffer number "4" is assigned in the special symbol buffer is cleared (step AKS304).

After step AKS304, a specific number of times specification command transmission table is specified (step AKS305), and then command set processing (step AKS306) is executed. Thereby, in response to the start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, control is performed so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. Subsequently, after specifying the production storage information designation command transmission table (step AKS307) and executing command set processing (step AKS308), the special symbol buffer shift processing ends. The special symbol buffer shift process includes steps AKS305 and AKS306 for controlling to be able to transmit the second specific number of times designation command in response to the execution of variable display of special symbols and the like in the special symbol game.

FIG. 294-12(B) shows an example of the configuration of the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21. The specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21 does not include data indicating the number of processes as table head data. When transmitting the second specific number of times designation command using the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21, the number of transmitted commands is "1", so the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table head data is "1". Correspondingly, the processing number is set to "1" in the command set processing at step AKS306. The table head data of the specific number designation command transmission table AKT21 is command type data that specifies 94[H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the second specific number designation command. In addition, the table data corresponding to the next address of the table head data in the specific number designation command transmission table AKT21 is the lower byte data for obtaining the reference data lower address corresponding to the specific number command buffer in the command extension data address table AKT11. becomes. This lower byte data includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates 12 [H], which is the specified number of times command buffer offset value. As a result, the data for the lower byte indicates 92[H], which is the sum of the offset value of 12[H] and 80[H], which corresponds to the bit value of the work area reference bit being "1". .

FIG. 294-12(C) shows a configuration example AKC11 of the second specific number of times designation command. The second specific number of times designation command includes command type data and specific number of times command data. The command type data of the second specific number of times designation command is 1-byte first control data indicating that the command type is the second specific number of times designation command, and the MODE data of the second specific number of times designation command is 94 [H]. shows. The specific number of times command data is 1-byte second control data that can be set in accordance with the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer. The bit value of the first bit of the specific number command data is "0", and the remaining 7 bits can be used to specify a specific number command buffer storage value from 00[H] to 7F[H]. In this way, the specific number of times command data has a minimum value of 00[H] and a maximum value of 7F[H]. Further, the second specific number of times designation command is a 2-byte production control command.

In the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), the specific number of times designation command transmission table specified in step AKS305 is referred to, and the second specific number of times designation command is sent by the command set process of step AKS306. Sent. The special symbol buffer shift process becomes pending memory information because the total number of pending memories is determined to be other than "0" in step AKS101 in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10(A). It is included in the special symbol determination process executed in step AKS107 when data indicating the value of the gaming random number is stored. In this case, the special symbol buffer stores data indicating the values of various random numbers included in the pending storage information, such as data indicating the random number MR1 for special symbol determination. In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, the stored contents of the special symbol buffer are shifted by executing the special symbol buffer shift process in step AKS202. In this special symbol buffer shift process, in the command set process of step AKS306, the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer is read out, and the upper byte and lower byte of the second specified number of times specified command are sequentially transferred to the serial communication data register. By storing the command, the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs a second specific number of times designation command to the production control board 12. In this way, in the special symbol buffer shift process, the second specific number designation command is controlled to be transmittable using the stored value of the specific number command buffer, which is stored information. In this way, when the special symbol determination process of the special symbol normal process is executed, the command set process is executed in the special symbol buffer shift process and the second specific number of times designation command is controlled to be transmitted, so the special symbol game At the timing when the variation of the special symbol starts, a second specific number designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Therefore, the correspondence between the special figure game to be started and the remaining number of plays up to a specific number is made clear, and the design and control of the number of remaining numbers up to a specific number of plays is facilitated, and the pachinko game is equipped with multiple states including a time-saving state. The marketability of Machine 1 can be improved.

FIG. 294-13 shows an example of symbol designation value determination. Among these, FIG. 294-13(A) is a determination example AKD01 when the special figure display result is "jackpot". FIG. 294-13(B) is a determination example AKD02 when the special figure display result is "small hit". In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, if the special symbol display result is "jackpot" in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, the jackpot symbol is determined using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. Configure settings. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the jackpot designated value, data indicating the value of the random number MR2 for winning symbol selection is stored in the special symbol buffer, and the starting opening winning designation value is " A jackpot state setting table corresponding to the case of “1” and the case of “2” is specified. Thereafter, by comparing the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol with the distribution judgment value indicated by the table data of the specified jackpot state setting table, the designated value of the jackpot symbol is determined according to the determination ratio shown in the determination example AKD01. . The jackpot symbol designation value is stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer. Further, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "small win", the small win symbol is set using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. For example, when the hit flag is set to 02[H] to indicate a small hit specified value, data indicating the value obtained by adding 64[H] to the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol is stored in the special symbol buffer. , and also specifies a small winning state setting table corresponding to the case where the starting opening winning designation value is "1" and the case where it is "2". Next, by comparing the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol with the distribution judgment value indicated by the table data of the specified small winning state setting table, the specified small winning symbol value is determined according to the determination ratio shown in the determination example AKD02. Determine. The small winning symbol designation value is stored in the small winning symbol determination buffer. In addition, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "loss", F1[H], which is a loss symbol pattern designation value, is stored in the special symbol buffer.

FIG. 294-14 shows an example of setting the number of openings of the big winning opening. Among these, FIG. 294-14(A) is a setting example AKE01 in the case where the special figure display result is "jackpot". FIG. 294-14(B) is a setting example AKE02 when the special figure display result is "small hit". In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, if the special symbol display result is "jackpot", the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is set using the jackpot symbol designation value. Configure settings. For example, when the winning flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the designated jackpot value, the special figure display result specifies the maximum value table for the number of openings of the jackpot corresponding to "jackpot". The maximum value table for the number of times the special winning hole is opened for which the special figure display result corresponds to "jackpot" includes table data that associates the specified value of the jackpot symbol with the maximum value for the number of times the special winning hole is opened. With reference to such a maximum value table of the number of openings of the jackpot, the maximum number of openings of the jackpot corresponding to the designated value of the jackpot symbol is determined. The data indicating the maximum number of openings of the special winning opening determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of openings of the special winning opening buffer. Furthermore, when the special figure display result is a "small win", it is possible to set the maximum value of the number of times the large winning hole is opened using the small win symbol designation value. For example, with reference to the maximum number of times the special winning hole is opened, the maximum value of the number of times the special winning hole is opened corresponding to the designated value of the small winning symbol is determined by referring to the maximum value table of the number of times the special winning hole is opened corresponding to the special symbol display result "small win". The data indicating the maximum number of openings of the special winning opening determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of openings of the special winning opening buffer. In addition, when the special figure display result is "small win", the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning hole is when a V winning occurs due to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small winning gaming state, may be determined.

FIG. 294-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS108 of FIG. 294-10(A) as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS221). For example, if the value of the hit flag is read out and the read value is 01 [H], which is the designated jackpot value, it may be determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot". When the special figure display result is "jackpot" (step AKS221; Yes), the jackpot symbol designation value is read (step AKS222). The jackpot design designation value is the designation value of the jackpot design that is set when the special symbol display result is "jackpot", and is stored in the production design buffer. Further, the performance state selection designation value is read out (step AKS223). The performance state selection designation value is a value stored in the performance state selection buffer, and is set to one of 00[H] to 0E[H]. After step AKS223, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS224). The jackpot variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special symbol display result is "jackpot", and includes the jackpot symbol designation value read out in step AKS222 and the effect read out in step AKS223. It is sufficient if it is possible to specify different tables corresponding to the state selection specification value.

Corresponding to step AKS221, if the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step AKS221; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS225). For example, if the value of the hit flag is read out and the read value is 02[H], which is the designated small hit value, it may be determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit". When the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS225; Yes), the small hit symbol designation value is read (step AKS226). The small win design designation value is the designation value of the small win design that is set when the special symbol display result is a "small win", and is stored in the production design buffer. Further, the performance state selection designation value is read out (step AKS227). Thereafter, a small winning variation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS228). The small hit variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "small hit", and is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "small hit", and it is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "small hit". It is sufficient if it is possible to specify a different table corresponding to the read performance state selection specification value.

Corresponding to step AKS225, if the special figure display result is not a "small win" (step AKS225; No), for example, the starting opening winning designation value is read from the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "0" (step AKS229). Further, the performance state selection designation value is read out (step AKS230). Thereafter, a loss variation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS231). The losing variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "losing", and includes the starting opening winning designation value read out in step AKS229 and the value read out in step AKS230. It is sufficient if it is possible to specify different tables corresponding to the production state selection specification value. Furthermore, the losing time fluctuation pattern type selection table is the first pending storage number when the starting opening winning designation value is "1" or the second holding storage number when the starting opening winning designation value is "2". It may be possible to specify different tables corresponding to .

After steps AKS224, AKS228, and AKS231, the value of random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is read (step AKS232). The data indicating the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type may be stored in the buffer for variation pattern type selection included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol buffer. Subsequently, a variation pattern type is selected based on the value of random number MR4 for variation pattern type selection (step AKS233). Next, a fluctuation pattern determination table is designated (step AKS234). In step AKS234, it is only necessary that a different variation pattern determination table can be specified corresponding to the variation pattern type selected in step AKS233. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is read out (step AKS235). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be stored in the fluctuation pattern determination buffer included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol buffer. Furthermore, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step AKS236).

Following step AKS236, a variable command transmission table is designated (step AKS237), and command set processing (step AKS238) is executed. The variation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting an effect control command at the time of the start of variation in response to the start of variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. For example, the variable command transmission table specified corresponding to the first special figure game includes, in addition to table head data indicating the number of processing, a production symbol designation command, a first fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command. , contains table data for sending. On the other hand, the variable command transmission table specified corresponding to the second special figure game includes, in addition to the table head data specifying the number of processing, the production symbol designation command, the second fluctuation start designation command, and the fluctuation pattern. Contains the specified command and table data for sending.

After step AKS238, a special symbol variation time table is designated (step AKS239), and a special symbol variation time is set (step AKS240). The special symbol variation time table includes table data for setting time data indicating a variable display time such as special symbol variation time in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern. In step AKS240, time data corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is stored in the HL register by referring to the special symbol variation time table specified in step AKS239 and executing time data expansion processing. The time data etc. acquired in this way may be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as variable time data.

Then, after setting the variation pattern, a work setting table is specified (step AKS241), data setting processing (step AKS242) is executed, and then the variation pattern setting processing ends. The post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for updating the special symbol process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process. Further, the work setting table after setting the variation pattern includes table data for updating the stored value of the display buffer during special symbol variation to 01[H]. The special symbol fluctuation display buffer stores a value that specifies the display symbol while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fluctuating, and stores the first special symbol fluctuation display buffer corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuation display buffer. A second special symbol fluctuation display buffer corresponding to the special symbol is included. In the data set process of step AKS242, the work setting table after the fluctuation pattern setting specified in step AKS241 is referred to, and when starting the first special symbol game, the stored value of the first special symbol fluctuation display buffer is set to 01 [ H], and when starting the second special symbol game, update the stored value of the second special symbol fluctuation display buffer to 01[H]. Further, the post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for clearing the random value buffer in which random numbers used for determining the variation pattern are stored and initializing the stored values.

FIG. 294-16 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD11 when the special figure display result is a "jackpot". In the variation pattern determination example AKD11, the determinable pattern type and the determinable pattern are set differently depending on the combination of the performance state selection designated value and the jackpot symbol designated value. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step AKS221, the jackpot symbol designation value read out in step AKS222 and the jackpot symbol designation value read in step AKS223 are In step AKS233, a variable pattern type is selected and determined from among the determinable pattern types, and in step AKS236, a variable pattern is determined from among the determinable patterns, corresponding to the performance state selection designation value read out. For example, the jackpot variation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS224 is a variation pattern type selection table that indicates the distribution judgment value for each determinable pattern type in response to the combination of the jackpot symbol specification value and the performance state selection specification value. The table may be selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. Further, the variation pattern determination table specified in step AKS234 is a plurality of pre-prepared variation pattern determination tables indicating the distribution determination values for each determinable pattern, corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type in step AKS233. Any one selected from among them is sufficient.

FIG. 294-17 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD12 when the special figure display result is "small hit". In the variation pattern determination example AKD12, the determinable pattern type and the determinable pattern are set differently depending on the combination of the performance state selection designated value and the small hit symbol designated value. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "small hit" in step AKS225, the small win symbol designation value read out in step AKS226 and the step In step AKS233, a variable pattern type is selected and determined from among the determinable pattern types, and in step AKS236, a variable pattern is determined from among the determinable patterns, corresponding to the performance state selection designation value read out by AKS227. Ru. For example, the small hit fluctuation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS228 is a fluctuation pattern that indicates the distribution judgment value for each determinable pattern type in response to the combination of the small hit symbol specified value and the performance state selection specified value. The type selection table may be one selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. Further, the variation pattern determination table specified in step AKS234 is a plurality of pre-prepared variation pattern determination tables indicating the distribution determination values for each determinable pattern, corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type in step AKS233. Any one selected from among them is sufficient.

FIG. 294-18 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the timed value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS121). In this special symbol process timer, the variable time data corresponding to the determination result of the variable pattern is set as a timer initial value in step AKS240 of the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15. . When the time value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the time value of the special symbol process timer is updated by 1 subtraction (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation process ends.

If the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02[H], which is the value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing. (Step AKS123). Further, after executing the special symbol stop time setting process (step AKS124), the counter subtraction process (step AKS125) is executed, and then the special symbol variation process ends.

FIG. 294-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS124 of FIG. 294-18 as the special symbol stop time setting process. In the special symbol stop time setting process, the CPU 103 first performs symbol stop time setting SZA1 (step AKS251). For example, a value corresponding to the start address of the symbol stop data selection table corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS252). For example, when 01[H] is set in the hit flag to indicate a designated jackpot value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot". If the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step AKS252; No), it is determined whether the performance designation value after winning is 00 [H] (step AKS253). The data indicating the post-win performance designation value is stored in the post-win performance designation buffer provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and is stored in the post-win performance designation buffer 00[H], 01[H], 03[H], 05[ H], 08[H], or 09[H]. When the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process shown in FIG. The game work area is cleared, and the performance designation value is set to 00 [H] after the winning ends.

Corresponding to step AKS253, if the after-win performance designation value is not 00 [H] (step AKS253; No), it is determined whether the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reach determination value (step AKS254). In step AKS254, data indicating the count value of the specific number of times counter is stored in the DE register. Thereafter, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the reaching determination value of the specific number of times counter is 0000[H] corresponding to "0", but in step AKS254, instead of updating the counted value of the specific number of times counter itself, data indicating that counted value is updated. is stored in a storage area such as a DE register that is different from the specific number of times counter, and the stored value is updated by subtracting 1 to determine whether or not the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value. The count value of the specific number of times counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

Corresponding to step AKS254, when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value (step AKS254; Yes), the symbol stop setting SZA3 is reset by overwriting setting (step AKS255). For example, the value corresponding to the start address of the symbol stop data selection table corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA3 is overwritten and stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. The count value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[H] as the initial value of the counter corresponding to the initial value of the specific number of times when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is not a "jackpot", the count value of the specific number of times counter is updated by subtracting 1. Then, when the count value of the specific number of times counter becomes 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS254 that the reaching determination value is reached. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the specific condition in which the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the attainment determination value is satisfied is a sufficiently lower rate than the rate at which it is determined that such specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, after the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is performed in step AKS251, when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254, the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is performed in step AKS255. Reset by overwriting settings. As a result, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA3, the program capacity of storage commands used for table setting etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Can be done. In addition, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA3, processing by branch commands is simplified and confirmation at the design stage becomes easier, and the product of pachinko game machine 1 You can increase your sexuality.

Corresponding to step AKS254, when the count value of the specific number of times counter does not reach the arrival determination value (step AKS254; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS256). For example, when 02[H] is set in the hit flag to indicate a designated small hit value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit." When the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step AKS256; No), it is determined whether the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end determination value (step AKS257). In step AKS257, data indicating the count value of the first time saving counter is stored in the DE register. Thereafter, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the end determination value of the first time saving counter is 0000 [H], which corresponds to "0", but in step AKS257, the counted value of the first time saving counter is not updated, but the counted value is By storing the data shown in a storage area such as a DE register different from the first time saving counter and updating the stored value by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the counted value of the first time saving counter reaches the end judgment value. . The first time-saving counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and calculates the total number of times of the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game that can be executed in the time-saving state, and the remaining number of times. It can be counted by counting down. The count value of the first time saving counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

Corresponding to step AKS257, if the count value of the first time saving counter does not reach the end determination value (step AKS257; No), it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS258) . At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS258; No), it is determined whether the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end determination value (step AKS259) . In step AKS259, data indicating the count value of the second time saving counter is stored in the DE register. Thereafter, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the end determination value of the second time saving counter is 0000 [H], which corresponds to "0", but in step AKS259, the counted value of the second time saving counter is not updated, but the counted value is By storing the data shown in a storage area such as a DE register different from the second time saving counter and updating the stored value by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the counted value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value. . The second time-saving counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and can count the number of times the second special game can be played in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. . The count value of the second time saving counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in response to step AKS257 (step AKS257; Yes), or when the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in response to step AKS259 ( Step AKS259; Yes), the symbol stop setting SZA2 is reset by overwriting setting (Step AKS260). For example, the value corresponding to the start address of the symbol stop data selection table corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA2 is overwritten and stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. The count value of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to the initial value of the counter corresponding to the number of changes during the time saving at the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed in the time-saving state, the count value of at least one of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter is updated by subtracting one. Then, when the count value of the first time saving counter reaches 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS257 that the end determination value has been reached. Further, when the count value of the second time saving counter reaches 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS259 that the end determination value has been reached. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the specific condition in which the count value of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter reaches the end judgment value is satisfied is sufficiently higher than the rate at which such specific condition is determined not to be satisfied. The proportion is low. Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, after performing the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251, if the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in step AKS257, or if the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in step AKS259, When the count value reaches the end judgment value, in step AKS260, the symbol stop setting SZA2 is reset by overwriting setting. As a result, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA2, the program capacity of storage commands used for table setting etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. Can be done. In addition, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA2, processing by branch commands is simplified and confirmation at the design stage becomes easier, and the product of pachinko game machine 1 You can increase your sexuality.

If the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in response to step AKS252 (step AKS252; Yes), and if the designated value for effect after winning is 00[H] in response to step AKS253 (step AKS253; Yes) , If the special figure display result is "small win" corresponding to step AKS256 (step AKS256; Yes), if the starting opening winning designation value is "1" corresponding to step AKS258 (step AKS258; Yes) Alternatively, if the count value of the second time saving counter does not reach the end judgment value in response to step AKS259 (step AKS259; No), command set processing is performed (step AKS261) based on the symbol stop setting SZA1 in step AKS251. , and the data set process (step AKS262) are executed, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS255, a command set process (step AKS261) and a data set process (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA3, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS260, a command set process (step AKS261) and a data set process (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA2, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends.

FIG. 294-20 shows a setting example AKE11 when the symbol is stopped. In the special symbol stop time setting process, by executing the command set process in step AKS261 based on any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3, it is possible to send a production symbol confirmation command with different EXT data as the lower byte. Control. In addition, in the special symbol stop time setting process, a different timer initial value can be set for the special symbol process timer by executing the data set process in step AKS262 based on any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3. to control. For example, the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] as the initial timer value in the case of the symbol stop setting SZA1, and 05DC[H] as the initial timer value in the case of the symbol stop setting SZA2. When the time setting is SZA3, 4F7E[H] is set as the timer initial value. The special symbol process timer to which these timer initial values have been set is updated by one subtraction each time a timer interrupt of the gaming control microcomputer 100 occurs in the special symbol stop processing until the time value reaches "0". Ru.

A timer interrupt of the game control microcomputer 100 occurs, for example, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds. As a result, in the case of the symbol stop setting SZA1, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 007D[H] x 4 = 500 milliseconds. be done. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is the normal stop time. In addition, in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA2, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 05DC[H] x 4 = 6000 milliseconds. Ru. In the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA3, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 4F7E[H]×4=81400 milliseconds. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time. The symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a setting performed in step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254 of the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. . When the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value, a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the special symbol game is established, and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state. At this time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, a specific stop time different from the normal stop time is set as the stop time after the special symbol variation time has elapsed.

The lower byte of the production symbol confirmation command is set to 00 [H] when the symbol stop setting is SZA1, 01 [H] when the symbol stop setting is SZA2, and 02 when the symbol stop setting is SZA3. [H] is set. When the special symbol variation time during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the special symbol game has elapsed, the command set processing in step AKS261 is controlled so that the production symbol confirmation command can be transmitted, and the production pattern is changed according to the lower byte. The symbol stop time can be specified on the control board 12 side. For example, in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, it becomes possible to specify that the symbol stop time is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the time saving state based on the specific stop time by executing the performance control corresponding to the reception of the performance pattern confirmation command with the lower byte of 02 [H]. What is necessary is to make it possible to perform a notification effect that notifies the user that the event will be performed.

FIG. 294-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS125 of FIG. 294-18 as the counter subtraction process. In the counter subtraction process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS271). For example, when 01[H] is set in the hit flag to indicate a designated jackpot value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot". If the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step AKS271; No), it is determined whether the count value of the specific number of times counter has reached the reach determination value (step AKS272). In step AKS272, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is already "0", it is determined that the count value has not reached the attainment determination value. On the other hand, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is other than "0", it is determined whether the count value becomes "0" after being updated by one. If the updated count value is other than "0", it is determined that the reaching determination value has not been reached. If the updated count value is "0", it is determined that the reaching determination value has been reached. In step AKS272, the value corresponding to the address of the specific number of times counter is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, and by updating the stored value at that address by subtracting 1, the counted value of the specific number of times counter itself can be updated. In this way, the count value of the specific number of times counter can be updated by counter subtraction processing based on execution of variable display. Corresponding to step AKS272, when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the arrival judgment value (step AKS272; Yes), the work setting table at the time of arrival is specified (step AKS273), and data set processing (step AKS274) is executed. do.

The determination in step AKS272 is not performed when the special figure display result is a "jackpot". The determination in step AKS272 includes a process of updating the count value by subtracting 1 from the count value of the specific number of times counter if it is not yet "0". The count value of the specific number of times counter becomes numerical information that can be updated in step AKS272 based on execution of variable display. In step AKS271, based on the variable display of special symbols in the executed special symbol game, an advantageous determination is made as to whether or not the special symbol display result should be controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to a "jackpot". . In response to the special figure display result being a "jackpot", if the judgment result of such an advantageous judgment is a judgment to control to an advantageous state, the count value of the specific number of times counter, which becomes numerical information, will be updated. Don't do it. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, it is judged that the reaching judgment value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information. In this case, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. In this way, when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, for example, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is updated by subtracting 1 to "0" based on the execution of the special figure game, steps AKS273 and AKS274 are executed. , data setting processing including controlling the gaming state to a time saving state is performed.

In step AKS272, the special symbol stop time setting shown in FIG. 294-19 occurs when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, such as updating the count value of the specific number of times counter by 1 and updating it to "0". In the process, since it is determined in step AKS254 that the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value, the command set process in step AKS261 is executed based on the symbol stop setting SZA3 in step AKS255. At this time, by sending the production symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA3 shown in FIG. , it is possible to specify that the time saving state is to be controlled. Further, when the numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, the fact that the time saving state is controlled can also be specified by transmitting a background color designation command or a second specific number of times designation command.

If the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state corresponding to "jackpot" and the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, is updated, the special figure is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Even though it is a figure game, there is a risk that an effect corresponding to the start of the time saving state may be executed due to updating of the numerical information. On the other hand, in the counter subtraction process, when the special figure display result in step AKS271 is a "jackpot", the determination in step AKS272 is not performed. As a result, when the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to "jackpot", the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, is not updated, so it corresponds to the start of the time saving state. It is possible to improve the game interest by making it possible to appropriately execute performances, and to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

On the other hand, the determination in step AKS272 can be made when the special figure display result is a "small hit". Then, when it is determined that the reached determination value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times. At this time, in steps AKS273 and AKS274, data setting processing including controlling the gaming state to a time saving state is performed. Therefore, in a special figure game where the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, reaches the reaching judgment value, when the special figure display result becomes "small win", a V win must occur in the small win game state. For example, after the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state. Alternatively, if a V win occurs in this small winning gaming state, the time saving state is set based on the end of the special drawing game, and then the jackpot gaming state is controlled, so the time saving state It is treated as a jackpot.

If the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in response to step AKS271 (step AKS271; Yes), or if the count value of the specific number of times counter does not reach the reach determination value in response to step AKS272 (step AKS272; No) , or after executing the data set process in step AKS274, the specific number of times command data is set to the specific number of times command upper limit value (step AKS275). The specific number of times command data is data for creating second control data that becomes the lower byte of the second specific number of times designation command in the counter subtraction process, and is stored in a storage area for data creation such as the A register, for example. The specific number command upper limit value is the maximum value of the specific number command data that can be specified by the lower byte of the second specific number designation command, and indicates, for example, 7F[H]. In step AKS275, for example, 2-byte data is read from the address of the specific number counter stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, stored in the DE register, and then 7F[H] is stored in the A register.

After step AKS275, it is determined whether the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit determination value (step AKS276). For example, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than 007F[H], it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit determination value. If the count value of the specific number of times counter is less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value but not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step AKS276; No), the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter is overwritten as specific number of times command data. Reset (step AKS277). For example, the specific number of times command data is reset by overwriting and storing the value of the lower byte stored in the E register in the A register among the count values of the specific number of times counter stored in the DE register. . The count value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[H] as the initial value of the counter corresponding to the initial value of the specific number of times when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is not a "jackpot", the count value of the specific number of times counter is updated by subtracting 1. Then, after the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches 007F[H], it is determined in step AKS276 that the value is not larger than the upper limit determination value. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the count value of the specific number of times counter is not greater than the upper limit determination value is a sufficiently lower rate than the rate at which it is determined that the count value is greater than the upper limit determination value. Therefore, in the counter subtraction process, after setting the specific number command data to the specific number command upper limit value in step AKS275, in step AKS276, if the count value of the specific number counter is not larger than the upper limit judgment value, step In the AKS277, the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter is reset as specific number of times command data by overwriting. As a result, if the setting frequency of the specific number of command upper limit value is higher than the setting frequency of the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the specific number of times command data, etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. In addition, as specific number of command data, if the setting frequency of the specific number of command upper limit value is higher than the setting frequency of the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter, processing by branch instructions can be simplified and confirmation at the design stage. This makes it possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

Corresponding to step AKS276, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step AKS276; Yes), or after step AKS277, the specific number of times command data is stored in the specific number of times command buffer (step AKS278). The specific number of times command upper limit value set in the specific number of times command data in step AKS275 is 7F[H], which corresponds to the upper limit determination value used for the determination in step AKS276. The upper limit determination value used in the determination in step AKS276 becomes determination information that is compared with the count value of the specific number of times counter. If the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command upper limit value 7F[H] set in step S275 is stored in the specific number of times command buffer in step AKS278. . In addition, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to the upper limit judgment value, in step AKS277, 7F[H], which is the same as the specific number of times command upper limit value, is added to the specific number of times command data as the lower byte of the counted value of the specific number of times counter. It is reset and then stored in the command buffer a specific number of times in step AKS278. In this way, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value, data indicating 7F[H], which is equal to the upper limit determination value and serves as determination information, is stored in the specific number of times command buffer. The value stored in the specific number of times command buffer is read out when executing the command set process in step AKS308 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), and is Used as command data for a specific number of times. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value, the specified number of times command data, which becomes the second control data of the second specific number designation command, corresponds to the upper limit judgment value, which becomes the judgment information. 7F[H] to be stored in the command buffer a specific number of times.

When the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter is set as the specific number command data in step AKS277, the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter is stored in the specific number command buffer in step AKS278. A value identical to a byte is stored in the command buffer a specified number of times. The count value of the specific number of times counter becomes numerical information that can be updated in step AKS272 based on execution of variable display. The value stored in the specific number of times command buffer is read out when executing the command set process in step AKS308 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), and is Used as command data for a specific number of times. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is less than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times counter's count value, which is numerical information, is used as the specific number of times command data, which is the second control data of the second specific number of times designation command. Stores the same value as the lower byte of a numeric value into the command buffer a specific number of times. This prevents an increase in the data volume of the second specific number of times designation command that is sent in response to the execution of the variable display, and improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including a time-saving state. be able to.

In this way, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H] when the count value of the specific number of times counter is 007F[H] or more and the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more. In addition, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is less than 007F[H] and the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is less than "127", the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is a value indicating the remaining number of times. Become. However, the specific number of times command buffer can store 1 byte data, and when the counted value of the specific number of times counter is not larger than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command buffer indicates the lower byte of the counted value of the specific number of times counter. is stored. The second specific number of times designation command is a set of a combination of command type data that is first control data and specific number of times command data that is second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. The command data becomes a 2-byte production control command. Then, in the counter subtraction process for updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, specific number of times command data that is second control data of the second specific number of times designation command is created. In this way, the second specific number of times designation command that is sent in response to the execution of variable display can have a 2-byte configuration, which prevents an increase in data capacity and allows multiple states including time-saving states. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with this can be improved.

In steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A), and steps AKS305 and AKS306 shown in FIG. 294-12(A), using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, Control is performed so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. In these cases, the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer can be read and set as the specific number of times command data in the second specific number of times designation command. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is stored in a storage area separate from the counted value of the specific number of times counter, and can be updated based on the counted value of the specific number of times counter. Can be used as command data. Therefore, when sending the second specific number of times designation command, there is no need to make a judgment regarding the count value of the specific number of times counter, so the processing load when sending the second specific number of times designation command is reduced, including the time saving state. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved. In particular, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H]. Therefore, when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command, even if it is determined in step AKS276 whether the counted value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit determination value, it is determined that it is a larger value. The period for which the value is not large is likely to be longer than the period for which it is determined that the value is not large. There is little practical benefit in creating the specific number of times command data when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command even if the processing load for such a determination is increased. Therefore, by creating specific number command data in the counter subtraction process and storing it in the specific number command buffer, the processing load when transmitting the second specific number designation command can be reduced, and multiple It is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having the following conditions.

After step AKS278, the first time-saving counter is designated (step AKS279), and time-saving subtraction processing (step AKS280) is executed. In step AKS279, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the first time saving counter is stored in the HL register which serves as a pointer. Subsequently, it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS281). At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS281; No), the second time saving counter is designated (step AKS282) and the time saving subtraction process (step AKS283) is executed. Next, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS284). Then, when the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS284; Yes), the third time saving counter is designated (step AKS285) and the time saving subtraction process (step AKS286) is executed.

If the starting opening winning designation value is "1" corresponding to step AKS281 (step AKS281; Yes), if the special figure display result is not "small hit" corresponding to step AKS284 (step AKS284; No), or After executing the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS286, a variable counter after the first winning is specified (step AKS287). The after-first winning fluctuation counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The initial value of the variable counter after the end of the first win is set to a counter initial value corresponding to a special symbol game that can be executed in the time saving state when the jackpot game state ends. In step AKS287, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the fluctuation counter after the first winning is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Subsequently, the effect selection table after the first winning is specified (step AKS288). Then, it is determined whether the gaming state designation code is 00[H] (step AKS289). The gaming state designation code is 1-byte data that indicates whether the gaming state is in a time saving state, and 00 [H] is set when it is not in a time saving state, and 01 [H] is set when it is in a time saving state. Ru. In step AKS289, for example, when the time-saving check process is executed to read the value of the time-saving function flag and the value is 01 [H], which is the time-saving operation designation value, the gaming state designation code is not 00 [H]. The same determination as in the case may be made.

If the gaming state designation code is 00 [H] in response to step AKS289 (step AKS289; Yes), a variable counter after the second winning is designated (step AKS290). The after-second winning fluctuation counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. For the second post-win variation counter, when the jackpot game state ends, a counter initial value corresponding to a special number of special symbol games that can be executed after the end of the time saving state is set. In step AKS290, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the fluctuation counter after the second winning is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Subsequently, the effect selection table after the second winning is specified (step AKS291). Thereafter, it is determined whether the counted value of the post-win fluctuation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290 is 00[H] corresponding to "0" (step AKS292). At this time, if the count value of the after-win fluctuation counter is 00 [H] (step AKS292; Yes), the counter subtraction process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS292, if the count value of the post-win fluctuation counter is other than 00 [H] (step AKS292; No), it is determined whether or not time saving control is in progress (step AKS293). In step AKS293, for example, a time-saving check process is executed, and if the time-saving function flag is set to 01 [H], which is the specified value for time-saving operation, it is determined that time-saving control is being performed. In addition, in step AKS293, for example, when the gaming state designation code is 01 [H] and not 00 [H], it may be determined that the time saving control is in progress. Then, when the time saving control is in progress (step AKS293; Yes), it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS294). At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS294; Yes), the counter subtraction process ends.

If the time saving control is not in progress in response to step AKS293 (step AKS293; No), or if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS294 (step AKS294; No), the win is won. After completion, the variable counter subtraction process (step AKS295) is executed, and the counter subtraction process is ended. The post-win variation counter subtraction process in step AKS295 includes processing for updating the counted value of the post-win variation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290 by subtracting 1. Thereafter, the post-win performance designation value is read from the post-win performance designation buffer. Then, referring to the after-win performance selection table specified in step AKS288 or step AKS291, the performance setting table corresponding to the after-win performance designation value is selected. The performance setting table includes table data indicating a counter determination value, a special symbol state designation code, and a performance state selection designation value. In the post-win variation counter subtraction process of step AKS295, the count value of the post-win variation counter is compared with the counter judgment value shown in the effect setting table, and if the two match, the counter judgment value is associated with the count value. The special symbol state designation code and production state selection designation value are set. The special symbol status designation code is a value indicating the status of the special symbol, and is set to one of 00[H] to 03[H]. The presentation state selection designation value is stored in the presentation state selection buffer and is used to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15.

In the counter subtraction process, when the determination in step AKS272 is made, the count value of the specific number of times counter can be updated, and specific number of times command data is created in steps AKS275 to AKS277. The specific number of times command data created at this time is stored in the specific number of times command buffer in step AKS278, and is used in steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A), and in FIG. 294-12(A). In steps AKS305 and AKS306 shown in ), it becomes possible to transmit a second specific number of times designation command using the stored value in the specific number of times command buffer. Since the second specific number designation command is transmitted in response to the start of the special figure game, it is conceivable that the count value of the specific number of times counter is also updated in response to the start of the special figure game. However, at the start of the special pattern game, many judgments, settings, selections, and decisions are required, such as special pattern jackpot judgment, special pattern small hit judgment, special pattern information setting, selection of variation pattern type, and determination of variation pattern. , the processing load tends to increase. Therefore, the count value of the specific number of times counter is controlled to be updatable by the counter subtraction process included in the special symbol variation process when the display result in the special symbol game is stopped and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load at the start of the special figure game, and to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, by controlling the count value of the specific number of times counter to be updatable by counter subtraction processing along with other counters such as a time saving counter and a fluctuating counter after winning ends, an increase in the design burden can be prevented and the product of pachinko game machine 1 You can increase your sexuality.

In the counter subtraction process, when the determination in step AKS272 is performed, the count value of the specific number of times counter can be updated, and when the time-saving subtraction process in steps AKS280, AKS283, and AKS285 is executed, the count value of the time-saving counter can be updated. Updatable. On the other hand, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, the count values of the specific number counter and time saving counter themselves are not updated. As a result, the process of setting the symbol stop time and the process of updating the count values of various counters are clearly separated, making it easier to design the pachinko game machine 1, which allows multiple processes including time-saving states to be easily designed. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the state can be improved. In addition, in the process of setting the symbol stop time such as the special symbol stop time setting process, the count value of the specific number counter or time saving counter itself may be updated, or the process of updating the count value of various counters such as counter subtraction process In this case, the symbol stop time may be set.

FIG. 294-22 shows an example of data setting upon arrival AKE21. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, after specifying the arrival work setting table in step AKS273, by executing the data set process in step AKS274, the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching judgment value. Configure data settings in case of This data setting includes various settings such as the arrival data setting example AKE21. In the arrival data setting example AKE21, the game state designation code is set to 01 [H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H], the performance state selection designation value is set to 0C [H], and the time is saved. Set the function flag to 01[H], set the initial value of the first time-saving counter to 02AD[H], set the initial value of the second time-saving counter to 0000[H], and set the initial value of the second time-saving counter to 0000[H]. The initial value of the counter is set to 0001 [H], the designated value for reaching the specific number of times is set to 01 [H], the specific number of times command buffer is cleared, and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H]. Here, by setting the time saving function flag to 01[H], the gaming state is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. Also, by setting 02AD[H] as the initial value of the first time-saving counter, the total number of times of the first special game and the second special game will reach "625" as a condition for ending the time-saving state. Set. Since the initial value of the second time-saving counter is set to 0000 [H], the condition for ending the time-saving state will not be satisfied based only on the number of times the second special symbol game is played. By setting 0001 [H] as the initial value of the third time-saving counter, the number of times the special figure game in which the special figure display result becomes a "small win" becomes "1" as a condition for ending the time-saving state. Set. By setting 01 [H] as the specified number of times, it becomes possible to specify that the time saving state is based on the number of executions of the special figure game reaching the specified number of times. The specified number of times specified value is set in a specified number of times reached flag provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102.

FIG. 294-23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of time-saving subtraction processing. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time-saving subtraction process can be executed in steps AKS280, AKS283, and AKS286. In the time saving subtraction process, it is determined whether the count value of the time saving counter specified by the counter subtraction process is "0" (step AKS321). For example, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280, it is determined whether the count value of the first time saving counter specified in step AKS279 is 0000[H] corresponding to "0". In the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, it is determined whether the count value of the second time saving counter specified in step AKS282 is 0000[H] corresponding to "0". In the time saving subtraction process in step AKS286, it is determined whether the count value of the third time saving counter specified in step AKS285 is 0000[H] corresponding to "0". Then, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" (step AKS321; Yes), the time saving subtraction process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS321, if the count value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step AKS321; No), the count value of the specified time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS322), and then the count value of the time-saving counter is updated. It is determined whether or not has become "0" (step AKS323). Here, if the count value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step AKS323; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, if the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0" in response to step AKS323 (step AKS323; Yes), the work setting table at the end of the first time saving is specified (step AKS324), and data set processing is performed. (Step AKS325) is executed.

Following the data setting process in step AKS325, it is determined whether the specific number of times reaching flag is on (step AKS326). For example, when the specific number of times specification flag is set to 01[H] to indicate the specified number of times reached specified value, it may be determined that the specified number of times reached flag is on. If the specific number of times reaching flag is off (step AKS326; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, if the specific number of times attainment flag is on (step AKS326; Yes), the work setting table at the end of the second time saving is specified (step AKS327), and after executing the data set processing (step AKS328), The time saving subtraction process ends.

FIG. 294-24 shows the settings to be cleared in the time saving subtraction process. Of these, FIG. 294-24(A) shows the AKE31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving by steps AKS324 and AKS325 of the time saving subtraction process. FIG. 294-24(B) shows the AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving by steps AKS327 and AKS328 of the time saving subtraction process. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data set process in step AKS325, which is executed after specifying the work setting table at the end of the first time saving in step AKS324, is performed when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "0". Contains data clear processing in case of Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". In addition, in the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data set process in step AKS328, which is executed after specifying the second time saving end work setting table in step AKS327, is added to the data set process in step AKS325. This includes data clearing processing when the specified number of times reaching flag is on. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

The AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving includes a time saving function flag, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, a third time saving counter, a gaming state designation code, and a fluctuation counter after the first winning ends. In the data set process of step AKS325, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving includes a special symbol state designation code and a performance state selection designation value. In the data set process of step AKS328, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The data set process in step AKS328 is executed in addition to the data set process in step AKS325 in response to the case where the specific number of times reaching flag is on. Since the clearing target AKE 32 at the end of the second time saving includes the performance state selection designation value, for example, the performance state selection buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to 00[H] corresponding to "0". When the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], it is the same value as when the RWM initial setting process of step S7 is executed when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the time-saving state based on the number of executions of the special figure game reaching a specific number ends, the production state selection specified value becomes the same setting as the initial setting after the power is turned on, and the change in the variation pattern setting process The pattern is also determined using selection data common to the initial settings after power-on.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the first time-saving counter is specified in step AKS279, and the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280 is executed. In the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280, if the counted value of the first time saving counter is not "0" in step AKS321, the counted value of the first time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS322, and after the update in step AKS323. If the count value is "0", the data set process of step AKS325 based on the specification of step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. included in the AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving are cleared, thereby ending the time saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS279 and AKS280 can be executed both when the starting opening winning determination value is "1" and when it is "2". Therefore, the first time saving counter can count the total number of times of the first special figure game and the second special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. In addition, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280, the determination in step AKS323 is whether the first condition that the total number of times of the first special figure game and the second special figure game during the time saving state becomes the first number is satisfied. This is the first time saving end determination process that determines.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the second time-saving counter is specified in step AKS282, and the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 is executed. In the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, if the count value of the second time saving counter is not "0" in step AKS321, the count value of the second time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS322, and after the update in step AKS323. If the count value is "0", the data set process of step AKS325 based on the specification of step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. included in the AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving are cleared, thereby ending the time saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS282 and AKS283 can be executed when the starting opening winning designation value is "2" in step AKS281, and the starting opening winning designation value is "1". It is not executed in this case. Therefore, the second time-saving counter can count the number of times the second special symbol game can be played in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. In addition, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, the determination in step AKS323 is to determine whether or not the second condition that the number of times of the second special symbol game during the time saving state has reached the second number is satisfied. This is a judgment process. In the counter subtraction process, the determination in step AKS281 is a variable display determination that determines whether or not the variable display of the second special figure in the second special figure game has been executed in response to the starting opening winning designation value being "2". It will be processed.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280, after the first condition is met and the setting is made to end the time saving state, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, the second time saving counter has already been cleared and set to "0". Since it has been initialized to the corresponding value, the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" in step AKS321, and the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 ends without performing the determination in step AKS323. In this way, the first time saving end determination process is executed to determine whether the first condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second time saving end determination process is performed to determine whether the second condition is satisfied. No judgment is made. On the other hand, since the determination in step AKS281 is performed after the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280 is executed, the variable display determination process is executed even when the second time saving end determination process is not executed. Note that when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by the first time saving end determination process, not only is the second time saving end determining process determining whether or not the second condition is satisfied, but also the second condition is determined by the variable display determination process. The determination as to whether or not the variable display of the special figure has been executed may also not be performed.

The first condition for ending the time saving state can be satisfied by the total number of times of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, so the first time saving counter is decremented and updated each time the special figure game is executed, and the first condition is satisfied. The presence or absence of is determined. Furthermore, since there can be many combinations of the number of executions of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, it is easy to realize the execution regardless of the progress of the game. On the other hand, the second condition for ending the time saving state is accompanied by a variable display determination process that determines whether or not the second special symbol game has been executed. Therefore, the first condition is determined by the first time-saving end determination process first, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is not determined by the second time-saving end determination process. Therefore, the processing load related to the control of the time-saving state can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time-saving state can be improved.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280, a count value update process is performed to update the count value of the first time-saving counter, and after the first condition is satisfied and the setting to end the time-saving state is performed, the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 is performed. In the subtraction process, the second time-saving counter has already been cleared and initialized to a value corresponding to "0", so the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" in step AKS321, and the count value of the time-saving counter is The time-saving subtraction processing in step AKS283 ends without proceeding to step AKS322, which updates by subtracting 1 by 1. In this way, a count value update process is performed to update the count value of the first time-saving counter, and when the first condition is satisfied, a process related to ending the time-saving state is performed, and a count value of the second time-saving counter is updated. Does not perform numerical update processing.

The first condition for ending the time saving state can be satisfied by the total number of times of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, so the first time saving counter is decremented and updated each time the special figure game is executed, and the first condition is satisfied. The presence or absence of is determined. Furthermore, since there can be many combinations of the number of executions of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, it is easy to realize the execution regardless of the progress of the game. Therefore, the count value update process that updates the count value of the first time-saving counter is performed first, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the count value update process that updates the count value of the second time-saving counter is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the control of the time-saving state and improve the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a plurality of states including the time-saving state.

In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280 includes a count value subtraction process of updating the count value of the first time saving counter by one. When the updated count value is "0" by this count value subtraction process, the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. Data set processing in step AKS325 is executed based on the specification in step AKS324. Further, in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283 includes a count value subtraction process of updating the count value of the second time saving counter by one. When the updated count value is "0" by this count value subtraction process, the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. Data set processing in step AKS325 is executed based on the specification in step AKS324. Therefore, in both the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, the count values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter are initialized in the process related to the end of the time-saving state. be done. As a result, if one of the first or second conditions for ending the time-saving state is met, the problem that may occur due to the count value of the time-saving counter corresponding to the other condition remaining is eliminated. By preventing this, it is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1, which has a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

FIG. 294-25 shows an example of effect settings AKE41 after winning. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, in the after-win fluctuation counter subtraction process in step AKS295, the after-win performance selection table specified in step AKS288 or step AKS291 is referred to, and the after-win performance specified value is set. Select the corresponding production setting table. For example, if step AKS291 is not executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the first winning specified in step AKS288 is referred to, and one of effect setting tables AKT31 to AKT34 is selected according to the specified value of effect after the winning. Select. On the other hand, when step AKS291 is executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the second winning specified by step AKS291 is referred to, and the effect setting table AKT41, AKT42 is set according to the specified value of effect after the winning. Choose one.

In the after-win performance setting example AKE41, the first after-win performance selection table is referred to, and when the after-win performance designation value is 03 [H], the performance setting table AKT31 is selected. Further, the performance setting table AKT32 is selected by referring to the performance selection table after the first winning and when the designation value of the performance after the winning is 05 [H]. The performance setting table AKT33 is selected by referring to the performance selection table after the first winning and when the designation value of the performance after the winning is 08 [H]. The performance setting table AKT34 is selected by referring to the performance selection table after the first winning and when the designation value of the performance after the winning is 09 [H]. Further, in the after-win performance setting example AKE41, the second after-win performance selection table is referred to, and when the after-win performance specified value is 01[H], the performance setting table AKT41 is selected. In the after-win performance setting example AKE41 of FIG. 294-25, the second after-win performance selection table is referred to, and the after-win performance specified values are 03 [H], 05 [H], 08 [H], 09 [ H], the effect setting table AKT42 is selected.

FIG. 294-26 shows an example of the configuration of the effect setting table. Of these, FIG. 294-26 (A1) shows the effect setting table AKT31, FIG. 294-26 (A2) shows the effect setting table AKT32, FIG. 294-26 (A3) shows the effect setting table AKT33, and FIG. -26 (A4) indicates the effect setting table AKT34. Further, FIG. 294-26 (B1) shows the effect setting table AKT41, and FIG. 294-26 (B2) shows the effect setting table AKT42. Each performance setting table includes table data for setting a special symbol state designation code and a performance state selection designation value in association with the counter determination value.

For example, in the effect setting table AKT31 shown in FIG. 294-26 (A1), the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H] in response to the counter judgment value of 05 [H], and the effect state selection designation value is set to 02 [H]. Corresponding to the table data for setting to 05[H] and the counter judgment value of 02[H], set the special symbol state designation code to 02[H], and set the performance state selection designation value to 06[H]. In order to set the special symbol state designation code to 02 [H] and the performance state selection designation value to 07 [H] in response to the table data and counter judgment value 00 [H]. Contains table data and. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, after updating the count value of the first post-win variation counter specified in step AKS287 by 1 in the post-win variation counter subtraction process of step AKS295, the updated value is If the count value and the counter judgment value indicated by the selected production setting table AKT31 match, for example, 05[H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02[H] corresponding to the counter judgment value. and set the performance state selection designation value to 05[H]. The same applies when the variable counter after the second winning is specified in step AKS290, when another effect setting table is set in the variable counter subtraction process after the winning ends in step AKS295, or when it matches another counter judgment value. , In response to the matched counter determination value, a special symbol state designation code and a performance state selection designation value are set. As a result, the production state selection specified value can be set during the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and during the period after the time saving state ends until the number of times the special figure game is executed reaches the special number. This makes it possible to select and determine different fluctuation patterns.

FIG. 294-27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS141). The special symbol process timer here has a timer initial value corresponding to any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3 set in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. When the time value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the time value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol variation process ends. As a result, the machine waits until the symbol stop time corresponding to any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3 has elapsed.

If the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS143). When the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS143; Yes), the special symbol stop process is finished after executing the jackpot start setting process (step AKS144).

Corresponding to step AKS143, if the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step AKS143; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS145). If the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS145; Yes), read out the small hit symbol designation value (step AKS146), specify the small hit start command transmission table (step AKS147), and start the small hit. After specifying the previous work setting table (step AKS148), command set processing (step AKS149) and data set processing (step AKS150) are executed, and then the special symbol stop processing ends.

Corresponding to step AKS145, if the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step AKS145; No), specify the work setting table after the loss is stopped (step AKS151), and execute the data set process (step AKS152). From this point on, the special symbol stop processing ends.

FIG. 294-28 shows a data setting example and a setting clear target in the special symbol stop processing. Of these, FIG. 294-28(A) is an example of data setting before starting a small hit AKE51 by steps AKS148 and AKS150 of the special symbol stop process in response to the case where the special symbol display result is a "small win". FIG. 294-28(B) corresponds to the case where the special symbol display result is "loss" and shows the setting clear target AKE52 after the loss stop by steps AKS151 and AKS152 of the special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 294-27, the data set process in step AKS150, which is executed after specifying the work setting table before starting a small hit in step AKS148, is a special symbol whose special symbol display result is "small win". Data settings are performed when a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result by executing a figure game. This data setting includes various settings such as the pre-small hit data setting example AKE51. In addition, in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 294-27, the data set processing in step AKS152, which is executed after specifying the work setting table after a loss stop in step AKS151, is performed when the special symbol display result is a "loss". This includes a data clearing process when a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of executing a figure game. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 52 to be cleared after the loss is stopped, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

In the data setting example AKE51 before starting the small hit, set the special symbol process code to 03 [H], set the stored value of the jackpot occurrence history buffer to 01 [H], and set the accessory solenoid control code to 01 [H]. setting, clearing the winning flag and initializing the stored value to 00[H], clearing the illegal winning notification invalidation timer and initializing the stored value to 0000[H]. Here, by setting the special symbol process code to 03 [H], it becomes possible to select and execute the small hit release pre-process in the special symbol process process in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. Furthermore, by setting the stored value of the jackpot occurrence history buffer to 01[H], it is stored in a way that allows identification of a jackpot via a small hit. By setting the accessory solenoid control code to 01 [H], the accessory solenoid, such as the specific area solenoid 83, is controlled to be drivable according to a predetermined drive control pattern in the small winning game state. In addition, a timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time before small hit release may be set in the special symbol process timer. The fraudulent winning notification invalidation timer stores a timer value corresponding to the time to invalidate the detection of fraudulent winnings in the small winning termination process.

The AKE52 to be cleared after a loss stop includes a special symbol process code, a demonstration display flag, and a starting opening winning designation value. In the data set process of step AKS152, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". AKE52, which is the target for setting clearing after a loss stops, includes a special symbol process code, so by clearing this and initializing it to 00 [H], a special symbol will be displayed in the special symbol process in response to the next timer interrupt occurrence. Normal processing can be selected and executed. Further, by clearing the demo display flag, control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the total number of pending memories is "0". Furthermore, in response to the end of the special figure game, the starting opening winning designation value that can identify whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0" is cleared. ] is initialized to

FIG. 294-29(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step AKS144 of FIG. 294-27 as the jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, a timer initial value serving as a fanfare performance initial value is set in a special symbol process timer (step AKS401). The fanfare performance initial value is a timer initial value corresponding to the fanfare performance standby time for waiting in accordance with the execution of the fanfare performance in the big winning opening pre-opening process selected by the special symbol process process. In the grand prize opening pre-opening process, the fanfare performance standby time elapses by decrementing and updating the timer value of the special symbol process timer to which the fanfare performance initial value has been set by 1 every time a timer interrupt occurs until the timer value reaches "0". Wait until

Following step AKS401, a fanfare command transmission table is specified (step AKS402), a work setting table before the first opening of the big prize opening is specified (step AKS403), command set processing (step AKS404), and data set processing (step After executing AKS405), the jackpot start setting process ends.

FIG. 294-29(B) shows the AKE53 that is subject to clearing the settings before opening the big prize opening for the first time. In the jackpot start setting process, the data set process in step AKS405, which is executed after specifying the work setting table before the first opening of the big winning opening in step AKS403, includes data clearing process when controlling to the jackpot gaming state. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 53 to be cleared for settings before opening of the grand prize opening for the first time are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". The AKE53 that is subject to clearing the settings before opening the big prize opening for the first time is the winning flag, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, the number of fluctuations after the first winning ends counter, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the second winning. It includes a counter, a specific area passage flag, a performance designation buffer after winning, a specific number of times counter, and a specific number of times reached flag. Among these, when the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, and the third time saving counter are cleared, the control for changing the gaming state to the time saving state ends. Further, by clearing the specific number of times counter and the specific number of times reaching flag, the control for shifting to the time saving state based on the number of executions of the special figure game ends.

FIG. 294-30(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit ending process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS161). The special symbol process timer here has a timer initial value corresponding to the small hit end time set in the small hit discharge ball standby process selected by the special symbol process process. When the time value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the time value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and the process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS161, when the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS161; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific area passing flag is on (step AKS163). The specific area passage flag is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The specific area passing flag is in an OFF state when 00 [H], which is the designated value of not passing through the specific area, is set, and when a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected in the small winning gaming state, By setting 01 [H], which is a specified value indicating passing through a specific area, the signal is turned on. When the specific area passage flag is on (step AKS163; Yes), the jackpot start setting process (step AKS164) is executed, and then the small hit end process ends. The jackpot start setting process executed in step AKS164 may be the same process as step AKS144 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 294-27. In this way, the jackpot start setting process that is common to the case where the special figure display result is a "jackpot" can be executed even when a V winning prize occurs in the small winning gaming state, thereby preventing an increase in program capacity. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

If the specific area passing flag is off in response to step AKS163 (step AKS163; No), specify the work setting table after the small hit ends (step AKS165), and execute the data set process (step AKS166). , ends the process. The work setting table after the small hit ends includes the special symbol process code, demo display flag, variable command specification buffer, small winning symbol determination buffer, big prize opening counter, number of openings counter for the big winning opening, jackpot occurrence history buffer, and jackpot symbol. It is only necessary to include table data for clearing the determination buffer, the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "0", and the number of winnings counter during the accessory game.

FIG. 294-30(B) shows the AKE 54 whose settings are to be cleared after the small win ends. In the small win end process, the data set process in step AKS166, which is executed after specifying the work setting table after the small win ends in step AKS165, is a data clear process when the small win game state ends without a V winning. Contains. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 54 to be cleared after the small win is cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". The AKE54 that is subject to clearing the settings after the small hit is a special symbol process code, demo display flag, variable command designation buffer, small winning symbol designation value, big prize opening counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened counter, jackpot occurrence history buffer, jackpot It includes a symbol designation value and a starting opening winning prize designation value. In the data set process of step AKS166, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". AKE54, whose settings are to be cleared after the small hit, includes a special symbol process code, so by clearing this and initializing it to 00[H], a special symbol will be activated in the special symbol process process in response to the next timer interrupt occurrence. You can select and execute symbol normal processing. Further, by clearing the demo display flag, control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the total number of pending memories is "0". Furthermore, in response to the end of the special figure game, the starting opening winning designation value that can identify whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0" is cleared. ] is initialized to

FIG. 294-31 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the timed value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS181). The special symbol process timer here has a timer initial value corresponding to the final jackpot production time set in the special symbol process process after opening the big winning hole. When the time value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS181; No), the time value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS182), and the process ends. Thereby, the game waits until the final jackpot performance time elapses.

Corresponding to step AKS181, when the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS181; Yes), the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot is specified (step AKS183), and the small winning symbol designation value is read out (step AKS184). The small winning symbol designation value is a value stored in the small winning symbol determination buffer. Also, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot via a small hit (step AKS185). For example, the value stored in the jackpot occurrence history buffer may be read out, and if the read value is 01[H], it may be determined that the jackpot is a jackpot via a small hit. If it is not a jackpot via small hit (step AKS185; No), the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot is specified again (step AKS186), and the jackpot symbol designation value is read (step AKS187). The jackpot symbol designation value is a value stored in the jackpot symbol determination buffer. In step AKS186, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing, for example, the value corresponding to the start address of the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot in the HL register serving as the pointer. In this way, in the jackpot end process, the first jackpot end state setting table is specified in step AKS183, and if it is not a jackpot via small hit in step AKS185, the second jackpot end state setting table is overwritten in step AKS186. Specify again according to settings. As a result, when the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot is higher than the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for table setting can be reduced, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Productivity can be improved. In addition, when the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot is higher than the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot, processing by branch instructions is simplified and confirmation at the design stage is facilitated. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

Corresponding to step AKS185, if it is a jackpot via small hit (step AKS185; Yes), or after step AKS187, a jackpot end state setting is performed (step AKS188). The state settings at the end of the jackpot include settings for controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state to a time-saving state, etc., based on the execution results of steps AKS183 to AKS187. Thereafter, the jackpot end work setting table is designated (step AKS189), data set processing (step AKS190) is executed, and the processing is ended.

FIG. 294-32 shows an example of setting the state at the end of the jackpot. Of these, FIG. 294-32(A) is an example of the first jackpot end state setting example AKE61 based on steps AKS183 and AKS184 of the jackpot end process. FIG. 294-32(B) is a second jackpot end state setting example AKE62 based on steps AKS186 and AKS187 of the jackpot end process. In the jackpot end process, in the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188, the jackpot end state setting type is set by referring to the jackpot end state setting table specified in step AKS183 or step AKS185. For example, when step AKS185 is not executed after step AKS183, the first jackpot end state setting table specified in step AKS183 is referred to, and the jackpot end state is set in accordance with the small hit symbol designation value read out in step AKS184. Select one of the types SX2, SX3, SX5, and SX8. On the other hand, when step AKS185 is executed after step AKS183, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot specified in step AKS185 is referred to, and the specified value is specified from the gaming state specification code along with the jackpot design specification value read out in step AKS186. One of the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to XS4, SX6, and SX7 is selected depending on the presence or absence of time saving control.

In the first jackpot end state setting example AKE61, the jackpot end state setting type SX8 is selected when the small hit symbol designation value is 00 [H], and the jackpot ends when the small hit design designation value is 01 [H]. When the state setting type SX3 is selected and the small hit symbol specified value is 02 [H], the state setting type SX5 at the end of jackpot is selected, and the small hit symbol specified value is any one of 03 [H] to 06 [H]. If so, the jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected. In addition, in the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, when there is no time saving control, the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected when the jackpot symbol designated value is 00 [H], and the jackpot symbol designated value is 01. [H], 02[H], jackpot end state setting type SX1 is selected, and the jackpot symbol designation value is 03[H], 04[H], 07[H] to 09[H] If the jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected, if it is 05 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX3 is selected, and if the jackpot symbol designation value is 06 [H], the jackpot ends. Time state setting type SX4 is selected. In the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected when the jackpot symbol designated value is 00 [H] among the cases with time saving control, and the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected when the jackpot symbol designated value is 01 [H]. ], 02[H], the jackpot end state setting type SX7 is selected, and the jackpot symbol designation value is any of 03[H], 04[H], 07[H] to 09[H]. If the jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected, if the value is 05 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX3 is selected, and if the jackpot symbol designation value is 06 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected. Setting type SX4 is selected.

FIG. 294-33 shows the setting contents corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type. In the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188 of the jackpot end process, based on the selection results of the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to SX8, the game state designation code, special symbol state designation code, performance state selection designation value, first hit The initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end, the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end of the second win, the production specified value after the end of the win, the time-saving function flag, the initial value of the first time-saving counter, the initial value of the second time-saving counter, and the initial value of the third time-saving counter. Set. Here, except for the jackpot end state setting type SX8, the gaming state designation code is set to 01[H], thereby indicating that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a time saving state. Correspondingly, the time-saving function flag is set to 01 [H], and the first time-saving counter initial value, the second time-saving counter initial value, and the third time-saving counter initial value are set to values other than 0000 [H]. be done. In addition, by setting the performance state selection designation value to a value other than 00 [H], in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern type is and fluctuation patterns can be determined. When the production specified value after winning is set to a value other than 00 [H], and based on the settings of the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the first winning and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the second winning, In the shown counter subtraction process, it becomes possible to execute the variable counter subtraction process after the winning in step AKS295 is completed, and the special symbol status designation code and performance are changed depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game and whether or not it is in a time saving state. The state selection specification value can be updated.

In this way, in the state setting at the end of the jackpot, the performance state selection designated value and the performance designation value after the end of the hit are set to a value other than 00 [H], and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the first hit and the end of the second hit are set. Based on the setting of the post-variation counter initial value, a variation pattern can be determined by selecting a variation pattern determination table different from the initial setting after power-on. The table data constituting the variable pattern determination table that can be selected in accordance with the initial setting after power-on is also referred to as normal pattern selection data. The table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table that is different from the initial setting after power-on is also referred to as special pattern selection data.

In the post-win performance setting example AKE41 shown in FIGS. 294-25, either performance setting table AKT41 or AKT42 can be set in correspondence with the second post-win performance selection table. The performance selection table after the end of the second winning can be set for a predetermined period until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches the special number in the normal state after the end of the time-saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot game state. It is. The time saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot gaming state is also referred to as the first time saving state. In the normal state after the first time saving state ends, when the effect setting table AKT41 is set, the effect state selection designation value can be set to 01[H]. Further, in the normal state after the first time saving state ends, when the effect setting table AKT42 is set, the effect state selection designation value can be set to 02[H].

In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, it is determined in step AKS323 that the count value of the time saving counter is "0", and furthermore, it is determined in step AKS326 that the specific number of times reaching flag is on. In this case, the data set process in step AKS328 is executed based on the second time saving end work setting table specified in step AKS327. At this time, since the AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving shown in FIG. 294-24(B) includes the performance state selection designation value, that value is cleared and initialized to 00[H] corresponding to "0". be converted into Such a setting is performed when the controllable time saving state ends based on the count value of the specific number of times counter reaching the reaching determination value. The time saving state that can be controlled based on the count value of the specific number of times counter serving as numerical information reaching the reaching determination value is also referred to as the second time saving state. In the normal state after the second time saving state ends, the performance state selection designation value is set to 00 [H], which is the same as the initial setting when the power is turned on.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example AKD11 shown in Figure 294-16, it can be determined when the production state selection designation value is 00 [H], 01 [H] or 02 [H]. The patterns are different. For example, the patterns that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is 01 [H] include a variation pattern PB57 and a variation pattern PB67. On the other hand, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H] include the variation pattern PB67, but do not include the variation pattern PB57. Moreover, the patterns that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is 02[H] include a variation pattern PB57 and a variation pattern PB68. On the other hand, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 00[H] include neither the variation pattern PB57 nor the variation pattern PB68. In the initial settings after turning on the power, the production state selection specified value is 00 [H], so the variable patterns that can be selected using the normal pattern selection data can be determined corresponding to the production state selection specification value of 00 [H]. It becomes a pattern. In the normal state after the first time saving state has ended, if the performance state selection designation value is 01 [H] or 02 [H], a variable pattern is created using special pattern selection data different from the normal pattern selection data. Select. In the normal state after the second time saving state ends, the performance state selection designation value becomes 00 [H], so the variable pattern is selected using the normal pattern selection data. The determinable pattern, which is a variable pattern that can be selected using the normal pattern selection data, does not include part or all of the determinable pattern, which is a variable pattern that can be selected using the special pattern selection data. Set. In this way, in the normal state after the first time-saving state based on the jackpot game state ends, special effects can be executed using special pattern selection data, while the first time-saving state based on the number of executions of the special pattern game can be executed. 2. In the normal state after the end of the time saving state, the use of normal pattern selection data common to the initial setting after power-on is used to prevent the special performance from being executed. As a result, when the second time-saving state based on the number of executions of the special figure game ends, multiple states including the time-saving state are suppressed by suppressing the execution of excessive effects and preventing a drop in gaming interest. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

The variation patterns that can be selected using the special pattern selection data may include only variation patterns that are not selectable using the normal pattern selection data, or may include at least one variation that is not selectable using the normal pattern selection data. May contain patterns. In the variation pattern determination example AKD12 at the time of a small hit shown in FIG. Only pattern PB68 is different. That is, the variable pattern PB68 becomes a pattern that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is 02 [H] and the small hit symbol designation value is within the range of 01 [H] to 06 [H]. On the other hand, the variable pattern PB68 is not included in the determinable patterns even if the small hit symbol designation value is any of 00 to 06 [H] when the production state selection designation value is 00 [H]. The variable pattern PB67 and the variable pattern PB84 are included in the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], 01 [H] or 02 [H]. In this way, a determinable pattern that is a variable pattern that can be selected using special pattern selection data may include part or all of a determinable pattern that is a variable pattern that can be selected using normal pattern selection data. may be set to .

FIG. 294-34 shows an example of data setting AKE71 at the end of the jackpot. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 294-31, after specifying the jackpot end work setting table in step AKS189, the final data setting when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed by executing the data set process in step AKS190. I do. This data setting includes various settings such as the jackpot end data setting example AKE71. In the jackpot end data setting example AKE71, 02AD[H] is set as the initial value of the specific number of times counter, and the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is set to 7F[H]. In addition, in the jackpot end data setting example AKE71, by clearing the special symbol process code, demo display flag, variable command specification buffer, maximum number of jackpot opening times buffer, jackpot occurrence history buffer, and starting opening winning specification value. , initialize each stored value to a value corresponding to "0". Here, by setting the initial value of the specific number of times counter to 02AD[H], after the end of the jackpot game state, the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game are It is set that the total number of times reaches "625" which is a specific number of times. By setting the storage value of the specific number of times command buffer to 7F[H], the specific number of times becomes the second control data of the second specific number of times designation command corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more. Create command data. By clearing the special symbol process code and initializing it to 00[H], it becomes possible to select and execute the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process in response to the next occurrence of a timer interrupt. Further, by clearing the demo display flag, control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the total number of pending memories is "0". Furthermore, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the starting opening winning designation value that can identify whether it is the first special game or the second special game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0" is cleared. ] is initialized to

The maximum number of openings of the jackpot opening in the jackpot gaming state and the number of special game games that can be executed in the time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends differ depending on the small winning symbol designation value and the jackpot symbol designation value. Can be configured. For example, in the setting example AKE01 for the number of openings of the big winning hole when the special figure display result shown in FIG. [H], the maximum number of openings of the big winning hole is set to 03 [H], and the jackpot symbol designation value is either 00 [H], 03 [H] to 06 [H]. In this case, the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning hole is set to 0A[H]. In addition, in the example AKE02 of setting the number of openings of the big winning hole when the special figure display result shown in FIG. 294-14(B) is "small hit", the small winning symbol designation value is 00 [H], 06 [H] The maximum number of openings for the big winning opening is set to 03[H] when either of the above is the case, and the maximum number of openings for the opening for the big winning opening is set to 03[H] when the specified value of the small winning symbol is between 01[H] and 03[H]. The maximum value is set to 0A[H]. Among multiple types of jackpot game states with different maximum numbers of openings, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the jackpot is set to 03 [H], the maximum number of openings of the jackpot is set to 03 [H]. A jackpot game state set to a relatively small value is defined as a first advantageous state. On the other hand, among multiple types of jackpot game states in which the maximum number of times the big winning hole is opened is different, for example, a jackpot game state where the maximum number of times the big winning hole is opened is set to 0A[H], A jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times is set to a relatively large value is defined as a second advantageous state. The display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game when controlled to the first advantageous state is also referred to as the first advantageous result. The display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game when controlled to the second advantageous state is also referred to as the second advantageous result. That is, when the display result of the variable display becomes the first advantageous result, it is possible to control the jackpot game state to be the first advantageous state among the jackpot game states as advantageous states. When the display result of the variable display becomes the second advantageous result, it is possible to control the jackpot game state to be the second advantageous state among the jackpot game states as advantageous states.

In the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62 shown in FIG. 294-32(B), the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is set when the jackpot symbol specified value is 00[H] without time saving control. is selected and the jackpot symbol specified value is either 01 [H] or 02 [H], the state setting type SX1 at jackpot end is selected, and the jackpot ends if the jackpot symbol specification value is 05 [H]. When the time state setting type SX3 is selected and the jackpot symbol designation value is 06 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX4 is set. In the jackpot end state setting type SX1, the first time saving counter initial value is 0006 [H], and the second time saving counter initial value is 0001 [H]. For the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, the first time saving counter initial value and the second time saving counter initial value are 02AD[H]. The time-saving states that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot gaming state are multiple types of time-saving states with different settings of the first time-saving counter initial value and the second time-saving counter initial value, and are the time-saving states corresponding to the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot. state, and time-saving states corresponding to jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6. The time-saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1 is a special game that can be executed because the first time-saving counter initial value is 0006 [H] and the second time-saving counter initial value is 0001 [H]. The first special state occurs in which the number of times is relatively small. In the time-saving states corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, the first time-saving counter initial value and the second time-saving counter initial value are 02AD[H], so the number of executable special figure games is reduced. The second special state is relatively common. The special symbols whose jackpot symbol designation values are 01[H] and 02[H] are included in the first advantageous result, and can be controlled to the first advantageous state when the result is the display result of the special symbol game. Special symbols whose jackpot symbol designation values are 00[H], 05[H], and 06[H] are included in the second advantageous result, and are controlled to the second advantageous state when they become the display result of the special symbol game. It is possible. When the first advantageous state ends, the time saving state that becomes the first special state of the time saving states can be controlled to the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1. When the second advantageous state ends, the time saving state that becomes the second special state among the time saving states can be controlled to the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6.

In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 294-31, for example, in step AKS186, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot is specified, and after reading out the jackpot symbol designation value in step AKS187, at the end of the jackpot in step AKS188. By setting the state, it is possible to set the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to SX8. For example, when the first advantageous state ends in response to the specified jackpot symbol values of 01 [H] and 02 [H], the state at the end of the jackpot is set as the first special state by setting the state at the end of the jackpot in step AKS188. Settings regarding the time saving state corresponding to type SX1 are possible. When the second advantageous state ends in response to the specified jackpot symbol value of 00 [H], 05 [H], or 06 [H], the jackpot ends as a second special state according to the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188. Settings related to time saving states corresponding to time state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6 are possible. After that, in the data set process of step AKS190, based on the jackpot end work setting table specified in step AKS189, the initial value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[, regardless of the jackpot end state setting type SX1 to SX8. H]. Therefore, the first advantageous state ends when the specified jackpot symbol value is 01[H], 02[H], and when the specified jackpot symbol value is 00[H], 05[H], 06[H]. Correspondingly, when the second advantageous state ends, a common specific number counter initial value is set as the initial value of the numerical information updated using the specific number counter by the data set processing in step AKS190. . In this way, in the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188, settings regarding time saving states corresponding to different types, such as the case of jackpot end state setting type SX1 and the case of jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, are made. After that, in the data set process of step AKS190, settings related to numerical information common to a plurality of types are performed, so that the program capacity can be reduced and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

FIG. 294-35 is a flowchart showing an example of the production side counter update process. On the side of the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 can update the count values of various counters used to control the performance by executing the performance side counter update process. The production-side counter update process is executed, for example, in the production control process process in step S76 each time it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 of the production control main process shown in FIG. Any processing is fine. The counters used to control the performance include a suggested performance counter and a counter for displaying the number of times, and both may be provided at a predetermined address in the performance work area of the RAM 122. The suggestion effect counter is used to control a suggestion effect that suggests that the time saving state is controlled based on the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times. Further, the suggestion effect counter is also used to control a countdown effect that counts down and notifies the remaining number of times until the time saving state is controlled. The number-of-times display counter is used to control the display of a suggestion indicating the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the performance-side counter update process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (step AKS501). For example, when a power-on designation command or a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the power is to be turned on. If the power is being turned on (step AKS501; Yes), the power-on support flag is set to the on state (step AKS502), and then it is determined whether or not the first specific number of times designation command has been received (step AKS503). . The first specific number of times designation command is sent in response to power-on, so if there is no abnormality, if step AKS501 determines that the power is turned on, step AKS503 determines that it has been received. be done.

Corresponding to step AKS503, when the first specific number designation command is received (step AKS503; Yes), specific number command data is acquired (step AKS504). For example, for the first specified number of times designation command from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, the first transmission data, the second transmission data, and the third transmission data, which are the lower bytes, are acquired sequentially and stored in the RAM 122. It may be stored in a specific number of command data buffer provided at a predetermined address. At this time, the acquired data is set in the suggestion effect counter (step AKS505). For example, the initial value of the suggestion effect counter is set by storing in the suggestion effect counter a 3-digit specific number designation value obtained by combining the lower 4 bits from the first transmission data to the third transmission data. In this way, the suggestion effect counter can set an initial value indicating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times based on the first specified number of times designation command.

If the power is not turned on in response to step AKS501 (step AKS501; No), if the first specific number of times designation command is not received in response to step AKS503 (step AKS503; No), or after step AKS505, the variable display It is determined whether it is the start (step AKS506). For example, if either the first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the variable display is to be started. If the variable display is to be started (step AKS506; Yes), it is determined whether the power-on support flag is on (step AKS507). If the power-on support flag is off (step AKS507; No), it is determined whether the count value of the number display counter is "0" (step AKS508). If the count value of the number display counter is not "0" (step AKS508; No), the number display counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS509). The update of the number display counter in step AKS509 is not performed when the power-on support flag is on. Therefore, during a predetermined period after the power is turned on in the pachinko game machine 1, the count value of the number display counter is not updated, and correspondingly, the indication display indicating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. This is a special aspect that is difficult to recognize.

If the power-on support flag is on in response to step AKS507 (step AKS507; Yes), if the count value of the number display counter is "0" in response to step AKS508 (step AKS508; Yes), or After step AKS509, it is determined whether a second specific number of times designation command has been received (step AKS510). Note that the second specific number of times designation command can be sent when the variable display of special symbols in the special pattern game starts, so various processes based on the determination of whether or not the second specific number of times designation command has been received are variable. It may be executed at the beginning of the display. When the second specific number of times designation command is received (step AKS510; Yes), specific number of times command data is acquired (step AKS511). For example, in the configuration example AKC11 of the second specific number of times designation command, the specific number of times command data of the lower byte serving as the second control data may be acquired and stored in a specific number of times command data buffer or the like. At this time, it is determined whether the acquired data indicates 7F[H] (step AKS512). When the acquired data indicates a value other than 7F[H] (step AKS512; No), the suggestion effect counter is updated with the acquired data (step AKS513).

If the second specific number of times designation command is not received in response to step AKS510 (step AKS510; No), or if the acquired data is 7F[H] in response to step AKS512 (step AKS512; Yes), the suggestion It is determined whether the count value of the performance counter is "0" (step AKS514). If the count value of the suggestion effect counter is other than "0" (step AKS514; No), the count value of the suggestion effect counter is decremented by 1 (step AKS515), and then the count value after the update is "0". It is determined whether there is one (step AKS516). Then, if the updated count value is "0" (step AKS516; Yes), a reaching effect flag is set (step AKS517).

If the variable display has not started in response to step AKS506 (step AKS506; No), if the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "0" in response to step AKS514 (step AKS514; Yes), in response to step AKS516, If the updated count value is not "0" (step AKS516; No), or following either step AKS513 or AKS517, it is determined whether the jackpot has ended (step AKS518). For example, when a jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the jackpot has ended. If the jackpot has not ended (step AKS518; No), the production side counter update process ends.

If the jackpot has ended in response to step AKS518 (step AKS518; Yes), it is determined whether the power-on compatible flag is on (step AKS519). At this time, if the power-on support flag is on (step AKS519; Yes), the power-on support flag is cleared (step AKS520).

If the power-on support flag is off in response to step AKS519 (step AKS519; No), or after step AKS520, 02AD[H] is set in the number display counter (step AKS521), and the suggestion effect counter is set to 02AD[H]. After setting 02AD[H] (step AKS522), the production side counter updating process ends.

In such a production-side counter update process, when it is determined in step AKS503 that the first specific number designation command has been received, the specific number command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggested production counter in step AKS505. . The suggested performance counter is provided at a predetermined address in the performance work area of the RAM 122, and stores the remaining number of times until the specified number of times based on the first specified number of times designation command. In addition, in the production side counter update process, when it is determined in step AKS510 that the second specific number designation command has been received, specific number command data is acquired in step AKS511, and in step AKS512, the acquired data is set to 7F[H]. Determine whether or not it indicates. Then, when the acquired data indicates 7F[H], in step AKS515, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated by subtracting 1 without being based on the acquired data. On the other hand, if the obtained data does not indicate 7F[H], in step AKS513, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated with the obtained data. The specific number command data, which is the second control data in the second specific number designation command, becomes judgment information used for comparison judgment with the count value of the specific number counter when 7F[H] is indicated, and other than 7F[H]. In the case where it is indicated, it becomes numerical information indicating the count value of the specific number of times counter. As a result, when the second specific number of times designation command is sent and the judgment information is sent as the specific number of times command data which is the second control data, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is changed to the second specific number of times designation command. When numerical information is sent as the specific number of times command data that is the second control data without updating based on the reception result, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated based on the reception result of the second specific number of times designation command. . Therefore, the count value of the suggestion effect counter can be updated and managed based on the latest reliable information without preparing a separate storage area, so that appropriate effects can be executed while preventing an increase in data capacity. , it is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that has a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

The second specific number of times designation command whose reception is determined in step AKS510 of the production side counter update process is included in the standby command by steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10(A). There are cases where the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A) is transmitted in response to the start of the special symbol game by steps AKS305 and AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process. Each time these second specific number of times designation commands are received, specific number of times command data may be stored in a predetermined storage area by overwriting. In response to the fact that the second specific number of times designation command is included in the standby command and sent, it is possible to execute a standby suggestion effect corresponding to the remaining number of times until the specified number of times during a period when a demonstration display is executed, etc. It's okay. In addition, the second specific number of times designation command is included in the standby command and is sent in response to the start of the special figure game, so the second specific number of times designation command can be sent normally at either timing. If the second specified number of times designation command is successfully received at the other timing when the second specified number of times designation command is not received at the other timing, the effect can be executed based on the normally received second specific number of times designation command.

FIG. 294-36 is a flowchart showing an example of the number of times suggestion control process. For example, in the production pattern process process of step S76 shown in FIGS. 292 and 293(A), the production control CPU 120 executes the production pattern variation start process in response to the production process code 01 [H]. In addition, it is sufficient if the number of suggestion control processing can be executed. In the number suggestion control process, it is determined whether or not the variable display has started (step AKS531), and if the variable display has not started (step AKS531; No), the process ends. If the production symbol variation start process includes the number suggestion control process, the process can be executed when starting variable display, so the determination in step S531 is not necessary.

If the variable display starts in response to step AKS531 (step AKS531; Yes), it is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed (step AKS532), and if time saving control is being performed (step AKS532; Yes), processing is performed. end. In this embodiment, the performance that controls the execution is a performance that suggests that the time saving state is controlled. Therefore, if the time saving control is in progress, it is not necessary to perform the performance, and the process can be ended as is.

Corresponding to step AKS532, if time saving control is not in progress (step AKS532; No), it is determined whether the power-on support flag is on (step AKS533). If the power-on support flag is on (step AKS533; Yes), the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected (step AKS534). The process table for displaying an unknown number of times is an effect control process table for controlling the suggestion display on the screen of the image display device 5 in a special manner that makes it difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. The power-on response flag is set to the on state when the power is turned on, and is cleared and turned off when the jackpot ends. Therefore, the suggestion display on the screen of the image display device 5 is controlled in a special manner so that it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times during the period from when the power is turned on until the end of the jackpot game state.

Next to step AKS534, it is determined whether the count value of the suggestion effect counter has reached a predetermined execution determination value corresponding to the suggestion effect (step AKS535). The execution determination value may be a setting value related to the number of executions of the special figure game, such as a value such that the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is a multiple of "100". If the count value of the suggestion production counter is not the execution determination value (step AKS535; No), the number of suggestion control processing ends. When the count value of the suggestion production counter is the execution determination value (step AKS535; Yes), the process table for suggestion production is selected (step AKS536), and the number of suggestion control processing ends. The process table for suggestion production is a production control process table for executing a suggestion production that suggests the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times while variable display of production symbols is being executed. When the process table for suggestion effect is selected in step AKS536, in the effect pattern variation process of the effect control process process, the suggestion effect is controlled to be executable.

If the power-on support flag is off in response to step AKS533 (step AKS533; No), it is determined whether the count value of the number display counter is "0" or not (step AKS537). If the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is not "0" (step AKS537; No), the process table for displaying the number of times notification is selected (step AKS538). The number-of-times notification display process table is an effect control process table for controlling the suggestion display on the screen of the image display device 5 in a notification mode that makes it easy to recognize the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. Therefore, when the power-on support flag is off in step AKS533, and if the count value of the number display counter is other than "0" in step AKS537, the notification mode is set so that it is easy to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. to enable and control the display of suggestions. If the count value of the number-of-times display counter is "0" in step AKS537, the process does not proceed to step AKS538, so that the suggestion display is not executed.

If the count value of the number display counter is "0" in response to step AKS537 (step AKS537; Yes), or after step AKS538, it is determined whether the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range. (Step AKS539). The countdown range may be set in advance as a range of count values that make it possible to perform a countdown effect, such as a range from "0" to "10". If the count value of the suggestion production counter is not within the countdown range (step AKS539; No), the number of suggestion control processing ends. On the other hand, if the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range (step AKS539; Yes), a process table for countdown effect is selected (step AKS540). The process table for countdown performance is a performance control process table for executing a countdown performance as a predetermined performance that notifies the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times while variable display of performance symbols is being executed. When the process table for countdown performance is selected in step AKS540, the countdown performance is controlled to be executable in the performance symbol variation process of the performance control process process.

After step AKS540, it is determined whether the arrival effect flag is on (step AKS541). The arrival effect flag is set and turned on when the count value of the suggested effect counter becomes "0" in step AKS517 of the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. If the arrival effect flag is off (step AKS541; No), the number of times suggestion control process ends. On the other hand, if the arrival effect flag is on (step AKS541; Yes), the process table for time-saving entry effect is selected (step AKS542), the arrival effect flag is cleared (step AKS543), and then the number of times The suggestion control process ends. The time-saving entry process table notifies that the time-saving state is controlled as a rescue time-saving when a specific number of times is reached during a period in which the final performance symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a performance control process table for executing a time-saving rush performance as a notification performance. When the process table for time-saving entry performance is selected in step AKS543, the time-saving entry performance is controlled to be executable in the performance symbol variation process or performance symbol variation stop process of the performance control process process.

FIG. 294-37 shows an example of control for displaying the number of times as a suggestion display. Of these, FIG. 294-37(A) is a control example AKF01 when the power-on support flag is off. FIG. 294-37(B) is a control example AKF02 when the power-on support flag is on. On the screen of the image display device 5, in addition to the small symbol display area 5K, a number display section 5Z is provided, and an effect image in the number display can be displayed as a suggestion display indicating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, it is determined in step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is off, and in step AKS537 it is determined that the count value of the number display counter is not "0". In this case, the process table for displaying the number of notifications is selected in step AKS538. In the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, for example, after the initial count value 02AD[H] is set in step AKS521 based on the end of the jackpot in step AKS518, the counter for displaying the number of times is set to step AKS506. Based on the start of variable display in step AKS509, the count value is updated by subtracting 1. As a result, during the period after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a specific number, as in the control example AKF01, the notification mode is set such that it is easy to recognize the remaining number of times until the specific number of times. The number of times displayed as a suggestion can be displayed in the number of times display section 5Z.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, if it is determined in step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is on, the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected in step AKS534. The power-on support flag is set in step AKS502 and turned on when it is determined in step AKS501 that the power is turned on in the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. Thereafter, based on the fact that the jackpot has been completed in step AKS518, the power-on corresponding flag is cleared in step AKS520 and turns off. As a result, after the power is turned on, as in control example AKF02, a special mode is displayed that suggests a special mode in which it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, which is different from the state after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. The number of times can be displayed on the number of times display section 5Z.

FIG. 294-38 shows an example of execution of a suggestion effect, a countdown effect, and a time-saving rush effect. In the number of suggestion control processing shown in FIG. 294-36, after the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected in step AKS534, in step AKS535, based on the count value of the suggestion effect counter being the execution determination value, step The AKS 536 selects the process table for suggestion effect. The process table for displaying an unknown number of times corresponds to a number of times display that is a special mode of suggestive display in which it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until a specific number of times. The execution determination value in step AKS535 may be a multiple of "100", for example. Thereby, when the suggestion display is in a special mode, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. In the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the first specific number designation command in step AKS503, the specific number command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggested production counter in step AKS505. After that, the count value can be updated at the end of the variable display by step AKS515 or the like. Thereby, the suggestion effect is executed based on the first specific number of times designation command. FIG. 294-38(A) is an example of execution AKG01 of the suggestion effect when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is "200". Further, FIG. 294-38(B) is an example of execution AKG02 of the suggestion effect corresponding to when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is "100". In these cases, the number display unit 5Z displays a number display that is a special mode of suggestion that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, as in control example AKF02 shown in FIG. 294-37(B). be exposed. In this way, in addition to displaying the number of special modes, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, so it is possible to improve the game interest until the jackpot game state after turning on the power, and to play multiple games including the time-saving state. It is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having the following conditions.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, if the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range in step AKS539, the process table for countdown effect is selected in step AKS540. As for the process table for countdown effect, it is sufficient that a plurality of types of effect control tables are prepared so as to be able to notify the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times in correspondence with the count value of the suggestion effect counter. In step AKS540, the process table for countdown effect corresponding to the count value of the suggestion effect counter may be selected. In the production side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the second specific number designation command in step AKS510, the specific number command data acquired in step AKS511 is changed to 7F[H] in step AKS512. Determine whether or not it indicates. The countdown range may be within a range where the specific number command data obtained from the second specific number designation command is not 7F[H], such as a range from "0" to "10". In this case, the suggestion effect counter is updated with the specific number of times command data acquired from the second specific number of times designation command in step AKS513. Therefore, the countdown effect, which is the predetermined effect, is executable and controlled based on the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, being transmitted as the second control data of the second specific number designation command. FIG. 294-38(C) is an execution example AKG03 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "10". FIG. 294-38(D) is an example AKG04 of the countdown effect when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "9". FIG. 294-38(E) is an execution example AKG05 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "1". FIG. 294-38(F) is an example AKG06 of the countdown effect when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "0". In this way, it is possible to execute a countdown effect, which is a predetermined effect, based on the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, being transmitted by the second specific number of times designation command, so that the game interest can be improved by an appropriate effect. As a result, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1, which has a plurality of states including a time-saving state, can be improved.

In the number of times display control process shown in FIG. 294-36, when the arrival effect flag is on in step AKS541, the time-saving entry process table is selected in step AKS542. The process table for time-saving entry performance is used to control the time-saving entry performance to be executable during a period in which the final performance symbol that is the display result in the variable display of performance symbols is stopped and displayed. The arrival effect flag is set and turned on when the count value of the suggested effect counter becomes "0" in step AKS517 of the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. Since the suggestion performance counter counts the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, when the count value becomes ``0'', it is controlled to a time saving state based on the execution of the special figure game a specified number of times. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, based on the count value of the specific number of times counter being the reaching determination value in step AKS254, the specific stop corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 in step AKS255 is determined. The time is set. The time-saving rush performance as a notification performance when the specific number of times is reached is executable controlled based on the specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. FIG. 294-38 (G) is an execution example AKG07 at the start of the time-saving rush effect. FIG. 294-38 (H) is an example of execution AKG08 after the start of the time-saving rush effect.

In addition to or in place of such a time-saving effect, there is a notification effect that notifies that the time-saving state will be controlled based on a specific command while a special figure game is being executed that has reached a certain number of times. may be executable. The specific command is a production control command that can specify that the time-saving state is to be controlled when the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, reaches a specific value of "0". 2. A specific number of times designation command can be used. When it is determined based on the background color designation command or the second specific number of times designation command to execute the notification effect at the start of the special figure game, for example, by displaying a effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, To executable control a notification effect for notifying that the time saving state is controlled. As a specific example, control may be performed such that the image display for displaying the number of times as a suggestion display in the number of times display section 5Z is a blinking display. Alternatively, in a dedicated specific number counter display provided separately from the image display device 5, control may be performed such that the display indicating the remaining number of times up to the specific number is a blinking display. With such a notification performance, it is possible to easily notify that the time-saving state is controlled based on the number of executions of the special figure game, improve the game interest, and enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, it is possible to set a specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 of step AKS255. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process shown in FIG. The game work area including the buffer is cleared, and the performance designation value is set to 00[H] after the winning ends. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, it is determined that the count value of the specific number of times counter has reached the reached value in step AKS254 based on the fact that the production specified value after winning is 00 [H] in step AKS253. It is possible to set the normal stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251 without making a numerical determination as to whether the value is the same or not. Therefore, after the initial setting at power-on is performed, the normal stop time is set even in a special figure game where the count value of the specific number of times counter is supposed to be the arrival determination value. This prevents the fairness of the game from being compromised based on the game history after the initial settings are made when the power is turned on. You can increase your sexuality.

While it is possible to set the normal stop time by performing the initial settings at power-on, if the initial settings at power-on are not performed, the specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA3 can be set. Based on this, it may be possible to control the time-saving entry performance as a notification performance that notifies that the time-saving state will be controlled when a specific number of times is reached. The symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a setting performed in step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254 of the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. . When the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value, a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the special symbol game is established, and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state. At this time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, a specific stop time different from the normal stop time is set as the stop time after the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Based on the specific stop time, a notification performance such as a time-saving entry performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will be controlled may be executed.

Further, while the normal stop time can be set by performing the initial setting when the power is turned on, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is performed in step AKS251. After that, when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254, the symbol stop setting SZA3 may be overwritten in step AKS255. Alternatively, while the normal stop time can be set by performing the initial setting at power-on, in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are By being executed, a first time saving end determination process is executed to determine whether the first condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, a second time saving end determination process is performed. It is also possible not to determine whether the second condition is satisfied by the process.

The first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command are not limited to ones that can specify the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times in response to the time saving conditions that are controlled to be in the time saving state, and are not limited to those that can specify the remaining number of times until the time saving state ends It may also be possible to specify the remaining number of times up to the time saving number in accordance with the termination condition. For example, the specific number of times command data in the first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command may be set based on the count value of the first time saving counter.

As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps AKS273 and AKS274 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, and time-saving subtraction shown in FIG. 294-23. The gaming state can be shifted to the normal state and the time saving state by processing steps AKS324, AKS325, step AKS188 of the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 294-31, and the like. Furthermore, the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, can be updated by step AKS272 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21. Then, based on the fact that the count value of the specific number of times counter is the attainment determination value in step AKS272, by executing the data set process in step AKS274, it is possible to shift the gaming state based on the numerical information. Then, when the power is turned on, by executing the specific number command transmission process shown in FIG. 294-8, a first specific number designation command, which is a first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number, is transmitted. On the other hand, for example, by executing the data set process in step AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. A second specific number of times designation command is transmitted as a second command different from the first command. The first specific number designation command has a total of 6 bytes from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, as shown in FIG. 294-9. The second specific number of times designation command is a 2-byte production control command, as shown in FIG. 294-12(C). In this way, the first specific number of times designation command has a larger number of bytes than the second specific number of times designation command. The first specific number designation command uses the first transmission data of the first set AKC01, the second transmission data of the second set AKC02, and the third transmission data of the third set AKC03, so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number is, for example, 7F. It is possible to specify the remaining number of times in the case where the first number of times is less than [H] and the case where the second number of times is greater than the first number, for example, 7F[H] or more. On the other hand, the second specific number of times notification command can be set from 00[H] to 7F[H] according to the specific number of times command data, so when the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is the first number, the remaining number of times can be set. While it is possible to specify the remaining number of times, if the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, it is not possible to specify the remaining number of times. As a result, when the power is turned on, a first specific number designation command that can accurately specify the remaining number of times up to the specific number is sent, and a second specific number designation command with a smaller number of bytes is sent in response to execution of variable display. Therefore, while making it possible to transmit accurate information when the power is turned on, the processing load corresponding to the execution of variable display can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 22AK)
A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance that can control the performance based on commands from the game control means. A control means, the game control means includes a state control means capable of shifting a gaming state between a normal state and a special state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display, a transmitting means capable of transmitting a command; the state controlling means is capable of shifting the gaming state based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times; When the power is turned on, a first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is transmitted, and in response to execution of the variable display, a second command different from the first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is sent, and the first command is sent. has a larger number of bytes than the second command, and there are cases where the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is the first number, and cases where the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is the second number of times that is greater than the first number. , the remaining number of times can be specified for each, and the second command can specify the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times up to the specific number is the first number, while the second command can specify the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is the first number. If the number of times is 2, it is not possible to specify the remaining number of times. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS325, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The transmitting means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes a specific number of command transmission processing or command set processing. The specific value may be, for example, "0". Sending the first command when the power is turned on may be, for example, executing a command sending process a specific number of times. Sending the second command in response to execution of variable display may be, for example, execution of command set processing in step AKS308. The number of bytes larger than the second command is, for example, for the second specific number specification command 94XX[H], which has a 2-byte configuration, and from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03 of the first specific number specification command 91XX[H]. It may be 6 bytes in total. The first number of times may be less than 7F[H], for example. The second number of times may be, for example, 7F[H] or more.
According to such a configuration, the processing load for transmitting commands and the program capacity can be reduced, and the marketability of the game machine can be improved.

[1] The first command is composed of a predetermined number of command data that is a combination of 1-byte first control data indicating the command type and 1-byte second control data regarding numerical information updated by the updating means. The game control means may create the first command by executing specific command processing. Here, the first control data may be, for example, command type data. The second control data may be, for example, the first to third transmission data. The predetermined number may be, for example, a total of three sets from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. The specific command process may be, for example, a process of transmitting a command a specific number of times.
In such a configuration, accurate commands related to numerical information can be transmitted when the power is turned on, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[2] The transmitting means transmits a command based on the command data stored in the data storage area, and the game controlling means transmits a command every time command data constituting the first command is created by executing specific command processing. It may be stored in the data storage area in the specific command processing. Here, the data storage means may be, for example, a serial communication data register. What may be stored in the data storage area in the specific command processing is, for example, steps AKS063, AKS064, AKS066, AKS067, AKS070, and AKS071.
In such a configuration, commands can be stably transmitted and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[3] The game control means is equipped with a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal, and whether the determination result of the determination process is normal or not. In some cases, when a specific command process is executed based on the stored numerical information, and the judgment result from the judgment process is not normal, the numerical information corresponding to the initial value is set by performing the initial setting process of the storage means. Then, specific command processing may be executed based on numerical information corresponding to the initial value. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process in step S3 and the part in step S4. Executing the specific command process based on the stored numerical information may be the part that executes the command transmission process a specific number of times in step S13 in the case of YES in step S4. Executing the specific command process based on the numerical information corresponding to the initial value may be performed as long as the specific number of command transmission processes in step S13 are executed in the case of No in step S4.
In such a configuration, a command related to numerical information can be sent regardless of whether the stored information is normal or not, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[4] The game control means does not need to execute other processes during execution of the specific command process. For example, it may be a part that executes the command transmission process a specific number of times in step S13 after step S1.
In such a configuration, accurate commands related to numerical information can be sent to improve the marketability of the gaming machine.

[5] The game control means includes a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. At times, specific command processing may be executed, and a command corresponding to the determination result of the determination processing may be transmitted before a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process in step S3 and the part in step S4. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, it is sufficient that the wait processing in step S12 is executed, for example. The control to enable transmission of the command corresponding to the determination result may be performed, for example, in a part that executes the command set process in step S10 after steps S6 and S9.
In such a configuration, commands can be reliably transmitted and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[6] The second command is composed of one set of command data that is a combination of one byte of first control data indicating the command type and one byte of second control data regarding numerical information updated by the updating means, The game control means may create the second control data in an update process in which the numerical information is updated by the update means. Here, the first control data may be, for example, command type data. The second control data may be, for example, specific number of times command data. The update process may be, for example, the counter subtraction process in step AKS125.
In such a configuration, the capacity of the second command can be prevented from increasing, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[7] The game control means is capable of executing an update process when the variable display time has elapsed, and compares the numerical information updated by the update means by executing the update process with judgment information indicating a specific judgment value, When the numerical information is greater than or equal to the specific judgment value, the judgment information is stored in the command information storage area as the second control data of the second command, and when the numerical information is less than the specific judgment value, the judgment information is stored as the second control data of the second command. Numerical information updated by the updating means may be stored as control data in the command information storage area. Here, when the variable display time has elapsed, it is sufficient if, for example, the counter subtraction process is executed in step AKS125 of the special symbol variation process. The specific judgment value may be, for example, an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the upper limit value of the specific number of commands. The determination information may be stored in the command information storage area, for example, in step AKS275. Numerical information may be stored in the command information storage area, for example, in step AKS277.
In such a configuration, the capacity of the second command can be reduced and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[8] A suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding a variable display that has not yet been started as suspension storage information, and the game control means performs a storage information shift process when suspension storage information is stored in the suspension storage means. In the storage information shift process, the storage information in the command information storage area may be used to control the transmission of the second command. Here, the suspension storage means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The stored information shift process may be, for example, the special symbol buffer shift process of step AKS202. The control to enable transmission of the second command may be performed, for example, in steps AKS305 and AKS306.
In such a configuration, the second command can be appropriately transmitted to improve the marketability of the gaming machine.

[9] A suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding a variable display that has not yet been started as suspension storage information, and a game control means that determines whether suspension storage information is stored in the suspension storage means. The determination process is executable, and when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, the storage information in the command information storage area is used to control the second command to be transmitted. Good too. Here, the suspension storage means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The pending storage determination process may be a special symbol normal process including step AKS101, for example. For example, steps AKS111 and AKS112 may be used to control the second command to be transmitted when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored.
In such a configuration, the second command can be stably transmitted and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[10] When it is determined in the suspension storage determination process that the suspension storage information is not stored, the game control means issues a command related to the non-gaming state together with a second command using the storage information in the command information storage area. It may also be controlled to enable transmission. For example, the standby command transmission table AKT15 may be specified in step AKS111, and the command set process in step AKS112 may be executed.
In such a configuration, commands can be sent appropriately to improve the marketability of the gaming machine.

[11] The game control means includes a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal when the power is turned on, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal. When the result is normal, control is possible using the stored numerical information, and when the judgment result from the judgment process is not normal, the numerical information corresponding to the initial value can be stored by initializing the storage means. is set and can be controlled using numerical information corresponding to the initial value, and the effect control means can display a suggestion indicating the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times, and after turning on the power, it can be controlled by using the numerical information corresponding to the initial value. are different modes, and include a suggestion display control means that controls the suggestion display in a special mode that makes it difficult to recognize the number of times remaining until the specific number of times, and when the suggestion display is in a special mode, the number of times remaining until the specific number of times is displayed. and a suggestion effect control means for executable control of a suggestion effect suggesting , and the suggestion effect control means may execute the suggestion effect based on the first command. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process in step S3 and the part in step S4. It is only necessary that the data setting using the backup setting table specified in step S6 does not include the initial value setting of the specific number of times counter to be controllable using the stored numerical information. It is only necessary that the data setting using the initialization setting table specified in step S9 includes the initial value setting of the specific number of times counter to be controllable using the numerical information corresponding to the initial value. . The suggestion display may be, for example, a display on the number of times display section 5Z. The special mode may be, for example, a mode where the number of times is unknown. The suggestive effect may be, for example, a remaining number of times suggestive effect. The suggested effect control means may be the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS535 and AKS536, for example.
In such a configuration, the game interest can be improved by the suggestive display and the suggestive performance, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[12] The performance control means controls to be able to execute a predetermined performance that notifies the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times based on the numerical information updated by the update means being transmitted as the second control data of the second command. It may also include a predetermined performance control means. Here, the predetermined effect may be, for example, a countdown effect. The predetermined performance control means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS539 and AKS540.
In such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by the predetermined performance, and the marketability of the game machine can be enhanced.

[13] When the first command is transmitted, the effect control means stores the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times based on the first command in the number storage area, and when the second command is transmitted, the effect control means When the determination information is transmitted as the second control data of the second command, the storage contents of the number storage area are not changed based on the reception result of the second command, but are transmitted as the second control data of the second command by the updating means. When the numerical information to be updated is transmitted, the storage contents of the number storage area may be changed based on the reception result of the second command. Here, the number of times storage area may be, for example, a suggestion effect counter. The storage contents of the number storage area may be changed, for example, in steps AKS512 and AKS513.
In such a configuration, the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times can be appropriately stored, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[14] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control the performance, The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from the normal state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a stop control means after the variable display time has elapsed. variable display control means for controlling the display results of the variable display so that they can be stopped and displayed at different times; The variable display control means can be controlled to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state, and the variable display control means can control the stop time when the numerical information updated by the updating means does not reach a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, the specific stopping time is set as the stopping time, and the production control means, based on the specific stopping time, It may also include a notification effect control means for executable control of a notification effect to notify that the special state is controlled. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The ability to control to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state may be provided, for example, in step AKS188. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game through notification effects while preventing an increase in capacity, thereby increasing the marketability of the game machine.

[15] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and the game control means is configured to display a variable display after the variable display time has elapsed. The game control means includes a variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that it can be stopped and displayed during the stop time, and the game control means performs a normal setting for setting the normal stop time as the stop time in the setting process for setting the stop time. , After the normal setting, perform a specific judgment regarding a specific condition, and if the judgment result of the specific judgment is that the specific condition is met, an overwrite setting that sets a specific stop time corresponding to the specific condition as the stop time. and performs control based on the specific stop time set by the override settings, and if the judgment result of the specific judgment is determined that the specific condition is not met, the control is performed based on the normal stop time set by the normal settings. Control may also be performed. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The normal setting may be the part of step AKS251, for example. The specific condition may be, for example, that the performance designation value after the winning is 00 [H]. The specific determination may be made, for example, at step AKS253. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The overwrite settings may be made, for example, at step AKS255.
With such a configuration, increase in program capacity can be prevented and the marketability of the game machine can be improved.

[16] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and a state control means capable of controlling the second variable display to a special state in which it is more likely to be executed than the normal state; variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that it can be stopped and displayed; and the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display during the special state has reached the second number, the special state is terminated, and the game control means terminates the special state. In the setting process for setting the stop time, a first condition is determined as to whether the first condition is satisfied, and if the first condition is satisfied, the stop time is set in response to the first condition being satisfied. , performs a variable display determination as to whether or not the second variable display has been executed, performs a second condition determination as to whether or not the second condition is satisfied when the second variable display is executed, and determines whether the second condition is satisfied. If the second condition is satisfied, the stop time is set in response to the second condition being satisfied, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by the first condition determination, the variable display determination and the second condition determination are not performed. good. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". Setting the stop time in response to the establishment of the first condition may be performed, for example, in a part where the symbol stop time setting SZA2 is performed in step AKS260 in the case of Yes in step AKS257. The variable display determination may be performed at step AKS258, for example. Setting the stop time in response to the establishment of the second condition may be performed, for example, in a part where the symbol stop time setting SZA2 is performed in step AKS260 in the case of Yes in step AKS259.
In such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[17] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control the performance, The game control means includes a state control means that can be controlled to a special state different from the normal state, a variable display control means that controls the display results of the variable display to be stopped and displayed during a stop time after the variable display time has elapsed; The effect control means includes an updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a counting means that can set counting information in response to the end of an advantageous state. The state control means is configured to perform variable display effects in different presentation modes depending on whether the counted information is the first specified value or the second specified value, and the state control means specifies the numerical information updated by the updating means. The variable display control means can be controlled to a special state based on a specific value corresponding to the number of times, and can be controlled to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state. If it is different from the initial setting value after inputting, a numerical judgment is made as to whether the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and when it does not become a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, A normal stop time is set as the stop time, and when a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times is reached, a specific stop time is set as the stop time, and when the counting information set by the counting means matches the initial setting value, the numerical value The normal stop time is set as the stop time without making a determination, and the effect control means controls the notification effect to enable execution of a notification effect to notify that the special state will be controlled based on the specific stop time. May include. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The count information may be, for example, a designated value for performance after winning. The counting means may be, for example, a performance designation buffer after winning ends. The first designated value may be, for example, 00 [H]. The second specified value may be any value other than 00[H], for example. Variable display performances with different performance modes may be different as long as the patterns that can be determined are different depending on the performance state selection designation value, for example. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The ability to control to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state may be provided, for example, in step AKS188. The initial setting value may be, for example, 00 [H]. Numerical determination may be performed, for example, in step AKS254. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. If the count information matches the initial setting value, it is sufficient if the answer in step AKS253 is Yes, for example. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game through the notification effect while maintaining the fairness of the game, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[18] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, which can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, The game control means is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the progress, the game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means at least Either one of the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times, and the second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display during the special state becomes the second number. The special state is terminated based on the fulfillment of the condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the second condition, and Performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; when the first condition is satisfied, performing a process related to ending the special state; performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; When two conditions are met, a process related to the end of the special state is performed, a count update process is performed to update the count by the first counting means, and when the first condition is met, the count by the second counting means is updated. There is no need to perform count value update processing to update the . Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The first counting means may be, for example, a first time saving counter. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. If the first condition is satisfied, it is sufficient if, for example, the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280 results in a Yes in step AKS323.
In such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[19] A gaming machine that displays a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, which includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance that is controlled based on commands from the game control means. The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from a normal state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display. , a transmitting means capable of transmitting commands according to the progress of the game, and in a numerical value updating process in which numerical information can be updated by an updating means, it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the executed variable display. When an advantageous judgment is made and the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, the numerical information is not updated by the updating means, and the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is a judgment that the control is not to be controlled to an advantageous state. In some cases, the updating means updates the numerical information, and performs processing related to special state control based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and the transmitting means updates the numerical information by the updating means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, a specific command that can be specified to control the special state is transmitted, and the production control means is controlled to the special state based on the specific command. The information processing apparatus may include a notification effect control means for executable control of a notification effect for notifying the user of the event. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The transmitting means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes command set processing. The numerical value update process may be, for example, a counter subtraction process. The advantageous determination may be made in step AKS271, for example. If the determination is to control to an advantageous state, it is sufficient if the determination is Yes in step AKS271, for example. If the determination is not to control the vehicle to an advantageous state, it is sufficient if the determination is No in step AKS271, for example. The process related to the control of the special state may be, for example, steps AKS273 and AKS274. The specific command may be, for example, a special symbol state designation command, a second specific number of times designation command, or the like. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by appropriately executing the notification effect, and the marketability of the game machine can be enhanced.

[20] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player. The game control means is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the progress, the game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means at least Either one of the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times, and the second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display during the special state becomes the second number. The special state is terminated based on the fulfillment of the condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the second condition, and Performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; when the first condition is satisfied, performing a process related to ending the special state; performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; When the two conditions are satisfied, the processing related to the termination of the special state is performed, and in both cases, in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, in the processing related to the termination of the special state, The counts by the first counting means and the second counting means may be initialized. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The first counting means may be, for example, a first time saving counter. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. The process related to ending the special state may be performed at steps AKS324, AKS327, etc., for example.
In such a configuration, the special state can be appropriately controlled and the marketability of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[21] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, which is based on a state control means that can control to a special state different from a normal state, and that the variable display is executed. and a pattern selection means capable of selecting a variable display pattern using pattern selection data. The pattern selection means can be controlled to a first special state, and can be controlled to a second special state of the special states based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. , in the normal state after the first special state ends, a variable display pattern is selected using the special pattern selection data, and in the normal state after the second special state ends, the same initial settings as after the power is turned on are set. The variable display pattern is selected using the normal pattern selection data, and the variable display pattern selectable using the normal pattern selection data does not include the variable display pattern selectable using the special pattern selection data. Good too. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The pattern selection data may be, for example, a jackpot variation pattern type selection table, a small win variation pattern type selection table, a loss variation pattern type selection table, a variation pattern determination table, or the like. The pattern selection means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the variation pattern setting process in step AKS108. The special pattern selection data may be, for example, a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, etc. corresponding to performance state selection designation values of 01 [H] and 02 [H]. The data for normal pattern selection may be, for example, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, etc. corresponding to the performance state selection designation value 00[H]. The variable display patterns that can be selected using the special pattern selection data may be, for example, variable patterns PB57, PB68, etc., which become determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. .
In such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate variable display pattern after the special state ends, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[22] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, which is based on a state control means that can control a special state different from a normal state, and that the variable display is executed. and an advantageous control means capable of controlling the numerical information to an advantageous state. controllable to a first advantageous state, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a second advantageous result, controllable to a second advantageous state of the advantageous states; When the second advantageous state ends, it can be controlled to a first special state among the special states, and when the second advantageous state ends, it can be controlled to a second special state among the special states, and the state is updated by the updating means. It is possible to control to a third special state among the special states based on the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and there are two cases in which the first advantageous state ends and the second advantageous state ends. In either case, the first process and the second process are performed, and when the first advantageous state ends, the first process allows settings regarding the first special state, and the second advantageous state ends. In this case, settings regarding the second special state can be made by the first process, and the updating means updates by the second process when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, respectively. An initial value of numerical information may be set. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The advantageous control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the big winning opening pre-opening process, the big winning opening opening process, the big winning opening post opening process, and the jackpot ending process. The first advantageous result may be, for example, when the designated jackpot symbol value is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state where the maximum number of openings of the jackpot opening is 03 [H]. The second advantageous result may be, for example, when the designated jackpot symbol value is 00[H], 05[H], or 06[H]. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state where the maximum number of openings of the jackpot opening is 0A[H]. The first special state may be, for example, a time-saving state in which the initial value of the first time-saving counter is 0006 [H] and the initial value of the second time-saving counter is 0001 [H] corresponding to the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot. Bye. The second special state may be a time-saving state in which the initial value of the first time-saving counter becomes 02AD[H] corresponding to the jackpot state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, for example. The first process may be, for example, step AKS188. The second process may be, for example, the data set process in step AKS190.
With such a configuration, increase in program capacity can be prevented and the marketability of the game machine can be improved.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp , 10 General prize opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st starting port switch, 22B 2nd starting port switch, 23 Count Switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball batting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passage gate, 9050 4th pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Equipped with a game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is
a transmission means capable of transmitting a command;
a state control means capable of controlling a plurality of states including a special state different from a normal state and the advantageous state;
an updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
The state control means includes:
When the display result of the variable display is a first advantageous result, control is possible to a first advantageous state among the advantageous states,
When the display result of the variable display is a second advantageous result, control is possible to a second advantageous state of the advantageous states,
controllable to a first special state of the special states when the first advantageous state ends;
controllable to a second special state of the special states when the second advantageous state ends;
Based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, control is possible to a third special state of the special states,
The game control means is
In either case, when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, the first process and the second process are performed,
When the first advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the first special state by the first process,
When the second advantageous state ends, performing a setting process regarding the second special state by the first process,
In either case, whether the first advantageous state ends or the second advantageous state ends, a setting process of setting an initial value of numerical information to be updated by the updating means by the second process. and
The transmitting means includes:
When the power is turned on, transmitting a first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times;
In response to execution of the variable display, transmitting a second command different from the first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times;
The first command is
has a larger number of bytes than the second command;
The remaining number of times can be specified in a case where the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is a first number of times and a case where the remaining number of times until the said specific number of times is a second number of times that is greater than the first number of times,
including a predetermined number of command data that is a combination of first control data indicating a command type and second control data including specific data related to numerical information and to which a value corresponding to the transmission order of the first command is set;
The second command specifies the remaining number of times when the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times is the first number of times, and the number of times remaining until the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times is the second number of times. , it is not possible to specify the remaining number of times,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images